diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
index 012eeb85..51575352 100644
--- a/README.md
+++ b/README.md
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ If you want to make your suggested changes then you may use the online editor to
## Structure
-UTA is written in a simple Markdown format and organized according to the [Resource Container Manual](https://resource-container.readthedocs.io/en/latest/container_types.html#manual-man) type. See that link for more information but here is a quick summary.
+UTA is written in a simple Markdown format and organized according to the [Resource Container Manual](https://resource-container.readthedocs.io/en/latest/container_types.html#manual-man) type. See that link for more information but here is a quick summary.
Each manual has its own directory in this repository (for example, the Checking Manual is in the [checking](https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/checking) directory). Each module has its own directory inside of these manual directories. Inside each of these are three files:
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Each manual has its own directory in this repository (for example, the Checking
* `sub-title.md` - This file contians the question that the module is intended to answer.
* `title.md` - This contains the title of the module
-There are also YAML formatted files in each manual’s directory. The `toc.yaml` file is for encoding the Table of Contents and the `config.yaml` file is for encoding dependencies between the modules.
+There are also YAML formatted files in each manual’s directory. The `toc.yaml` file is for encoding the Table of Contents and the `config.yaml` file is for encoding dependencies between the modules.
## GL Translators
@@ -32,20 +32,20 @@ There are also YAML formatted files in each manual’s directory. The `toc.yaml
To learn the philosophy of how to translate the UTA please see the [Translate unfoldingWord® Translation Academy](http://gl-manual.readthedocs.io/en/latest/gl_translation.html#translating-translationacademy) article in the [Gateway Language Manual](http://gl-manual.readthedocs.io/).
-NOTE: The Bible was originally written in Hebrew, Aramaic, and Greek. In these languages, masculine pronouns and terms can apply to both men and women. The same is true in English, and in this manual we often use masculine terms to refer to both men and women. For example, in this manual we often use masculine pronouns to refer to people like you (and other translators) who will use this manual. But we do not intend to say that only men can use this manual or to say that only men can translate the Bible. We are simply using masculine terms to refer to both men and women.
+NOTE: The Bible was originally written in Hebrew, Aramaic, and Greek. In these languages, masculine pronouns and terms can apply to both men and women. The same is true in English, and in this manual we often use masculine terms to refer to both men and women. For example, in this manual we often use masculine pronouns to refer to people like you (and other translators) who will use this manual. But we do not intend to say that only men can use this manual or to say that only men can translate the Bible. We are simply using masculine terms to refer to both men and women.
If you are translating online, please fork the [Door43-Catalog/en_ta](https://git.door43.org/Door43-Catalog/en_ta) repository, following this workflow: [Translate Content Online](https://forum.ccbt.bible/t/translate-content-online/75).
### Technical Information for Translating UTA
-* *Do not* rename any files or directories. Only translate what is inside the files.
+* *Do not* rename any files or directories. Only translate what is inside the files.
* The `config.yaml` and `toc.yaml` files do not need to be changed unless you add a new module. When you are finished translating, you may want to update the `title` fields in the `toc.yaml` file, but you shouldn’t make any other changes in those files.
-* Images that are included in UTA should be no more than 600px wide. NOTE: If you use the images already in UTA, you do not need to translate the names of the image files. They will work in their current format.
+* Images that are included in UTA should be no more than 600px wide. NOTE: If you use the images already in UTA, you do not need to translate the names of the image files. They will work in their current format.
* Hyperlinks (links to other articles or to other pages on the internet) follow this pattern: `[text to display](http://www.example.com)`. You can translate the “text to display” inside the square brackets but not the web address that follows inside the parentheses.
You are free to add additional modules. In order for the new modules to be included, all of the following conditions need to be satisfied:
-* You must create a directory in one of the manual directories (like the translate directory) that has the short name of the module you want to write. For example, to create a new module on “testing” in the Translation Manual, you will want to put the file in “translate/testing/01.md.”
+* You must create a directory in one of the manual directories (like the translate directory) that has the short name of the module you want to write. For example, to create a new module on “testing” in the Translation Manual, you will want to put the file in “translate/testing/01.md.”
* The file must be included in the table of contents, `toc.yaml` for the appropriate manual.
* The value of the slug in the `toc.yaml` file and the directory (without the extension) must be the same as the directory name (`testing` in this example).
* The slug must be unique, and not used in any of the other manuals. This is a requirement so that it is possible to create unambiguous links to each module.
diff --git a/checking/accuracy-check/01.md b/checking/accuracy-check/01.md
index 0c030b85..8181b8b4 100644
--- a/checking/accuracy-check/01.md
+++ b/checking/accuracy-check/01.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
It is very important to make sure that the new translation is accurate. A translation is accurate when it communicates the same meaning as the original. In other words, an accurate translation communicates the same message that the original writer intended to communicate. A translation can be accurate even though it uses more or fewer words or puts the ideas in a different order. Often this is necessary in order to make the original message clear in the target language.
-Although members of the translation team have checked the translation for accuracy with each other during the [Oral Partner Check](../peer-check/01.md), the translation will continue to improve as it is checked by many people, especially by pastors and church leaders. Each passage or book can be checked by one church leader, or, if many leaders are available, there can be several church leaders checking each passage or book. Having more than one person checking a story or passage can be helpful, because often different checkers will notice different things.
+Although members of the translation team have checked the translation for accuracy with each other during the [Oral Partner Check](../peer-check/01.md), the translation will continue to improve as it is checked by many people, especially by pastors and church leaders. Each passage or book can be checked by one church leader, or, if many leaders are available, there can be several church leaders checking each passage or book. Having more than one person checking a story or passage can be helpful, because often different checkers will notice different things.
The church leaders who do accuracy checking should be speakers of the language of the translation, be respected in the community, and know the Bible well in the source language. They should not be the same people who translated the passage or book that they are checking. The accuracy checkers will be helping the translation team make sure that the translation says everything that the source says, and that it does not add things that are not part of the source message. Keep in mind, however, that accurate translations also might include [Implicit Information](../../translate/figs-explicit/01.md).
@@ -11,14 +11,14 @@ It is true that the language community members who do the [Language Community Ch
The Church Leaders doing accuracy checking should follow these steps:
-1. If possible, find out ahead of time which set of stories or which Bible passage you will be checking. Read the passage in several versions in any languages you understand. Read the passage in the ULT and UST, along with unfoldingWord® Translation Notes and unfoldingWord® Translation Words. You can read these in translationStudio or in Bible Viewer.
-
+1. If possible, find out ahead of time which set of stories or which Bible passage you will be checking. Read the passage in several versions in any languages you understand. Read the passage in the ULT and UST, along with unfoldingWord® Translation Notes and unfoldingWord® Translation Words. You can read these in translationStudio or in Bible Viewer.
+
1. Then each of the accuracy checkers should read the translation (or listen to the recording) by himself, comparing it to the original Bible passage or story in the source language. The checker can do this using translationStudio. It can be helpful for someone, such as the translator, to read the translation out loud to the checker while the checker follows along looking at the source Bible or Bibles. As the checker reads (or listens to) the translation and compares it to the source, he should keep in mind these general questions:
* Does the translation add anything to the original meaning? (The original meaning also includes [Implicit Information](../../translate/figs-explicit/01.md).)
* Is there any part of the meaning that is left out of the translation?
- * Has the translation changed the meaning in any way?
-
+ * Has the translation changed the meaning in any way?
+
1. It can be helpful to read or listen to the translation of the Bible passage several times. You might not notice everything the first time through a passage or verse. This is especially true if the translation puts ideas or parts of a sentence in a different order than in the source. You may need to check for one part of the sentence, then read or listen again to check for another part of the sentence. When you have read or listened to the passage as many times as it takes to find all of its parts, then you can move to the next passage. For more ways to check if the translation is complete, see [Complete](../complete/01.md).
1. The checker should make notes where he thinks there might be a problem or something to be improved. Each checker will discuss these notes with the translation team. The notes could be in the margins of a printed translation draft, or in a spreadsheet, or using the comment feature of translationCore.
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ The Church Leaders doing accuracy checking should follow these steps:
1. After the translation team revises the translation, they should read it out loud to each other or to other members of the language community to make sure that it still sounds natural in their language.
-1. If there are any Bible passages or verses that are still difficult to understand, the translation team should make a note of the difficulty. The translation team can assign these problems to members to do more research in Bible translation helps or commentaries to find the answer, or they can ask for additional help from other Bible checkers or consultants. When the members have discovered the meaning, the translation team can meet again to decide how to express that meaning naturally and clearly in their language.
+1. If there are any Bible passages or verses that are still difficult to understand, the translation team should make a note of the difficulty. The translation team can assign these problems to members to do more research in Bible translation helps or commentaries to find the answer, or they can ask for additional help from other Bible checkers or consultants. When the members have discovered the meaning, the translation team can meet again to decide how to express that meaning naturally and clearly in their language.
##### Additional Questions
@@ -42,5 +42,5 @@ These questions can also be helpful for finding anything that might be inaccurat
* Are the phrases used in the new translation helpful in understanding the more difficult phrases of the source translation? (Are the phrases of the new translation put together in a way that brings better understanding yet still fits with the meaning of the source language translation?)
* Another way to determine if the text is accurate is to ask comprehension questions about the translation, such as, “who did what, when, where, how, and why?” There are questions that have already been prepared to help with this. (To view the unfoldingWord® Translation Questions go to http://ufw.io/tq/.) The answers to those questions should be the same as the answers to those questions about the source language translation. If they are not, there is a problem in the translation.
-For more general types of things that need to be checked, go to [Types of Things to Check](../vol2-things-to-check/01.md).
+For more general types of things that need to be checked, go to [Types of Things to Check](../vol2-things-to-check/01.md).
diff --git a/checking/alignment-tool/01.md b/checking/alignment-tool/01.md
index 54c82cf7..8e83eb4a 100644
--- a/checking/alignment-tool/01.md
+++ b/checking/alignment-tool/01.md
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
### Alignment Checking
-Alignment Checking will be done by the Church Network Delegates. These are people who are chosen by the church leaders in the language community. These people are first-language speakers of the target language, are knowledgeable about the Bible, and are persons whose opinions are respected by the church leaders. If possible, they should be people who are trained in biblical languages, biblical content, and translation principles. When these people affirm the translation, the church leaders will approve of the distribution and use of the translation among the people who know and respect them.
+Alignment Checking will be done by the Church Network Delegates. These are people who are chosen by the church leaders in the language community. These people are first-language speakers of the target language, are knowledgeable about the Bible, and are persons whose opinions are respected by the church leaders. If possible, they should be people who are trained in biblical languages, biblical content, and translation principles. When these people affirm the translation, the church leaders will approve of the distribution and use of the translation among the people who know and respect them.
-If these people do not exist in the language community, then the translation team may want to collaborate with Quality Checkers from outside the language community in order to do Alignment Checking. In this case, it may be necessary to prepare a [backtranslation](../vol2-backtranslation/01.md).
+If these people do not exist in the language community, then the translation team may want to collaborate with Quality Checkers from outside the language community in order to do Alignment Checking. In this case, it may be necessary to prepare a [backtranslation](../vol2-backtranslation/01.md).
-Those who do Alignment Checking should be other than the people who did the previous [Accuracy Checking](../accuracy-check/01.md). Since Alignment Checking is also a form of accuracy checking, the translation will receive the maximum benefit if different people do each of these checks.
+Those who do Alignment Checking should be other than the people who did the previous [Accuracy Checking](../accuracy-check/01.md). Since Alignment Checking is also a form of accuracy checking, the translation will receive the maximum benefit if different people do each of these checks.
-The purpose of Alignment Checking is to ensure that the translation accurately communicates the message of the original language texts and reflects the sound doctrine of the global Church throughout history and throughout the world. After Alignment Checking, the leaders of the churches that speak the target language can affirm that the translation is trustworthy for their people.
+The purpose of Alignment Checking is to ensure that the translation accurately communicates the message of the original language texts and reflects the sound doctrine of the global Church throughout history and throughout the world. After Alignment Checking, the leaders of the churches that speak the target language can affirm that the translation is trustworthy for their people.
It is best if the leaders from every Church network in the language community can appoint or approve some of the people who will do the Alignment Checking. In that way, all of the church leaders will be able to affirm that the translation is trustworthy and useful for all of the churches of the community.
@@ -14,25 +14,25 @@ The tool that we recommend for Alignment Checking is the Alignment Tool in trans
If you are a Quality Checker (QC) and are using Alignment Checking as part of your checking process, go to [Steps for Quality Checkers](../vol2-steps/01.md) to see the rest of the QC checking process.
-#### In order to use the Alignment Tool to do Alignment Checking:
+#### In order to use the Alignment Tool to do Alignment Checking:
1. Load the translation of the Bible book that you want to check into translationCore®.
-1. Choose the Word Alignment tool.
+1. Choose the Word Alignment tool.
1. Navigate through the verses using the menu of chapters and verses on the left side.
- * When you click on a verse in the menu list to open it, the words of that verse appear in a vertical list, ordered from top to bottom, just to the right of the list of chapters and verses. Each word is in a separate box.
- * The words of the original language (Greek, Hebrew, or Aramaic) text for that verse are also in separate boxes in a field to the right of the target language word list. There is a space under each of the original language word boxes outlined with a dotted line.
-1. In each verse, drag the target language words in the word bank onto the space below the original language words that express that same meaning.
+ * When you click on a verse in the menu list to open it, the words of that verse appear in a vertical list, ordered from top to bottom, just to the right of the list of chapters and verses. Each word is in a separate box.
+ * The words of the original language (Greek, Hebrew, or Aramaic) text for that verse are also in separate boxes in a field to the right of the target language word list. There is a space under each of the original language word boxes outlined with a dotted line.
+1. In each verse, drag the target language words in the word bank onto the space below the original language words that express that same meaning.
* To drag a word, click and hold down the button as you move each word box of the target language into the space under the word box of the source (original) text that the word corresponds to. Drop the target language word by releasing the mouse button.
* When the target language word is over a word box of the original, the dotted outline will turn blue to let you know that the word will drop there. If you make a mistake or decide that the target word belongs somewhere else, simply drag it again to where it belongs. Target language words can also be dragged back to the list.
- * If there are repeated words in a verse, make sure to drag only the words that correspond to that part of the meaning of the original language verse. Then drag the repeated words to the place in the original verse where that meaning is repeated.
+ * If there are repeated words in a verse, make sure to drag only the words that correspond to that part of the meaning of the original language verse. Then drag the repeated words to the place in the original verse where that meaning is repeated.
* When the same target language word occurs more than once in a verse, each instance of the word will have a small superscript number after it. This number will help you to align each repeated target word to the correct original word in the correct order.
* You may need to combine original language words and/or target language words in order to make groups of words that have equivalent meanings. The goal of aligning is to match the smallest group of target language words to the smallest group of original language words that have the same meaning.
-
+
When you have finished this process for a verse, it should be easy to see if there are words left over in either the target word bank or the original language pane.
-* If there are target language words left over, this may mean that there is something that has been added that does not belong in the translation. If the left-over words are expressing implied information, then they are not necessarily extra, but could be aligned to the word or words that they are explaining.
-* If there are original language words left over, this may mean that the translation needs to include a translation of these words.
-* If you determine that the translation has words that it should not have or is missing a translation of some words of the original text, then someone will need to edit the translation. You can either make a comment to tell someone else what to change in the translation, or you can edit the translation directly in the Alignment Tool, depending on your role in the Translation Team.
+* If there are target language words left over, this may mean that there is something that has been added that does not belong in the translation. If the left-over words are expressing implied information, then they are not necessarily extra, but could be aligned to the word or words that they are explaining.
+* If there are original language words left over, this may mean that the translation needs to include a translation of these words.
+* If you determine that the translation has words that it should not have or is missing a translation of some words of the original text, then someone will need to edit the translation. You can either make a comment to tell someone else what to change in the translation, or you can edit the translation directly in the Alignment Tool, depending on your role in the Translation Team.
#### Alignment Philosophy
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ The Alignment Tool supports one-to-one, one-to-many, many-to-one, and many-to-ma
Because each target language will have different requirements for sentence structure and the amount of explicit information that must be provided, there will often be some target language words that do not have an exact match to any original language words. If these words are there to give information that the sentence needs in order to make sense, or to provide some implicit information that is necessary for understanding the sentence, then the target words that are provided should be aligned with the original language word that implies them, or that they help to explain.
-#### Merge and Unmerge Instructions
+#### Merge and Unmerge Instructions
* To align multiple target language words to a single original language word, simply drag and drop the target language words onto the box below the desired original language word.
* When it is desired to align target language word(s) to a combination of original language words, first drag one of the combination original language words into the same box as the other original language word. Multiple original language words can be merged together in this fashion.
@@ -50,6 +50,6 @@ Because each target language will have different requirements for sentence struc
#### After Aligning
-If you are a Quality Checker, after you have finished aligning a Bible book and making questions and comments about the translation, it is time to either send the questions to the translation team or plan to meet together with the translation team and discuss them. For the steps to complete this process, return to where you left off on the [Steps for Quality Checkers](../vol2-steps/01.md) page.
+If you are a Quality Checker, after you have finished aligning a Bible book and making questions and comments about the translation, it is time to either send the questions to the translation team or plan to meet together with the translation team and discuss them. For the steps to complete this process, return to where you left off on the [Steps for Quality Checkers](../vol2-steps/01.md) page.
To learn more about the kinds of things that need to be checked, go to [Types of Things to Check](../vol2-things-to-check/01.md).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/checking/authority-process/01.md b/checking/authority-process/01.md
index 655befc9..5f53aa4a 100644
--- a/checking/authority-process/01.md
+++ b/checking/authority-process/01.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
#### Accountability
-The Bible belongs to the global Church, meaning all Christians throughout history and throughout the world. Every part of the Church is accountable to every other part of the Church for how we interpret, proclaim, and live what the Bible says. In regard to Bible translation, each language of the world will have its own way of expressing the meaning that the Bible contains. Even so, the part of the Church that speaks each language is accountable to the other parts of the Church for how they express that meaning. For that reason, those who translate the Bible must study how others have translated it. They must be guided by and open to correction from others who are experts in biblical languages and how the Church has understood and interpreted the Bible through history.
+The Bible belongs to the global Church, meaning all Christians throughout history and throughout the world. Every part of the Church is accountable to every other part of the Church for how we interpret, proclaim, and live what the Bible says. In regard to Bible translation, each language of the world will have its own way of expressing the meaning that the Bible contains. Even so, the part of the Church that speaks each language is accountable to the other parts of the Church for how they express that meaning. For that reason, those who translate the Bible must study how others have translated it. They must be guided by and open to correction from others who are experts in biblical languages and how the Church has understood and interpreted the Bible through history.
#### Authority and Capacity
diff --git a/checking/church-leader-check/01.md b/checking/church-leader-check/01.md
index 68cdfd57..5354bd07 100644
--- a/checking/church-leader-check/01.md
+++ b/checking/church-leader-check/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Accuracy Checking by Church Leaders
-After the translation has been checked by community members for clarity and naturalness, it will be checked by church leaders for accuracy. These are the guidelines for these church leaders who do the accuracy checking. They should be mother-tongue speakers of the target language and also understand well one of the languages in which the source text is available. They should not be the same people who did the translation. They should be church leaders who know the Bible well. Usually these reviewers will be pastors. These church leaders should represent as many of the different church networks in the language community as possible.
+After the translation has been checked by community members for clarity and naturalness, it will be checked by church leaders for accuracy. These are the guidelines for these church leaders who do the accuracy checking. They should be mother-tongue speakers of the target language and also understand well one of the languages in which the source text is available. They should not be the same people who did the translation. They should be church leaders who know the Bible well. Usually these reviewers will be pastors. These church leaders should represent as many of the different church networks in the language community as possible.
These reviewers should follow these steps:
diff --git a/checking/community-evaluation/01.md b/checking/community-evaluation/01.md
index d61bf282..779c1e6f 100644
--- a/checking/community-evaluation/01.md
+++ b/checking/community-evaluation/01.md
@@ -12,20 +12,20 @@ Please also answer the following questions. The answers to these questions will
* List a few passages where the community feedback was helpful. How did you change these passages to make them clearer?
-
-
-
+
+
+
* Write an explanation for some of the Important Terms, explaining how they are equal to terms used in the source language. This will help the checkers understand why you chose these terms.
-
-
-
+
+
+
* Does the community verify that there is a good flow to the language when the passages are read out loud? (Does the language sound like the writer was a person from your own community?)
-
-
-
+
+
+
The community leaders might want to add their own information to this or make a summary statement about how acceptable this translation is to the local community. The wider church leadership will have access to this information, and it will help them to understand and to have confidence in the checking process that has been done so far. This will help them to validate the translation as approved by the local Christian community both when they do the Accuracy Check and when they do the final Validation Check.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/checking/config.yaml b/checking/config.yaml
index 1f3b5023..6640597e 100644
--- a/checking/config.yaml
+++ b/checking/config.yaml
@@ -17,9 +17,9 @@ accuracy-check:
- guidelines-accurate
- important-term-check
alignment-tool:
- recommended:
+ recommended:
- vol2-things-to-check
- dependencies:
+ dependencies:
- vol2-steps
- guidelines-accurate
alphabet:
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ alphabet:
- translate-alphabet
- formatting
authority-process:
- recommended:
+ recommended:
- peer-check
dependencies:
- goal-checking
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ church-leader-check:
recommended:
- accuracy-check
- good
- dependencies:
+ dependencies:
- trans-note-check
clear:
recommended:
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ complete:
- self-assessment
- good
- verses
- dependencies:
+ dependencies:
- punctuation
formatting:
recommended:
diff --git a/checking/formatting/01.md b/checking/formatting/01.md
index 5ad3861f..9471dd7b 100644
--- a/checking/formatting/01.md
+++ b/checking/formatting/01.md
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-There are checks that you can do before, during, and after translation of a book of the Bible that will make the translation process go much easier so that the translation will look good and be as easy to read as possible. The modules on these topics are gathered here under Formatting and Publishing, but they are things that the translation team should be thinking about and deciding throughout the translation process.
+There are checks that you can do before, during, and after translation of a book of the Bible that will make the translation process go much easier so that the translation will look good and be as easy to read as possible. The modules on these topics are gathered here under Formatting and Publishing, but they are things that the translation team should be thinking about and deciding throughout the translation process.
### Before Translating
diff --git a/checking/goal-checking/01.md b/checking/goal-checking/01.md
index 7a566fbc..e422bebd 100644
--- a/checking/goal-checking/01.md
+++ b/checking/goal-checking/01.md
@@ -9,11 +9,11 @@ The checkers who are pastors, church leaders, and leaders of church networks wil
#### Clear
-The checkers who are members of the language community will help the translation team produce a translation that is clear. They will do this by listening to the translation and pointing out to them the places where the translation is confusing or does not make sense to them. Then the translation team can fix those places so that they are clear. (For more information about clear translations, see [Create Clear Translations](../../translate/guidelines-clear/01.md).)
+The checkers who are members of the language community will help the translation team produce a translation that is clear. They will do this by listening to the translation and pointing out to them the places where the translation is confusing or does not make sense to them. Then the translation team can fix those places so that they are clear. (For more information about clear translations, see [Create Clear Translations](../../translate/guidelines-clear/01.md).)
#### Natural
-The checkers who are members of the language community will also help the translation team produce a translation that is natural. They will do this by listening to the translation and pointing out to them the places where the translation sounds strange and does not sound like the way that someone who speaks their language would say it. Then the translation team can fix those places so that they are natural. (For more information about natural translations, see [Create Natural Translations](../../translate/guidelines-natural/01.md).)
+The checkers who are members of the language community will also help the translation team produce a translation that is natural. They will do this by listening to the translation and pointing out to them the places where the translation sounds strange and does not sound like the way that someone who speaks their language would say it. Then the translation team can fix those places so that they are natural. (For more information about natural translations, see [Create Natural Translations](../../translate/guidelines-natural/01.md).)
#### Church-approved
diff --git a/checking/headings/01.md b/checking/headings/01.md
index 8fbb633a..af6da073 100644
--- a/checking/headings/01.md
+++ b/checking/headings/01.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ One of the decisions that the translation team will have to make is whether or n
Using section headings requires more work, because you will need either to write or to translate each one in addition to the text of the Bible. It will also make your translation of the Bible longer. But section headings can be very helpful to your readers. Section headings make it much easier to find where the Bible talks about different topics. If a person is looking for something in particular, he can just read the section headings until he finds one that introduces the topic that he wants to read about. Then he can read that section.
-If you have decided to use section headings, then you will need to decide which kind to use. Again, you should find out which kind of section heading the language community prefers. You may also choose to follow the style of the national language. Be sure to use a kind of section heading that the people will understand is not part of the text that it introduces. The section heading is not a part of the Bible; it is just a guide to the different parts of the Bible. You might be able to make this clear by putting a space before and after the section heading and by using a different font (style of letters) or a different size of letters. See how the Bible in the national language does this, and test different methods with the language community.
+If you have decided to use section headings, then you will need to decide which kind to use. Again, you should find out which kind of section heading the language community prefers. You may also choose to follow the style of the national language. Be sure to use a kind of section heading that the people will understand is not part of the text that it introduces. The section heading is not a part of the Bible; it is just a guide to the different parts of the Bible. You might be able to make this clear by putting a space before and after the section heading and by using a different font (style of letters) or a different size of letters. See how the Bible in the national language does this, and test different methods with the language community.
### Kinds of Section Headings
diff --git a/checking/important-term-check/01.md b/checking/important-term-check/01.md
index a81e7acc..654f2c93 100644
--- a/checking/important-term-check/01.md
+++ b/checking/important-term-check/01.md
@@ -6,26 +6,26 @@
1. Select the category or categories of words that you want to check
1. Select your Gateway Language
1. Click “Launch”
-1. Work through the list of words on the left by following the instructions that appear to the right of the Bible verse.
+1. Work through the list of words on the left by following the instructions that appear to the right of the Bible verse.
1. To understand the source word better, you can read the short definition in the blue bar, or the longer one in the panel on the right side.
1. After selecting (highlighting) the translation for the word or phrase in the list, click “Save.”
1. Consider whether or not the term that was chosen makes sense in this context.
1. If you think that the translation for the term is a good translation, then click “Save and Continue.”
1. If you think that there is a problem with the verse or that the translation for the word or phrase is not good, then either edit the verse to make it better, or make a comment telling someone who will review your work what you think might be wrong with the translation here.
1. If you have made an edit, you may need to make your selection again.
-1. When you are finished making your edit or comment, click “Save and Continue.” If you prefer to only make a comment about a term and not make a selection for it, then click on the next verse in the list on the left to go on to the next word.
+1. When you are finished making your edit or comment, click “Save and Continue.” If you prefer to only make a comment about a term and not make a selection for it, then click on the next verse in the list on the left to go on to the next word.
After a selection has been made for all of the verses where a translationWord occurs, the list for that word can be reviewed. The instructions that follow are for the reviewer or for the translation team.
-1. You will now be able to see a list of the translations that were made for each term under each translationWord on the left. If you see that the word was translated in different ways in different verses, you will want to review the places that have differences to see if the target term used was the correct one for each context.
-1. You will also want to review any comments that were made by others. To do that, click the funnel symbol to the right of “Menu” at the upper left. A list will open, including the word “Comments.”
+1. You will now be able to see a list of the translations that were made for each term under each translationWord on the left. If you see that the word was translated in different ways in different verses, you will want to review the places that have differences to see if the target term used was the correct one for each context.
+1. You will also want to review any comments that were made by others. To do that, click the funnel symbol to the right of “Menu” at the upper left. A list will open, including the word “Comments.”
1. Click the box next to “Comments.” This will make all verses that do not have comments in them disappear.
1. To read the comments, click on the first verse in the list.
1. Click on “Comment.”
-1. Read the comment, and decide what you will do about it.
+1. Read the comment, and decide what you will do about it.
1. If you decide to make an edit to the verse, then click “Cancel” and then “Edit Verse.” This will open a small screen where you can edit the verse.
-1. When you are finished making the edit, select the reason for the change, and then click “Save.”
+1. When you are finished making the edit, select the reason for the change, and then click “Save.”
-Continue this process until you have acted on all of the comments that were left for you.
+Continue this process until you have acted on all of the comments that were left for you.
If you are unsure if a translation for a certain term is correct in a certain context, it might be helpful to consult the key terms spreadsheet that the translation team made as they were creating the translation. You may also want to discuss a difficult term with others on the translation team and try to find a solution together. You may need to use a different term in some contexts, or find another way to communicate the concept, such as using a longer phrase.
diff --git a/checking/intro-check/01.md b/checking/intro-check/01.md
index b9385c5f..0c3cf70b 100644
--- a/checking/intro-check/01.md
+++ b/checking/intro-check/01.md
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
### Translation Checking Manual
-This manual describes how to check Bible translations in Other Languages (OLs) for accuracy, clarity, and naturalness. (For the process to check Gateway Languages (GLs), see the [Gateway Language Manual](https://gl-manual.readthedocs.io/en/latest/)). This Translation Checking Manual also discusses the importance of obtaining approval for the translation and the translation process from the church leaders of the language area.
+This manual describes how to check Bible translations in Other Languages (OLs) for accuracy, clarity, and naturalness. (For the process to check Gateway Languages (GLs), see the [Gateway Language Manual](https://gl-manual.readthedocs.io/en/latest/)). This Translation Checking Manual also discusses the importance of obtaining approval for the translation and the translation process from the church leaders of the language area.
-The manual begins with instructions for checking the translation that the translation team will use to check each other’s work. These checks include the [Oral Partner Check](../peer-check/01.md) and the [Team Oral Chunk Check](../team-oral-chunk-check/01.md). Then there are instructions for the translation team to use for checking the translation with the translationCore software. These include the [Translation Words Check](../important-term-check/01.md) and the [Translation Notes check](../trans-note-check/01.md).
+The manual begins with instructions for checking the translation that the translation team will use to check each other’s work. These checks include the [Oral Partner Check](../peer-check/01.md) and the [Team Oral Chunk Check](../team-oral-chunk-check/01.md). Then there are instructions for the translation team to use for checking the translation with the translationCore software. These include the [Translation Words Check](../important-term-check/01.md) and the [Translation Notes check](../trans-note-check/01.md).
-After this, the translation team will need to check the translation with the [Language Community](../language-community-check/01.md) for clarity and naturalness. This is necessary because other speakers of the language can often suggest better ways of saying things that the translation team may not have thought of. Sometimes the translation team makes the translation sound strange because they are following the words of the source language too closely. Other speakers of the language can help them fix that.
-Another check that the translation team can do at this point is [Church Leader Check](../accuracy-check/01.md) (or OL pastor check). Since the OL pastors are familiar with the Bible in the Gateway Language (GL), they can check the translation for accuracy to the GL Bible. They can also catch mistakes that the translation team did not see because the translation team is so close to and involved in their work. Also, the translation team may lack some of the expertise or knowledge of the Bible that other OL pastors might have who are not part of the translation team. In this way, the whole language community can work together to make sure that the Bible translation is accurate, clear, and natural in the target language.
+After this, the translation team will need to check the translation with the [Language Community](../language-community-check/01.md) for clarity and naturalness. This is necessary because other speakers of the language can often suggest better ways of saying things that the translation team may not have thought of. Sometimes the translation team makes the translation sound strange because they are following the words of the source language too closely. Other speakers of the language can help them fix that.
+Another check that the translation team can do at this point is [Church Leader Check](../accuracy-check/01.md) (or OL pastor check). Since the OL pastors are familiar with the Bible in the Gateway Language (GL), they can check the translation for accuracy to the GL Bible. They can also catch mistakes that the translation team did not see because the translation team is so close to and involved in their work. Also, the translation team may lack some of the expertise or knowledge of the Bible that other OL pastors might have who are not part of the translation team. In this way, the whole language community can work together to make sure that the Bible translation is accurate, clear, and natural in the target language.
A further check for the accuracy of the Bible translation is to align it to the original languages of the Bible using the [Word Alignment](../alignment-tool/01.md) tool in Translation Core. After all of these checks have been performed and the translation has been aligned, the leaders of the OL church networks will want to [Review](../vol2-steps/01.md) the translation and give their [Endorsement](../level3-approval/01.md). Because many leaders of church networks do not speak the language of the translation, there are also instructions for creating a [Back Translation](../vol2-backtranslation/01.md), which allows people to check a translation in a language that they do not speak.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/checking/intro-checking/01.md b/checking/intro-checking/01.md
index a39bd587..2bc07697 100644
--- a/checking/intro-checking/01.md
+++ b/checking/intro-checking/01.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ First, he may not have understood the source text correctly, and so someone who
Or it could be that he did not understand something about what the Bible meant to communicate at a certain place. In this case, someone who knows the Bible well, such as a Bible teacher or a Bible translation checker, can correct the translation.
-Secondly, although the translator may know very well what the text should say, the way he translated it might mean something else to a different person. That is, another person might think that the translation is talking about something other than what the translator intended. Or the person hearing or reading the translation might not understand what the translator was trying to say.
+Secondly, although the translator may know very well what the text should say, the way he translated it might mean something else to a different person. That is, another person might think that the translation is talking about something other than what the translator intended. Or the person hearing or reading the translation might not understand what the translator was trying to say.
It often happens when one person writes a sentence and then another person reads it (or sometimes even if the first person reads it again later), that they understand it to say something different from what the writer meant. Take the following sentence as an example.
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ It often happens when one person writes a sentence and then another person reads
In his mind when he wrote it, the writer meant that Peter went home, but the reader thought that the writer probably meant that it was John who went home. The sentence needs to be changed so that it is more clear.
-Finally, a translation team is very close to and involved in their work, and so they sometimes do not see mistakes that others can see more easily. For these reasons, it is always necessary to check what someone else understands from the translation so that you (the translator) can make it more accurate and more clear.
+Finally, a translation team is very close to and involved in their work, and so they sometimes do not see mistakes that others can see more easily. For these reasons, it is always necessary to check what someone else understands from the translation so that you (the translator) can make it more accurate and more clear.
This Checking Manual is a guide to the process of checking. It will guide you through several kinds of checks that will allow you to fix these problems. We believe that having many people doing a variety of different checks will result in a faster checking process, allow broad church participation and ownership, and produce better translations.
diff --git a/checking/language-community-check/01.md b/checking/language-community-check/01.md
index 40d24f18..b8e7b3a7 100644
--- a/checking/language-community-check/01.md
+++ b/checking/language-community-check/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Language Community Check
-After the translation team has completed the steps of drafting and checking as a team and performed the checks in translationCore, the translation is ready to be checked by the target language community. The community will help the translation team to make the translation communicate its message clearly and naturally in the target language. To do this, the translation committee will choose people to be trained in the process of community checking. These could be the same people who have been doing the translating.
+After the translation team has completed the steps of drafting and checking as a team and performed the checks in translationCore, the translation is ready to be checked by the target language community. The community will help the translation team to make the translation communicate its message clearly and naturally in the target language. To do this, the translation committee will choose people to be trained in the process of community checking. These could be the same people who have been doing the translating.
These people will go throughout the language community and check the translation with members of the language community. It is best if they do this checking with a variety of people, including young and old, male and female, and speakers from various parts of the language area. This will help the translation to be understandable to everyone.
diff --git a/checking/level3-questions/01.md b/checking/level3-questions/01.md
index d94e7115..41d0d710 100644
--- a/checking/level3-questions/01.md
+++ b/checking/level3-questions/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Questions for Quality Checkers or Church Network Delegates
-If the Church Network leadership or Translation Committee has given you the task of checking the accuracy of the translation in the role of a Quality Checker (QC), you can use these questions to guide your evaluation of the translation.
+If the Church Network leadership or Translation Committee has given you the task of checking the accuracy of the translation in the role of a Quality Checker (QC), you can use these questions to guide your evaluation of the translation.
You can answer these questions after you read portions of the translation or as you come across problems in the text. If you answer “no” to any of these questions in the first group, please explain in more detail. Include the specific passage that you feel is not right, and give your recommendation for how the translation team should correct it.
@@ -14,13 +14,13 @@ Also keep in mind that the translators may have included information that the or
1. Does the translation conform to the Statement of Faith and Translation Guidelines?
1. Did the translation team show a good understanding of the source language as well as the target language and culture?
1. Does the language community affirm that the translation speaks in a clear and natural way in their language?
-1. Is the translation [complete](../complete/01.md)? (Does it have all of the verses, events, and information as the source)?
+1. Is the translation [complete](../complete/01.md)? (Does it have all of the verses, events, and information as the source)?
1. Which of the following translation styles did the translators appear to follow?
1. word-by-word translation, staying very close to the form of the source translation
1. phrase-by-phrase translation, using natural language phrase structures
- 1. meaning-focused translation, aiming for a freedom of local language expression
-
+ 1. meaning-focused translation, aiming for a freedom of local language expression
+
1. Do the community leaders feel that the style that the translators followed (as identified in question 4) is appropriate for the community?
1. Do the community leaders feel that the dialect that the translators used is the best one to communicate to the wider language community? For example, did the translators use expressions, phrase connectors, and spellings that will be recognized by most people in the language community? For more ways to explore this question, see [Acceptable Style](../acceptable/01.md).
1. As you read the translation, think about cultural issues in the local community that might make some passages in the book difficult to translate. Did the translation team translate these passages in a way that makes the message of the source text clear, and avoids any misunderstanding that people might have because of the cultural issue?
diff --git a/checking/natural/01.md b/checking/natural/01.md
index 595e85bb..72857b57 100644
--- a/checking/natural/01.md
+++ b/checking/natural/01.md
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
### A Natural Translation
-To translate the Bible so that it is natural means that the translation should sound like it was written by a member of the target language community. The translation should not sound like it was written by a foreigner. The translation should say things in the way that speakers of the target language say them. When a translation is natural, it is much easier to understand.
+To translate the Bible so that it is natural means that the translation should sound like it was written by a member of the target language community. The translation should not sound like it was written by a foreigner. The translation should say things in the way that speakers of the target language say them. When a translation is natural, it is much easier to understand.
To check a translation for naturalness, it is not helpful to compare it to the source language. During this check for naturalness, no one should look at the source language Bible. People will look at the source language Bible again for other checks––such as the check for accuracy––but not during this check.
-To check a translation for naturalness, you or another member of the language community must read it out loud or play a recording of it. It is difficult to evaluate a translation for naturalness when you are only looking at it on paper. But when your people hear the language, they will know immediately if it sounds right or not.
+To check a translation for naturalness, you or another member of the language community must read it out loud or play a recording of it. It is difficult to evaluate a translation for naturalness when you are only looking at it on paper. But when your people hear the language, they will know immediately if it sounds right or not.
You can read it out loud to one other person who speaks the target language or to a group of people. Before you start reading, tell the people listening that you want them to stop you when they hear something that does not sound like the way someone from your language community would say it. When someone stops you, then you can discuss together how someone would say that same thing in a more natural way.
diff --git a/checking/other-methods/01.md b/checking/other-methods/01.md
index d01e3113..18a2b08b 100644
--- a/checking/other-methods/01.md
+++ b/checking/other-methods/01.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
As well as asking questions, there are other checking methods that you may also use to ensure that the translation is [clear](../clear/01.md), easy to read, and sounds [natural](../natural/01.md) to the listeners. Here are some other methods that you may like to try:
-* **Retell Method**: You (the translator or checker) can read a passage or story and ask someone else to retell what was said. If the person can easily retell the passage, then the passage was clear. Make a note of any place that the person left out or told incorrectly, along with the chapter and verse. The translation team may need to revise those places in the translation to make them more clear. Also make note of any different ways that the person said things that mean the same thing as in the translation. It may be that these ways of saying things are more natural than the ways in the translation. The translation team can use these ways of saying the same thing to make the translation more natural.
+* **Retell Method**: You (the translator or checker) can read a passage or story and ask someone else to retell what was said. If the person can easily retell the passage, then the passage was clear. Make a note of any place that the person left out or told incorrectly, along with the chapter and verse. The translation team may need to revise those places in the translation to make them more clear. Also make note of any different ways that the person said things that mean the same thing as in the translation. It may be that these ways of saying things are more natural than the ways in the translation. The translation team can use these ways of saying the same thing to make the translation more natural.
* **Reading Method**: Someone other than you (the translator or checker) can read aloud a passage of the translation while you listen and take notes of where the person pauses or makes mistakes. This will show how easy or how difficult it is to read and understand the translation. Look at the places in the translation where the reader paused or made mistakes and consider what made that part of the translation difficult. The translation team may need to revise the translation at those points so that it is easier to read and understand.
diff --git a/checking/peer-check/01.md b/checking/peer-check/01.md
index 5e0908fa..5e90af42 100644
--- a/checking/peer-check/01.md
+++ b/checking/peer-check/01.md
@@ -3,12 +3,12 @@
At this point, you (the translator) should have already gone through the steps of drafting at least one chapter of your translation, following the guidelines in the module called [First Draft](../../translate/first-draft/01.md). Now you are ready for others to help you to check it, to find any errors or problems, and to make it better. You (or your translation team) should check your translation before you translate very many stories or chapters of the Bible, so that you can correct mistakes as early as possible in the translation process. Many of the steps in this process will need to be done several times before the translation is finished. To do an Oral Partner Check, follow these steps.
-* Read your translation to a partner (a member of the translation team) who did not work on this passage.
-* The partner can listen first for naturalness (without looking at the source text) and tell you which parts do not sound natural in your language. Together, you can think of how someone would say that meaning in your language.
-* Use those ideas to change the unnatural parts of your translation to be more natural. For more information, see [Natural](../natural/01.md).
-* Then read the passage to your partner again. This time, the partner can check for accuracy by listening to the translation while following along in the source text. The purpose of this step is to make sure that the translation accurately communicates the meaning of the original story or Bible passage.
-* Your partner can tell you if there is any part where something was added, was missing, or was changed when compared to the source text.
-* Correct those parts of the translation.
+* Read your translation to a partner (a member of the translation team) who did not work on this passage.
+* The partner can listen first for naturalness (without looking at the source text) and tell you which parts do not sound natural in your language. Together, you can think of how someone would say that meaning in your language.
+* Use those ideas to change the unnatural parts of your translation to be more natural. For more information, see [Natural](../natural/01.md).
+* Then read the passage to your partner again. This time, the partner can check for accuracy by listening to the translation while following along in the source text. The purpose of this step is to make sure that the translation accurately communicates the meaning of the original story or Bible passage.
+* Your partner can tell you if there is any part where something was added, was missing, or was changed when compared to the source text.
+* Correct those parts of the translation.
* It can also be useful to do accuracy checking with members of the community who are not part of the translation team. They should be speakers of the language of the translation, be respected in the community, and, if possible, know the Bible well in the source language. These checkers can help the translation team to think about the best way to translate the meaning of the story or Bible passage in their own language. Having more than one person checking a Bible passage in this way can be helpful, because often different checkers will notice different things.
-* For more help with checking for accuracy, see [Accuracy-Check](../accuracy-check/01.md).
+* For more help with checking for accuracy, see [Accuracy-Check](../accuracy-check/01.md).
* If you are unsure about something, ask other members of the translation team.
diff --git a/checking/publishing/01.md b/checking/publishing/01.md
index 303b296e..4d2d7c91 100644
--- a/checking/publishing/01.md
+++ b/checking/publishing/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Publishing on Door43
-* Throughout the translation and checking process, the translation draft will be uploaded to and maintained in a repository under the username that you have chosen on the Door43 website. This is where translationStudio and translationCore send the drafts when you tell them to upload.
-* When checking has been completed and all appropriate edits have been made to the translation on door43, the checkers or church leaders will inform unfoldingWord of their desire to publish. They will provide unfoldingWord with the documents affirming that the [Pastors](../good/01.md), the [Community](../community-evaluation/01.md), and the [Church Network Leaders](../level3-approval/01.md) affirm that the translation is trustworthy. The documents also contain an affirmation of the unfoldingWord [Translation Guidelines](../../intro/translation-guidelines/01.md) and the unfoldingWord [Statement of Faith](../../intro/statement-of-faith/01.md). All translated content is expected to be in accordance with the theology of the Statement of Faith. We also expect that the translators have followed the procedures and methodologies of the Translation Guidelines. unfoldingWord has no way to verify the accuracy of the translations or the affirmations, and so we rely on the integrity of the leadership of the church networks.
+* Throughout the translation and checking process, the translation draft will be uploaded to and maintained in a repository under the username that you have chosen on the Door43 website. This is where translationStudio and translationCore send the drafts when you tell them to upload.
+* When checking has been completed and all appropriate edits have been made to the translation on door43, the checkers or church leaders will inform unfoldingWord of their desire to publish. They will provide unfoldingWord with the documents affirming that the [Pastors](../good/01.md), the [Community](../community-evaluation/01.md), and the [Church Network Leaders](../level3-approval/01.md) affirm that the translation is trustworthy. The documents also contain an affirmation of the unfoldingWord [Translation Guidelines](../../intro/translation-guidelines/01.md) and the unfoldingWord [Statement of Faith](../../intro/statement-of-faith/01.md). All translated content is expected to be in accordance with the theology of the Statement of Faith. We also expect that the translators have followed the procedures and methodologies of the Translation Guidelines. unfoldingWord has no way to verify the accuracy of the translations or the affirmations, and so we rely on the integrity of the leadership of the church networks.
* After obtaining these affirmations, unfoldingWord will then make a copy of the translation that is on Door43, digitally publish a static copy of it on the unfoldingWord website (see http://www.unfoldingword.org), and make it available on the unfoldingWord mobile app. A print-ready PDF will also be produced and made available for download. It will continue to be possible to change the checked version on Door43, allowing for future checking and editing.
* unfoldingWord will also need to know the version number of the source that was used for the translation. This number will be incorporated into the version number for the translation so that it will be easy to keep track of the state of the source and the translation as they both improve and change over time. For information about version numbers, see [Source Texts and Version Numbers](../../translate/translate-source-version/01.md).
diff --git a/checking/self-assessment/01.md b/checking/self-assessment/01.md
index 0dbd9349..5516249e 100644
--- a/checking/self-assessment/01.md
+++ b/checking/self-assessment/01.md
@@ -109,8 +109,8 @@ Circle either “0” or “1” or “2” for each statement below.
**no | yes** Church leaders who have checked this translation are first-language speakers of the target language, and include someone who understands well one of the languages in which the source text is available.
-**no | yes** People from the language community––both men and women, old and young––have reviewed the translation of this chapter and agree that it is natural and clear.
+**no | yes** People from the language community––both men and women, old and young––have reviewed the translation of this chapter and agree that it is natural and clear.
-**no | yes** Church leaders from at least two different church networks have reviewed the translation of this chapter and agree that it is accurate.
+**no | yes** Church leaders from at least two different church networks have reviewed the translation of this chapter and agree that it is accurate.
-**no | yes** The leadership (or their delegates) of at least two different church networks have reviewed the translation of this chapter and endorse it as a faithful translation of this chapter of the Bible in this language.
+**no | yes** The leadership (or their delegates) of at least two different church networks have reviewed the translation of this chapter and endorse it as a faithful translation of this chapter of the Bible in this language.
diff --git a/checking/spelling/01.md b/checking/spelling/01.md
index b8a987a8..b6f6b82d 100644
--- a/checking/spelling/01.md
+++ b/checking/spelling/01.md
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-In order for the reader to be able to read and understand the translation easily, it is important that you (the translator) spell words consistently. This can be difficult if there is not a tradition of writing or spelling in the target language. When there are several people working on different parts of a translation, they may spell the same words differently from each other. For that reason, it is important for the translation team to meet together before they start translating to talk about how they plan to spell words.
+In order for the reader to be able to read and understand the translation easily, it is important that you (the translator) spell words consistently. This can be difficult if there is not a tradition of writing or spelling in the target language. When there are several people working on different parts of a translation, they may spell the same words differently from each other. For that reason, it is important for the translation team to meet together before they start translating to talk about how they plan to spell words.
As a team, discuss the words that are difficult to spell. If the words have sounds in them that are difficult to represent, then you may need to make a change in the writing system that you are using (see [Alphabet/Orthography](../../translate/translate-alphabet/01.md)). If the sounds in the words can be represented in different ways, then the team will need to agree on how to spell them. Make a list of the agreed-upon spellings of these words in alphabetical order. Make sure that each member of the team has a copy of this list so that they can consult it when translating. Add other difficult words to the list as you come across them, and make sure that these are added to everyone’s list with the same spelling. It may be helpful to use a spreadsheet to maintain your spelling list. This can be easily updated and shared electronically, or printed out periodically.
diff --git a/checking/team-oral-chunk-check/01.md b/checking/team-oral-chunk-check/01.md
index 34daaf4f..2ff98f50 100644
--- a/checking/team-oral-chunk-check/01.md
+++ b/checking/team-oral-chunk-check/01.md
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ The duties of the team members are divided - it is important that each team memb
1. One or more team members listen for naturalness. If something is unnatural, at the end of reading the chunk, they recommend a more natural way to say it.
1. One or more team members follow along in the source text, noting anything that is added, is missing, or is changed. At the end of reading the chunk, they alert the team that something was added, was missing, or was changed.
-1. Another team member follows along in the report mode of translationCore, noting all of the highlighted key terms in the source text. The team then discusses any key terms in the translation that seem inconsistent or inappropriate, along with any other problems that surface in the reading. If this mode is not available, this team member can look up the key terms on the team’s key term spreadsheet.
+1. Another team member follows along in the report mode of translationCore, noting all of the highlighted key terms in the source text. The team then discusses any key terms in the translation that seem inconsistent or inappropriate, along with any other problems that surface in the reading. If this mode is not available, this team member can look up the key terms on the team’s key term spreadsheet.
These steps can be repeated as necessary until the team is satisfied with their translation.
diff --git a/checking/toc.yaml b/checking/toc.yaml
index 5c842708..734193ee 100644
--- a/checking/toc.yaml
+++ b/checking/toc.yaml
@@ -20,10 +20,10 @@ sections:
link: important-term-check
- title: "translationNotes Check in tC"
link: trans-note-check
- - title: "Language Community Check"
+ - title: "Language Community Check"
sections:
- title: "Checking the Translation for Clarity and Naturalness"
- link: language-community-check
+ link: language-community-check
- title: "Other Methods"
link: other-methods
- title: "Clear Translation"
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ sections:
- title: "Quality Checkers"
sections:
- title: "Steps for Quality Checkers"
- link: vol2-steps
+ link: vol2-steps
- title: "Types of Things to Check"
link: vol2-things-to-check
- title: "Questions for Quality Checkers"
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ sections:
- title: "Complete Versification"
link: verses
- title: "Section Headings"
- link: headings
+ link: headings
- title: "Publishing"
link: publishing
- title: "Self-Assessment Rubric"
diff --git a/checking/trans-note-check/01.md b/checking/trans-note-check/01.md
index db67fced..f4d04eab 100644
--- a/checking/trans-note-check/01.md
+++ b/checking/trans-note-check/01.md
@@ -4,21 +4,21 @@
1. Select the project (book of the Bible) that you want to check
1. Select the category or categories of Notes that you want to check
1. Select your Gateway Language
-1. Click “Launch.” The verses to be checked will be listed on the left side, divided into different categories of Notes.
-1. Select a verse to check, and read the Note for that verse in the blue bar. It is best to check all of the verses in the same category before moving to a new category.
+1. Click “Launch.” The verses to be checked will be listed on the left side, divided into different categories of Notes.
+1. Select a verse to check, and read the Note for that verse in the blue bar. It is best to check all of the verses in the same category before moving to a new category.
-Some Notes refer to a more general issue that applies to the specific verse being examined. To understand this more general issue and how it applies to the current verse, read the information in the panel on the right side.
+Some Notes refer to a more general issue that applies to the specific verse being examined. To understand this more general issue and how it applies to the current verse, read the information in the panel on the right side.
1. After selecting (highlighting) the translation for the word or phrase in the Note, click “Save.”
-1. Consider whether or not the translation that was chosen for that word or phrase makes sense in this context.
+1. Consider whether or not the translation that was chosen for that word or phrase makes sense in this context.
1. Decide whether or not the translation is correct, considering the issue that the Note talks about.
-1. After considering these things, if you think that the translation is a good translation, then click “Save and Continue.”
+1. After considering these things, if you think that the translation is a good translation, then click “Save and Continue.”
1. If you think that there is a problem with the verse or that the translation for the word or phrase is not good, then either edit the verse to make it better, or make a comment telling someone who will review your work what you think might be wrong with the translation here. If you have made an edit, you may need to make your selection again.
-1. When you are finished making your edit or comment, click “Save and Continue.” If you prefer to only make a comment for the word or phrase and not make a selection for it, then click on the next verse in the list on the left to go on to the next verse.
+1. When you are finished making your edit or comment, click “Save and Continue.” If you prefer to only make a comment for the word or phrase and not make a selection for it, then click on the next verse in the list on the left to go on to the next verse.
After a selection has been made for all of the verses in a Note category, the list of translations in that category can be reviewed. The instructions that follow are for the reviewer or for the translation team.
-1. You will now be able to see a list of the translations that were made for each word or phrase under each translationNote category on the left. Choose the category that you want to review. It may be that different members of the translation team will have better knowledge in different areas. For example, one team member may be very good at reviewing metaphors, while another may be very good at understanding and correcting difficult grammar, such as passive voice constructions.
+1. You will now be able to see a list of the translations that were made for each word or phrase under each translationNote category on the left. Choose the category that you want to review. It may be that different members of the translation team will have better knowledge in different areas. For example, one team member may be very good at reviewing metaphors, while another may be very good at understanding and correcting difficult grammar, such as passive voice constructions.
1. You will want to review any comments that were made by others. To do that, click the funnel symbol to the right of “Menu” at the upper left. A list will open, including the word “Comments.”
1. Click the box next to “Comments.” This will make all verses that do not have comments in them disappear.
1. To read the comments, click on the first verse in the list.
@@ -26,6 +26,6 @@ After a selection has been made for all of the verses in a Note category, the li
1. Read the comment, and decide what you will do about it.
1. If you decide to make an edit to the verse, click “Cancel” and then “Edit Verse.” This will open a small screen where you can edit the verse.
1. When you are finished making the edit, select the reason for the change, then click “Save.”
-1. Continue this process until you have acted on all of the comments that were left for you.
+1. Continue this process until you have acted on all of the comments that were left for you.
-After you have finished reviewing a Note category or a Bible book, you may still have questions about some verses or Note checks. You may want to discuss a difficult verse with others on the translation team and try to find a solution together, study more Bible translation resources, or refer the question to a Bible translation expert.
+After you have finished reviewing a Note category or a Bible book, you may still have questions about some verses or Note checks. You may want to discuss a difficult verse with others on the translation team and try to find a solution together, study more Bible translation resources, or refer the question to a Bible translation expert.
diff --git a/checking/vol2-backtranslation-guidelines/01.md b/checking/vol2-backtranslation-guidelines/01.md
index 61de208c..2980cfbb 100644
--- a/checking/vol2-backtranslation-guidelines/01.md
+++ b/checking/vol2-backtranslation-guidelines/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### 1. Show the Target Language Usage for Words and Clauses
-For the purposes of this module, “target language” refers to the language into which the Bible draft was made, and “language of wider communication” refers to the language into which the back translation is being made.
+For the purposes of this module, “target language” refers to the language into which the Bible draft was made, and “language of wider communication” refers to the language into which the back translation is being made.
#### Use the meaning of the word in context
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ The back translator should use the same punctuation in the back translation as i
#### Express the full meaning of complex words
-Sometimes words in the target language will be more complex than words in the language of wider communication. In this case, the back translator will need to represent the target language word with a longer phrase in the language of wider communication. This is necessary so that the translation checker can see as much of the meaning as possible. For example, to translate one word in the target language it might be necessary to use a phrase in the language of wider communication such as “go up” or “be lying down.” Also, many languages have words that contain more information than the equivalent words in the language of wider communication. In this case, it is most helpful if the back translator includes that additional information in parentheses, such as “we (inclusive)” or “you (feminine, plural).”
+Sometimes words in the target language will be more complex than words in the language of wider communication. In this case, the back translator will need to represent the target language word with a longer phrase in the language of wider communication. This is necessary so that the translation checker can see as much of the meaning as possible. For example, to translate one word in the target language it might be necessary to use a phrase in the language of wider communication such as “go up” or “be lying down.” Also, many languages have words that contain more information than the equivalent words in the language of wider communication. In this case, it is most helpful if the back translator includes that additional information in parentheses, such as “we (inclusive)” or “you (feminine, plural).”
### 2. Use the Language of Wider Communication Style for Sentence and Logical Structure
diff --git a/checking/vol2-backtranslation-purpose/01.md b/checking/vol2-backtranslation-purpose/01.md
index e1fa6800..844600ef 100644
--- a/checking/vol2-backtranslation-purpose/01.md
+++ b/checking/vol2-backtranslation-purpose/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Why is a back translation necessary?
-The purpose of a back translation is to allow a consultant or checker of biblical material who does not understand the target language to be able to see what is in the target language translation, even though he or she does not understand the target language. In this way, the checker can “look through” the back translation and check the target language translation without knowing the target language. Therefore, the language of the back translation needs to be a language that both the back translator (that is, the person doing the back translation) and the checker understand well. Often this means that the back translator will need to translate the target language text back into the same language of wider communication that was used for the source text.
+The purpose of a back translation is to allow a consultant or checker of biblical material who does not understand the target language to be able to see what is in the target language translation, even though he or she does not understand the target language. In this way, the checker can “look through” the back translation and check the target language translation without knowing the target language. Therefore, the language of the back translation needs to be a language that both the back translator (that is, the person doing the back translation) and the checker understand well. Often this means that the back translator will need to translate the target language text back into the same language of wider communication that was used for the source text.
Some people might consider this to be unnecessary, since the biblical text already exists in the source language. But remember that the purpose of the back translation is to allow the checker to see what is in the target language translation. The checker cannot see what is in the target language translation by reading the original source language text. In order to see what is in the target language translation, the back translator must make a new translation back into the language of wider communication that is based only on the target language translation. For this reason, the back translator *must not* look at the source language text when doing his back translation, but *must look only* at the target language text. In this way, the checker can identify any problems that might exist in the target language translation and work with the translator to fix those problems.
diff --git a/checking/vol2-steps/01.md b/checking/vol2-steps/01.md
index 15dac703..663b89e4 100644
--- a/checking/vol2-steps/01.md
+++ b/checking/vol2-steps/01.md
@@ -14,9 +14,9 @@ These are steps for the Quality Checkers or Church Network Delegates to follow w
#### While Checking
-1. **Align the passage**. If this has not been done, then use the Aligning Tool in translationCore to align the passage with the original language. If you do not speak the target language, then work together with someone who does speak the target language. In this way, you can align the translation by combining your knowledge of the original language with the other person’s knowledge of the target language. As a result of the aligning process, you will have questions about parts of the translation. Make note of these with the comment feature in translationCore so that you can ask the translation team about them when you meet, or so that the translation team can see and discuss them before you meet. For instructions about the alignment tool, go to [Alignment Tool](../alignment-tool/01.md).
-1. **Ask Questions**. When you are with the translation team and you want to address something that you think might be a problem in the translation, do not make a statement to the translator that there is a problem in the translation. If you do not speak the target language, then you do not know if there is a problem or not. You only think that there might be a problem. Even if you do speak the target language, it is more polite to ask a question than to make a statement that something is wrong. You could ask something like, “What would you think about saying it this way?” and then suggest an alternative way to translate it. Then together you can discuss the different translation ideas, and you can give reasons why you think one translation alternative might be better than another. Then, after considering the alternatives, the translator or translation team must decide which way is best. For topics to ask questions about while checking a Bible translation, see [Types of Things to Check](../vol2-things-to-check/01.md).
-1. **Explore the target language and culture**. The questions that you ask will be to discover what the phrase means in the target language. The best questions are the ones that help the translator to think about what the phrase means and how it is used. Useful questions are, “In what situations is this phrase used in your language?” or “Who usually says things like this, and why do they say it?” It is also useful to help the translator to think about what a person from his village would say if in the same situation as the person in the Bible.
+1. **Align the passage**. If this has not been done, then use the Aligning Tool in translationCore to align the passage with the original language. If you do not speak the target language, then work together with someone who does speak the target language. In this way, you can align the translation by combining your knowledge of the original language with the other person’s knowledge of the target language. As a result of the aligning process, you will have questions about parts of the translation. Make note of these with the comment feature in translationCore so that you can ask the translation team about them when you meet, or so that the translation team can see and discuss them before you meet. For instructions about the alignment tool, go to [Alignment Tool](../alignment-tool/01.md).
+1. **Ask Questions**. When you are with the translation team and you want to address something that you think might be a problem in the translation, do not make a statement to the translator that there is a problem in the translation. If you do not speak the target language, then you do not know if there is a problem or not. You only think that there might be a problem. Even if you do speak the target language, it is more polite to ask a question than to make a statement that something is wrong. You could ask something like, “What would you think about saying it this way?” and then suggest an alternative way to translate it. Then together you can discuss the different translation ideas, and you can give reasons why you think one translation alternative might be better than another. Then, after considering the alternatives, the translator or translation team must decide which way is best. For topics to ask questions about while checking a Bible translation, see [Types of Things to Check](../vol2-things-to-check/01.md).
+1. **Explore the target language and culture**. The questions that you ask will be to discover what the phrase means in the target language. The best questions are the ones that help the translator to think about what the phrase means and how it is used. Useful questions are, “In what situations is this phrase used in your language?” or “Who usually says things like this, and why do they say it?” It is also useful to help the translator to think about what a person from his village would say if in the same situation as the person in the Bible.
1. **Teach the translator**. After you explore the meaning of a phrase in the target language and culture, you can tell the translator what the phrase means in the source language and culture. Then together you can decide if the phrase in the translation or the phrase he has just thought of has that same meaning or not.
#### Checking the Translation Directly
diff --git a/checking/vol2-steps/sub-title.md b/checking/vol2-steps/sub-title.md
index b5733462..f16dde95 100644
--- a/checking/vol2-steps/sub-title.md
+++ b/checking/vol2-steps/sub-title.md
@@ -1 +1 @@
-What are the steps that I, as a Quality Checker, should follow to check a translation?
\ No newline at end of file
+What are the steps that I, as a Quality Checker, should follow to check a translation?
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/checking/vol2-things-to-check/01.md b/checking/vol2-things-to-check/01.md
index 7b504466..780d4d96 100644
--- a/checking/vol2-things-to-check/01.md
+++ b/checking/vol2-things-to-check/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Types of Things to Check
-These are things to check as you look at a passage of Scripture to check it for accuracy. Pastors who speak the target language can use these guidelines, as well as Quality Checkers who do not speak the target language.
+These are things to check as you look at a passage of Scripture to check it for accuracy. Pastors who speak the target language can use these guidelines, as well as Quality Checkers who do not speak the target language.
1. Ask about anything that does not seem right to you, so that the translation team can explain it. If it also does not seem right to them, they can adjust the translation. In general:
diff --git a/intro/finding-answers/01.md b/intro/finding-answers/01.md
index 1de7ee1a..297ba872 100644
--- a/intro/finding-answers/01.md
+++ b/intro/finding-answers/01.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ There are several resources available for finding answers to questions:
* **unfoldingWord® Translation Academy** - This training manual is available at http://ufw.io/ta and has much information including:
* [Introduction](../ta-intro/01.md) - introduces this resource, the Gateway Languages strategy, and translation
- * [Process Manual](../../process/process-manual/01.md) - answers the question “what next?”
+ * [Process Manual](../../process/process-manual/01.md) - answers the question “what next?”
* [Translation Manual](../../translate/translate-manual/01.md) - explains the basics of translation theory and provides practical translation helps
* [Checking Manual](../../checking/intro-check/01.md) - explains the basics of checking theory and best practices
* **Door43 Slack** - Join the Door43 community, post your questions to the “#helpdesk” channel, and get real-time answers to your questions (sign up at http://ufw.io/door43)
diff --git a/intro/open-license/01.md b/intro/open-license/01.md
index aebadbe3..7f0b9ac7 100644
--- a/intro/open-license/01.md
+++ b/intro/open-license/01.md
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ This principle applies to trademarks from other organizations as well. The CC BY
On the derivative work, you must indicate what changes you have made and attribute the work as follows: “The original work by unfoldingWord is available from unfoldingword.org/uta.” You must also make your derivative work available under the same license (CC BY-SA).
-Suggested attribution statement for Door43 works: “Original work created by the Door43 World Missions Community, available at http://door43.org/, and released under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International License (http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0/). This work has been changed from the original, and the original authors have not endorsed this work.”
+Suggested attribution statement for Door43 works: “Original work created by the Door43 World Missions Community, available at http://door43.org/, and released under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International License (http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0/). This work has been changed from the original, and the original authors have not endorsed this work.”
Other works on Door43 may have different suggestions for attribution, please check the LICENSE files that are distributed with the content.
diff --git a/intro/ta-intro/01.md b/intro/ta-intro/01.md
index f7615a2c..58014c28 100644
--- a/intro/ta-intro/01.md
+++ b/intro/ta-intro/01.md
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
### Welcome to unfoldingWord® Translation Academy
-unfoldingWord® Translation Academy is a collection of information and instruction on the topic of Bible translation. The primary users that we have in mind are church-based mother-tongue translators. It is written in simple language wherever possible and is intended to enable anyone, anywhere to equip themselves so that they will be able to make high-quality translations of biblical content into their own language.
+unfoldingWord® Translation Academy is a collection of information and instruction on the topic of Bible translation. The primary users that we have in mind are church-based mother-tongue translators. It is written in simple language wherever possible and is intended to enable anyone, anywhere to equip themselves so that they will be able to make high-quality translations of biblical content into their own language.
-unfoldingWord® Translation Academy is designed to be highly flexible. It is modular in structure, making possible many pathways through the material, depending on the needs and interests of the user. Although it does recommend certain steps and procedures, it seeks to be paradigm-neutral, so that it can be used in a variety of settings and processes. It can be used in systematic, in-advance approaches, or it can be used for just-in-time learning (or both, as needed).
+unfoldingWord® Translation Academy is designed to be highly flexible. It is modular in structure, making possible many pathways through the material, depending on the needs and interests of the user. Although it does recommend certain steps and procedures, it seeks to be paradigm-neutral, so that it can be used in a variety of settings and processes. It can be used in systematic, in-advance approaches, or it can be used for just-in-time learning (or both, as needed).
unfoldingWord® Translation Academy is organized into the following sections:
* [Introduction](../ta-intro/01.md) - introduces this resource, the Gateway Languages strategy, and translation
-* [Process Manual](../../process/process-manual/01.md) - answers the question “what next?”
+* [Process Manual](../../process/process-manual/01.md) - answers the question “what next?”
* [Translation Manual](../../translate/translate-manual/01.md) - explains the basics of translation theory and offers practical Bible translation helps
* [Checking Manual](../../checking/intro-check/01.md) - explains the basics of checking theory and best practices for checking translations
diff --git a/intro/translate-why/01.md b/intro/translate-why/01.md
index d355367c..073a7ecb 100644
--- a/intro/translate-why/01.md
+++ b/intro/translate-why/01.md
@@ -7,4 +7,4 @@ Today, people in your country do not understand Hebrew, Aramaic and Greek. But t
Someone’s “mother tongue” or “heart language” means the language they first spoke as a child and the one which they use at home. This is the language in which they are most comfortable and which they use to express their deepest thoughts. We want everyone to be able to read God’s Word in their heart language, even if you speak a language that has not been written down yet!
-Every language is important and valuable. Small languages are just as important as the national languages spoken in your country, and they can express meaning just as well. No one should be ashamed to speak their dialect. Sometimes, those in minority groups feel ashamed of their language and try not to use it around the people who are in the majority in their nation. But there is nothing inherently more important, more prestigious, or more educated about a national language than there is about local languages. Each language has nuances and shades of meaning that are unique. We should use the language we are most comfortable with and with which we best communicate with others.
+Every language is important and valuable. Small languages are just as important as the national languages spoken in your country, and they can express meaning just as well. No one should be ashamed to speak their dialect. Sometimes, those in minority groups feel ashamed of their language and try not to use it around the people who are in the majority in their nation. But there is nothing inherently more important, more prestigious, or more educated about a national language than there is about local languages. Each language has nuances and shades of meaning that are unique. We should use the language we are most comfortable with and with which we best communicate with others.
diff --git a/intro/translation-guidelines/01.md b/intro/translation-guidelines/01.md
index 9590760b..ae10349e 100644
--- a/intro/translation-guidelines/01.md
+++ b/intro/translation-guidelines/01.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
The following statement on the principles and procedures used in translation is subscribed to by unfoldingWord and its contributors. All translation activities are carried out according to these common guidelines.
-1. **Accurate** — Translate accurately, without detracting from, changing, or adding to the meaning of the original text. Translated content should faithfully communicate as precisely as possible the meaning of the original text as it would have been understood by the original audience. (see [Create Accurate Translations](../../translate/guidelines-accurate/01.md))
+1. **Accurate** — Translate accurately, without detracting from, changing, or adding to the meaning of the original text. Translated content should faithfully communicate as precisely as possible the meaning of the original text as it would have been understood by the original audience. (see [Create Accurate Translations](../../translate/guidelines-accurate/01.md))
1. **Clear** — Use whatever language structures are necessary to achieve the highest level of comprehension. This includes rearranging the form of a text and using as many or as few terms as necessary to communicate the original meaning as clearly as possible. (see [Create Clear Translations](../../translate/guidelines-clear/01.md))
1. **Natural** — Use language forms that are effective and that reflect the way your language is used in corresponding contexts. (see [Create Natural Translations](../../translate/guidelines-natural/01.md))
1. **Faithful** — Avoid any political, denominational, ideological, social, cultural, or theological bias in your translation. Use key terms that are faithful to the vocabulary of the original biblical languages. Use equivalent common language terms for the biblical words that describe the relationship between God the Father and God the Son. These may be clarified, as needed, in footnotes or other supplemental resources. (see [Create Faithful Translations](../../translate/guidelines-faithful/01.md))
diff --git a/intro/uw-intro/01.md b/intro/uw-intro/01.md
index fb7887c3..435c7462 100644
--- a/intro/uw-intro/01.md
+++ b/intro/uw-intro/01.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ The vision of unfoldingWord is **the church in every people group and the Bible
Jesus commanded his disciples to make disciples of EVERY people group:
-> Jesus came to them and spoke to them, saying, “All authority has been given to me in heaven and on the earth. Go, therefore, and make disciples of all the nations. Baptize them into the name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Spirit. Teach them to obey all the things that I have commanded you. See, I am with you always, even to the end of the age.” (Matthew 28:18-20 ULT)
+> Jesus came to them and spoke to them, saying, “All authority has been given to me in heaven and on the earth. Go, therefore, and make disciples of all the nations. Baptize them into the name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Spirit. Teach them to obey all the things that I have commanded you. See, I am with you always, even to the end of the age.” (Matthew 28:18-20 ULT)
We have the promise that people from EVERY language will be in heaven:
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ How do we accomplish the goal of **the church in every people group and the Bibl
#### Content
-We create and make available for translation free and unrestricted biblical content. See https://www.unfoldingword.org/content for a complete list of resources and translations. Here are a few samples:
+We create and make available for translation free and unrestricted biblical content. See https://www.unfoldingword.org/content for a complete list of resources and translations. Here are a few samples:
* **unfoldingWord® Open Bible Stories** - unrestricted visual Bible stories comprising 50 key stories of the Bible, from Creation to Revelation, for evangelism and discipleship, in print, audio, and video (see https://www.openbiblestories.org/).
* **unfoldingWord® Literal Text** - a ‘form-centric’ translation of the Bible *for translators*. It increases the translator’s understanding of the lexical and grammatical composition of the underlying text by adhering closely to the word order and structure of the originals (see https://www.unfoldingword.org/ult).
diff --git a/manifest.yaml b/manifest.yaml
index 87598568..65416e4c 100644
--- a/manifest.yaml
+++ b/manifest.yaml
@@ -22,12 +22,12 @@ dublin_core:
description: 'A modular handbook that provides a condensed explanation of Bible translation and checking principles that the global Church has implicitly affirmed define trustworthy translations. It enables translators to learn how to create trustworthy translations of the Bible in their own language.'
format: 'text/markdown'
identifier: 'ta'
- issued: '2020-07-23'
+ issued: '2020-10-29'
language:
identifier: 'en'
title: 'English'
direction: 'ltr'
- modified: '2020-07-23'
+ modified: '2020-10-29'
publisher: 'unfoldingWord®'
relation:
- 'en/ust'
@@ -39,11 +39,11 @@ dublin_core:
-
identifier: 'ta'
language: 'en'
- version: '13'
+ version: '14'
subject: 'Translation Academy'
title: 'unfoldingWord® Translation Academy'
type: 'man'
- version: '14'
+ version: '15'
checking:
checking_entity:
diff --git a/process/intro-publishing/01.md b/process/intro-publishing/01.md
index efdd9c73..d4ca1fc7 100644
--- a/process/intro-publishing/01.md
+++ b/process/intro-publishing/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Publishing Overview
-Once a work has been uploaded to Door43, it is automatically available online under your user account. This is referred to as self-publishing. You will have access to a web version of your project at http://door43.org/u/user_name/project_name (where user_name is your username and project_name is your translation project). Both translationStudio and translationCore will give you the correct link when you upload. You can also browse all works on http://door43.org.
+Once a work has been uploaded to Door43, it is automatically available online under your user account. This is referred to as self-publishing. You will have access to a web version of your project at http://door43.org/u/user_name/project_name (where user_name is your username and project_name is your translation project). Both translationStudio and translationCore will give you the correct link when you upload. You can also browse all works on http://door43.org.
From your Door43 project page you can:
diff --git a/process/intro-share/01.md b/process/intro-share/01.md
index 4e65fa71..def50c34 100644
--- a/process/intro-share/01.md
+++ b/process/intro-share/01.md
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
Biblical content is worthless unless it is distributed and used. One advantage of using the Door43 translation and publishing platform is that it provides multiple, simple ways of distributing content. On Door43:
-* You can safely store your translation
-* People can see your translation
+* You can safely store your translation
+* People can see your translation
* People can leave comments and suggestions to improve your translation
* People can download your translation to read, print, and share with others
diff --git a/process/process-manual/01.md b/process/process-manual/01.md
index 248b44e3..9dfc524f 100644
--- a/process/process-manual/01.md
+++ b/process/process-manual/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Welcome
-Welcome to Bible translation! We are pleased that you desire to translate God’s message into the language of your people, whether this is through translaton of Bible stories or books of Scripture. This Process Manual is a step-by-step guide to help translation teams know what they need to do from the start of a project to its completion. This guide will help a translation team from the initial setup to the final publishing of translated and checked content.
+Welcome to Bible translation! We are pleased that you desire to translate God’s message into the language of your people, whether this is through translaton of Bible stories or books of Scripture. This Process Manual is a step-by-step guide to help translation teams know what they need to do from the start of a project to its completion. This guide will help a translation team from the initial setup to the final publishing of translated and checked content.
### Getting Started
diff --git a/process/setup-tc/01.md b/process/setup-tc/01.md
index 0cccf34a..22059828 100644
--- a/process/setup-tc/01.md
+++ b/process/setup-tc/01.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
### How to Get translationCore®
-translationCore® is an open-source and open-licensed software program for checking Bible translations. It is completely free to use. The latest version of translationCore for desktop or laptop computers (Windows, Mac, or Linux) is available from https://translationcore.com/. To install the program, click on “Download” to get the latest release. Note that you may also copy the installation file to other computers to share translationCore with others without using the internet.
+translationCore® is an open-source and open-licensed software program for checking Bible translations. It is completely free to use. The latest version of translationCore for desktop or laptop computers (Windows, Mac, or Linux) is available from https://translationcore.com/. To install the program, click on “Download” to get the latest release. Note that you may also copy the installation file to other computers to share translationCore with others without using the internet.
### How to Set Up translationCore®
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ For documentation on how to use translationCore, please see https://tc-documenta
#### Log In
-To start, you will need to log in with a user name. If your translation is on Door43, use your Door43 user name. If you do not want to use the internet, then you can enter any name that you want to use, either real or a pseudonym.
+To start, you will need to log in with a user name. If your translation is on Door43, use your Door43 user name. If you do not want to use the internet, then you can enter any name that you want to use, either real or a pseudonym.
#### Choose a Project
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ If you logged in with your Door43 user name, translationCore will know which tra
#### Choose a Tool
-translationCore currently contains three checking tools:
+translationCore currently contains three checking tools:
* [translationWords Tool](../../checking/important-term-check/01.md)
* [translationNotes Tool](../../checking/trans-note-check/01.md)
diff --git a/process/setup-team/01.md b/process/setup-team/01.md
index ef53f411..386eb084 100644
--- a/process/setup-team/01.md
+++ b/process/setup-team/01.md
@@ -22,8 +22,8 @@ There are many decisions the translation team will need to make, many of them ri
* [Alphabet/Orthography](../../translate/translate-alphabet/01.md) - Many languages have alphabet decisions that need to be made
* [Decisions for Writing Your Language](../../translate/writing-decisions/01.md) - Writing style, punctuation, translating names, spelling, and other decisions have to be made
* [Translation Style](../../translate/choose-style/01.md) - The translation committee needs to agree on the style of the translation in the sense of how much they want it to imitate the form of the source, how much borrowing of words is allowed, and other topics. See also this section on making the translation [Acceptable](../../checking/acceptable/01.md).
-* [Choosing What to Translate](../../translate/translation-difficulty/01.md) - Books should be chosen based on the needs of the church and the difficulty of translation
+* [Choosing What to Translate](../../translate/translation-difficulty/01.md) - Books should be chosen based on the needs of the church and the difficulty of translation
-After the translation committee makes these decisions, it is good to write them down in a document that everyone involved in the translation can read. This will help everyone to make similar translation decisions and will avoid further arguments about these things.
+After the translation committee makes these decisions, it is good to write them down in a document that everyone involved in the translation can read. This will help everyone to make similar translation decisions and will avoid further arguments about these things.
After choosing the translation team, it will be time to start giving them [Translation Training](../pretranslation-training/01.md).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/process/setup-ts/01.md b/process/setup-ts/01.md
index 8199a1e4..804b1088 100644
--- a/process/setup-ts/01.md
+++ b/process/setup-ts/01.md
@@ -1,23 +1,23 @@
### Installing tS for Mobile
-The mobile (Android) edition of translationStudio is available from the [Google Play Store](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.translationstudio.androidapp ) or via direct download from http://ufw.io/ts/. If you install from the Play Store, then you will be notified by the Play Store when a new version is available. Note that you may also copy the installation file (apk) to other devices to share translationStudio with others without using the internet.
+The mobile (Android) edition of translationStudio is available from the [Google Play Store](https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.translationstudio.androidapp ) or via direct download from http://ufw.io/ts/. If you install from the Play Store, then you will be notified by the Play Store when a new version is available. Note that you may also copy the installation file (apk) to other devices to share translationStudio with others without using the internet.
### Installing tS for Desktop
-The latest version of translationStudio for desktop or laptop computers (Windows, Mac, or Linux) is available from http://ufw.io/ts/. To install the program, navigate to the “Desktop” section and download the latest release. Note that you may also copy the installation file to other computers to share translationStudio with others without using the internet.
+The latest version of translationStudio for desktop or laptop computers (Windows, Mac, or Linux) is available from http://ufw.io/ts/. To install the program, navigate to the “Desktop” section and download the latest release. Note that you may also copy the installation file to other computers to share translationStudio with others without using the internet.
### Using tS
-Once installed, both editions of translationStudio are designed to work similarly. You *do not* need an internet connection to use translationStudio! When using translationStudio for the first time, the software will take you to a screen where you must sign an agreement to the [Statement of Faith](../../intro/statement-of-faith/01.md), the [Translation Guidelines](../../intro/translation-guidelines/01.md), and the [Open License](../../intro/open-license/01.md).
+Once installed, both editions of translationStudio are designed to work similarly. You *do not* need an internet connection to use translationStudio! When using translationStudio for the first time, the software will take you to a screen where you must sign an agreement to the [Statement of Faith](../../intro/statement-of-faith/01.md), the [Translation Guidelines](../../intro/translation-guidelines/01.md), and the [Open License](../../intro/open-license/01.md).
-After this first-use screen, the software will then take you to the Home screen where you can create a new project. You will need to give the project a name (usually a book of the Bible), identify the project type (usually Bible or Open Bible Stories), and identify the target language. Once your project is created, you can start translating. Make sure that you understand the [Principles of Good Translation](../pretranslation-training/01.md) and know how to use the [Translation Helps](../../translate/translate-help/01.md) that are built into translationStudio. These will help you to gain a better understanding of the source text and how to translate it. Note that your work is automatically saved. You may also choose to back up, share, or upload your work at various intervals (use the menu to access these functions). For guidelines on how to start translating, see [Translation Overview](../translation-overview/01.md) and [Making a First Draft](../../translate/first-draft/01.md).
+After this first-use screen, the software will then take you to the Home screen where you can create a new project. You will need to give the project a name (usually a book of the Bible), identify the project type (usually Bible or Open Bible Stories), and identify the target language. Once your project is created, you can start translating. Make sure that you understand the [Principles of Good Translation](../pretranslation-training/01.md) and know how to use the [Translation Helps](../../translate/translate-help/01.md) that are built into translationStudio. These will help you to gain a better understanding of the source text and how to translate it. Note that your work is automatically saved. You may also choose to back up, share, or upload your work at various intervals (use the menu to access these functions). For guidelines on how to start translating, see [Translation Overview](../translation-overview/01.md) and [Making a First Draft](../../translate/first-draft/01.md).
For more information on how to use translationStudio, please see the documentation at https://ts-info.readthedocs.io/.
### After Using tS
1. Make sure that you have a translation team that can help you check your work (see [Training Before Checking Begins](../prechecking-training/01.md)).
-1. At any point, you may upload your work to [Door43](https://git.door43.org) by clicking on the three-dot menu and choosing Upload/Export. You will need to create a user name on Door43.
+1. At any point, you may upload your work to [Door43](https://git.door43.org) by clicking on the three-dot menu and choosing Upload/Export. You will need to create a user name on Door43.
1. Once uploaded, Door43 will keep your work in a repository under your user name and you can access your work there (see [Publishing](../intro-publishing/01.md)).
diff --git a/process/share-content/01.md b/process/share-content/01.md
index a8a0a201..556b8b02 100644
--- a/process/share-content/01.md
+++ b/process/share-content/01.md
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
### Sharing Content from tS and tC
-Sharing content that is in translationStudio is easy. For offine sharing, use the Backup feature from the tS menu. For online sharing, use the Upload feature from the tS menu. In translationCore, use the three-dot menu on the Projects page. For offline sharing, use either Export to USFM or Export to CSV. For online sharing, use Upload to Door43.
+Sharing content that is in translationStudio is easy. For offine sharing, use the Backup feature from the tS menu. For online sharing, use the Upload feature from the tS menu. In translationCore, use the three-dot menu on the Projects page. For offline sharing, use either Export to USFM or Export to CSV. For online sharing, use Upload to Door43.
### Sharing Content on Door43
-If you upload your work from translationStudio or translationCore, then it will automatically appear online on Door43. All of your uploaded content will appear under your user account. For example, if your username is *test_user* then you may find all your work at https://git.door43.org/test_user/. You can share your work with others online by giving them the link to the projects you have uploaded.
+If you upload your work from translationStudio or translationCore, then it will automatically appear online on Door43. All of your uploaded content will appear under your user account. For example, if your username is *test_user* then you may find all your work at https://git.door43.org/test_user/. You can share your work with others online by giving them the link to the projects you have uploaded.
### Sharing Content Offline
-You can also generate and download documents from your project pages on Door43. Once you have downloaded these, you can transfer them to others however you would like, including printing and distributing paper copies.
\ No newline at end of file
+You can also generate and download documents from your project pages on Door43. Once you have downloaded these, you can transfer them to others however you would like, including printing and distributing paper copies.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/process/translation-overview/01.md b/process/translation-overview/01.md
index 492c3249..424bd6ba 100644
--- a/process/translation-overview/01.md
+++ b/process/translation-overview/01.md
@@ -27,6 +27,6 @@ After finishing Open Bible Stories, you will have gained enough skill and experi
8. Check the translation with [Leaders of Church Networks](../../checking/level3/01.md).
9. [Publish](../intro-publishing/01.md) the translation on Door43, in print, and in audio, as desired.
-Repeat these steps with each Bible book.
+Repeat these steps with each Bible book.
-Plan to have someone from the translation team continue to maintain the translation on [Door43](http://git.door43.org), editing it to correct errors and improve it according to suggestions from the church community. The translation can easily be downloaded and reprinted as often as desired.
+Plan to have someone from the translation team continue to maintain the translation on [Door43](http://git.door43.org), editing it to correct errors and improve it according to suggestions from the church community. The translation can easily be downloaded and reprinted as often as desired.
diff --git a/translate/biblicalimageryta/01.md b/translate/biblicalimageryta/01.md
index c06637ab..037b4ee9 100644
--- a/translate/biblicalimageryta/01.md
+++ b/translate/biblicalimageryta/01.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
### Description
-The term “biblical imagery” refers in a general way to any kind of language in which an image is paired with an idea such that the image represents the idea. This general definition is applied most directly to [metaphors](../figs-metaphor/01.md) but can also include [similes](../figs-simile/01.md), [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md), and cultural models.
+The term “biblical imagery” refers in a general way to any kind of language in which an image is paired with an idea such that the image represents the idea. This general definition is applied most directly to [metaphors](../figs-metaphor/01.md) but can also include [similes](../figs-simile/01.md), [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md), and cultural models.
We have included several modules about biblical imagery in order to tell about the various patterns of imagery found in the Bible. The patterns of pairings found in the Bible are often unique to the Hebrew and Greek languages. It is useful to recognize these patterns because they repeatedly present translators with the same problems regarding how to translate them. Once translators think through how they will handle these translation challenges, they will be ready to meet them anywhere they see the same patterns. See [Biblical Imagery - Common Patterns](../bita-part1/01.md) for links to pages showing common patterns of pairings between ideas in similes and metaphors.
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ A **simile** is an explicit figure of speech that compares two items using one o
A **metonymy** is an implicit figure of speech that refers to an item (either physical or abstract) not by its own name, but by the name of something closely related to it. See [Biblical Imagery - Common Metonymies](../bita-part2/01.md) for a list of some common metonymies in the Bible.
-A **metaphor** is a figure of speech which uses a physical image to refer to an abstract idea, either explicitly or implicitly. In our translation helps, we distinguish between three different types of metaphors: [simple metaphors](../figs-simetaphor/01.md), [extended metaphors](../figs-exmetaphor/01.md), and [complex metaphors](../figs-cometaphor/01.md).
+A **metaphor** is a figure of speech which uses a physical image to refer to an abstract idea, either explicitly or implicitly. In our translation helps, we distinguish between three different types of metaphors: [simple metaphors](../figs-simetaphor/01.md), [extended metaphors](../figs-exmetaphor/01.md), and [complex metaphors](../figs-cometaphor/01.md).
In a metaphor, the **Image** is the physical term (object, event, action, etc.) that is used to refer to an abstract term (idea, concept, action, etc.).
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ A **simple metaphor** is an explicit metaphor in which a single physical image i
An **extended metaphor** is an explicit metaphor that uses multiple images and multiple ideas at the same time. For example, in Psalm 23 the psalmist writes “Yahweh is my shepherd” and then goes on to describe multiple physical aspects of the relationship between sheep and a shepherd as well as multiple abstract ideas concerning the relationship between himself and Yahweh.
-A **complex metaphor** is an implicit metaphor that uses multiple images and multiple ideas at the same time. Complex metaphors are very similar to extended metaphors, except that they are implied by the text rather than explicitly stated. Because of this, complex metaphors can be very difficult to identify in the Bible. For example, in Ephesians 6:10-20 the apostle Paul describes how a Christian should prepare to resist temptation by comparing abstract ideas to pieces of armor worn by a soldier. The term “full armor of God” is not a combination of several simple metaphors (where the belt represents truth, the helmet represents salvation, etc.). Rather, the unstated complex metaphor PREPARATION IS GETTING DRESSED underlies the entire description as a whole. The apostle Paul was using the physical Image of a soldier putting on his armor (that is, “GETTING DRESSED”) to refer to the abstract Idea (that is, “PREPARATION”) of a Christian preparing himself to resist temptation.
+A **complex metaphor** is an implicit metaphor that uses multiple images and multiple ideas at the same time. Complex metaphors are very similar to extended metaphors, except that they are implied by the text rather than explicitly stated. Because of this, complex metaphors can be very difficult to identify in the Bible. For example, in Ephesians 6:10-20 the apostle Paul describes how a Christian should prepare to resist temptation by comparing abstract ideas to pieces of armor worn by a soldier. The term “full armor of God” is not a combination of several simple metaphors (where the belt represents truth, the helmet represents salvation, etc.). Rather, the unstated complex metaphor PREPARATION IS GETTING DRESSED underlies the entire description as a whole. The apostle Paul was using the physical Image of a soldier putting on his armor (that is, “GETTING DRESSED”) to refer to the abstract Idea (that is, “PREPARATION”) of a Christian preparing himself to resist temptation.
In our translation helps, we use the term **cultural model** to refer to either an extended metaphor or a complex metaphor that is widely used within a specific culture but which may or may not be used within a different culture. See [Biblical Imagery - Cultural Models](../bita-part3/01.md) for a list of some cultural models found in the Bible.
@@ -33,20 +33,20 @@ Cultural models are complex metaphors that people use to help them imagine and t
For example, both the Old Testament and New Testament describe God as if he were a shepherd and his people were sheep. This is a cultural model that is used frequently in the Bible, and it appears as an extended metaphor in Psalm 23. In the culture of ancient Israel, GOD IS MODELED AS A SHEPHERD.
-> **Yahweh is my shepherd**; I will lack nothing. (Psalm 23:1 ULT)
-
+> **Yahweh is my shepherd**; I will lack nothing. (Psalm 23:1 ULT)
+
> He led his own people out **like sheep** and guided them through the wilderness **like a flock**. (Psalm 78:52 ULT)
-
-> **I am the good shepherd**. The good shepherd lays down his life for the sheep. (John 10:11 ULT)
-
+
+> **I am the good shepherd**. The good shepherd lays down his life for the sheep. (John 10:11 ULT)
+
> Then when **the Chief Shepherd** is revealed, you will receive an unfading crown of glory. (1 Peter 5:4 ULT)
-Another cultural model is found in Psalm 24, where the psalmist describes God as if he were a mighty and glorious king coming into a city. In the culture of ancient Israel, GOD IS MODELED AS A KING.
+Another cultural model is found in Psalm 24, where the psalmist describes God as if he were a mighty and glorious king coming into a city. In the culture of ancient Israel, GOD IS MODELED AS A KING.
> Lift up your heads, you gates; be lifted up, everlasting doors, so that the **King of glory** may come in! Who is this **King of glory**? Yahweh, strong and mighty; Yahweh, mighty in battle. (Psalm 24:7-8 ULT)
->
+>
> Someone who breaks open their way for them will go ahead of them. They break through the gate and go out; **their king** will pass on before them. **Yahweh** will be at their head. (Micah 2:8 ULT)
->
+>
> Out of his mouth goes a sharp sword, so that with it he might strike the nations, and he will shepherd them with an iron rod. He tramples in the winepress of the fury of the wrath of **God Almighty**. He has a name written on his robe and on his thigh: “**King of kings and Lord of lords**.” (Revelation 19:15-16 ULT)
This cultural model was very common in ancient Near Eastern cultures, and the ancient Israelites who read the Bible would have understood it easily because their nation was ruled by a king. However, many modern nations are not ruled by kings, so this specific cultural model is not as easily understood in many modern cultures.
diff --git a/translate/bita-animals/01.md b/translate/bita-animals/01.md
index 0831e166..ace2a3ca 100644
--- a/translate/bita-animals/01.md
+++ b/translate/bita-animals/01.md
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-Some common [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md) and [metaphors](../figs-metaphor/01.md) from the Bible involving animals are listed below in alphabetical order. The word in all capital letters identifies an Image that represents an Idea. The specific word of the Image may not appear in every verse that uses the Image, but the text will somehow communicate the concept of the Image.
+Some common [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md) and [metaphors](../figs-metaphor/01.md) from the Bible involving animals are listed below in alphabetical order. The word in all capital letters identifies an Image that represents an Idea. The specific word of the Image may not appear in every verse that uses the Image, but the text will somehow communicate the concept of the Image.
#### An ANIMAL HORN represents strength
-> God is my rock. I take refuge in him.
-> He is my shield, the **horn** of my salvation, my stronghold, and my refuge,
+> God is my rock. I take refuge in him.
+> He is my shield, the **horn** of my salvation, my stronghold, and my refuge,
> the one who saves me from violence. (2 Samuel 22:3 ULT)
The “horn of my salvation” is the strong one who saves me.
@@ -17,23 +17,23 @@ The horn is King David’s military strength.
This is because some birds are easily trapped.
> I have been hunted like a **bird** by those who were my enemies; they hunted me without a reason. (Lamentations 3:52 ULT)
-
-> Save yourself like a gazelle from the hand of the hunter,
+
+> Save yourself like a gazelle from the hand of the hunter,
> like a **bird** from the hand of the fowler. (Proverbs 6:5 ULT)
A fowler is a person who catches birds, and a snare is a small trap.
-> We have escaped like a **bird** out of the snare of the fowlers;
+> We have escaped like a **bird** out of the snare of the fowlers;
> the snare has been broken, and we have escaped. (Psalm 124:7 ULT)
#### BIRDS THAT EAT MEAT represent enemies who attack swiftly
In Habakkuk and Hosea, Israel’s enemies who would come and attack them were compared to an eagle.
-> Their horsemen come from a great distance—they fly like an **eagle** hurrying to eat! (Habakkuk 1:8 ULT)
+> Their horsemen come from a great distance—they fly like an **eagle** hurrying to eat! (Habakkuk 1:8 ULT)
-> An **eagle** is coming over the house of Yahweh.
-> … Israel has rejected what is good,
+> An **eagle** is coming over the house of Yahweh.
+> … Israel has rejected what is good,
> and the enemy will pursue him. (Hosea 8:1, 3 ULT)
In Isaiah, God called a certain foreign king a bird of prey because he would come quickly and attack Israel’s enemies.
@@ -44,22 +44,22 @@ In Isaiah, God called a certain foreign king a bird of prey because he would com
This is because birds spread their wings over their chicks to protect them from danger.
-> Protect me like the apple of your eye; hide me under the shadow of **your wings**
+> Protect me like the apple of your eye; hide me under the shadow of **your wings**
> from the presence of the wicked ones who assault me, my enemies who surround me. (Psalms 17:8-9 ULT)
Here is another example of how the wings represent protection.
-> Be merciful to me, God, be merciful to me,
-> for I take refuge in you until these troubles are over.
+> Be merciful to me, God, be merciful to me,
+> for I take refuge in you until these troubles are over.
> I stay under **your wings** for protection until this destruction is over. (Psalm 57:1 ULT)
#### DANGEROUS ANIMALS represent dangerous people
In Psalms, David referred to his enemies as lions.
-> My life is among **lions**;
-> I am among those who are ready to devour me.
-> I am among people whose teeth are spears and arrows,
+> My life is among **lions**;
+> I am among those who are ready to devour me.
+> I am among people whose teeth are spears and arrows,
> and whose tongues are sharp swords. (Psalm 57:4 ULT)
Peter called the devil a roaring lion.
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ In Matthew, John the Baptist called the religious leaders poisonous snakes becau
#### EAGLES represent strength
-> He satisfies your life with good things
+> He satisfies your life with good things
> so that your youth is renewed like the **eagle**. (Psalm 103:5 ULT)
> For Yahweh says this, “See, the enemy will come flying like an **eagle**, spreading out his wings over Moab.” (Jeremiah 48:40 ULT)
@@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ In Matthew, John the Baptist called the religious leaders poisonous snakes becau
#### SHEEP or a FLOCK OF SHEEP represents people who need to be led or are in danger
> My people have been a lost **flock**. Their shepherds have led them astray in the mountains. (Jeremiah 50:6 ULT)
-
+
> He led his own people out like **sheep** and guided them through the wilderness like a **flock**. (Psalm 78:52 ULT)
-
-> Israel is a **sheep** scattered and driven away by lions. First the king of Assyria devoured him;
+
+> Israel is a **sheep** scattered and driven away by lions. First the king of Assyria devoured him;
> then after this, Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon broke his bones. (Jeremiah 50:17 ULT)
> See, I send you out as **sheep** in the midst of wolves, so be as wise as serpents and harmless as doves. (Matthew 10:16 ULT)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/bita-farming/01.md b/translate/bita-farming/01.md
index 38504d0a..72c1c42b 100644
--- a/translate/bita-farming/01.md
+++ b/translate/bita-farming/01.md
@@ -2,36 +2,36 @@ Some common [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md) and [metaphors](../figs-metapho
#### A FARMER represents God, and the VINEYARD represents his chosen people
-> My well beloved had a **vineyard** on a very fertile hill.
-> He spaded it, removed the stones, and planted it with an excellent kind of vine.
-> He built a tower in the middle of it, and also built a winepress.
+> My well beloved had a **vineyard** on a very fertile hill.
+> He spaded it, removed the stones, and planted it with an excellent kind of vine.
+> He built a tower in the middle of it, and also built a winepress.
> He waited for it to produce grapes, but it only produced wild grapes. (Isaiah 5:1-2)
->
+>
> For the kingdom of heaven is like a landowner who went out early in the morning to hire workers for his **vineyard**. (Matthew 20:1 ULT)
->
+>
> There was a man, a landowner. He planted a **vineyard**, set a hedge about it, dug a winepress in it, built a watchtower, and rented it out to vine growers. Then he went into another country. (Matthew 21:33 ULT)
#### The GROUND represents people’s hearts (inner being)
-> For Yahweh says this to each person in Judah and Jerusalem: ‘Plow your own **ground**, and do not sow among thorns. (Jeremiah 4:3 ULT)
->
+> For Yahweh says this to each person in Judah and Jerusalem: ‘Plow your own **ground**, and do not sow among thorns. (Jeremiah 4:3 ULT)
+>
> When anyone hears the word of the kingdom but does not understand it … This is the seed that was sown **beside the road**. That which was sown on **rocky ground** is the person who hears the word and immediately receives it with joy … That which was sown **among the thorn plants**, this is the person who hears the word, but the cares of the world and the deceitfulness of riches choke the word…That which was sown on the **good soil**, this is the person who hears the word and understands it. (Matthew 13:19-23 ULT)
->
-> Break up your **unplowed ground**,
+>
+> Break up your **unplowed ground**,
> for it is time to seek Yahweh. Hosea 10:12 ULT)
#### SOWING represents actions or attitudes, and REAPING represents judgment or reward
-> According to what I have seen, those who plow iniquity and **sow** trouble **reap** it. (Job 4:8 ULT)
->
-> Do not be deceived. God is not mocked, for whatever a man **plants**, that he will also **gather** in. For he who **plants** seed to his own sinful nature, from the sinful nature **will gathe**r in destruction. But the one who **plants** seed to the Spirit, from the Spirit **will gather** in eternal life. (Galatians 6:7-8 ULT)
+> According to what I have seen, those who plow iniquity and **sow** trouble **reap** it. (Job 4:8 ULT)
+>
+> Do not be deceived. God is not mocked, for whatever a man **plants**, that he will also **gather** in. For he who **plants** seed to his own sinful nature, from the sinful nature **will gathe**r in destruction. But the one who **plants** seed to the Spirit, from the Spirit **will gather** in eternal life. (Galatians 6:7-8 ULT)
#### THRESHING and WINNOWING represent the separation of evil people from good people
-After farmers harvest wheat and other types of grain, they bring them to a **threshing floor**, a flat place with hard ground, and have oxen pull heavy wheeled carts or sleds without wheels over the grain to **thresh** it, to separate the usable grains from the useless chaff. Then they take large forks and **winnow** the threshed grain by throwing it up in the air so the wind can carry off the chaff (waste) while the grains fall back to the threshing floor, where they can be gathered and used for food. (See "thresh" and "winnow" pages in [unfoldingWord® Translation Words](http://ufw.io/tw/) for help translating thresh and winnow.)
+After farmers harvest wheat and other types of grain, they bring them to a **threshing floor**, a flat place with hard ground, and have oxen pull heavy wheeled carts or sleds without wheels over the grain to **thresh** it, to separate the usable grains from the useless chaff. Then they take large forks and **winnow** the threshed grain by throwing it up in the air so the wind can carry off the chaff (waste) while the grains fall back to the threshing floor, where they can be gathered and used for food. (See "thresh" and "winnow" pages in [unfoldingWord® Translation Words](http://ufw.io/tw/) for help translating thresh and winnow.)
> So I will **winnow** them with a pitchfork at the gates of the land. I will bereave them. I will destroy my people since they will not turn from their ways. (Jeremiah 15:7 ULT)
->
+>
> His **winnowing fork** is in his hand to thoroughly clear off his **threshing floor** and to gather the wheat into his storehouse. But he will burn up the chaff with unquenchable fire. (Luke 3:17 ULT)
#### GRAFTING represents God’s allowing the Gentiles to become his people
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ After farmers harvest wheat and other types of grain, they bring them to a **thr
#### RAIN represents God’s gifts to his people
> … he comes and **rains** righteousness on you. (Hosea 10:12b ULT)
->
-> For the land that drinks in the **rain** that often comes on it, and that produces plants useful to those for whom the land was also cultivated, receives a blessing from God. But land that bears thorns and thistles is worthless and is about to be cursed. Its end is to be burned. (Hebrews 6:7-8 ULT)
->
+>
+> For the land that drinks in the **rain** that often comes on it, and that produces plants useful to those for whom the land was also cultivated, receives a blessing from God. But land that bears thorns and thistles is worthless and is about to be cursed. Its end is to be burned. (Hebrews 6:7-8 ULT)
+>
> So be patient, brothers, until the Lord’s coming. See, the farmer awaits the valuable harvest from the ground. He is patiently waiting for it, until it receives the early and late **rains**. (James 5:7 ULT)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/bita-farming/sub-title.md b/translate/bita-farming/sub-title.md
index d3153597..3d9a3e15 100755
--- a/translate/bita-farming/sub-title.md
+++ b/translate/bita-farming/sub-title.md
@@ -1 +1 @@
-What are some examples of images taken from farming that are used as images in the Bible?
\ No newline at end of file
+What are some examples of images taken from farming that are used as images in the Bible?
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/bita-hq/01.md b/translate/bita-hq/01.md
index 9973a833..69240dca 100644
--- a/translate/bita-hq/01.md
+++ b/translate/bita-hq/01.md
@@ -3,14 +3,14 @@ Some common [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md) and [metaphors](../figs-metapho
#### The BODY represents a group of people
> Now you are the **body** of Christ and individually members of it. (1 Corinthians 12:27 ULT)
->
+>
> Instead, speaking the truth in love, let us grow up in all things into him who is the head, even Christ, from whom the whole **body,** being joined and held together by every supporting ligament, according to the working in measure of each individual part, causes the growth of the **body** for building up itself in love.
In these verses, the body of Christ represents the group of people who follow Christ.
#### A BROTHER represents a person’s relatives, associates, or peers
-> For Mordecai the Jew was second to the King Ahasuerus, and great among the Jews, and favored by the multitude of his **brothers **… (Esther 10:3a ULT)
+> For Mordecai the Jew was second to the King Ahasuerus, and great among the Jews, and favored by the multitude of his **brothers **… (Esther 10:3a ULT)
#### A DAUGHTER represents a village located near a town or city
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ In these verses, the body of Christ represents the group of people who follow Ch
#### The FACE represents someone’s presence, sight, knowledge, perception, attention, or judgment
> Then Esther repeated her action, and she spoke before the **face** of the king. (Esther 8:3a ULT)
->
+>
> Why do you hide your **face** and forget our affliction and our oppression? (Psalm 44:24 ULT)
To hide one’s face from someone means to ignore him.
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ To hide one’s face from someone means to ignore him.
If someone seeks another person’s face, he hopes that the person will pay attention to him.
> Do you not fear me—this is Yahweh’s declaration—or tremble before my **face**? (Jeremiah 5:22 ULT)
->
+>
> Every man of the house of Israel who takes his idols into his heart, or who puts the stumbling block of his iniquity before his **face**, and who then comes to a prophet—I, Yahweh, will answer him according to the number of his idols. (Ezekiel 14:4 ULT)
To put something before one’s face is to look at it intently or pay attention to it.
@@ -39,21 +39,21 @@ To put something before one’s face is to look at it intently or pay attention
#### The FACE represents the front of something
> So Hathak went out to Mordecai, to the open place of the city that was before the **face** of the gate of the king. (Esther 4:6 ULT)
->
+>
> She fell before the **face** of his feet and wept and implored favor from him to take away the evil of Haman the Agagite and his plot that he had plotted against the Jews. (Esther 8:3b ULT)
#### The FACE represents the surface of something
> The famine was over all **the face** of the whole land. (Genesis 41:56a ULT)
->
-> He covers **the face** of the moon and spreads his clouds on it. (Job 26:9 ULT)
+>
+> He covers **the face** of the moon and spreads his clouds on it. (Job 26:9 ULT)
#### A FATHER represents someone’s ancestor(s)
#### A SON represents someone’s descendant(s)
-> But they acted presumptuously, they and our **fathers**. And they stiffened their neck and did not listen to your commandments. (Nehemiah 9:16 ULT)
->
+> But they acted presumptuously, they and our **fathers**. And they stiffened their neck and did not listen to your commandments. (Nehemiah 9:16 ULT)
+>
> We have not listened to your servants the prophets who spoke in your name to our kings, our leaders, our **fathers**, and to all the people of the land. To you, Lord, belongs righteousness …" (Daniel 9:6-7a ULT)
#### The HAND represents someone’s power, control, agency, or action
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ To put something before one’s face is to look at it intently or pay attention
#### The HEART represents the action of thinking or feeling
> And Boaz ate and drank, and his **heart** was good, and he went to lie down at the end of the pile of grain. (Ruth 3:7a ULT)
->
+>
> On the seventh day, when the **heart** of the king was pleased by the wine… (Esther 1:10a ULT)
#### The HEART represents someone’s attitude
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ In this context, having a full heart means to be proud or arrogant.
#### The EYES represent sight, knowledge, perception, attention, or judgment
-> For the matter of the queen will go out to all the women, in order to make their husbands despised in their **eyes** … (Esther 1:17a ULT)
+> For the matter of the queen will go out to all the women, in order to make their husbands despised in their **eyes** … (Esther 1:17a ULT)
#### The EYES represent someone’s attitude
@@ -103,8 +103,8 @@ Lowered eyes show that a person is humble.
#### The HEAD represents a ruler, a leader, or a person with authority over others
> A man from each tribe, **a clan head**, must serve with you as his tribe’s leader. (Num 1:4 ULT)
->
-> He put all things under his feet and **gave him as head** over all things to the church, which is his body, the fullness of the one who fills all in all. (Ephesians 1:22-23 ULT)
+>
+> He put all things under his feet and **gave him as head** over all things to the church, which is his body, the fullness of the one who fills all in all. (Ephesians 1:22-23 ULT)
#### A MASTER represents anything that motivates someone to act
@@ -115,20 +115,20 @@ To serve God is to be motivated by God. To serve money is to be motivated by mon
#### The MOUTH means speech or words
> A fool’s **mouth** is his ruin. (Proverbs 18:7 ULT)
->
-> I would strengthen you with my mouth. (Job 16:5 ULT)
+>
+> I would strengthen you with my mouth. (Job 16:5 ULT)
In these examples the mouth refers to what a person says.
#### A NAME represents the person who has that name
> May your God make **the name of Solomon** better than your name, and make his throne greater than your throne.” (1 Kings 1:47 ULT)
->
+>
> See, I have sworn **by my great name**—says Yahweh. **My name** will no longer be called upon by the mouths of any of the men of Judah in all the land of Egypt.” (Jeremiah 44:26 ULT)
If someone’s name is great, it means that he is great.
-> Please let your ear be attentive to the prayer of your servant and to the prayer of your servants, the ones who delight to **fear your name**. (Nehemiah 1:11 ULT)
+> Please let your ear be attentive to the prayer of your servant and to the prayer of your servants, the ones who delight to **fear your name**. (Nehemiah 1:11 ULT)
To fear someone’s name is to honor him.
@@ -138,11 +138,11 @@ To fear someone’s name is to honor him.
To profane God’s name is to profane his reputation, that is, to profane how people think about him.
-> For I will make **my great name** holy, which you have profaned among the nations … (Ezekiel 36:23 ULT)
+> For I will make **my great name** holy, which you have profaned among the nations … (Ezekiel 36:23 ULT)
To make God’s name holy is to cause people to see that God is holy.
-> Your servants have come from a very distant country, because of **the name** of Yahweh your God, for we have heard a report about him and about everything that he did in Egypt. (Joshua 9:9 ULT)
+> Your servants have come from a very distant country, because of **the name** of Yahweh your God, for we have heard a report about him and about everything that he did in Egypt. (Joshua 9:9 ULT)
The fact that the men said they heard a report about Yahweh shows that “because of the name of Yahweh” means because of Yahweh’s reputation.
@@ -153,12 +153,12 @@ The fact that the men said they heard a report about Yahweh shows that “becaus
#### The NOSE represents anger
> Then … the foundations of the world were laid bare at your rebuke, Yahweh, at the blast of the breath of **your nostrils**. (Psalms 18:15 ULT)
->
+>
> By the blast of **your nostrils** the waters were piled up. (Exodus 15:8a ULT)
->
+>
> Smoke went up from out of **his nostrils**, and blazing fire came out of his mouth. (2 Samuel 22:9a ULT)
->
-> Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious, **slow to anger **… (Exodus 34:6a ULT)
+>
+> Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious, **slow to anger **… (Exodus 34:6a ULT)
In Hebrew, a hot nose represents anger, including such images as a blast of air or smoke coming from someone’s nostrils. The opposite of a “hot nose” is a “long nose.” The phrase “slow to anger” in Hebrew literally means “long of nose.” A long nose represents patience, meaning that it takes a long time for that person’s nose to get hot.
@@ -168,16 +168,16 @@ In Hebrew, a hot nose represents anger, including such images as a blast of air
#### The SON OF SOMETHING represents something shares the qualities of another thing
-> No **son of wickedness** will oppress him. (Psalm 89:22b ULT)
+> No **son of wickedness** will oppress him. (Psalm 89:22b ULT)
A son of wickedness is a wicked person.
-> May the groans of the prisoners come before you;
+> May the groans of the prisoners come before you;
> with the greatness of your power keep the **children of death** alive. (Psalm 79:11 ULT)
Children of death here are people that others plan to kill.
-> We all also once lived among these, in the evil desires of our flesh, fulfilling the desires of the body and of the mind. We were by nature **children of wrath**, as also the rest. (Ephesians 2:3 ULT)
+> We all also once lived among these, in the evil desires of our flesh, fulfilling the desires of the body and of the mind. We were by nature **children of wrath**, as also the rest. (Ephesians 2:3 ULT)
Children of wrath here are people with whom God is very angry.
diff --git a/translate/bita-humanbehavior/01.md b/translate/bita-humanbehavior/01.md
index f9adb3b7..139e9f9f 100644
--- a/translate/bita-humanbehavior/01.md
+++ b/translate/bita-humanbehavior/01.md
@@ -6,12 +6,12 @@ Some common [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md) and [metaphors](../figs-metapho
#### Having BIRTH PAINS mean suffering that is necessary to achieve a new condition
-> **Be in pain and labor to give birth**, daughter of Zion, like a **woman in labor**.
-> For now you will go out of the city, live in the field, and go to Babylon.
-> There you will be rescued. There Yahweh will rescue you from the hand of your enemies. (Micah 4:10 ULT)
->
+> **Be in pain and labor to give birth**, daughter of Zion, like a **woman in labor**.
+> For now you will go out of the city, live in the field, and go to Babylon.
+> There you will be rescued. There Yahweh will rescue you from the hand of your enemies. (Micah 4:10 ULT)
+>
> For nation will rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom. There will be famines and earthquakes in various places. But all these things are only the beginning of **birth pains**. (Matthew 24:7-8 ULT)
->
+>
> My little children, again I am in the **pains of childbirth** for you until Christ is formed in you.(Galatians 4:19 ULT)
#### Being CALLED SOMETHING means being that thing
@@ -24,34 +24,34 @@ This is because he actually is the God of the whole earth.
This is because he actually is discerning.
-> He will … **be called** the Son of the Most High. (Luke 1:32a ULT)
+> He will … **be called** the Son of the Most High. (Luke 1:32a ULT)
This is because he actually is the Son of the Most High.
-> Therefore, the holy one who will be borne will **be called** the Son of God. (Luke 1:35b ULT)
+> Therefore, the holy one who will be borne will **be called** the Son of God. (Luke 1:35b ULT)
This is because he actually is the Son of God.
-> Every male who opens the womb will **be called** dedicated to the Lord. (Luke 2:23b ULT)
+> Every male who opens the womb will **be called** dedicated to the Lord. (Luke 2:23b ULT)
This is because he actually will be dedicated to the Lord.
#### Being CLEAN means being acceptable for God’s purposes
> Noah built an altar to Yahweh. He took some of the **clean** animals and some of the **clean** birds, and offered burnt offerings on the altar. Yahweh smelled the pleasing aroma. (Genesis 8:20 ULT)
->
+>
> The priest will examine him again on the seventh day to see if the disease is better and has not spread farther in the skin. If it has not, then the priest will pronounce him **clean**. It is a rash. He must wash his clothes, and then he is **clean**. (Leviticus 13:6 ULT)
#### CLEANSING or PURIFYING means making something acceptable for God’s purposes
> He must go out to the altar that is before Yahweh and make atonement for it, and he must take some of the bull’s blood and some of the goat’s blood and put it on the horns of the altar all around. He must sprinkle some of the blood on it with his finger seven times to **cleanse** it and dedicate it to Yahweh, away from the **unclean** actions of the people of Israel. (Leviticus 16:18-19 ULT)
->
+>
> This is because on this day atonement will be made for you, to **cleanse** you from all your sins so you will be **clean** before Yahweh. (Leviticus 16:30 ULT)
#### COMING or STANDING BEFORE SOMEONE means serving him
-> How blessed are your wives, and how blessed are your servants who constantly **stand before you**, because they hear your wisdom. (1 Kings 10:8 ULT)
->
+> How blessed are your wives, and how blessed are your servants who constantly **stand before you**, because they hear your wisdom. (1 Kings 10:8 ULT)
+>
> Covenant faithfulness and trustworthiness **come before you**. (Psalm 89:14b ULT)
Covenant faithfulness and trustworthiness are also personified here. (See [Personification](../figs-personification/01.md).)
@@ -59,9 +59,9 @@ Covenant faithfulness and trustworthiness are also personified here. (See [Perso
#### Being CUT OFF means being killed
> So you must keep the Sabbath, for it must be treated by you as holy, reserved for him. Everyone who defiles it must surely **be put to death**. Whoever works on the Sabbath, that person must surely **be cut off from his people**. (Exodus 31:14 ULT)
->
+>
> Whoever does not humble himself on that day must be **cut off from his people**. Whoever does any work on that day, **I, Yahweh, will destroy him** from among his people. (Leviticus 23:29-30 ULT)
->
+>
> But he was **cut off** from the land of the living … (Isaiah 53:8b ULT)
#### Being CUT OFF from something means being sepa rated from it
@@ -72,55 +72,55 @@ Covenant faithfulness and trustworthiness are also personified here. (See [Perso
Too much wine makes a person weak so that he staggers. So too, when God judges people, they become weak and stagger. So the idea of wine is used to represent God’s judgment.
-> You have made your people see difficult things; you have made us **drink the wine of staggering**. (Psalm 60:3 ULT)
->
-> But God is the judge;
-> he brings down and he lifts up.
-> For Yahweh holds in his hand a cup of **foaming wine**,
-> which is mixed with spices, and pours it out.
+> You have made your people see difficult things; you have made us **drink the wine of staggering**. (Psalm 60:3 ULT)
+>
+> But God is the judge;
+> he brings down and he lifts up.
+> For Yahweh holds in his hand a cup of **foaming wine**,
+> which is mixed with spices, and pours it out.
> Surely all the wicked of the earth will **drink it** to the last drop. (Psalm 75:7-8 ULT)
->
+>
> He also will drink from the **wine** of the wrath of God, the **wine** that has been poured undiluted into the cup of his anger. (Revelation 14:10a ULT)
#### EATING UP means defeating, destroying, or harming
-> God brings him out of Egypt.
-> with strength like a wild ox.
-> **He will eat up the nations who fight against him**.
-> He will break their bones to pieces.
+> God brings him out of Egypt.
+> with strength like a wild ox.
+> **He will eat up the nations who fight against him**.
+> He will break their bones to pieces.
> He will shoot them with his arrows. (Numbers 24:8 ULT)
Another word for “eat up” is devour.
-> Therefore as **the tongue of fire devours stubble**, and as the dry grass goes down in flame, so their root will rot, and their blossom will blow away like dust. (Isaiah 5:24 ULT)
->
-> Therefore Yahweh will raise up against him Rezin, his adversary, and will stir up his enemies, the Arameans on the east, and the Philistines on the west.
+> Therefore as **the tongue of fire devours stubble**, and as the dry grass goes down in flame, so their root will rot, and their blossom will blow away like dust. (Isaiah 5:24 ULT)
+>
+> Therefore Yahweh will raise up against him Rezin, his adversary, and will stir up his enemies, the Arameans on the east, and the Philistines on the west.
> **They will devour Israel with open mouth**. (Isaiah 9:11-12 ULT)
->
-> I will make my arrows drunk with blood, and **my sword will devour flesh** with the blood of the killed and the captives, and from the heads of the leaders of the enemy. (Deuteronomy 32:42 ULT)
+>
+> I will make my arrows drunk with blood, and **my sword will devour flesh** with the blood of the killed and the captives, and from the heads of the leaders of the enemy. (Deuteronomy 32:42 ULT)
#### FALLING UPON or BEING UPON means affecting
> Yahweh God caused a deep sleep to **fall upon** the man, so the man slept. (Genesis 2:21a ULT)
->
-> Will not his majesty terrify you, and the dread of him fall upon you? (Job 13:11 ULT)
->
+>
+> Will not his majesty terrify you, and the dread of him fall upon you? (Job 13:11 ULT)
+>
> Then the Spirit of Yahweh **fell on me** and he said for me to say … (Exekiel 11:5a ULT)
->
+>
> Now look, the hand of the Lord **is upon you**, and you will become blind. (Acts 13:11a ULT)
#### FOLLOWING SOMEONE means being loyal to him
> Thus they forsook Yahweh, the God of their fathers, the one who brought them out of the land of Egypt. **They went after** other gods from the gods of the people groups who were around them, and they bowed down to them. They provoked Yahweh to anger. They forsook Yahweh and they served the Baal and the Ashtoreths. (Judges 2:12-13 ULT)
->
+>
> For Solomon **followed** Ashtoreth, the goddess of the Sidonians, and **he followed** Milcom, the disgusting idol of the Ammonites. (1 Kings 11:5 ULT)
->
+>
> Not one of them who despised me will see it, except for my servant Caleb, because he had another spirit. **He has followed me fully**; I will bring him into the land which he went to examine. His descendants will possess it. (Numbers 14:23-24 ULT)
#### GOING BEFORE, ACCOMPANYING, or FOLLOWING A KING WITH HIS OTHER ATTENDANTS means serving him
> See, his reward is **with him**, and his recompense is **going before him**. (Isaiah 62:11b ULT)
->
+>
> Righteousness will **go before him** and make a way for his footsteps. (Psalm 85:13 ULT)
#### INHERITING means permanently possessing something
@@ -146,8 +146,8 @@ The mountain where God will be worshiped is viewed as his permanent possession.
Moses asks God to still accept the people of Israel as his special possession, that is, as the people permanently belonging to him.
> …the richness of the glory of his **inheritance** in the saints … (Ephesians 1:18b ULT) The wonderful things that God will give all who are set apart for him are viewed as their permanent possessions.
->
-> For the promise to Abraham and to his descendants that he would be **heir** of the world did not come through the law but through the righteousness of faith. (Romans 4:13 ULT)
+>
+> For the promise to Abraham and to his descendants that he would be **heir** of the world did not come through the law but through the righteousness of faith. (Romans 4:13 ULT)
The promise was that Abraham and his descendants would permanently possess the entire world.
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ The promise was that Abraham and his descendants would permanently possess the e
God’s Son will receive all things as a permanent possession.
-> By faith Noah … condemned the world and became an heir of the righteousness that is according to faith. (Hebrews 11:7 ULT)
+> By faith Noah … condemned the world and became an heir of the righteousness that is according to faith. (Hebrews 11:7 ULT)
Noah received righteousness as a permanent possession.
@@ -166,39 +166,39 @@ Noah received righteousness as a permanent possession.
#### LYING DOWN or SLEEPING means dying or being dead
> When your days are fulfilled and you **lie down with your fathers**, I will raise up a descendant after you, (2 Samuel 7:12a ULT)
->
+>
> ‘Are you really more beautiful than anyone else? Go down and **lie down** with the uncircumcised.’ They will fall among those who were killed by the sword. The sword has been drawn! She has been given to the sword; they will seize her and her multitudes. (Ezekiel 32:19-20 ULT)
#### REIGNING or RULING means controlling
> This happened so that, as sin **ruled** in death, even so grace might **rule** through righteousness for everlasting life through Jesus Christ our Lord. (Romans 5:21 ULT)
->
+>
> Therefore do not let sin **rule** in your mortal body in order that you obey its lusts. (Romans 6:12 ULT)
#### RESTING or a RESTING PLACE means a safe and beneficial situation
-> Then Naomi, her mother-in-law, said to her, “My daughter, should I not seek a **resting place** for you, that will be good for you? (Ruth 3:1 ULT)
->
+> Then Naomi, her mother-in-law, said to her, “My daughter, should I not seek a **resting place** for you, that will be good for you? (Ruth 3:1 ULT)
+>
> Therefore I vowed in my anger that they would never enter into my **resting place**. (Psalm 95:11 ULT)
->
+>
> This is my **resting place** forever. I will live here, for I desire her \[Zion\]. (Psalm 132:14 ULT)
->
+>
> The nations will seek him out, and his **resting place** will be glorious. (Isaiah 11:10b ULT)
#### RISING or STANDING UP means doing or taking action
> **Rise up** for our help and redeem us for the sake of your covenant faithfulness. (Psalm 44:26 ULT)
->
+>
> **Get up**, go to Nineveh, the great city, and call out against it, because their wickedness has risen up before my face. (Jonah 1:2 ULT)
#### SEEING means knowledge, perception, notice, attention, or judgment
> Why have I found favor **in your eyes** that you should take notice of me…(Ruth 2:10b ULT)
->
+>
> And the young woman was pleasing **in his eyes**, and she lifted kindness before his face. (Esther 2:9a ULT)
->
+>
> The **eyes** of Yahweh are everywhere, **keeping watch** over the evil and the good. (Proverbs 15:3 ULT)
->
+>
> But Haman remained in order to seek for his life from Esther the queen, for he **saw** that evil was determined against him by the king. (Esther 7:7b ULT)
#### SEEKING means pleading or begging
@@ -218,13 +218,13 @@ Noah received righteousness as a permanent possession.
#### SITTING means reigning, ruling, or judging
> A throne will be established in covenant faithfulness, and one from David’s tent will faithfully **sit** there. (Isaiah 16:5a ULT)
->
+>
> … in those days, as the king Ahasuerus **sat** on his royal throne, which was in Susa the citadel: (Esther 1:2 ULT)
#### STANDING means defending or successfully resisting
> So the wicked will not **stand** in the judgment, nor sinners in the assembly of the righteous. (Psalm 1:5 ULT)
->
+>
> that the king gave to the Jews who were in every city by city: to gather and to **stand** for their life, to annihilate, and to slaughter, and to destroy any strength of a people or province that would attack them, children and women, and plunder their spoil; (Esther 8:11 ULT)
#### TURNING or TURNING OVER means changing
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Noah received righteousness as a permanent possession.
#### Being UNCLEAN means not being acceptable for God’s purposes
> You may eat any animal that has a split hoof and that also chews the cud. However, some animals either chew the cud or have a split hoof, and **you must not eat them**, animals such as the camel, because it chews the cud but does not have a split hoof. So the camel is **unclean** for you. (Leviticus 11:3-4 ULT)
->
+>
> And if any of them dies and falls on anything, that thing will be **unclean**, whether it is made of wood, cloth, leather, or sackcloth. Whatever it is and whatever it is used for, it must be put into water; it will be **unclean** until evening. Then it will be **clean**. (Leviticus 11:32 ULT)
#### WALKING means behaving
@@ -242,9 +242,9 @@ Noah received righteousness as a permanent possession.
#### a PATH or a WAY means a person’s behavior
> Blessed is the man who does not **walk** in the advice of the wicked. (Psalm 1:1a ULT)
->
+>
> For Yahweh approves of the **way** of the righteous. (Psalm 1:6a ULT)
->
+>
> Turn from me the **path** of deceit. (Psalm 119:29a ULT)
->
+>
> I will run in the **path** of your commandments. (Psalm 119:32a ULT)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/bita-manmade/01.md b/translate/bita-manmade/01.md
index 972cab06..e651468c 100644
--- a/translate/bita-manmade/01.md
+++ b/translate/bita-manmade/01.md
@@ -11,19 +11,19 @@ Some common [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md) and [metaphors](../figs-metapho
#### CLOTHING represents moral or emotional qualities (attitudes, spirit, life)
> It is God who puts strength on me like a **belt**. (Psalm 18:32a ULT)
->
+>
> Righteousness will be the **belt of his waist**, and faithfulness the **belt around his hips**. (Isaiah 11:5 ULT)
->
+>
> May my adversaries be **clothed with shame**; may they **wear their shame like a robe**. (Psalm 109:29 ULT)
->
+>
> I will **clothe his enemies with shame**. (Psalm 132:18a ULT)
#### A HOUSE represents a family or household (that is, the people who live and work at a family house or property)
> Now Yahweh said to Abram, “Go from your country, and from your relatives, and from your father’s **household**, to the land that I will show you. (Genesis 12:1 ULT)
->
+>
> On that day, the king Ahasuerus gave to Esther the queen the **house** of Haman, the adversary of the Jews. (Esther 8:1a ULT)
->
+>
> They said, “Believe in the Lord Jesus, and you will be saved, you and your **household**.” They spoke the word of the Lord to him, together with everyone in his house. Then he took them at that same hour of the night, and washed them from the blows, and he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his. (Acts 16:31-33 ULT)
In the original languages (Hebrew and Greek), the words translated here as “household” literally mean “house.” The word “house” is a metonym for the people who live in the house. This is a very common metonym in the Bible.
@@ -47,15 +47,15 @@ Here “house” represents a people group, the people of Israel.
#### A SNARE (that is, a SMALL TRAP for birds worked by cords) represents death
> For he will rescue you from the **snare** of the hunter. (Psalm 91:3a ULT)
->
+>
> The **cords of death** surrounded me, and the **snares** of sheol confronted me. (Psalm 116:3a ULT)
->
+>
> The **cords of the wicked** have **ensnared** me. (Psalm 119:61a ULT)
->
+>
> The wicked have **set a snare** for me. (Psalm 119:110a ULT)
->
+>
> The wicked is **ensnared** by his own actions. (Psalm 9:16b ULT)
->
+>
> They mingled with the nations and learned their ways and worshiped their idols, which became **a snare** to them. (Psalm 106:35-36 ULT)
In this case the snare was a persuasion to do evil, which leads to death.
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ In this case the snare was a persuasion to do evil, which leads to death.
#### A TENT represents a house, home, people in one’s home, descendants
> God will likewise destroy you forever; he will take you up and pluck you out of your **tent**. (Psalm 52:5a ULT)
->
+>
> The house of the wicked will be destroyed, but the **tent** of the upright will flourish. (Proverbs 14:11 ULT)
->
+>
> A throne will be established in covenant faithfulness, and one from David’s **tent** will faithfully sit there. (Isaiah 16:5a ULT)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/bita-part1/01.md b/translate/bita-part1/01.md
index 4eb4e2a6..7c06fc8a 100644
--- a/translate/bita-part1/01.md
+++ b/translate/bita-part1/01.md
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ These patterns present three challenges to anyone who wants to identify them:
In 1 Kings 7:50, a lamp trimmer is a tool for trimming the wick on an ordinary lamp. In 2 Samuel 21:17 the lamp of Israel represents King David’s life. When his men were concerned that he might “put out the lamp of Israel” they were concerned that he might be killed.
-> Solomon also had made the cups, lamp trimmers, basins, spoons, and incense burners, all of which were made of pure gold. (1 Kings 7:50a ULT)
+> Solomon also had made the cups, lamp trimmers, basins, spoons, and incense burners, all of which were made of pure gold. (1 Kings 7:50a ULT)
> Ishbibenob…intended to kill David. But Abishai the son of Zeruiah rescued David, attacked the Philistine, and killed him. Then the men of David swore to him, saying, “You must not go to battle anymore with us, so that you do not put out the **lamp** of Israel.” (2 Samuel 21:16-17 ULT)
diff --git a/translate/bita-part2/01.md b/translate/bita-part2/01.md
index cdfeda94..9c47ba09 100644
--- a/translate/bita-part2/01.md
+++ b/translate/bita-part2/01.md
@@ -13,35 +13,35 @@ People do not drink cups. They drink what is in the cup.
#### A LOCATION (city, nation, etc.) represents the people who live in or near that place
> Then Mordecai went out from before the face of the king in a garment of royalty of blue and white, with a great crown of gold and a robe of fine linen and purple, and **the city of Susa** cheered and rejoiced. (Esther 8:15 ULT)
->
-> So as for me, should I not feel troubled about **Nineveh, the great city **… (Jonah 4:11a ULT)
+>
+> So as for me, should I not feel troubled about **Nineveh, the great city **… (Jonah 4:11a ULT)
#### The MEMORY OF A PERSON means \[his descendants\]
The memory of a person represents his descendants, because they are the ones who should remember and honor him. When the Bible says that someone’s memory dies, it means that either he will not have any descendants, or his descendants will all die.
-> You have rebuked the nations;
-> you have destroyed the wicked;
-> you have blotted out **their memory** forever.
-> The enemy crumbled like ruins
-> when you overthrew their cities.
+> You have rebuked the nations;
+> you have destroyed the wicked;
+> you have blotted out **their memory** forever.
+> The enemy crumbled like ruins
+> when you overthrew their cities.
> All **remembrance of them** has perished. (Psalm 9:5-6 ULT)
->
+>
> **His memory** will perish from the earth. (Job 18:17a ULT)
->
-> The face of Yahweh is against those who do evil, to cut off **the memory of them** from the earth. (Psalm 34:16 ULT)
+>
+> The face of Yahweh is against those who do evil, to cut off **the memory of them** from the earth. (Psalm 34:16 ULT)
#### ONE PERSON means \[a group of people\]
-> For **the wicked person** boasts of his deepest desires;
+> For **the wicked person** boasts of his deepest desires;
> he blesses the greedy and insults Yahweh. (Psalm 10:3 ULT)
This does not refer to a particular wicked person, but to wicked people in general.
#### A PERSON’S NAME means \[his descendants\]
-> **Gad**—raiders will attack him, but he will attack them at their heels.
-> **Asher’s** food will be rich, and he will provide royal delicacies.
+> **Gad**—raiders will attack him, but he will attack them at their heels.
+> **Asher’s** food will be rich, and he will provide royal delicacies.
> **Naphtali** is a doe let loose; he will have beautiful fawns. (Genesis 49:19-21 ULT)
The names Gad, Asher, and Naphtali refer not only to those men, but to their descendants.
diff --git a/translate/bita-part3/01.md b/translate/bita-part3/01.md
index f267811a..a8a08ddd 100644
--- a/translate/bita-part3/01.md
+++ b/translate/bita-part3/01.md
@@ -7,45 +7,45 @@ Some common cultural models found in the Bible are listed below. First there are
#### God is modeled as a KING
> For God is the **King** over all the earth. (Psalm 47:7a ULT)
->
-> For the **kingdom** is Yahweh’s;
+>
+> For the **kingdom** is Yahweh’s;
> he is the **ruler** over the nations. (Psalm 22:28 ULT)
->
-> Your **throne**, God, is forever and ever;
+>
+> Your **throne**, God, is forever and ever;
> a **scepter** of justice is the scepter of your **kingdom**. (Psalm 45:6 ULT)
->
-> This is what Yahweh says,
+>
+> This is what Yahweh says,
> “Heaven is my **throne**, and the earth is my **footstool**. (Isaiah 66:1a ULT)
->
-> God **reigns** over the nations;
-> God sits on his holy **throne**.
-> The **princes** of the peoples have gathered together
-> to the people of the God of Abraham;
-> for the **shields** of the earth belong to God;
+>
+> God **reigns** over the nations;
+> God sits on his holy **throne**.
+> The **princes** of the peoples have gathered together
+> to the people of the God of Abraham;
+> for the **shields** of the earth belong to God;
> he is greatly \*\*exalted\*\*. (Psalm 47:8-9 ULT)
#### God is modeled as a WARRIOR
> Yahweh is a **warrior**. (Exodus 15:3a ULT)
->
-> Yahweh will go out as a **warrior**; as a \*\*man of war\*\* he will stir up his zeal..
+>
+> Yahweh will go out as a **warrior**; as a \*\*man of war\*\* he will stir up his zeal..
> He will shout, yes, he will roar his **battle cries**; he will **show his enemies his power**. (Isaiah 42:13 ULT)
->
-> Your right hand, Yahweh, is **glorious in power**;
+>
+> Your right hand, Yahweh, is **glorious in power**;
> your right hand, Yahweh, **has shattered the enemy**. (Exodus 15:6 ULT)
->
-> But **God will shoot them**;
+>
+> But **God will shoot them**;
> suddenly they will be **wounded with his arrows**. (Psalm 64:7 ULT)
->
+>
> For you will turn them back; **you will draw your bow** before them. (Psalm 21:12 ULT)
#### A leader is modeled as a SHEPHERD and those he leads are modeled as SHEEP
> Then all the tribes of Israel came to David at Hebron and said, “Look…when Saul was king over us, it was you who led the Israelite army. Yahweh said to you, ‘You will **shepherd** my people Israel, and you will become ruler over Israel.’“ (2 Samuel 5:1-2 ULT)
->
+>
> “Woe to the **shepherds** who destroy and scatter the **sheep** of my **pasture**—this is Yahweh’s declaration.” (Jeremiah 23:1 ULT)
->
-> Guard yourselves and all the **flock** of which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers. Be careful to **shepherd** the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood. I know that after my departure, vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the **flock**. Even among you yourselves, men will come speaking perverse things which draw away the disciples after them. (Acts 20:28-30 ULT)
+>
+> Guard yourselves and all the **flock** of which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers. Be careful to **shepherd** the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood. I know that after my departure, vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the **flock**. Even among you yourselves, men will come speaking perverse things which draw away the disciples after them. (Acts 20:28-30 ULT)
#### Life is modeled as BLOOD
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ In this model, the blood of a person or an animal represents its life.
If blood is spilled or shed, someone has been killed.
> Whoever **sheds man’s blood**, by man will his **blood be shed**. (Genesis 9:6a ULT)
->
+>
> In this way, this person would not die by the hand of the one who wanted to avenge **the blood that was shed**, until the accused person would first stand before the assembly. (Joshua 20:9b ULT)
If blood cries out, nature itself is crying out for vengeance on a person who killed someone. (This also includes personification, because the blood is pictured as someone that can cry out. See: [Personification](../figs-personification/01.md))
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ If blood cries out, nature itself is crying out for vengeance on a person who ki
Psalm 110 pictures the sun as being in the womb before it comes out in the morning.
-> From **the womb** of the dawn your youth will be to you like the dew. (Psalm 110:3b ULT)
+> From **the womb** of the dawn your youth will be to you like the dew. (Psalm 110:3b ULT)
#### Things that can move fast are modeled as having WINGS
@@ -86,15 +86,15 @@ This is especially true of things that move in the air or the sky.
The sun is modeled as a disc with wings which allow it to “fly” through the air from east to west during the daytime. In Psalm 139, “the wings of the morning” refers to the sun. In Malachi 4 God called himself the “sun of righteousness” and he spoke of the sun as having wings.
> If I fly away on **the wings of the morning** and go to live in the uttermost parts across the sea … (Psalm 139:9 ULT)
-
+
> But for you who fear my name, the sun of righteousness will rise with healing **in its wings**. (Malachi 4:2 ULT)
The wind moves quickly and is modeled as having wings.
> He was seen on the **wings of the wind**. (2 Sam. 22:11b ULT)
-
+
> He rode on a cherub and flew; he glided on the **wings of the wind**. (Psalm 18:10 ULT)
-
+
> you walk on the **wings of the wind** (Psalm 104:3 ULT)
#### Futility is modeled as something that the WIND can blow away
@@ -103,23 +103,23 @@ In this model, the wind blows away things that are worthless, and they are gone.
Psalm 1 and Job 27 show that wicked people are worthless and will not live long.
-> The wicked are not so,
+> The wicked are not so,
> but are instead **like the chaff that the wind drives away**. (Psalm 1:4 ULT)
-
-> **The east wind carries him away**, and he leaves;
+
+> **The east wind carries him away**, and he leaves;
> **it sweeps him out of his place**. (Job 27:21 ULT)
The writer of Ecclesiastes says that everything is worthless.
-> "**Like a vapor of mist**,
-> **like a breeze in the wind**,
-> everything vanishes, leaving many questions.
+> "**Like a vapor of mist**,
+> **like a breeze in the wind**,
+> everything vanishes, leaving many questions.
> What profit does mankind gain from all the work that they labor at under the sun?" (Ecclesiastes 1:2-3 ULT)
In Job 30:15, Job complains that his honor and prosperity are gone.
-> Terrors are turned upon me;
-> my honor is **driven away as if by the wind**;
+> Terrors are turned upon me;
+> my honor is **driven away as if by the wind**;
> my prosperity **passes away as a cloud**. (Job 30:15 ULT)
#### Human warfare is modeled as DIVINE WARFARE
@@ -127,9 +127,9 @@ In Job 30:15, Job complains that his honor and prosperity are gone.
When there was a war between nations, people believed that the gods of those nations were also at war.
> This happened while the Egyptians were burying all their firstborn, those whom Yahweh had killed among them, for **he also inflicted punishment on their gods**. (Numbers 33:4 ULT)
-
+
> And what nation is like your people Israel, the one nation on earth whom you, God, went and rescued for yourself? … You drove out nations **and their gods** from before your people, whom you rescued from Egypt. (2 Samuel 7:23 ULT)
-
+
> The servants of the king of Aram said to him, “**Their god is a god of the hills. That is why they were stronger than we were**. But now let us fight against them in the plain, and surely there we will be stronger than they are.” (1 Kings 20:23 ULT)
#### Constraints in life are modeled as PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES
@@ -137,28 +137,28 @@ When there was a war between nations, people believed that the gods of those nat
The verses below are not about real physical boundaries but about difficulties or the lack of difficulties in life.
> He has built **a wall** around me, and I cannot escape. He has made my shackles heavy. (Lamentations 3:7 ULT)
-
+
> He blocked my path with **a wall of hewn stone**; he made my paths crooked. (Lamentations 3:9 ULT)
-
+
> **Measuring lines** have been laid for me in pleasant places. (Psalm 16:6a ULT)
#### Dangerous places are modeled as NARROW PLACES
In Psalm 4 David asks God to rescue him.
-> Answer me when I call, God of my righteousness;
-> give me room **when I am hemmed in**.
+> Answer me when I call, God of my righteousness;
+> give me room **when I am hemmed in**.
> Have mercy on me and listen to my prayer. (Psalm 4:1 ULT)
#### A distressing situation is modeled as a WILDERNESS
When Job was distressed because of all the sad things that happened to him, he spoke as if he were in a wilderness. Jackals and ostriches are animals that live in the wilderness.
-> My heart is troubled and does not rest;
-> days of affliction have come on me.
-> I have gone about like one who was living in the dark, but not because of the sun;
-> I stand up in the assembly and cry for help.
-> I am **a brother to jackals**,
+> My heart is troubled and does not rest;
+> days of affliction have come on me.
+> I have gone about like one who was living in the dark, but not because of the sun;
+> I stand up in the assembly and cry for help.
+> I am **a brother to jackals**,
> **a companion of ostriches**. (Job 30:27-29 ULT)
#### Wellbeing is modeled as PHYSICAL CLEANLINESS, and evil is modeled as PHYSICAL DIRTINESS
diff --git a/translate/bita-phenom/01.md b/translate/bita-phenom/01.md
index 249fee83..1c17b53f 100644
--- a/translate/bita-phenom/01.md
+++ b/translate/bita-phenom/01.md
@@ -3,37 +3,37 @@ Some common [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md) and [metaphors](../figs-metapho
#### LIGHT represents moral righteousness, DARKNESS represents moral wickedness
> Woe to those **who call evil good, and good evil**; **who represent darkness as light, and light as darkness**; who represent bitter as sweet, and sweet as bitter! (Isaiah 5:20 ULT)
->
+>
> But if your eye is **bad**, your whole body is **full of darkness**. Therefore, if the light that is in you is actually **darkness**, how great is that **darkness**! (Matthew 6:23 ULT)
#### LIGHT or SWEETNESS represents pleasant feelings, DARKNESS or BITTERNESS represents unpleasant feelings
> Truly the **light is sweet**, and it is a **pleasant thing** for the eyes to see the sun. (Ecclesiastes 11:7 ULT)
->
+>
> I am a man who has seen **misery** under the rod of Yahweh’s fury. He drove me away and caused me to walk in **darkness** rather than light. (Lamentations 3:1-2 ULT)
#### LIGHT represents wisdom, DARKNESS represents foolishness
> Then I began to understand that **wisdom has advantages over folly**, just as **light is better than darkness**. (Ecclesiastes 2:13 ULT)
->
+>
> They are **darkened in their understanding**, being alienated from the life of God because of the **ignorance** that is in them, because of the **hardness of their hearts**. (Ephesians 4:18 ULT)
->
+>
> For with you is the fountain of life; **in your light we will see light**. (Psalm 36:9 ULT)
#### LIGHT or FIRE represents life
> They say, ‘Give into our hand the man who struck his brother, so that we may put him to death, to pay for the life of his brother whom he killed.’ And so they would also destroy the heir. Thus they will put out the **burning coal** that I have left, and they will leave for my husband neither name nor descendant on the surface of the earth. (2 Samuel 14:7b ULT)
->
+>
> "You must not go to battle anymore with us, so that you do not put out the **lamp of Israel**." (2 Samuel 21:17b ULT)
->
+>
> I will give one tribe to Solomon’s son, so that David my servant may always have **a lamp** before me in Jerusalem. (1 Kings 11:36a ULT)
->
+>
> Nevertheless for David’s sake, Yahweh his God gave him **a lamp** in Jerusalem by raising up his son after him in order to strengthen Jerusalem. (1 Kings 15:4 ULT)
->
+>
> Indeed, **the light** of the wicked person will be put out; **the spark of his fire** will not shine. **The light** will be dark in his tent; **his lamp** above him will be put out. (Job 18:5-6 ULT)
->
+>
> For you give **light to my lamp**; Yahweh my God **lights up my darkness**. (Psalm 18:28 ULT)
->
+>
> A **dimly burning wick** he will not quench. (Isaiah 42:3b ULT)
#### DARKNESS or SHADOW represents death
@@ -43,87 +43,87 @@ Some common [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md) and [metaphors](../figs-metapho
#### LIGHT OF THE FACE represents smiling (that is, an attitude of grace or favor)
> Yahweh, lift up the **light of your face** on us. (Psalm 4:6b ULT)
->
-> For they did not obtain the land for their possession by their own sword,
-> neither did their own arm save them;
-> but your right hand, your arm, and the **light of your face**,
+>
+> For they did not obtain the land for their possession by their own sword,
+> neither did their own arm save them;
+> but your right hand, your arm, and the **light of your face**,
> because you were favorable to them. (Psalm 44:3 ULT)
->
+>
> they did not reject the **light of my face**. (Job 29:24b ULT)
->
+>
> Yahweh, they walk in the **light of your face**. (Psalm 89:15b ULT)
#### FIRE represents extreme feelings, particularly love or anger
> Because lawlessness will increase, the love of many will **grow cold**. (Matthew 24:12 ULT)
->
+>
> Surging waters cannot **quench** love. (Song of Songs 8:7a ULT)
->
+>
> For **a fire is kindled by my anger** and **is burning** to the lowest Sheol. (Deuteronomy 32:22a ULT)
->
-> Therefore **the anger of Yahweh blazed** against Israel. (Judges 3:8a ULT)
->
+>
+> Therefore **the anger of Yahweh blazed** against Israel. (Judges 3:8a ULT)
+>
> When Yahweh heard this, **he was angry**; so **his fire burned** against Jacob, and **his anger** attacked Israel. (Psalm 78:21 ULT)
#### A WIDE SPACE represents safety, security, and ease
-> They came against me on the day of my distress but Yahweh was my support.
+> They came against me on the day of my distress but Yahweh was my support.
> He set me free in **a wide open place**; he saved me because he was pleased with me. (Psalms 18:18-19 ULT)
->
-> You have made **a wide place** for my feet beneath me,
+>
+> You have made **a wide place** for my feet beneath me,
> so my feet have not slipped. (2 Samuel 22:37 ULT)
->
-> You made people ride over our heads;
-> we went through fire and water,
+>
+> You made people ride over our heads;
+> we went through fire and water,
> but you brought us out into **a spacious place**. (Psalms 66:12 ULT)
#### A NARROW SPACE represents danger or difficulties
-> Answer me when I call, God of my righteousness;
-> give me room when **I am hemmed in**.
+> Answer me when I call, God of my righteousness;
+> give me room when **I am hemmed in**.
> Have mercy on me and listen to my prayer. (Psalm 4:1 ULT)
->
-> For a prostitute is a deep pit,
+>
+> For a prostitute is a deep pit,
> and an immoral woman is **a narrow well**. (Proverbs 23:27 ULT)
#### WATER or LIQUID represents a moral or emotional quality (attitude, spirit, life)
> Yahweh has burst through my enemies before me like a bursting **flood of water**. (2 Samuel 5:20 ULT)
->
+>
> He will make a complete end to his enemies with an overwhelming **flood**. (Nahum 1:8a ULT)
->
+>
> I am being **poured out like water**. (Psalm 22:14a ULT)
->
+>
> It will come about afterward that I will **pour out** my Spirit on all flesh. (Joel 2:28a ULT)
->
+>
> For it is great, the anger of Yahweh that has been **poured out** on us. (2 Chronicles 34:21b ULT)
#### FLOODING WATER represents disaster
> I have come into **deep waters**, where the **floods flow** over me. (Psalm 69:2b ULT)
->
+>
> Do not let the **floods of water** overwhelm me. (Psalm 69:15a ULT)
->
+>
> Reach out your hand from above; rescue me out of **many waters** from the hand of foreigners. (Psalm 144:7 ULT)
#### A FOUNTAIN or SPRING OF WATER represents the origin or source of something
> The fear of Yahweh is a **fountain of life**. (Proverbs 14:27a ULT)
->
+>
> For with you is the **fountain of life**; in your light we will see light. (Psalm 36:9 ULT)
#### LIQUID represents what someone says
> A quarreling wife is a constant **dripping of water**. (Proverbs 19:13b ULT)
->
+>
> His lips are lilies, **dripping liquid myrrh**. (Song of Songs 5:13b ULT)
->
+>
> My groaning is **poured out like water**. (Job 3:24b ULT)
->
+>
> The words of a man’s mouth are **deep waters**; the **fountain of wisdom** is a flowing stream. (Proverbs 18:4 ULT)
#### A ROCK represents salvation or protection
> Who is a **rock** except our God? (Psalm 18:31b ULT)
->
+>
> Yahweh, **my rock**, and my redeemer. (Psalm 19:14b ULT)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/bita-plants/01.md b/translate/bita-plants/01.md
index 60f42f22..1f1e07e5 100644
--- a/translate/bita-plants/01.md
+++ b/translate/bita-plants/01.md
@@ -5,19 +5,19 @@ Some common [metonymies](../figs-metonymy/01.md) and [metaphors](../figs-metapho
In the examples below, Isaiah wrote about one of Jesse’s descendants and Jeremiah wrote about one of David’s descendants.
> **A shoot** will sprout from the root of Jesse, and **a branch** out of his root will bear fruit. (Isaiah 11:1 ULT)
->
+>
> See, the days are coming—this is Yahweh’s declaration—when I will raise up for David a righteous **branch**. He will reign as king; he will act wisely and cause justice and righteousness in the land. (Jeremiah 23:5 ULT)
In Job when it says “his branch will be cut off,” it means that he will not have any descendants.
-> His roots will be dried up beneath;
-> above will **his branch be cut off**.
-> His memory will perish from the earth;
+> His roots will be dried up beneath;
+> above will **his branch be cut off**.
+> His memory will perish from the earth;
> he will have no name in the street. (Job 18:16-17 ULT)
#### A PLANT represents a person
-> God will likewise destroy you forever; he will … **root you out** of the land of the living. (Psalm 52:5 ULT)
+> God will likewise destroy you forever; he will … **root you out** of the land of the living. (Psalm 52:5 ULT)
#### A PLANT represents actions or behaviors
@@ -26,11 +26,11 @@ Just as planting one kind of seeds results in that kind of plant growing, behavi
The action or behavior in the verses is marked in bold below.
> **Sow righteousness** for yourselves, and **reap the fruit** of covenant faithfulness. (Hosea 10:12a ULT)
->
-> According to what I have seen, those who **plow iniquity** and **sow trouble reap it**. (Job 4:8 ULT)
->
+>
+> According to what I have seen, those who **plow iniquity** and **sow trouble reap it**. (Job 4:8 ULT)
+>
> For the people **sow the wind and reap the whirlwind**. (Hosea 8:7a ULT)
->
+>
> … what **fruit then did you have** at that time of the things of which you are now ashamed? (Romans 6:21a ULT)
#### A SEED represents the descendant(s) of a person or group of people
@@ -40,9 +40,9 @@ The action or behavior in the verses is marked in bold below.
#### A TREE represents a person
> He will be like **a tree planted** by the streams of water that **produces its fruit in its season**, whose **leaves do not wither**; whatever he does will prosper. (Psalm 1:3 ULT)
->
+>
> I have seen the wicked and terrifying person spread out **like a green tree in its native soil**. (Psalm 37:35 ULT)
->
+>
> … I am **like a green olive tree** in God’s house. (Psalm 52:8a ULT)
#### A TREE represents something made of wood (such as a pole or platform)
diff --git a/translate/choose-style/01.md b/translate/choose-style/01.md
index 59709e86..9b07afc0 100644
--- a/translate/choose-style/01.md
+++ b/translate/choose-style/01.md
@@ -2,9 +2,9 @@
Before beginning a translation of the Bible, the translation committee needs to discuss and agree on the style that they want the translation to have. The following topics should be included in the discussion.
-1. **Form** – Should the translation follow the form of the source language so that people who are used to hearing and reading the Bible in the source language will feel more comfortable with it, or should the translation follow the form of the target language, and be easier to understand? In most cases we recommend that it is better if the translation follows the form of the target language so that people can understand it better. This means that it will be harder to compare with the source language Bible because it will put things in a different order and use different kinds of expressions that are clear and natural in the target language. But when a Bible is clear and natural, many people will want to read it and hear it, not just the people who have been part of the church for many years.
+1. **Form** – Should the translation follow the form of the source language so that people who are used to hearing and reading the Bible in the source language will feel more comfortable with it, or should the translation follow the form of the target language, and be easier to understand? In most cases we recommend that it is better if the translation follows the form of the target language so that people can understand it better. This means that it will be harder to compare with the source language Bible because it will put things in a different order and use different kinds of expressions that are clear and natural in the target language. But when a Bible is clear and natural, many people will want to read it and hear it, not just the people who have been part of the church for many years.
-2. **Format** - Is this a written translation to be read from a book, or a translation to be recorded and listened to? If it is a written translation to be used in church, the people may prefer a more formal style. If it is for a recording, the people may prefer a style that is more like people talking informally.
+2. **Format** - Is this a written translation to be read from a book, or a translation to be recorded and listened to? If it is a written translation to be used in church, the people may prefer a more formal style. If it is for a recording, the people may prefer a style that is more like people talking informally.
3. **Borrowing** – Should the translation borrow many words from the source language, or should the translators find ways to express these things using target language words? People who have been part of the church for many years may be used to hearing many biblical concepts expressed with source language words. If these words are widely understood outside of the church, then it may be fine to use them in the translation. But if people outside of the church do not understand these words, it would be better to find ways to express these things using target language words.
@@ -14,10 +14,10 @@ Before beginning a translation of the Bible, the translation committee needs to
6. **Audience** - The translation committee should discuss who is the audience for this translation. Is it primarily educated people, so they should use a style that uses long sentences and many borrowed words? Is it primarily for young people, or old people, for men or women? Or is it for everyone? In that case, it should use simple language so that everyone can understand it. For more on this topic, see also [Aim](../translate-aim/01.md).
-7. **Footnotes** – Should the translation put explanations of difficult things in footnotes? If so, should it use many footnotes, or only for certain topics or especially difficult things? Will people understand what footnotes are and how they work, or will they be confused by them? Instead of footnotes, would it be better to put short explanations in the text of the Bible translation? Or should the translation not include any extra explanations at all? To help in making this decision, consider how well your people understand biblical culture and such things as shepherds, fishing with nets, sailing boats, kings, ancient warfare with chariots, etc., and how much of this might need to be explained.
+7. **Footnotes** – Should the translation put explanations of difficult things in footnotes? If so, should it use many footnotes, or only for certain topics or especially difficult things? Will people understand what footnotes are and how they work, or will they be confused by them? Instead of footnotes, would it be better to put short explanations in the text of the Bible translation? Or should the translation not include any extra explanations at all? To help in making this decision, consider how well your people understand biblical culture and such things as shepherds, fishing with nets, sailing boats, kings, ancient warfare with chariots, etc., and how much of this might need to be explained.
-8. **Pictures** - Will pictures be used in the Bible translation? If so, how many? Pictures can be very useful for showing things that are unknown in the target culture, such as certain animals or tools or clothing. Using pictures for these things can reduce the need to explain them in footnotes.
+8. **Pictures** - Will pictures be used in the Bible translation? If so, how many? Pictures can be very useful for showing things that are unknown in the target culture, such as certain animals or tools or clothing. Using pictures for these things can reduce the need to explain them in footnotes.
-9. **Headings** – Should the translation use section headings that summarize what each section is talking about? If so, what style of headings should be used? These can be very helpful for finding different topics. See [Headings](../../checking/headings/01.md) for examples.
+9. **Headings** – Should the translation use section headings that summarize what each section is talking about? If so, what style of headings should be used? These can be very helpful for finding different topics. See [Headings](../../checking/headings/01.md) for examples.
diff --git a/translate/choose-style/sub-title.md b/translate/choose-style/sub-title.md
index fa4f8b7b..23fd6df4 100755
--- a/translate/choose-style/sub-title.md
+++ b/translate/choose-style/sub-title.md
@@ -1 +1 @@
-What are the topics that we need to discuss in order to choose a translation style?
\ No newline at end of file
+What are the topics that we need to discuss in order to choose a translation style?
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/choose-team/01.md b/translate/choose-team/01.md
index 1cdba0bd..95378bda 100644
--- a/translate/choose-team/01.md
+++ b/translate/choose-team/01.md
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ The people who are selected to [check the translation for accuracy](../../checki
Those who do [Validation Checking](../../checking/level3/01.md) should be leaders of groups of churches or people who are very widely respected in the language area. It is important that these people approve of the translation so that it will be accepted and used in the churches. Since many of these people are very busy, they may choose to appoint others whom they trust to check the translation for them. Also, it may work best to send different books or chapters to different people, and not burden one or two people with checking the whole translation.
-#### Tech Support
+#### Tech Support
These people must have experience (or aptitude) with technology and computers for all things pertaining to file management, as well as training and use of software and hardware.
diff --git a/translate/figs-123person/01.md b/translate/figs-123person/01.md
index d344daf5..8962663a 100644
--- a/translate/figs-123person/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-123person/01.md
@@ -2,9 +2,9 @@ Normally a speaker refers to himself as “I” and the person he is speaking to
### Description
-* First person - This is how a speaker normally refers to himself. English uses the pronouns “I” and “we.” (Also: me, my, mine; us, our, ours)
-* Second person - This is how a speaker normally refers to the person or people he is speaking to. English uses the pronoun “you.” (Also: your, yours)
-* Third person - This is how a speaker refers to someone else. English uses the pronouns “he,” “she,” “it,” and “they.” (Also: him, his, her, hers, its; them, their, theirs) Noun phrases like “the man” or “the woman” are also third person.
+* First person - This is how a speaker normally refers to himself. English uses the pronouns “I” and “we.” (Also: me, my, mine; us, our, ours)
+* Second person - This is how a speaker normally refers to the person or people he is speaking to. English uses the pronoun “you.” (Also: your, yours)
+* Third person - This is how a speaker refers to someone else. English uses the pronouns “he,” “she,” “it,” and “they.” (Also: him, his, her, hers, its; them, their, theirs) Noun phrases like “the man” or “the woman” are also third person.
### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Sometimes people used the third person instead of “I” or “me” to refer t
David referred to himself in the third person as “your servant” and used “his.” He was calling himself Saul’s servant in order to show his humility before Saul.
-> Then Yahweh answered Job out of a fierce storm and said,
+> Then Yahweh answered Job out of a fierce storm and said,
> “… Do you have an arm like **God’s**? Can you thunder with a voice like **his**? (Job 40:6, 9 ULT)
God referred to himself in the third person with the words “God’s” and “his.” He did this to emphasize that he is God, and he is powerful.
@@ -44,15 +44,15 @@ If using the third person to mean “I” or “you” would be natural and give
(1) Use the third person phrase along with the pronoun “I” or “you.”
> But David said to Saul, “**Your servant** used to keep **his** father’s sheep.” (1 Samuel 17:34)
->
+>
> > But David said to Saul, “**I, your servant**, used to keep **my** father’s sheep.”
(2) Simply use the first person (“I”) or second person (“you”) instead of the third person.
> Then Yahweh answered Job out of a fierce storm and said, “… Do you have an arm like **God’s**? Can you thunder with a voice like **his**? (Job 40:6, 9 ULT)
->
+>
> > Then Yahweh answered Job out of a fierce storm and said, “…Do you have an arm like **mine**? Can you thunder with a voice like **mine**?”
->
+>
> So also my heavenly Father will do to you if **each of you** does not forgive **his** brother from your heart. (Matthew 18:35 ULT)
->
+>
> > So also my heavenly Father will do to you if **each of you** does not forgive **your** brother from your heart.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-abstractnouns/01.md b/translate/figs-abstractnouns/01.md
index 482494f9..2159d316 100644
--- a/translate/figs-abstractnouns/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-abstractnouns/01.md
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
-Abstract nouns are nouns that refer to attitudes, qualities, events, or situations. These are things that cannot be seen or touched in a physical sense, such as happiness, weight, unity, friendship, health, and reason. This is a translation issue because some languages may express a certain idea with an abstract noun, while others would need a different way to express it.
+Abstract nouns are nouns that refer to attitudes, qualities, events, or situations. These are things that cannot be seen or touched in a physical sense, such as happiness, weight, unity, friendship, health, and reason. This is a translation issue because some languages may express a certain idea with an abstract noun, while others would need a different way to express it.
### Description
Remember that nouns are words that refer to a person, place, thing, or idea. Abstract nouns are the nouns that refer to ideas. These can be attitudes, qualities, events, situations, or even relationships between those ideas. These are things that cannot be seen or touched in a physical sense, such as joy, peace, creation, goodness, contentment, justice, truth, freedom, vengeance, slowness, length, weight, and many, many more.
-Some languages, such as Biblical Greek and English, use abstract nouns a lot.They provide a way of giving names to actions or qualities. With names, people who speak these languages can talk about the concepts as though they were things. For example, in languages that use abstract nouns, people can say, “I believe in the forgiveness of sin.”
+Some languages, such as Biblical Greek and English, use abstract nouns a lot.They provide a way of giving names to actions or qualities. With names, people who speak these languages can talk about the concepts as though they were things. For example, in languages that use abstract nouns, people can say, “I believe in the forgiveness of sin.”
But some languages do not use abstract nouns very much. In these languages, speakers may not have the two abstract nouns “forgiveness” and “sin,” but they would express the same meaning in other ways. For example, they would express, “I believe that God is willing to forgive people after they have sinned,” by using verb phrases instead of nouns for those ideas.
### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ The Bible that you translate from may use abstract nouns to express certain idea
### Examples From the Bible
> From **childhood** you have known the sacred writings … (2 Timothy 3:15a ULT)
-
+
The abstract noun “childhood” refers to when someone was a child.
> But **godliness** with **contentment** is great **gain**. (1 Timothy 6:6 ULT)
@@ -46,24 +46,24 @@ If an abstract noun would be natural and give the right meaning in your language
(1) Reword the sentence with a phrase that expresses the meaning of the abstract noun. Instead of a noun, the new phrase will use a verb, an adverb, or an adjective to express the idea of the abstract noun. Alternative translations are indented below the Scripture example.
> … from **childhood** you have known the sacred writings … (2 Timothy 3:15a ULT)
->
+>
> > Ever since **you were a child** you have known the sacred writings.
->
+>
> But **godliness** with **contentment** is great **gain**. (1 Timothy 6:6 ULT)
->
-> > But **being godly** and **content** is very **beneficial**.
-> > But we **benefit** greatly when we **are godly** and **content**.
+>
+> > But **being godly** and **content** is very **beneficial**.
+> > But we **benefit** greatly when we **are godly** and **content**.
> > But we **benefit** greatly when we **honor and obey God** and when we are **happy with what we have**.
->
+>
> Today **salvation** has come to this house, because he too is a son of Abraham. (Luke 19:9 ULT)
->
-> > Today the people in this house **have been saved**…
+>
+> > Today the people in this house **have been saved**…
> > Today God **has saved** the people in this house…
->
+>
> The Lord does not move slowly concerning his promises, as some consider **slowness** to be. (2 Peter 3:9a ULT)
->
+>
> > The Lord does not move slowly concerning his promises, as some consider **moving slowly** to be.
->
+>
> He will bring to light the hidden things of darkness and reveal the **purposes** of the heart. (1 Corinthians 4:5b ULT)
->
+>
> > He will bring to light the hidden things of darkness and reveal **the things that people want to do and the reasons that they want to do them**.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-activepassive/01.md b/translate/figs-activepassive/01.md
index c35eee0b..7fa04cef 100644
--- a/translate/figs-activepassive/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-activepassive/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
Some languages use both active and passive sentences. In active sentences, the subject does the action. In passive sentences, the subject is the one that receives the action. Here are some examples with their subjects bolded:
-* Active: **My father** built the house in 2010.
-* Passive: **The house** was built in 2010.
+* Active: **My father** built the house in 2010.
+* Passive: **The house** was built in 2010.
Translators whose languages do not use passive sentences will need to know how they can translate passive sentences that they find in the Bible. Other translators will need to decide when to use a passive sentence and when to use the active form.
@@ -9,14 +9,14 @@ Translators whose languages do not use passive sentences will need to know how t
Some languages have both active and passive forms of sentences.
-* In the active form, the subject does the action and is always mentioned.
-* In the passive form, the action is done to the subject, and the one who does the action is not always mentioned.
+* In the active form, the subject does the action and is always mentioned.
+* In the passive form, the action is done to the subject, and the one who does the action is not always mentioned.
In the examples of active and passive sentences below, we have bolded the subject.
-* active: **My father** built the house in 2010.
-* passive: **The house** was built by my father in 2010.
-* passive: **The house** was built in 2010. (This does not tell who did the action.)
+* active: **My father** built the house in 2010.
+* passive: **The house** was built by my father in 2010.
+* passive: **The house** was built in 2010. (This does not tell who did the action.)
#### Reasons This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -24,14 +24,14 @@ All languages use active forms. Some languages use passive forms, and some do no
#### Purposes for the Passive
-* The speaker is talking about the person or thing the action was done to, not about the person who did the action.
-* The speaker does not want to tell who did the action.
-* The speaker does not know who did the action.
+* The speaker is talking about the person or thing the action was done to, not about the person who did the action.
+* The speaker does not want to tell who did the action.
+* The speaker does not know who did the action.
#### Translation Principles Regarding the Passive
-* Translators whose language does not use passive forms will need to find another way to express the idea.
-* Translators whose language has passive forms will need to understand why the passive is used in a particular sentence in the Bible and decide whether or not to use a passive form for that purpose in his translation of the sentence.
+* Translators whose language does not use passive forms will need to find another way to express the idea.
+* Translators whose language has passive forms will need to understand why the passive is used in a particular sentence in the Bible and decide whether or not to use a passive form for that purpose in his translation of the sentence.
### Examples from the Bible
@@ -58,18 +58,18 @@ If your language would use a passive form for the same purpose as in the passage
(1) Use the same verb in an active sentence and tell who did the action. If you do this, try to keep the focus on the person receiving the action.
> A loaf of bread **was given** him every day from the street of the bakers. (Jeremiah 37:21b ULT)
->
+>
> > **The king’s servants gave** Jeremiah a loaf of bread every day from the street of the bakers.
(2) Use the same verb in an active sentence, and do not tell who did the action. Instead, use a generic expression like “they” or ”people” or ”someone.”
> It would be better for him if a millstone **were put** around his neck and he **were thrown** into the sea. (Luke 17:2a ULT)
->
-> > It would be better for him if **they were to put** a millstone around his neck and **throw** him into the sea.
+>
+> > It would be better for him if **they were to put** a millstone around his neck and **throw** him into the sea.
> > It would be better for him if **someone were to put** a heavy stone around his neck and **throw** him into the sea.
(3) Use a different verb in an active sentence.
> A loaf of bread **was given** him every day from the street of the bakers. (Jeremiah 37:21 ULT)
->
+>
> > He **received** a loaf of bread every day from the street of the bakers.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-apostrophe/01.md b/translate/figs-apostrophe/01.md
index 2462a99c..ff3dd897 100644
--- a/translate/figs-apostrophe/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-apostrophe/01.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
### Description
-An apostrophe is a figure of speech in which a speaker turns his attention away from his listeners and speaks to someone or something that he knows cannot hear him. He does this to tell his listeners his message or feelings about that person or thing in a very strong way.
+An apostrophe is a figure of speech in which a speaker turns his attention away from his listeners and speaks to someone or something that he knows cannot hear him. He does this to tell his listeners his message or feelings about that person or thing in a very strong way.
#### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -27,9 +27,9 @@ If apostrophe would be natural and give the right meaning in your language, cons
### Examples of Translation Strategies Applied
> He cried against the altar by the word of Yahweh: "**Altar**, **altar**! This is what Yahweh says, ‘See, … on you they will burn human bones.’“ (1 Kings 13:2 ULT)
->
+>
> > He said this about the altar: “This is what Yahweh says **about this altar.** ‘See, … they will burn people’s bones on **it**.’“
->
+>
> **Mountains of Gilboa**, let there not be dew or rain on **you.** (2 Samuel 1:21a ULT)
->
+>
> > **As for these mountains of Gilboa**, let there not be dew or rain on **them**.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-aside/01.md b/translate/figs-aside/01.md
index f2d32361..48d8b2a1 100644
--- a/translate/figs-aside/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-aside/01.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
### Description
-An aside is a figure of speech in which someone who is speaking to a person or group pauses to speak confidentially to himself or someone else about those to whom he had been speaking. The speaker does this to indicate in a strong way his thoughts or feelings about that person or group.
+An aside is a figure of speech in which someone who is speaking to a person or group pauses to speak confidentially to himself or someone else about those to whom he had been speaking. The speaker does this to indicate in a strong way his thoughts or feelings about that person or group.
#### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Many languages do not use asides, and readers could be confused by them. They ma
In the first three lines, Yahweh is telling the people of Edom what will happen to them because they did not help the people of Judah. In the fourth line, Yahweh says something about Edom to himself.
-> And I purified them from everything foreign. And I caused the service watches to stand: for the priests and for the Levites, a man in his work; and for the offering of pieces of wood at the appointed times; and for the firstfruits. **Remember me, my God, for good.** (Nehemiah 13:30-31 ULT)
+> And I purified them from everything foreign. And I caused the service watches to stand: for the priests and for the Levites, a man in his work; and for the offering of pieces of wood at the appointed times; and for the firstfruits. **Remember me, my God, for good.** (Nehemiah 13:30-31 ULT)
Nehemiah is speaking to the readers of his account and describing some of the many things he did to restore true worship in Judah after the people returned from exile. But he suddenly turns aside and addresses God, asking God to bless him for what he, Nehemiah, has done for those people.
@@ -28,6 +28,6 @@ Nehemiah is speaking to the readers of his account and describing some of the ma
(1) All the men of your covenant are sending you away as far as the border. The men of your peace are deceiving you and are prevailing against you. They of your bread will set a trap under you. **You do not understand any of this.**
-> And I purified them from everything foreign. And I caused the service watches to stand: for the priests and for the Levites, a man in his work; 31 and for the offering of pieces of wood at the appointed times; and for the firstfruits. **Remember me, my God, for good.** (Nehemiah 13:30-31 ULT)
+> And I purified them from everything foreign. And I caused the service watches to stand: for the priests and for the Levites, a man in his work; 31 and for the offering of pieces of wood at the appointed times; and for the firstfruits. **Remember me, my God, for good.** (Nehemiah 13:30-31 ULT)
(2) And I cleansed them from everything foreign, and I made assignments for the priests and for the Levites, a man to his own work. And the wood offering at the stated time, and the firstfruits. **“Remember me, my God, for good."**
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-cometaphor/01.md b/translate/figs-cometaphor/01.md
index 80809a4f..833cab3d 100644
--- a/translate/figs-cometaphor/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-cometaphor/01.md
@@ -2,13 +2,13 @@ A complex metaphor is an implicit [metaphor](../figs-metaphor/01.md) that uses m
### Explanation of a Complex Metaphor
-When using a metaphor, a writer/speaker uses a physical **Image** in order to express an abstract **Idea** about some immediate **Topic**, with at least one point of comparison between the Topic and the Image.
+When using a metaphor, a writer/speaker uses a physical **Image** in order to express an abstract **Idea** about some immediate **Topic**, with at least one point of comparison between the Topic and the Image.
-In simple metaphors, usually the Topic and the Image are expressed, and the Idea is implied from the context. In extended metaphors, the writer or speaker explicitly states the topic, and then describes multiple images and communicates multiple ideas.
+In simple metaphors, usually the Topic and the Image are expressed, and the Idea is implied from the context. In extended metaphors, the writer or speaker explicitly states the topic, and then describes multiple images and communicates multiple ideas.
-A complex metaphor is different from both of these. In a complex metaphor, a writer/speaker uses multiple **Images** to express multiple **Ideas** about a **Topic**, but he does not explicitly say how the images and ideas are metaphorically related to one another. The reader/listener must think very carefully about what the writer/speaker is saying in order to figure out the underlying relationship between the images and the ideas.
+A complex metaphor is different from both of these. In a complex metaphor, a writer/speaker uses multiple **Images** to express multiple **Ideas** about a **Topic**, but he does not explicitly say how the images and ideas are metaphorically related to one another. The reader/listener must think very carefully about what the writer/speaker is saying in order to figure out the underlying relationship between the images and the ideas.
- One can say more precisely that a complex metaphor operates *in the mind of the writer/speaker* rather than **in the text itself**.
+ One can say more precisely that a complex metaphor operates *in the mind of the writer/speaker* rather than **in the text itself**.
For example, the metaphor FORGIVENESS IS CLEANSING is a very common complex metaphor in both the Old Testament and the New Testament. Consider the following verses from Psalm 51.
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Here the psalmist is praying to God in earnest repentance for his sin (the **Top
The apostle Paul uses an even more difficult complex metaphor in Ephesians 6:10-20:
-> Finally, be strong in the Lord and in the force of his strength. **Put on the whole armor of God, to enable you to stand against the scheming of the devil.** For our struggle is not against blood and flesh, but against the rulers, against the authorities, against the world-controllers of this darkness, against the spiritual forces of evil in the heavenly places. Therefore, put on the whole armor of God, so that you may be able to withstand in the evil day, and, having done everything, to stand. 14 Stand, therefore, **having fastened up your robe around your waist with the truth** and **having put on the breastplate of righteousness**, and **having shod your feet with the readiness of the gospel of peace**. 16 In everything **take up the shield of the faith**, by which you will be able to extinguish all the flaming arrows of the evil one. **Take the helmet of salvation and the sword of the Spirit, which is the word of God**. With every prayer and request, pray at all times in the Spirit. To this end, be watchful with all perseverance and requests for all the saints, 19 and for me, so that a message might be given to me when I open my mouth, to make known with boldness the mystery of the gospel 20 (for which I am an ambassador in chains), so that in it I may speak boldly, as it is necessary for me to speak. (Eph 6:10-20 ULT)
+> Finally, be strong in the Lord and in the force of his strength. **Put on the whole armor of God, to enable you to stand against the scheming of the devil.** For our struggle is not against blood and flesh, but against the rulers, against the authorities, against the world-controllers of this darkness, against the spiritual forces of evil in the heavenly places. Therefore, put on the whole armor of God, so that you may be able to withstand in the evil day, and, having done everything, to stand. 14 Stand, therefore, **having fastened up your robe around your waist with the truth** and **having put on the breastplate of righteousness**, and **having shod your feet with the readiness of the gospel of peace**. 16 In everything **take up the shield of the faith**, by which you will be able to extinguish all the flaming arrows of the evil one. **Take the helmet of salvation and the sword of the Spirit, which is the word of God**. With every prayer and request, pray at all times in the Spirit. To this end, be watchful with all perseverance and requests for all the saints, 19 and for me, so that a message might be given to me when I open my mouth, to make known with boldness the mystery of the gospel 20 (for which I am an ambassador in chains), so that in it I may speak boldly, as it is necessary for me to speak. (Eph 6:10-20 ULT)
In this paragraph, the apostle Paul describes how a Christian should prepare to resist temptation (the **Topic**) by comparing a series of abstract ideas to pieces of armor worn by a soldier. The term “full armor of God” is not a combination of several simple metaphors. The soldier’s belt does not represent truth, the helmet does not represent salvation, the shield does not represent faith, and so on. Rather, the apostle Paul was using the central **Image** of a soldier putting on his armor (that is, “GETTING DRESSED” for battle) to refer to the central abstract **Idea** of a Christian preparing himself (that is, “PREPARATION”) to resist temptation. The unstated complex metaphor PREPARATION IS GETTING DRESSED underlies the entire description as a whole.
@@ -27,15 +27,15 @@ In this paragraph, the apostle Paul describes how a Christian should prepare to
The Bible often speaks of God as doing things that people do, such as speaking, seeing, walking, etc. But God is not a human being, although Jesus is both God and a human being, of course. So when the Old Testament says that God speaks, we should not think that he has vocal chords that vibrate. And when the Bible says something about God doing something with his hand, we should not think that God has a physical hand made of flesh and bones. Rather, the writer is thinking about God as a person, using the physical **Image** of a human being to represent the abstract **Idea** “God.” The writer is using the complex metaphor GOD IS A HUMAN, even though he does not explicitly say so in the text.
> If we hear **the voice of Yahweh our God** any longer, we will die. (Deuteronomy 5:25b ULT)
->
-> I was strengthened as **the hand of Yahweh** my God was upon me. (Ezra 7:28b ULT)
->
+>
+> I was strengthened as **the hand of Yahweh** my God was upon me. (Ezra 7:28b ULT)
+>
> You drove out the nations with **your hand**, but you planted our people; you afflicted the peoples, but you spread our people out in the land. For they did not obtain the land for their possession by their own sword, neither did their own arm save them; but **your right hand**, **your arm**, and the light of **your face**, because you were favorable to them. (Psa 44:2-3 ULT)
### Translation Strategies
-* Complex metaphors in the Bible should be translated like passive metaphors.
-
-* For strategies regarding translating metaphors, see [Metaphor](../figs-metaphor/01.md).
-
-* To learn more about biblical imagery, complex metaphors, and cultural models in the Bible, see [Biblical Imagery](../biblicalimageryta/01.md) and/or [Biblical Imagery - Common Patterns](../bita-part1/01.md) and/or [Biblical Imagery - Cultural Models](../bita-part3/01.md).
\ No newline at end of file
+* Complex metaphors in the Bible should be translated like passive metaphors.
+
+* For strategies regarding translating metaphors, see [Metaphor](../figs-metaphor/01.md).
+
+* To learn more about biblical imagery, complex metaphors, and cultural models in the Bible, see [Biblical Imagery](../biblicalimageryta/01.md) and/or [Biblical Imagery - Common Patterns](../bita-part1/01.md) and/or [Biblical Imagery - Cultural Models](../bita-part3/01.md).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-declarative/01.md b/translate/figs-declarative/01.md
index 9e7bf004..e055d054 100644
--- a/translate/figs-declarative/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-declarative/01.md
@@ -56,17 +56,17 @@ The phrase “you will call his name Jesus” is an instruction. It can be trans
The function of “I know you can” is to make a request. In addition to the statement, a request can be added.
> > Lord, **I know you can heal me**,. If you are willing, please do so**.**
-> >
+> >
> > Lord, if you are willing, please heal me**.** **I know you can do so****.**
(3) If the function of a statement would not be understood correctly in your language, use a verb form that would express that function.
> She will give birth to a son, and **you will call his name Jesus**, for he will save his people from their sins. (Matthew 1:21 ULT)
->
+>
> > She will give birth to a son, and **you must call his name Jesus**, for he will save his people from their sins.
->
+>
> Son, your sins are forgiven. (Mark 2:5 ULT)
->
+>
> > Son, I forgive your sins.
-> >
+> >
> > Son, God has forgiven your sins.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-distinguish/01.md b/translate/figs-distinguish/01.md
index f620aef5..5bf7e06a 100644
--- a/translate/figs-distinguish/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-distinguish/01.md
@@ -4,18 +4,18 @@ In some languages, phrases that modify a noun can be used with the noun for two
Some languages use a comma to mark the difference between (1) making a distinction between similar items and (2) giving more information about an item. Without the comma, the sentence below communicates that it is making a distinction:
-* Mary gave some of the food to **her sister who was very thankful**.
- * If her sister was usually thankful, the phrase “who was thankful” could distinguish this sister of Mary’s from another sister who was not usually thankful.
+* Mary gave some of the food to **her sister who was very thankful**.
+ * If her sister was usually thankful, the phrase “who was thankful” could distinguish this sister of Mary’s from another sister who was not usually thankful.
With the comma, the sentence is giving more information:
-* Mary gave some of the food to **her sister, who was very thankful**.
- * This same phrase can be used give us more information about Mary’s sister. It tells us about how Mary’s sister responded when Mary gave her the food. In this case it does not distinguish one sister from another sister.
+* Mary gave some of the food to **her sister, who was very thankful**.
+ * This same phrase can be used give us more information about Mary’s sister. It tells us about how Mary’s sister responded when Mary gave her the food. In this case it does not distinguish one sister from another sister.
#### Reasons This Is a Translation Issue
-* Many source languages of the Bible use phrases that modify a noun both for distinguishing the noun from another similar item and also for giving more information about the noun. You (the translator) must be careful to understand which meaning the author intended in each case.
-* Some languages use phrases that modify a noun only for distinguishing the noun from another similar item. When translating a phrase that is used for giving more information, translators who speak these languages will need to separate the phrase from the noun. Otherwise, people who read it or hear it will think that the phrase is meant to distinguish the noun from other similar items.
+* Many source languages of the Bible use phrases that modify a noun both for distinguishing the noun from another similar item and also for giving more information about the noun. You (the translator) must be careful to understand which meaning the author intended in each case.
+* Some languages use phrases that modify a noun only for distinguishing the noun from another similar item. When translating a phrase that is used for giving more information, translators who speak these languages will need to separate the phrase from the noun. Otherwise, people who read it or hear it will think that the phrase is meant to distinguish the noun from other similar items.
### Examples from the Bible
@@ -55,30 +55,30 @@ If readers would understand the purpose of a phrase with a noun, then consider k
### Examples of Translation Strategies Applied
-(1) Put the information in another part of the sentence and add words that show its purpose.
+(1) Put the information in another part of the sentence and add words that show its purpose.
-> I hate those who serve **worthless** idols (Psalm 31:6 ULT)
-> By saying “worthless idols,” David was commenting about all idols and giving his reason for hating those who serve them. He was not distinguishing worthless idols from valuable idols.
->
-> > **Because** **idols are worthless**, I hate those who serve them.
->
+> I hate those who serve **worthless** idols (Psalm 31:6 ULT)
+> By saying “worthless idols,” David was commenting about all idols and giving his reason for hating those who serve them. He was not distinguishing worthless idols from valuable idols.
+>
+> > **Because** **idols are worthless**, I hate those who serve them.
+>
> … for your **righteous** judgments are good. (Psalm 119:39b ULT)
->
-> > … for your judgments are good **because they are righteous**.
->
-> Can Sarah, **who is 90 years old**, bear a son? (Genesis 17:17b ULT)
+>
+> > … for your judgments are good **because they are righteous**.
+>
+> Can Sarah, **who is 90 years old**, bear a son? (Genesis 17:17b ULT)
> The phrase “who is 90 years old” is a reminder of Sarah’s age. It tells why Abraham was asking the question. He did not expect that a woman who was that old could bear a child.
->
-> > Can Sarah bear a son **even when** **she is 90 years old**?
->
-> I will call on Yahweh, **who is worthy to be praised** (2 Samuel 22:4a ULT)
+>
+> > Can Sarah bear a son **even when** **she is 90 years old**?
+>
+> I will call on Yahweh, **who is worthy to be praised** (2 Samuel 22:4a ULT)
> There is only one Yahweh. The phrase “who is worthy to be praised” gives a reason for calling on Yahweh.
->
+>
> > I will call on Yahweh, because **he is worthy to be praised**
(2) Use one of your language’s ways for expressing that this is just added information.
> You are my Son, **whom I love**. I am pleased with you. (Luke 3:22 ULT)
->
-> > You are my Son. **I love you** and I am pleased with you.
+>
+> > You are my Son. **I love you** and I am pleased with you.
> > **Receiving my love**, you are my Son. I am pleased with you.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-doublenegatives/01.md b/translate/figs-doublenegatives/01.md
index 8163e58a..dea97467 100644
--- a/translate/figs-doublenegatives/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-doublenegatives/01.md
@@ -7,10 +7,10 @@ Negative words are words that have in them the meaning “not.” Examples in En
A double negative occurs when a clause has two words that each have a negative meaning.
-> We did this **not** because we have **no** authority … (2 Thessalonians 3:9a ULT)
->
-> And this was not done without an oath! (Hebrews 7:20a ULT)
->
+> We did this **not** because we have **no** authority … (2 Thessalonians 3:9a ULT)
+>
+> And this was not done without an oath! (Hebrews 7:20a ULT)
+>
> Be sure of this—the wicked person will **not** go **un**punished. (Proverbs 11:21a ULT)
#### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ By using a double negative, John emphasized that the Son of God created absolute
### Translation Strategies
-If double negatives are natural and are used to express the positive in your language, consider using them. Otherwise, you could consider these strategies:
+If double negatives are natural and are used to express the positive in your language, consider using them. Otherwise, you could consider these strategies:
(1) If the purpose of a double negative in the Bible is simply to make a positive statement, and if it would not do that in your language, remove the two negatives so that it is positive.
(2) If the purpose of a double negative in the Bible is to make a strong positive statement, and if it would not do that in your language, remove the two negatives and put in a strengthening word or phrase such as “very” or “surely” or “absolutely.”
@@ -44,18 +44,18 @@ If double negatives are natural and are used to express the positive in your lan
(1) If the purpose of a double negative in the Bible is simply to make a positive statement, and if it would not do that in your language, remove the two negatives so that it is positive.
-> For we do **not** have a high priest who can**not** feel sympathy for our weaknesses. (Hebrews 4:15a ULT)
+> For we do **not** have a high priest who can**not** feel sympathy for our weaknesses. (Hebrews 4:15a ULT)
>> “For we have a high priest who can feel sympathy for our weaknesses.”
-
-> … in order **not** to be **unfruitful**. (Titus 3:14b ULT)
+
+> … in order **not** to be **unfruitful**. (Titus 3:14b ULT)
>> “… so that they may be fruitful.”
-
+
(2) If the purpose of a double negative in the Bible is to make a strong positive statement, and if it would not do that in your language, remove the two negatives and put in a strengthening word or phrase such as “very” or “surely” or “absolutely.”
> Be sure of this—the wicked person will **not** go **un**punished. (Proverbs 11:21a ULT)
->
+>
> > “Be sure of this—wicked people will **certainly** be punished.”
->
+>
> All things were made through him and **without** him there was **not** one thing made that has been made. (John 1:3 ULT)
->
+>
> > “All things were made through him. He made **absolutely** everything that has been made.”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-doublet/01.md b/translate/figs-doublet/01.md
index 4844fc8c..c06da551 100644
--- a/translate/figs-doublet/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-doublet/01.md
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ If a doublet would be natural and give the right meaning in your language, consi
(3) If the doublet is used to intensify or emphasize the meaning, use one of your language’s ways of doing that.
> … like a lamb **without blemish** and **without spot**. (1 Peter 1:19b ULT)
->
-> * English can emphasize this with “any” and “at all.”
->
+>
+> * English can emphasize this with “any” and “at all.”
+>
> > “… like a lamb **without any blemish at all**.”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-ellipsis/01.md b/translate/figs-ellipsis/01.md
index 8597a9f4..10917050 100644
--- a/translate/figs-ellipsis/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-ellipsis/01.md
@@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ There is ellipsis in the second part because “nor sinners in the assembly of t
#### There are two types of ellipsis.
-1. A Relative Ellipsis happens when the reader has to supply the omitted word or words from the context. Usually the word is in the previous sentence, as in the example above.
-2. An Absolute Ellipsis happens when the omitted word or words are not in the context, but the phrases are common enough in the language that the reader is expected to supply what is missing from this common usage or from the nature of the situation.
+1. A Relative Ellipsis happens when the reader has to supply the omitted word or words from the context. Usually the word is in the previous sentence, as in the example above.
+2. An Absolute Ellipsis happens when the omitted word or words are not in the context, but the phrases are common enough in the language that the reader is expected to supply what is missing from this common usage or from the nature of the situation.
#### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Readers who see incomplete sentences or phrases may not know that there is infor
The writer wants his words to be few and to make good poetry. The full sentence with the information filled in would be:
> > He makes Lebanon skip like a calf and **he makes** Sirion **skip** like a young ox.
->
+>
> Watch carefully, therefore, how you walk—**not as unwise but as wise**. (Ephesians 5:15)
The information that the reader must understand in the second parts of these sentences can be filled in from the first parts:
@@ -40,12 +40,12 @@ The information that the reader must understand in the second parts of these sen
It seems that the man answered in an incomplete sentence because he wanted to be polite and not directly ask Jesus for healing. He knew that Jesus would understand that the only way he could receive his sight would be for Jesus to heal him. The complete sentence would be:
> > “Lord, **I want you to heal me so** that I might receive my sight.”
-
-> To Titus … **Grace and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Savior**. (Titus 1:4 ULT)
+
+> To Titus … **Grace and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Savior**. (Titus 1:4 ULT)
The writer assumes that the reader will recognize this common form of a blessing or wish, so he does not need to include the full sentence, which would be:
-> > To Titus … **May you receive** grace and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Savior.
+> > To Titus … **May you receive** grace and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Savior.
### Translation Strategies
@@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ If ellipsis would be natural and give the right meaning in your language, consid
(1) Add the missing words to the incomplete phrase or sentence.
> So the wicked will not stand in the judgment, nor **sinners in the assembly** of the righteous. (Psalm 1:5)
-
+
> > So the wicked will not stand in the judgment, and **sinners will not stand in the assembly** of the righteous.
-
+
> Then when the he had come near, he asked him, “What do you want me to do for you?” He said, “Lord, **that I might receive my sight**.” (Luke 18:40b-41)
-
+
> > Then when the man was near, Jesus asked him, “What do you want me to do for you?” He said, “Lord, **I want you to heal me** that I might receive my sight.”
-
+
> He makes Lebanon skip like a calf **and Sirion like a young ox**. (Psalm 29:6)
-
+
> > He makes Lebanon skip like a calf, and **he makes** Sirion **skip** like a young ox.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-euphemism/01.md b/translate/figs-euphemism/01.md
index 73f1f84d..f87dead3 100755
--- a/translate/figs-euphemism/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-euphemism/01.md
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ In order **to be polite**, Mary uses a euphemism to say that she has never had s
If euphemism would be natural and give the right meaning in your language, consider using it. If not, here are other options:
-(1) Use a euphemism from your own culture.
+(1) Use a euphemism from your own culture.
(2) State the information plainly without a euphemism if it would not be offensive.
@@ -33,16 +33,16 @@ If euphemism would be natural and give the right meaning in your language, consi
(1) Use a euphemism from your own culture.
> … where there was a cave. Saul went inside to **cover his feet**. (1 Samuel 24:3b ULT) - Some languages might use euphemisms like these:
->
-> > “… where there was a cave. Saul went into the cave **to dig a hole**“
+>
+> > “… where there was a cave. Saul went into the cave **to dig a hole**“
> > “… where there was a cave. Saul went into the cave **to have some time alone**“
->
+>
> But Mary said to the angel, “How will this be, since I have not **known a man**?” (Luke 1:34 ULT)
->
+>
> > But Mary said to the angel, “How will this be, since **I do not know a man**?” - (This is the euphemism used in the original Greek)
(2) State the information plainly without a euphemism if it would not be offensive.
> They found Saul and his sons **fallen** on Mount Gilboa. (1 Chronicles 10:8b ULT)
->
+>
> > “They found Saul and his sons **dead** on Mount Gilboa.”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-events/01.md b/translate/figs-events/01.md
index eaea4749..049c7f36 100644
--- a/translate/figs-events/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-events/01.md
@@ -22,36 +22,36 @@ This sounds like a person must first open the scroll and then break its seals, b
### Translation Strategies
-(1) If your language uses phrases or time words to show that an event happened before one that was already mentioned, consider using one of them.
-(2) If your language uses verb tense or aspect to show that an event happened before one that was already mentioned, consider using that. (See the section on “Aspect” of [Verbs](../figs-verbs/01.md).)
+(1) If your language uses phrases or time words to show that an event happened before one that was already mentioned, consider using one of them.
+(2) If your language uses verb tense or aspect to show that an event happened before one that was already mentioned, consider using that. (See the section on “Aspect” of [Verbs](../figs-verbs/01.md).)
(3) If your language prefers to tell events in the order that they occurred, consider reordering the events so they they are in that order. This may require putting two or more verses together (like 5-6). (See [Verse Bridges](../translate-versebridge/01.md).)
### Examples of Translation Strategies Applied
(1) If your language uses phrases, time words or tenses to show that an event happened before the one just mentioned, consider using one of them.
-> 20 he even added this to them all: he locked John up in prison. Now it came about, when all the people were baptized, Jesus also was baptized. (Luke 3:20-21 ULT)
->
+> 20 he even added this to them all: he locked John up in prison. Now it came about, when all the people were baptized, Jesus also was baptized. (Luke 3:20-21 ULT)
+>
> > 20 But then Herod … had John locked up in prison. 21 **Before John was put in prison,** while all the people were being baptized by John, Jesus also was baptized.
->
+>
> Who is worthy to open the scroll and break its seals? (Revelation 5:2b ULT)
->
+>
> > Who is worthy to open the scroll **after** breaking its seals?
(2) If your language uses verb tense or aspect to show that an event happened before one that was already mentioned, consider using that.
-> Just as Joshua had said to the people, the seven priests carrying seven trumpets of rams’ horns before Yahweh went forward and blew the trumpets, But Joshua commanded the people, saying, “Do not shout nor let your voice be heard, nor let any word leave your mouth until the day I tell you to shout. Then you must shout.” (Joshua 6:8,10 ULT)
->
+> Just as Joshua had said to the people, the seven priests carrying seven trumpets of rams’ horns before Yahweh went forward and blew the trumpets, But Joshua commanded the people, saying, “Do not shout nor let your voice be heard, nor let any word leave your mouth until the day I tell you to shout. Then you must shout.” (Joshua 6:8,10 ULT)
+>
> > 8 Just as Joshua had said to the people, the seven priests carried the seven trumpets of rams’ horns before Yahweh, as they advanced, they gave a blast on the trumpets 10 But Joshua **had commanded** the people, saying, “Do not shout. No sound must leave your mouths until the day I tell you to shout. Only then must you shout.
(3) If your language prefers to tell events in the order that they occur, consider reordering the events. This may require putting two or more verses together (like 5-6).
-> 8 Just as Joshua had said to the people, the seven priests carrying seven trumpets of rams’ horns before Yahweh went forward and blew the trumpets, But Joshua commanded the people, saying, “Do not shout nor let your voice be heard, nor let any word leave your mouth until the day I tell you to shout. Then you must shout.” (Joshua 6:8,10 ULT)
->
+> 8 Just as Joshua had said to the people, the seven priests carrying seven trumpets of rams’ horns before Yahweh went forward and blew the trumpets, But Joshua commanded the people, saying, “Do not shout nor let your voice be heard, nor let any word leave your mouth until the day I tell you to shout. Then you must shout.” (Joshua 6:8,10 ULT)
+>
> > 8,10 Joshua commanded the people, saying, “Do not shout. No sound must leave your mouths until the day I tell you to shout. Only then must you shout.” Then just as Joshua had said to the people, the seven priests carried the seven trumpets of rams horns before Yahweh, as they advanced, they gave a blast on the trumpets…
->
+>
> Who is worthy to open the scroll and break its seals? (Revelation 5:2b ULT)
->
+>
> > Who is worthy to break the seals and open the scroll?
You may also want to watch the video at http://ufw.io/figs\_events.
diff --git a/translate/figs-exclamations/01.md b/translate/figs-exclamations/01.md
index bcf70bb6..f36436c7 100644
--- a/translate/figs-exclamations/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-exclamations/01.md
@@ -20,10 +20,10 @@ Some exclamations have a word that shows feeling. The sentences below have “Oh
The word “Alas” below shows that Gideon was very frightened.
-> When Gideon saw that he was the angel of Yahweh, Gideon lamented, “**Alas**, O my Lord Yahweh, for because of this I have seen the angel of Yahweh face to face!” (Judges 6:22 ULT)
->
+> When Gideon saw that he was the angel of Yahweh, Gideon lamented, “**Alas**, O my Lord Yahweh, for because of this I have seen the angel of Yahweh face to face!” (Judges 6:22 ULT)
+>
> Some exclamations start with a question word such as “how” or “why,” even though they are not questions. The sentence below shows that the speaker is amazed at how unsearchable God’s judgments are.
->
+>
> **How** unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways beyond discovering! (Romans 11:33b ULT)
Some exclamations in the Bible do not have a main verb. The exclamation below shows that the speaker is disgusted with the person he is speaking to.
@@ -43,38 +43,38 @@ Some exclamations in the Bible do not have a main verb. The exclamation below sh
(1) If an exclamation in your language needs a verb, add one. Often a good verb is “is” or “are.”
> You worthless person! (Matthew 5:22b ULT)
->
+>
> > “You **are** such a worthless person!”
->
+>
> Oh, the depth of the riches both of the wisdom and the knowledge of God! (Romans 11:33b ULT)
->
+>
> > “Oh, the riches of the wisdom and the knowledge of God **are** so deep!”
(2) Use an exclamation word from your language that shows the strong feeling. In the first suggested translation below, the word “wow” shows that they were astonished. In the second suggested translation, the expression “Oh no” shows that something terrible or frightening has happened.
> They were extremely astonished, saying, “He has done everything well. He even makes the deaf hear and the mute speak.” (Mark 7:37 ULT)
->
+>
> > “They were extremely astonished, saying, ‘**Wow**! He has done everything well. He even makes the deaf to hear and the mute to speak.’”
->
+>
> Alas, oh my Lord Yahweh! For because of this I have seen the angel of Yahweh face to face! (Judges 6:22b ULT)
->
+>
> > “**Oh no**, Lord Yahweh! I have seen the angel of Yahweh face to face!”
(3) Translate the exclamation word with a sentence that shows the feeling.
> **Alas,** O my Lord Yahweh, for because of this I have seen the angel of Yahweh face to face!” (Judges 6:22 ULT)
->
-> > Lord Yahweh, **what will happen to me**? For I have seen the angel of Yahweh face to face!”
+>
+> > Lord Yahweh, **what will happen to me**? For I have seen the angel of Yahweh face to face!”
> > **Help**, Lord Yahweh! For I have seen the angel of Yahweh face to face!
(4) Use a word that emphasizes the part of the sentence that brings about the strong feeling.
> How unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways beyond discovering! (Romans 11:33b ULT)
->
+>
> > “His judgments are **so** unsearchable and his ways are **far** beyond discovering!”
(5) If the strong feeling is not clear in the target language, then tell how the person felt.
> When Gideon saw that he was the angel of Yahweh, Gideon lamented, “**Alas,** O my Lord Yahweh, for because of this I have seen the angel of Yahweh face to face!” (Judges 6:22 ULT)
->
+>
> > “Gideon understood that this was the angel of Yahweh. **He was terrified** and said, “**Alas**, Lord Yahweh! I have seen the angel of Yahweh face to face!”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-exclusive/01.md b/translate/figs-exclusive/01.md
index ef0189da..e75637c5 100644
--- a/translate/figs-exclusive/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-exclusive/01.md
@@ -26,6 +26,6 @@ John is telling people who have not seen Jesus what he and the other apostles ha
The shepherds were speaking to one another. When they said “us,” they were **including** the people they were speaking to - one another.
-> Now it happened that on one of those days, he indeed got into a boat with his disciples, and he said to them, “Let **us** go over to the other side of the lake.” So they set sail. (Luke 8:22 ULT)
+> Now it happened that on one of those days, he indeed got into a boat with his disciples, and he said to them, “Let **us** go over to the other side of the lake.” So they set sail. (Luke 8:22 ULT)
When Jesus said “us,” he was referring to himself and to the disciples he was speaking to, so this would be the inclusive form.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-exmetaphor/01.md b/translate/figs-exmetaphor/01.md
index e4ca7bd1..7480d4bb 100644
--- a/translate/figs-exmetaphor/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-exmetaphor/01.md
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-An **extended metaphor** is an explicit metaphor that uses multiple images and multiple ideas at the same time. This is in contrast to a [simple metaphor](../figs-simetaphor/01.md), which uses only a single Image and a single Idea. The difference between an extended metaphor and a [complex metaphor](../figs-cometaphor/01.md) is that an extended metaphor is explicitly stated by a writer/speaker, but a complex metaphor is not.
+An **extended metaphor** is an explicit metaphor that uses multiple images and multiple ideas at the same time. This is in contrast to a [simple metaphor](../figs-simetaphor/01.md), which uses only a single Image and a single Idea. The difference between an extended metaphor and a [complex metaphor](../figs-cometaphor/01.md) is that an extended metaphor is explicitly stated by a writer/speaker, but a complex metaphor is not.
### Explanation of an Extended Metaphor
@@ -7,19 +7,19 @@ When using a metaphor, a writer/speaker uses a physical Image in order to expres
In Isaiah 5:1b-7, the prophet Isaiah uses a vineyard (the **Image**) to express God’s disappointment (the **Idea**) with the nation of Israel (the **Topic**) for their unfaithfulness to God and his covenant with them as his people. Farmers care for their gardens, and a farmer would feel disappointed if his vineyard produced bad fruit. If a vineyard produced only bad fruit for a long enough time, the farmer would eventually stop caring for it. We call this an extended metaphor because the prophet describes in detail multiple images relating to a vineyard as well as multiple aspects of God’s disappointment.
-> 1b My well beloved had a **vineyard** on a very fertile hill. 2 He **spaded it,** **removed the stones**, and **planted it** with an excellent kind of vine. He **built a tower** in the middle of it, and also **built a winepress**. **He waited for it to produce grapes, but it produced wild grapes**. 3 So now, inhabitant of Jerusalem and man of Judah; judge between me and my vineyard. 4 What more could have been done for my vineyard, that I have not done for it? **When I looked for it to produce grapes, why did it produce wild grapes**? 5 Now I will tell you what I will do to my vineyard; I will remove the hedge; I will turn it into a pasture; I will break down its wall, and it will be trampled down. 6 I will lay it waste, and it will not be pruned nor hoed. Instead, briers and thorns will spring up. I will also command the clouds not to rain on it. 7 For **the vineyard of Yahweh of hosts is the house of Israel**, and the man of Judah his pleasant planting; **he waited for justice, but instead, there was killing**; **for righteousness, but, instead, a shout for help**. (Isa 5:1b-7 ULT)
+> 1b My well beloved had a **vineyard** on a very fertile hill. 2 He **spaded it,** **removed the stones**, and **planted it** with an excellent kind of vine. He **built a tower** in the middle of it, and also **built a winepress**. **He waited for it to produce grapes, but it produced wild grapes**. 3 So now, inhabitant of Jerusalem and man of Judah; judge between me and my vineyard. 4 What more could have been done for my vineyard, that I have not done for it? **When I looked for it to produce grapes, why did it produce wild grapes**? 5 Now I will tell you what I will do to my vineyard; I will remove the hedge; I will turn it into a pasture; I will break down its wall, and it will be trampled down. 6 I will lay it waste, and it will not be pruned nor hoed. Instead, briers and thorns will spring up. I will also command the clouds not to rain on it. 7 For **the vineyard of Yahweh of hosts is the house of Israel**, and the man of Judah his pleasant planting; **he waited for justice, but instead, there was killing**; **for righteousness, but, instead, a shout for help**. (Isa 5:1b-7 ULT)
### Other Examples from the Bible
In Psalm 23, the psalmist uses the physical **Image** of a shepherd to describe the way that God (the **Topic**) shows great concern and care (the **Idea**) for his people. The psalmist describes multiple aspects of what shepherds do for sheep (leads them to pasture and to water, protects them, etc.). The psalmist also describes multiple aspects of how God takes care of him (gives him life, righteousness, comfort, etc.). Shepherds give sheep what they need, take them to safe places, rescue them, guide them, and protect them. What God does for his people is like these actions.
-> 1 Yahweh is my shepherd; I will lack nothing.
-> 2 He **makes me** to lie down in green pastures;
-> he **leads me** beside tranquil water.
-> 3 He **brings back** my life;
-> he **guides me** along right paths for his name’s sake.
-> 4 Even though I walk through a valley of darkest shadow,
-> I will not fear harm since you are with me;
+> 1 Yahweh is my shepherd; I will lack nothing.
+> 2 He **makes me** to lie down in green pastures;
+> he **leads me** beside tranquil water.
+> 3 He **brings back** my life;
+> he **guides me** along right paths for his name’s sake.
+> 4 Even though I walk through a valley of darkest shadow,
+> I will not fear harm since you are with me;
> your rod and your staff comfort me. (Psalm 23:1-4 ULT)
#### Reasons This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -39,59 +39,59 @@ In Psalm 23, the psalmist uses the physical **Image** of a shepherd to describe
Consider using the same extended metaphor if your readers will understand it in the same way the original readers would have understood it. If not, here are some other strategies:
-(1) If the target audience would think that the images should be understood literally, translate the metaphor as a simile by using words such as “like” or “as.” It may be enough to to do this in just the first sentence or two.
- (2) If the target audience would not know the image, find a way of translating it so they can understand what the image is.
+(1) If the target audience would think that the images should be understood literally, translate the metaphor as a simile by using words such as “like” or “as.” It may be enough to to do this in just the first sentence or two.
+ (2) If the target audience would not know the image, find a way of translating it so they can understand what the image is.
(3) If the target audience still would not understand, then state it clearly.
### Examples of Translation Strategies Applied
(1) If the target audience would think that the images should be understood literally, translate the metaphor as a simile by using words such as “like” or “as.” It may be enough to to do this in just the first sentence or two. See Psalm 23:1-2 as an example:
-> Yahweh is **my shepherd**; I will lack nothing.
-> He makes **me** to lie down in green pastures;
+> Yahweh is **my shepherd**; I will lack nothing.
+> He makes **me** to lie down in green pastures;
> **he leads me** beside tranquil water. (ULT)
Can be translated as:
-> “Yahweh is **like** a shepherd to me, so I will lack nothing.
-> **Like** a shepherd who makes his sheep lie down in green pastures and leads them by peaceful waters, Yahweh helps me to rest peacefully.”
+> “Yahweh is **like** a shepherd to me, so I will lack nothing.
+> **Like** a shepherd who makes his sheep lie down in green pastures and leads them by peaceful waters, Yahweh helps me to rest peacefully.”
(2) If the target audience would not know the image, find a way of translating it so they can understand what the image is.
-> My well beloved had a **vineyard** on a very fertile hill.
-> He **spaded** it, removed the stones, and planted it with **an excellent kind of vine**.
-> He built **a tower** in the middle of it, and also built a **winepress**.
+> My well beloved had a **vineyard** on a very fertile hill.
+> He **spaded** it, removed the stones, and planted it with **an excellent kind of vine**.
+> He built **a tower** in the middle of it, and also built a **winepress**.
> He waited for it to produce grapes, but it only produced **wild grapes.** (Isaiah 5:1b-2 ULT)
May be translated as:
-> My well beloved had a **grapevine garden** on a very fertile hill.
-> He **dug up the ground** and removed the stones, and planted it with **the best grapevines**.
-> He built a **watchtower** in the middle of it, and also built **a tank where he could crush the juice out of the grapes**.
+> My well beloved had a **grapevine garden** on a very fertile hill.
+> He **dug up the ground** and removed the stones, and planted it with **the best grapevines**.
+> He built a **watchtower** in the middle of it, and also built **a tank where he could crush the juice out of the grapes**.
> He waited for it to produce grapes, but it produced **wild grapes that were not good for making wine**.”
(3) If the target audience still would not understand, then state it clearly.
> Yahweh is **my shepherd**; I will lack nothing. (Psalm 23:1 ULT)
->
+>
> > “Yahweh **cares for me** like a shepherd that cares for his sheep, so I will lack nothing.”
->
-> For the vineyard of Yahweh of hosts **is** the house of Israel,
-> and the men of Judah his pleasant planting;
-> he waited for justice, but instead, there was killing;
+>
+> For the vineyard of Yahweh of hosts **is** the house of Israel,
+> and the men of Judah his pleasant planting;
+> he waited for justice, but instead, there was killing;
> for righteousness, but, instead, a shout for help. (Isaiah 5:7 ULT)
Can be translated as:
-> > For the vineyard of Yahweh of hosts **represents** the house of Israel,
-> > and the men of Judah **are like** his pleasant planting;
-> > he waited for justice, but instead, there was killing;
+> > For the vineyard of Yahweh of hosts **represents** the house of Israel,
+> > and the men of Judah **are like** his pleasant planting;
+> > he waited for justice, but instead, there was killing;
> > for righteousness, but, instead, a cry for help.
or as:
-> > **So as** **a farmer stops caring** **for** **a** **grapevine** **garden that produces bad fruit**,
-> > **Yahweh will stop protecting** Israel and Judah,
-> > **because they do not do what is right.**
-> > He waited for justice, but instead, there was killing;
+> > **So as** **a farmer stops caring** **for** **a** **grapevine** **garden that produces bad fruit**,
+> > **Yahweh will stop protecting** Israel and Judah,
+> > **because they do not do what is right.**
+> > He waited for justice, but instead, there was killing;
> > for righteousness, but, instead, a cry for help.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-explicit/01.md b/translate/figs-explicit/01.md
index c365b6ce..c3fa06ea 100644
--- a/translate/figs-explicit/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-explicit/01.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ When the speaker does give the audience information, he can do so in two ways. T
When someone speaks or writes, he has something specific that he wants people to know or do or think about. He normally states this directly. This is explicit information.
-The speaker assumes that his audience already knows certain things that they will need to think about in order to understand this information. Normally he does not tell people these things, because they already know them. This is called assumed knowledge.
+The speaker assumes that his audience already knows certain things that they will need to think about in order to understand this information. Normally he does not tell people these things, because they already know them. This is called assumed knowledge.
The speaker does not always directly state everything that he expects his audience to learn from what he says. Implicit information is information that he expects people to learn from what he says even though he does not state it directly.
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Jesus did not directly say here “I am the Son of Man” but, if the scribe did
> Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! If the mighty deeds had been done in **Tyre and Sidon** which were done in you, they would have repented long ago in sackcloth and ashes. But I say to you, it will be more tolerable for Tyre and Sidon at the **day of judgment** than for you. (Matthew 11:21-22 ULT)
-Jesus assumed that the people he was speaking to knew that Tyre and Sidon were very wicked, and that the day of judgment is a time when God will judge every person. Jesus also knew that the people he was talking to believed that they were good and did not need to repent. Jesus did not need to tell them these things. This is all **assumed knowledge**.
+Jesus assumed that the people he was speaking to knew that Tyre and Sidon were very wicked, and that the day of judgment is a time when God will judge every person. Jesus also knew that the people he was talking to believed that they were good and did not need to repent. Jesus did not need to tell them these things. This is all **assumed knowledge**.
An important piece of **implicit information** here is that the people he was speaking to would be judged more severely than the people of Tyre and Sidon would be judged **because** they did not repent.
@@ -38,28 +38,28 @@ One of the traditions of the elders was a ceremony in which people would wash th
If readers have enough assumed knowledge to be able to understand the message, along with any important implicit information that goes with the explicit information, then it is good to leave that knowledge unstated and leave the implicit information implicit. If the readers do not understand the message because one of these is missing for them, then follow these strategies:
-(1) If readers cannot understand the message because they do not have certain assumed knowledge, then provide that knowledge as explicit information.
+(1) If readers cannot understand the message because they do not have certain assumed knowledge, then provide that knowledge as explicit information.
(2) If readers cannot understand the message because they do not know certain implicit information, then state that information clearly, but try to do it in a way that does not imply that the information was new to the original audience.
### Examples of Translation Strategies Applied
(1) If readers cannot understand the message because they do not have certain assumed knowledge, then provide that knowledge as explicit information.
-> Jesus said to him, “Foxes **have holes**, and the birds of the sky **have nests**, but the Son of Man has nowhere to lay his head.” (Matthew 8:20 ULT)
+> Jesus said to him, “Foxes **have holes**, and the birds of the sky **have nests**, but the Son of Man has nowhere to lay his head.” (Matthew 8:20 ULT)
-The assumed knowledge was that the foxes slept in their holes and birds slept in their nests.
+The assumed knowledge was that the foxes slept in their holes and birds slept in their nests.
> > Jesus said to him, “Foxes **have holes to live in**, and the birds of the sky **have nests to live in**, but the Son of Man has nowhere to lay his head and sleep.”
-> >
-> >
->
+> >
+> >
+>
> It will be more tolerable for **Tyre and Sidon** at the day of judgment than for you (Matthew 11:22 ULT)
-
+
The assumed knowledge was that the people of Tyre and Sidon were very, very wicked. This can be stated explicitly.
->
-> > At the day of judgment, it will be more tolerable for **those cities of Tyre and Sidon, whose people were very wicked**, than it will be for you. or At the day of judgment, It will be more tolerable for those **wicked cities, Tyre and Sidon,** than for you.
->
-> Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? For **they do not wash their hands** when they eat bread. (Matthew 15:2 ULT)
+>
+> > At the day of judgment, it will be more tolerable for **those cities of Tyre and Sidon, whose people were very wicked**, than it will be for you. or At the day of judgment, It will be more tolerable for those **wicked cities, Tyre and Sidon,** than for you.
+>
+> Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? For **they do not wash their hands** when they eat bread. (Matthew 15:2 ULT)
The assumed knowledge was that one of the traditions of the elders was a ceremony in which people would wash their hands in order to be ritually clean before eating, which they must do to be righteous. It was not to remove germs from their hands to avoid sickness, as a modern reader might think.
@@ -72,13 +72,13 @@ The assumed knowledge was that one of the traditions of the elders was a ceremon
The implicit information is that Jesus himself is the Son of Man. Other implicit information is that if the scribe wanted to follow Jesus, then, like Jesus, he would have to live without a house.
> > Jesus said to him, “Foxes have holes, and the birds of the sky have nests, but **I, the Son of Man**, have **no home to rest in. If you want to follow me, you will live as I live**.”
->
-> It will be more tolerable for Tyre and Sidon at the day of judgment than for you (Matthew 11:22 ULT)
+>
+> It will be more tolerable for Tyre and Sidon at the day of judgment than for you (Matthew 11:22 ULT)
The implicit information is that God would not only judge the people; he would punish them. This can be made explicit.
-> > At the day of judgment, God will **punish Tyre and Sidon**, cities whose people were very wicked, **less severely than he will punish you**.
-> > or:
+> > At the day of judgment, God will **punish Tyre and Sidon**, cities whose people were very wicked, **less severely than he will punish you**.
+> > or:
> > At the day of judgment, God will **punish you more severely** than Tyre and Sidon, cities whose people were very wicked.
Modern readers may not know some of the things that the people in the Bible and the people who first read it knew. This can make it hard for them to understand what a speaker or writer says, and to learn things that the speaker left implicit. Translators may need to state some things explicitly in the translation that the original speaker or writer left unstated or implicit.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-explicitinfo/01.md b/translate/figs-explicitinfo/01.md
index 69cc2425..dcae1207 100644
--- a/translate/figs-explicitinfo/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-explicitinfo/01.md
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ If you translate all of the explicit information from the source language into t
### Examples from the Bible
-> **Then** Abimelech came toward the tower and he fought against it, and approached as far as the entrance of the tower in order **to burn it with fire**. (Judges 9:52 ESV)
+> **Then** Abimelech came toward the tower and he fought against it, and approached as far as the entrance of the tower in order **to burn it with fire**. (Judges 9:52 ESV)
In Biblical Hebrew, it is normal to start most sentences with a conjunction such as “and” to show the connection between sentences. In English, it is not natural to do so, it is quite tiresome for the English reader, and it gives the impression that the author is uneducated. In English, it is best to leave the idea of connection between sentences implicit in most cases and not translate the conjunction explicitly.
@@ -28,24 +28,24 @@ In the biblical languages, it was normal to introduce direct speech with two ver
(1) If the explicit information of the source language sounds natural in the target language, then translate it as explicit information.
-* There would be no change to the text using this strategy, so no examples are given here.
+* There would be no change to the text using this strategy, so no examples are given here.
(2) If the explicit information does not sound natural in the target language or seems unnecessary or confusing, make the explicit information implicit. Only do this if the reader can understand this information from the context. You can test this by asking the reader a question about the passage.
> Then Abimelech came toward the tower and he fought against it, and he approached as far as the entrance of the tower in order to burn it with fire. (Judges 9:52 ESV)
->
+>
> > Abimelech came to the tower and fought against it, and he approached the door of the tower **to burn it**. (Or) … **to set it on fire**.
In English, it is clear that the action of this verse follows the action of the previous verse without the use of the connector “and” at the beginning, so it was omitted. Also, the words “with fire” were left out, because this information is communicated implicitly by the word “burn.” An alternative translation for “to burn it” is “to set it on fire.” It is not natural in English to use both “burn” and “fire,” so the English translator should choose only one of them. You can test if the readers understood the implicit information by asking, “How would the door burn?” If they knew it was by fire, then they have understood the implicit information. Or, if you chose the second option, you could ask, “What happens to a door that is set on fire?” If the readers answer, “It burns,” then they have understood the implicit information.
> But the centurion answered and said, “Lord, I am not worthy that you should enter under my roof" (Matthew 8:8a ULT)
->
+>
> > The centurion **answered**, “Lord, I am not worthy that you should enter under my roof”
In English, the information that the centurion responded by speaking is included in the verb “answered,” so the verb “said” can be left implicit. You can test if the readers understood the implicit information by asking, “How did the centurion answer?” If they knew it was by speaking, then they have understood the implicit information.
> He opened his mouth and taught them, saying, (Matthew 5:2 ULT)
->
+>
> > **He began to** teach them, saying, (Or) He taught them, saying,
In English, it would be very strange to include the information that Jesus opened his mouth when he spoke. That information is included in the verbs “taught” and “saying,” so that phrase can be omitted and that information left implicit. However, “he opened his mouth” is an idiom that indicates the beginning of a speech, so that information may be included, or it may also be left implicit.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-extrainfo/01.md b/translate/figs-extrainfo/01.md
index 437d8e08..59096e1c 100644
--- a/translate/figs-extrainfo/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-extrainfo/01.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Sometimes it is better not to state assumed knowledge or implicit information ex
### Examples from the Bible
-> From the eater came forth food;
+> From the eater came forth food;
> and from the strong one came forth sweetness. (Judges 14:14 ULT)
This was a riddle. Samson purposely said this in a way that it would be hard for his enemies to know what it meant. Do not make it clear that the eater and the strong thing was a lion and that the sweet thing to eat was honey.
diff --git a/translate/figs-gendernotations/01.md b/translate/figs-gendernotations/01.md
index 7822c89c..ac1291fb 100644
--- a/translate/figs-gendernotations/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-gendernotations/01.md
@@ -2,10 +2,10 @@ In the Bible, sometimes the words “men,” “brothers,” and “sons” refe
### Description
-In some languages a word that normally refers to men can also be used in a more general way to refer to both men and women. For example, the Bible sometimes says "brothers" when it refers to both brothers and sisters.
+In some languages a word that normally refers to men can also be used in a more general way to refer to both men and women. For example, the Bible sometimes says "brothers" when it refers to both brothers and sisters.
Also in some languages, the masculine pronouns “he” and “him” can be used in a more general way for any person if it is not important whether the person is a man or a woman. In the example below, the pronoun is “his,” but it is not limited to males.
-> A wise son makes **his** father rejoice
+> A wise son makes **his** father rejoice
> but a foolish son brings grief to **his** mother. (Proverbs 10:1 ULT)
#### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -44,21 +44,21 @@ If people would understand that that masculine words like “man,” “brother,
(1) Use nouns that can be used for both men and women.
-> The wise **man** dies just like the fool dies. (Ecclesiastes 2:16b ULT)
->> “The wise **person** dies just like the fool dies.”
+> The wise **man** dies just like the fool dies. (Ecclesiastes 2:16b ULT)
+>> “The wise **person** dies just like the fool dies.”
>> “Wise **people** die just like fools die.”
(2) Use a word that refers to men and a word that refers to women.
-> For we do not want you to be uninformed, **brothers**, about the troubles that happened to us in Asia. (2 Corinthians 1:8) - Paul was writing this letter to both men and women.
->> “For we do not want you to be uninformed, **brothers and sisters**, about the troubles that happened to us in Asia.”
+> For we do not want you to be uninformed, **brothers**, about the troubles that happened to us in Asia. (2 Corinthians 1:8) - Paul was writing this letter to both men and women.
+>> “For we do not want you to be uninformed, **brothers and sisters**, about the troubles that happened to us in Asia.”
(3) Use pronouns that can be used for both men and women.
-> If anyone wants to follow me, he must deny himself, take up his cross, and follow me.” (Matthew 16:24 ULT)
-
+> If anyone wants to follow me, he must deny himself, take up his cross, and follow me.” (Matthew 16:24 ULT)
+
English speakers can change the masculine singular pronouns, “he,” “himself,” and “his” to plural pronouns that do not mark gender, “they,” “themselves,” and “their” in order to show that it applies to all people, not just men.
->
+>
> > “If **people** want to follow me, **they** must deny **themselves**, take up **their** cross, and follow me.”
diff --git a/translate/figs-genericnoun/01.md b/translate/figs-genericnoun/01.md
index 2e2c010e..7ef059a0 100644
--- a/translate/figs-genericnoun/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-genericnoun/01.md
@@ -2,8 +2,8 @@
Generic noun phrases refer to people or things in general rather than to specific individuals or things. This happens frequently in proverbs, because proverbs tell about things that are true about people in general.
-> Can **a man** walk on hot coals without scorching his feet?
-> So is **the man who goes in to his neighbor’s wife**;
+> Can **a man** walk on hot coals without scorching his feet?
+> So is **the man who goes in to his neighbor’s wife**;
> **the one who touches her** will not go unpunished. (Proverbs 6:28-29 ULT)
The phrases in bold above do not refer to a specific man. They refer to any man who does these things.
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Different languages have different ways of showing that noun phrases refer to so
### Examples from the Bible
-> The **righteous person** is kept away from trouble and it comes upon **the wicked** instead. (Proverbs 11:8 ULT)
+> The **righteous person** is kept away from trouble and it comes upon **the wicked** instead. (Proverbs 11:8 ULT)
The bold phrases above do not refer to a specific person but to anyone who does what is right or anyone who is wicked.
@@ -39,27 +39,27 @@ If your language can use the same wording as in the ULT to refer to people or th
(1) Use the word “the” in the noun phrase.
-> Yahweh gives favor to **a good man**, but he condemns **a man who makes evil plans**. (Proverbs 12:2 ULT)
+> Yahweh gives favor to **a good man**, but he condemns **a man who makes evil plans**. (Proverbs 12:2 ULT)
>> “Yahweh gives favor to **the good man**, but he condemns **the man who makes evil plans**.” (Proverbs 12:2)
(2) Use the word “a” in the noun phrase.
-> People curse **the man** who refuses to sell grain. (Proverbs 11:26 ULT)
+> People curse **the man** who refuses to sell grain. (Proverbs 11:26 ULT)
>> “People curse **a man** who refuses to sell grain”
(3) Use the word “any, as in “any person” or “anyone.”
-> People curse **the man** who refuses to sell grain. (Proverbs 11:26 ULT)
+> People curse **the man** who refuses to sell grain. (Proverbs 11:26 ULT)
>> “People curse **any man** who refuses to sell grain.”
(4) Use the plural form, as in “people” (or in this sentence, “men”).
-> People curse **the man** who refuses to sell grain. (Proverbs 11:26 ULT)
+> People curse **the man** who refuses to sell grain. (Proverbs 11:26 ULT)
>> “People curse **men** who refuse to sell grain”
(5) Use any other way that is natural in your language.
-> People curse **the man** who refuses to sell grain. (Proverbs 11:26 ULT)
+> People curse **the man** who refuses to sell grain. (Proverbs 11:26 ULT)
>> “People curse **whoever** refuses to sell grain.”
diff --git a/translate/figs-go/01.md b/translate/figs-go/01.md
index 37f524ec..349a1fbe 100644
--- a/translate/figs-go/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-go/01.md
@@ -43,19 +43,19 @@ If the word used in the ULT would be natural and give the right meaning in your
(1) Use the word “go,” “come,” “take,” or “bring” that would be natural in your language.
-> But you will be free from my oath if you **come** to my relatives and they will not give her to you. (Genesis 24:41 ULT)
+> But you will be free from my oath if you **come** to my relatives and they will not give her to you. (Genesis 24:41 ULT)
>> But you will be free from my oath if you **go** to my relatives and they will not give her to you.
-
->“What did you go out into the desert to see? A reed shaken by the wind? (Luke 7:24b ULT)
+
+>“What did you go out into the desert to see? A reed shaken by the wind? (Luke 7:24b ULT)
>> “What did you come out into the desert to see? A reed shaken by the wind?
(2) Use another word that expresses the right meaning.
-> When you have **come** to the land that Yahweh your God gives you, and when you take possession of it and begin to live in it… (Deuteronomy 17:14 ULT)
+> When you have **come** to the land that Yahweh your God gives you, and when you take possession of it and begin to live in it… (Deuteronomy 17:14 ULT)
>> “When you have **arrived** in the land that Yahweh your God gives you, and when you take possession of it and begin to live in it…”
-
-> Yahweh said to Noah, “**Come**, you and all your household, into the ark… (Genesis 7:1 ULT)
+
+> Yahweh said to Noah, “**Come**, you and all your household, into the ark… (Genesis 7:1 ULT)
>> “Yahweh said to Noah, “**Enter**, you and all your household, into the ark…”
-
-> “What did you go out into the desert to see? A reed shaken by the wind? (Luke 7:24b ULT)
->> “What did you travel out into the desert to see? A reed shaken by the wind?
\ No newline at end of file
+
+> “What did you go out into the desert to see? A reed shaken by the wind? (Luke 7:24b ULT)
+>> “What did you travel out into the desert to see? A reed shaken by the wind?
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-grammar/01.md b/translate/figs-grammar/01.md
index c77387c1..98700a3a 100644
--- a/translate/figs-grammar/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-grammar/01.md
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-Grammar has two main parts: words and structure. Structure involves how we put words together to form phrases, clauses, and sentences. Here is a brief overview of Grammar Topics we will deal with in detail.
+Grammar has two main parts: words and structure. Structure involves how we put words together to form phrases, clauses, and sentences. Here is a brief overview of Grammar Topics we will deal with in detail.
-**Parts of Speech** - Every word in a language belongs to a category called a part of speech. (See [Parts of Speech](../figs-partsofspeech/01.md).)
+**Parts of Speech** - Every word in a language belongs to a category called a part of speech. (See [Parts of Speech](../figs-partsofspeech/01.md).)
-**Sentences** - When we speak, we organize our thoughts in sentences. A sentence usually has a complete thought about an event or a situation or state of being. (See [Sentence Structure](../figs-sentences/01.md).)
+**Sentences** - When we speak, we organize our thoughts in sentences. A sentence usually has a complete thought about an event or a situation or state of being. (See [Sentence Structure](../figs-sentences/01.md).)
* Sentences can be statements, questions, commands, or exclamations. (See [Exclamations](../figs-sentencetypes/01.md).)
* Sentences can have more than one clause. (See [Sentence Structure](../figs-sentences/01.md).)
@@ -10,9 +10,9 @@ Grammar has two main parts: words and structure. Structure involves how we put w
**Possession** - This shows that there is a relationship between two nouns. In English it is marked with “of” as in “the love of God,” or with “‘s” as in “God’s love,” or with a possessive pronoun as in “his love.” (See [Possession](../figs-possession/01.md).)
-**Quotations** - A quotation is a report of what someone else has said.
+**Quotations** - A quotation is a report of what someone else has said.
* Quotations normally have two parts: Information about who said something and what the person said. (See [Quotations and Quote Margins](../writing-quotations/01.md).)
-* Quotations can be either direct quotes or indirect quotes. (See [Direct and Indirect Quotations](../figs-quotations/01.md).)
+* Quotations can be either direct quotes or indirect quotes. (See [Direct and Indirect Quotations](../figs-quotations/01.md).)
* Quotes can have quotes within them. (See [Quotes within Quotes](../figs-quotesinquotes/01.md).)
* Quotes can be marked to make it easy for readers to understand who said what. (See [Quote Markings](../figs-quotemarks/01.md).)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-hendiadys/01.md b/translate/figs-hendiadys/01.md
index 4bd6aeef..20bd53a5 100644
--- a/translate/figs-hendiadys/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-hendiadys/01.md
@@ -42,28 +42,28 @@ If the hendiadys would be natural and give the right meaning in your language, c
(1) Substitute the describing noun with an adjective that means the same thing.
-> For I will give you **a mouth** **and wisdom** … (Luke 21:15a ULT)
->
+> For I will give you **a mouth** **and wisdom** … (Luke 21:15a ULT)
+>
> > For I will give you **wise words** …
->
+>
> Walk in a manner that is worthy of God, who calls you into **his own kingdom and glory**. (1 Thessalonians 2:12b ULT)
->
+>
> > You should walk in a manner that is worthy of God, who calls you to **his own glorious kingdom**.
(2) Substitute the describing noun with a phrase that means the same thing.
-> For I will give you **a mouth** **and wisdom** … (Luke 21:15a ULT)
->
+> For I will give you **a mouth** **and wisdom** … (Luke 21:15a ULT)
+>
> > for I will give you **words of wisdom**.
->
+>
> You should walk in a manner that is worthy of God, who calls you into **his own kingdom and glory**. (1 Thessalonians 2:12b ULT)
->
+>
> > You should walk in a manner that is worthy of God, who calls you to **his own kingdom of glory**.
(3) Substitute the describing adjective with an adverb that means the same thing.
> If you are willing and obedient … (Isaiah 1:19a ULT)
->
+>
> > If you are **willingly obedient** …
(4) Substitute other parts of speech that mean the same thing and show that one word or phrase describes the other.
@@ -78,6 +78,6 @@ The adjective “obedient” can be substituted with the verb “obey.”
> We look forward to receiving **the blessed hope and appearing of the glory** of **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**. (Titus 2:13b ULT)
-The noun “glory” can be changed to the adjective “glorious” to make it clear that Jesus’ appearing is what we hope for. Also, “Jesus Christ” can be moved to the front of the phrase and “great God and Savior” put into a relative clause that describes the one person, Jesus Christ.
+The noun “glory” can be changed to the adjective “glorious” to make it clear that Jesus’ appearing is what we hope for. Also, “Jesus Christ” can be moved to the front of the phrase and “great God and Savior” put into a relative clause that describes the one person, Jesus Christ.
->> We look forward to receiving **what we are longing for, the blessed and glorious appearing** of **Jesus Christ, who is our great God and Savior**.
+>> We look forward to receiving **what we are longing for, the blessed and glorious appearing** of **Jesus Christ, who is our great God and Savior**.
diff --git a/translate/figs-hyperbole/01.md b/translate/figs-hyperbole/01.md
index a5c662b1..05a58b85 100644
--- a/translate/figs-hyperbole/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-hyperbole/01.md
@@ -4,13 +4,13 @@ A speaker or writer can use exactly the same words to say something that he mean
* It rains here every night.
-1. The speaker means this as literally true if he means that it really does rain here every night.
-2. The speaker means this as a **generalization** if he means that it rains here most nights.
-3. The speaker means this as a **hyperbole** if he wants to say that it rains more than it actually does, usually in order to express a strong attitude toward the amount or frequency of rain, such as being annoyed or being happy about it.
+1. The speaker means this as literally true if he means that it really does rain here every night.
+2. The speaker means this as a **generalization** if he means that it rains here most nights.
+3. The speaker means this as a **hyperbole** if he wants to say that it rains more than it actually does, usually in order to express a strong attitude toward the amount or frequency of rain, such as being annoyed or being happy about it.
**Hyperbole**: In hyperbole, a figure of speech that uses exaggeration, a speaker deliberately describes something with an extreme or even unreal statement, usually to show his strong feeling or opinion about it. He expects people to understand that he is exaggerating.
-> They will not leave **stone upon stone in you.** (Luke 19:44b ULT)
+> They will not leave **stone upon stone in you.** (Luke 19:44b ULT)
This is an exaggeration. It means that the enemies will completely destroy Jerusalem.
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ This hyperbole means that he had learned everything an Egyptian education could
**Generalization:** This is a statement that is true most of the time or in most situations that it could apply to.
-> The one who ignores instruction **will have poverty and shame,**
+> The one who ignores instruction **will have poverty and shame,**
> but **honor will come** to him who learns from correction. (Proverbs 13:18)
These generalizations tell about what normally happens to people who ignore instruction and what normally happens to people who learn from correction. There may be some exceptions to these statements, but they are generally true.
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ These generalizations tell about what normally happens to people who ignore inst
This generalization tells about what Gentiles were known for doing. Many Gentiles did this. It does not matter if a few did not. The point was that the hearers should not join in this well-known practice.
-Even though a hyperbole or a generalization may have a strong-sounding word like “all,” “always,” “none,” or “never,” it does not necessarliy mean **exactly** “all,” “always,” “none,” or “never.” It simply means “most,” “most of the time,” “hardly any,” or “rarely.”
+Even though a hyperbole or a generalization may have a strong-sounding word like “all,” “always,” “none,” or “never,” it does not necessarliy mean **exactly** “all,” “always,” “none,” or “never.” It simply means “most,” “most of the time,” “hardly any,” or “rarely.”
#### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -48,9 +48,9 @@ When Jesus said to cut off your hand, he meant that we should **do whatever extr
The bolded phrase is an exaggeration for the purpose of expressing the emotion that the Philistine army was overwhelming in number. It means that there were **many, many** soldiers in the Philistine army.
-> But as his anointing teaches you **every****thing** and is true and is not a lie, and just as it has taught you, remain in him. (1 John 2:27b ULT)
+> But as his anointing teaches you **every****thing** and is true and is not a lie, and just as it has taught you, remain in him. (1 John 2:27b ULT)
-This is a hyperbole. It expresses the assurance that God’s Spirit teaches us about **all things that we need to know**. God’s Spirit does not teach us about everything that it is possible to know.
+This is a hyperbole. It expresses the assurance that God’s Spirit teaches us about **all things that we need to know**. God’s Spirit does not teach us about everything that it is possible to know.
> When they found him, they also said to him, “**Everyone** is looking for you.” (Mark 1:37 ULT)
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This is not hyperbole. Jesus really walked on the water. It is a literal stateme
Do not assume that the word “all” is always a generalization that means “most.”
-> Yahweh is righteous in **all** his ways
+> Yahweh is righteous in **all** his ways
> and gracious in **all** he does. (Psalms 145:17 ULT)
Yahweh is always righteous. This is a completely true statement.
@@ -99,25 +99,25 @@ If the hyperbole or generalization would be natural and people would understand
(1) Express the meaning without the exaggeration.
-> The Philistines gathered together to fight against Israel: three thousand chariots, six thousand men to drive the chariots, and troops **as numerous as the sand on the seashore**. (1 Samuel 13:5a ULT)
+> The Philistines gathered together to fight against Israel: three thousand chariots, six thousand men to drive the chariots, and troops **as numerous as the sand on the seashore**. (1 Samuel 13:5a ULT)
>> The Philistines gathered together to fight against Israel: three thousand chariots, six thousand men to drive the chariots, and **a great number of troops**.
(2) For a generalization, show that it is a generalization by using a phrase like “in general” or “in most cases.”
-> **The one who ignores instruction will have poverty and shame.** (Proverbs 13:18a ULT)
+> **The one who ignores instruction will have poverty and shame.** (Proverbs 13:18a ULT)
>> **In general,** the one who ignores instruction will have poverty and shame
-
-> And when you pray, do not make useless repetitions as the Gentiles do, for they think that they will be heard because of their many words. (Matthew 6:7)
+
+> And when you pray, do not make useless repetitions as the Gentiles do, for they think that they will be heard because of their many words. (Matthew 6:7)
>> “And when you pray, do not make useless repetitions as the Gentiles **generally** do, for they think that they will be heard because of their many words.”
(3) For a hyperbole or a generalization, add a word like “many” or “almost” to show that the hyperbole or generalization is not meant to be exact.
-> The **whole** country of Judea and **all** the people of Jerusalem went out to him. (Mark 1:5a ULT)
->> **Almost all** the country of Judea and **almost all** the people of Jerusalem went out to him.”
->> or:
+> The **whole** country of Judea and **all** the people of Jerusalem went out to him. (Mark 1:5a ULT)
+>> **Almost all** the country of Judea and **almost all** the people of Jerusalem went out to him.”
+>> or:
>> **Many** of the country of Judea and **many** of the people of Jerusalem went out to him.”
(4) For a hyperbole or a generalization that has a word like “all,” always,” “none,” or “never,” consider deleting that word.
-> The **whole** country of Judea and **all** the people of Jerusalem went out to him. (Mark 1:5a ULT)
+> The **whole** country of Judea and **all** the people of Jerusalem went out to him. (Mark 1:5a ULT)
>> The country of Judea and the people of Jerusalem went out to him.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-hypo/01.md b/translate/figs-hypo/01.md
index 8627bee7..7ddc4022 100644
--- a/translate/figs-hypo/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-hypo/01.md
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ People sometimes express regrets about things that have not happened or that are
#### Hypothetical Situations in the Past
-> “Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! **If the mighty deeds had been done** in Tyre and Sidon which were done in you, **they would have repented** long ago in sackcloth and ashes.” (Matthew 11:21 ULT)
+> “Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! **If the mighty deeds had been done** in Tyre and Sidon which were done in you, **they would have repented** long ago in sackcloth and ashes.” (Matthew 11:21 ULT)
Here in Matthew 11:21, Jesus said that **if** the people living in the ancient cities of Tyre and Sidon had been able to see the miracles that he performed, they would have repented long ago. The people of Tyre and Sidon did not actually see his miracles, and they did not repent. He said this to rebuke the people of Chorazin and Bethsaida who had seen his miracles and yet did not repent.
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Martha said this to express her wish that Jesus would have come sooner so that h
#### Hypothetical Situations in the Present
-> And no man puts new wine into old wineskins. **But if he did do that, the new wine would burst the wineskins, and it would be spilled out, and the wineskins would be destroyed**. (Luke 5:37 ULT)
+> And no man puts new wine into old wineskins. **But if he did do that, the new wine would burst the wineskins, and it would be spilled out, and the wineskins would be destroyed**. (Luke 5:37 ULT)
Jesus told about what would happen if a person were to put new wine into old wineskins. But no one would do that. He used this imaginary situation as an example to show that there are times when it is unwise to mix new things with old things. He did this so that people could understand why his disciples were not fasting as people traditionally did.
@@ -57,9 +57,9 @@ Jesus was talking about a future time when very bad things would happen. He told
#### Expressing Emotion About a Hypothetical Situation
-People sometimes talk about hypothetical situations in order to express regrets and wishes. Regrets are about the past and wishes are about the present and future.
+People sometimes talk about hypothetical situations in order to express regrets and wishes. Regrets are about the past and wishes are about the present and future.
-> The Israelites said to them, “**If only we had died by Yahweh’s hand in the land of Egypt when we were sitting by the pots of meat and were eating bread to the full.** For you have brought us out into this wilderness to kill our whole community with hunger.” (Exodus 16:3 ULT)
+> The Israelites said to them, “**If only we had died by Yahweh’s hand in the land of Egypt when we were sitting by the pots of meat and were eating bread to the full.** For you have brought us out into this wilderness to kill our whole community with hunger.” (Exodus 16:3 ULT)
Here the Israelites were afraid that they would have to suffer and die of hunger in the wilderness, and so they wished that they had stayed in Egypt and died there with full stomachs. They were complaining, expressing regret that this had not happened.
diff --git a/translate/figs-idiom/01.md b/translate/figs-idiom/01.md
index 1b759bb5..18dbe17d 100644
--- a/translate/figs-idiom/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-idiom/01.md
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
An idiom is a figure of speech made up of a group of words that, as a whole, has a meaning that is different from what one would understand from the meanings of the individual words. Someone from outside of the culture usually cannot understand an idiom without someone inside the culture explaining its true meaning. Every language uses idioms. Some English examples are:
-* You are pulling my leg. (This means, “You are teasing me by telling me something that is not true.”)
-* Do not push the envelope. (This means, “Do not take a matter to its extreme.”)
-* This house is under water. (This means, “The debt owed for this house is greater than its actual value.”)
-* We are painting the town red. (This means, “We are going around town tonight celebrating very intensely.”)
+* You are pulling my leg. (This means, “You are teasing me by telling me something that is not true.”)
+* Do not push the envelope. (This means, “Do not take a matter to its extreme.”)
+* This house is under water. (This means, “The debt owed for this house is greater than its actual value.”)
+* We are painting the town red. (This means, “We are going around town tonight celebrating very intensely.”)
### Description
An idiom is a phrase that has a special meaning to the people of the language or culture who use it. Its meaning is different than what a person would understand from the meanings of the individual words that form the phrase.
-> he **set his face** to go to Jerusalem. (Luke 9:51b ULT)
+> he **set his face** to go to Jerusalem. (Luke 9:51b ULT)
The words “set his face” is an idiom that means “decided.”
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ The phrase “come under my roof” is an idiom that means “enter my house.”
This idiom means “Listen carefully and remember what I say.”
-**Purpose**: An idiom is probably created in a culture somewhat by accident when someone describes something in an unusual way. But, when that unusual way communicates the message powerfully and people understand it clearly, other people start to use it. After a while, it becomes a normal way of talking in that language.
+**Purpose**: An idiom is probably created in a culture somewhat by accident when someone describes something in an unusual way. But, when that unusual way communicates the message powerfully and people understand it clearly, other people start to use it. After a while, it becomes a normal way of talking in that language.
#### Reasons This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ This idiom means “Listen carefully and remember what I say.”
This means, “We and you belong to the same race, the same family.”
-> The children of Israel went out **with a high hand**. (Exodus 14:8b ASV)
+> The children of Israel went out **with a high hand**. (Exodus 14:8b ASV)
This means, “The Israelites went out defiantly.”
@@ -57,19 +57,19 @@ If the idiom would be clearly understood in your language, consider using it. If
(1) Translate the meaning plainly without using an idiom.
-> Then all Israel came to David at Hebron and said, “Look, we are your **flesh and bone**.” ( 1 Chronicles 11:1 ULT)
+> Then all Israel came to David at Hebron and said, “Look, we are your **flesh and bone**.” ( 1 Chronicles 11:1 ULT)
>> Look, we all **belong to the same nation**.
-
-> Then he **set his face** to go to Jerusalem. (Luke 9:51b ULT)
+
+> Then he **set his face** to go to Jerusalem. (Luke 9:51b ULT)
>> He started to travel to Jerusalem, **determined to reach it**.
-
-> I am not worthy that you would come **under my roof**. (Luke 7:6b ULT)
+
+> I am not worthy that you would come **under my roof**. (Luke 7:6b ULT)
>> I am not worthy that you should enter **my house**.
(2) Use an idiom that people use in your own language that has the same meaning.
-> Put these words **into your ears** (Luke 9:44a ULT)
+> Put these words **into your ears** (Luke 9:44a ULT)
>> **Be all ears** when I say these words to you.
-
-> ”My **eyes grow dim** from grief (Psalm 6:7a ULT)
->> I am crying my **eyes out**
\ No newline at end of file
+
+> ”My **eyes grow dim** from grief (Psalm 6:7a ULT)
+>> I am crying my **eyes out**
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-imperative/01.md b/translate/figs-imperative/01.md
index c2d98caa..8d9ade9e 100644
--- a/translate/figs-imperative/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-imperative/01.md
@@ -35,14 +35,14 @@ In the Bible, God blesses people by using imperatives. This indicates what his w
#### Imperatives that function as conditions
-An imperative sentence can also be used to tell the **condition** under which something will happen. The proverbs mainly tell about life and things that often happen. The purpose of Proverbs 4:6 below is not primarily to give a command, but to teach what people can expect to happen **if** they love wisdom.
+An imperative sentence can also be used to tell the **condition** under which something will happen. The proverbs mainly tell about life and things that often happen. The purpose of Proverbs 4:6 below is not primarily to give a command, but to teach what people can expect to happen **if** they love wisdom.
->**Do not abandon** wisdom and she will watch over you;
+>**Do not abandon** wisdom and she will watch over you;
> **love** her and she will keep you safe. (Proverbs 4:6 ULT)
The purpose of Proverbs 22:6, below, is to teach what people can expect to happen if they teach their children the way they should go.
-> **Teach** a child the way he should go,
+> **Teach** a child the way he should go,
> and when he is old he will not turn away from that instruction. (Proverbs 22:6 ULT)
### Translation Strategies
@@ -56,30 +56,30 @@ The purpose of Proverbs 22:6, below, is to teach what people can expect to happe
(1) If people would not use an imperative sentence for one of the functions in the Bible, try using a statement instead.
> **Be clean**. (Matthew 8:3b ULT)
->
-> > “You are now clean.”
+>
+> > “You are now clean.”
> > “I now cleanse you.”
->
+>
> God said, “**Let there be** light,” and there was light. (Genesis 1:3 ULT)
->
+>
> > God said, “**There is now light** “ and there was light.
->
+>
> God blessed them and said to them, “**Be fruitful**, and **multiply**. **Fill** the earth, and **subdue** it. **Have dominion** over the fish of the sea, over the birds of the sky, and over every living thing that moves upon the earth.” (Genesis 1:28 ULT)
->
+>
> > God blessed them and said to them, “**My will for you is that you be fruitful**, and **multiply**. **Fill** the earth, and **subdue** it. **I want you to have dominion** over the fish of the sea, over the birds of the sky, and over every living thing that moves upon the earth.”
(2) If people would not understand that a sentence is used to cause something to happen, add a connecting word like “so” to show that what happened was a result of what was said.
> God said, “**Let there be** light,” and there was light. (Genesis 1:3 ULT)
->
-> > God said, ‘Let there be light,’ **so** there was light.
+>
+> > God said, ‘Let there be light,’ **so** there was light.
> > God said, “Light must be;” **as a result**, there was light.
(3) If people would not use a command as a condition, translate it as a statement with the words “if” and “then.”
-> Teach a child the way he should go, and when he is old he will not turn away from that instruction. (Proverbs 22:6 ULT)
+> Teach a child the way he should go, and when he is old he will not turn away from that instruction. (Proverbs 22:6 ULT)
Translated as:
-> “**If** you teach a child the way he should go,
+> “**If** you teach a child the way he should go,
> **then** when he is old he will not turn away from that instruction.”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-informremind/01.md b/translate/figs-informremind/01.md
index b9bb0264..6b57d274 100755
--- a/translate/figs-informremind/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-informremind/01.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Some languages can use a word or phrase with a noun to give information about that noun or to remind people of something about it.
-* Mary gave some of the food to her sister, **who was very thankful**.
+* Mary gave some of the food to her sister, **who was very thankful**.
The phrase “who was very thankful” immediately follows the word “sister” and informs us about how Mary’s sister responded when Mary gave her the food. In this case it does not distinguish this sister from another sister that Mary might have. It simply gives added information about that sister.
@@ -20,9 +20,9 @@ Languages have different ways of signaling the parts of communication that the l
### Translation Principles
-* If your language does not use phrases with a noun for new information or a reminder, you may need to put that information or reminder in a different part of the sentence.
-* Try to present it in a weak way.
-* Ask yourself: In our language, how do we express information in a strong way, and how do we express it in a weaker way?
+* If your language does not use phrases with a noun for new information or a reminder, you may need to put that information or reminder in a different part of the sentence.
+* Try to present it in a weak way.
+* Ask yourself: In our language, how do we express information in a strong way, and how do we express it in a weaker way?
### Examples From the Bible
@@ -52,24 +52,24 @@ If people would understand the purpose of a phrase with a noun, then consider ke
(1) Put the information in another part of the sentence and add words that show its purpose.
-> I hate those who serve **worthless** idols. (Psalm 31:6a ULT)
->
->
->
+> I hate those who serve **worthless** idols. (Psalm 31:6a ULT)
+>
+>
+>
> By saying “worthless idols,” David was commenting about all idols and giving his reason for hating those who serve them. He was not distinguishing worthless idols from valuable idols.“
->
+>
> > **Because** idols are worthless, I hate those who serve them.”
->
+>
> … for your **righteous** judgments are good. (Psalm 119:39b ULT)
->
+>
> > … for your judgments are good **because** they are righteous.
->
-> How can Sarah, **who is 90 years old**, bear a son? (Genesis 17:17b ULT)
->
+>
+> How can Sarah, **who is 90 years old**, bear a son? (Genesis 17:17b ULT)
+>
> The phrase “who is 90 years old” is a reminder of Sarah’s age. It tells why Abraham was asking the question. He did not expect that a woman who was that old could bear a child.“
->
+>
> > Can Sarah bear a son **even when** she is 90 years old?”
->
+>
> I will call on Yahweh, **who is worthy to be praised.** (2 Samuel 22:4a ULT)
There is only one Yahweh. The phrase “who is worthy to be praised” gives a reason for calling on Yahweh.
@@ -79,5 +79,5 @@ There is only one Yahweh. The phrase “who is worthy to be praised” gives a r
(2) Use one of your language’s ways for expressing information in a weak way.
> The name of the third river is Tigris, **which flows east of Asshur**. (Genesis 2:14a ULT)
->
+>
> > “The name of the third river is Tigris. **It flows east of Asshur**.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-infostructure/01.md b/translate/figs-infostructure/01.md
index 1129232f..ea452fd1 100644
--- a/translate/figs-infostructure/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-infostructure/01.md
@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
### Description
-Different languages arrange the parts of the sentence in different ways. In English, a sentence normally has the subject first, then the verb, then the object, then other modifiers, like this: Peter painted his house yesterday.
+Different languages arrange the parts of the sentence in different ways. In English, a sentence normally has the subject first, then the verb, then the object, then other modifiers, like this: Peter painted his house yesterday.
Many other languages normally put these things in a different order such as: Painted yesterday Peter his house.
Although all languages have a normal order for parts of a sentence, this order can change depending on what information the speaker or writer considers to be the most important.
- Suppose that someone is answering the question, “What did Peter paint yesterday?” The person asking the question already knows all of the information in our sentence above except for the object, “his house.” Therefore, that becomes the most important part of the information, and a person answering in English might say "His house is what Peter painted (yesterday)."
+ Suppose that someone is answering the question, “What did Peter paint yesterday?” The person asking the question already knows all of the information in our sentence above except for the object, “his house.” Therefore, that becomes the most important part of the information, and a person answering in English might say "His house is what Peter painted (yesterday)."
This puts the most important information first, which is normal for English. Many Other Languages would normally put the most important information last. In the flow of a text, the most important information is usually what the writer considers to be new information for the reader. In some languages the new information comes first, and in others it comes last.
### Reasons This Is a Translation Issue
-* Different languages arrange the parts of a sentence in different ways. If you (the translator) copy the order of the parts of a sentence from the source, it may not make sense in your language.
-* Different languages put important or new information in different places in the sentence. If you keep the important or new information in the same place that it had in the source language, it may be confusing or give the wrong message in your language.
+* Different languages arrange the parts of a sentence in different ways. If you (the translator) copy the order of the parts of a sentence from the source, it may not make sense in your language.
+* Different languages put important or new information in different places in the sentence. If you keep the important or new information in the same place that it had in the source language, it may be confusing or give the wrong message in your language.
### Examples From the Bible
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ In this verse, the most important part of the information is first, that “woe
(1) Study how your language arranges the parts of a sentence, and use that order in your translation.
-This is the verse in the original Greek order:
+This is the verse in the original Greek order:
> And he went out from there and came to the hometown his, and they followed him the disciples his. (Mark 6:1)
@@ -55,9 +55,9 @@ The ULT has put this into the normal order for English:
If your language puts the important information last, you can change the order of the verse.
> > Now the day was about to come to an end, and the twelve came to him and said, “Because we are here in an desolate place, send the crowd away that they may go into the surrounding villages and countryside to find lodging and food.”
->
->
->
+>
+>
+>
> Woe to you, when all men speak well of you, for that is how their ancestors treated the false prophets. (Luke 6:26 ULT)
If your language puts the important information last, you can change the order of the verse.
diff --git a/translate/figs-irony/01.md b/translate/figs-irony/01.md
index c22e7521..7f161b51 100755
--- a/translate/figs-irony/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-irony/01.md
@@ -21,13 +21,13 @@ If someone does not realize that a speaker is using irony, he will think that th
People worshiped idols as if their idols had knowledge or power, and Yahweh was angry at them for doing that. So he used irony and challenged their idols to tell what would happen in the future. He knew that the idols could not do this, but by speaking as if they could, he mocked the idols, making their inability more obvious, and rebuked the people for worshiping them.
-> Can you lead light and darkness to their places of work?
-> Can you find the way back to their houses for them?
+> Can you lead light and darkness to their places of work?
+> Can you find the way back to their houses for them?
> **Undoubtedly you know, for you were born then;** “**the number of your days is so large!** “ (Job 38:20-21 ULT)
Job thought that he was wise. Yahweh used irony to show Job that he was not so wise. The two phrases in bold above are irony. They emphasize the opposite of what they say, because they are so obviously false. They emphasize that Job could not possibly answer God’s questions about the creation of light because Job was not born until many, many years later.
-> Already you are satisfied! Already you have become rich! **You began to reign** apart from us, and I wish you really did reign, so that we also might reign with you.(1 Corinthians 4:8 ULT)
+> Already you are satisfied! Already you have become rich! **You began to reign** apart from us, and I wish you really did reign, so that we also might reign with you.(1 Corinthians 4:8 ULT)
The Corinthians considered themselves to be very wise, self-sufficient, and not in need of any instruction from the Apostle Paul. Paul used irony, speaking as if he agreed with them, to show how proudly they were acting and how far from being wise they really were.
@@ -43,27 +43,27 @@ If the irony would be understood correctly in your language, translate it as it
(1) Translate it in a way that shows that the speaker is saying what someone else believes.
> **How well you reject the commandment of God** so that you may keep your tradition! (Mark 7:9a ULT)
->
-> > **You think that you are doing well when you reject God’s commandment** so you may keep your tradition!
+>
+> > **You think that you are doing well when you reject God’s commandment** so you may keep your tradition!
> > **You act like it is good to reject God’s commandment** so you may keep your tradition!
->
+>
> I did not come to call **the righteous**, but sinners to repentance.” (Luke 5:32 ULT)
->
+>
> > I did not come to call **people who think that they are righteous** to repentance, but to call sinners to repentance.
(2) Translate the actual, intended meaning of the statement of irony.
> **How well you reject the commandment of God** so that you may keep your tradition! (Mark 7:9a ULT)
->
+>
> > **You are doing a terrible thing when you reject the commandment of God** so you may keep your tradition!
->
+>
> ”Present your case,” says Yahweh; “present your best arguments for your idols,” says the King of Jacob. “**Let them bring us their own arguments; have them come forward and declare to us what will happen**, so we may know these things well. **Have them tell us of earlier predictive declarations, so we can reflect on them and know how they were fulfilled**.” (Isaiah 41:21-22 ULT)
->
+>
> > ‘Present your case,’ says Yahweh; ‘present your best arguments for your idols,’ says the King of Jacob. Your idols **cannot bring us their own arguments or come forward to declare to us what will happen** so we may know these things well. We cannot hear them because **they cannot speak** to tell us their earlier predictive declarations, so we cannot reflect on them and know how they were fulfilled.
->
-> Can you lead light and darkness to their places of work?
-> Can you find the way back to their houses for them?
-> **Undoubtedly you know, for you were born then;**
+>
+> Can you lead light and darkness to their places of work?
+> Can you find the way back to their houses for them?
+> **Undoubtedly you know, for you were born then;**
> **the number of your days is so large!**“ (Job 38:20-21 ULT)
->
+>
> > Can you lead light and darkness to their places of work? Can you find the way back to their houses for them? **You act like you know how light and darkness were created, as if you were there; as if you are as old as creation, but you are not**!
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-litany/01.md b/translate/figs-litany/01.md
index 422080b2..76c3dc7d 100644
--- a/translate/figs-litany/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-litany/01.md
@@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ In this passage Yahweh is telling the people of Edom all the things they should
(1) The verse before the litany explains its overall meaning. That verse can be placed as an introduction. In English, a colon would indicate that what follows elaborates on this meaning. The accusation in the middle of the litany can be placed on a line of its own so that readers will see that the sentence that follows is like all the others in the litany.
> > You did nothing to help the Israelites when strangers carried away their wealth. They conquered all the cities of Judah, and they even plundered Jerusalem. And you were just as bad as those foreigners, because you did nothing to help:
->
+>
> You should not have looked on the day of your brother, on the day of his misfortune. You should not have rejoiced over the sons of Judah in the day of their perishing. You should not have made your mouth great in a day of distress. You should not have entered the gate of my people in the day of their calamity. Yes, you! You should not have looked on his evil in the day of his calamity. You women should not have looted his wealth in the day of his calamity. You should not have stood at the crossroads to cut down his fugitives. You should not have delivered up his survivors in a day of distress. (Obadiah 1:12-14)
(2) The sentence before the litany explains its overall meaning. That sentence can be placed as an introduction. In English, a colon would indicate that what follows elaborates on this meaning. Because the first three sentences are shorter, they can be presented on a single line, so that the way the litany develops may be recognized more clearly.
> Not one of them will get away, not one of them will escape:
->
+>
> Though they dig into Sheol, there my hand will take them. Though they climb up to heaven, there I will bring them down. Though they hide on the top of Carmel, there I will search and take them. Though they are hidden from my sight in the bottom of the sea, there will I give orders to the serpent, and it will bite them. Though they go into captivity, driven by their enemies before them, there will I give orders to the sword, and it will kill them. (Amos 9:1b–4 ULT)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-litotes/01.md b/translate/figs-litotes/01.md
index f0e8df35..4d8e1005 100644
--- a/translate/figs-litotes/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-litotes/01.md
@@ -16,9 +16,9 @@ By using litotes, Paul emphasized that his visit with them was **very** useful.
By using litotes, Luke emphasized that there was a **lot** of excitement or anxiety among the soldiers about what happened to Peter. (Peter had been in prison, and even though there were soldiers guarding him, he escaped when an angel let him out. So they were very agitated.)
-> But you, Bethlehem, in the land of Judah,
-> are **not the least** among the leaders of Judah,
-> for from you will come a ruler
+> But you, Bethlehem, in the land of Judah,
+> are **not the least** among the leaders of Judah,
+> for from you will come a ruler
> who will shepherd my people Israel. (Matthew 2:6 ULT)
By using litotes, the prophet emphasized that Bethlehem would be a **very important city**.
@@ -33,9 +33,9 @@ If the litotes would be understood correctly, consider using it.
(1) If the meaning with the negative would not be clear, give the **positive** meaning in a strong way.
-> For you yourselves know, brothers, that our coming to you was **not useless**. (1 Thessalonians 2:1 ULT)
+> For you yourselves know, brothers, that our coming to you was **not useless**. (1 Thessalonians 2:1 ULT)
>> “For you yourselves know, brothers, our visit to you **did much good**.”
-
-> Now when it became day, there was **no small disturbance** among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter. (Acts 12:18 ULT)
->> “Now when it became day, there was **great excitement** among the soldiers, regarding what had happened to Peter.”
+
+> Now when it became day, there was **no small disturbance** among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter. (Acts 12:18 ULT)
+>> “Now when it became day, there was **great excitement** among the soldiers, regarding what had happened to Peter.”
>> “Now when it became day, the soldiers were **very concerned** because of what had happened to Peter.”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-merism/01.md b/translate/figs-merism/01.md
index 48343288..25583e86 100644
--- a/translate/figs-merism/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-merism/01.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Merism is a figure of speech in which a person refers to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it. By referring to the extreme parts, the speaker intends to include also everything in between those parts.
> “I am **the alpha and the omega**,” says the Lord God, “the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty.” (Revelation 1:8 ULT)
->
+>
> I am **the alpha and the omega**, **the first and the last**, **the beginning and the end**. (Revelation 22:13, ULT)
**Alpha and omega** are the first and last letters of the Greek alphabet. This is a merism that includes everything from the beginning to the end. It means eternal.
@@ -38,18 +38,18 @@ If the merism would be natural and give the right meaning in your language, cons
(1) Identify what the merism refers to without mentioning the parts.
-> I praise you, Father, Lord of **heaven and earth**. (Matthew 11:25b ULT)
+> I praise you, Father, Lord of **heaven and earth**. (Matthew 11:25b ULT)
>> I praise you, Father, Lord of **everything**.
-
-> **From the rising of the sun to its setting**, Yahweh’s name should be praised. (Psalm 113:3 ULT)
+
+> **From the rising of the sun to its setting**, Yahweh’s name should be praised. (Psalm 113:3 ULT)
>> **In all places**, people should praise Yahweh’s name.
(2) Identify what the merism refers to and include the parts.
-> I praise you, Father, Lord of **heaven and earth**. (Matthew 11:25b ULT)
+> I praise you, Father, Lord of **heaven and earth**. (Matthew 11:25b ULT)
>> I praise you, Father, Lord of **everything, including both what is in heaven and what is on earth**.
-
-> He will bless those who honor him, both **young and old**. (Psalm 115:13 ULT)
+
+> He will bless those who honor him, both **young and old**. (Psalm 115:13 ULT)
>> He will bless **all those** who honor him, regardless of whether they are **young or old**.
diff --git a/translate/figs-metaphor/01.md b/translate/figs-metaphor/01.md
index 4c2e6dc7..751d266b 100644
--- a/translate/figs-metaphor/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-metaphor/01.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ A metaphor is a figure of speech in which someone speaks of one thing as if it w
For example, someone might say, "The girl I love is a red rose."
-A girl and a rose are very different things, but the speaker considers that they are alike in some way. The hearer’s task is to understand in what way they are alike.
+A girl and a rose are very different things, but the speaker considers that they are alike in some way. The hearer’s task is to understand in what way they are alike.
### The Parts of a Metaphor
@@ -13,12 +13,12 @@ The example above shows us that a metaphor has three parts. In this metaphor, th
Every metaphor has three parts:
-* The **Topic**, the item being immediately discussed by the writer/speaker.
-
-* The **Image**, the physical item (object, event, action, etc.) which the speaker uses to describe the topic.
-
-* The **Idea**, the abstract concept or quality that the physical **Image** brings to the mind of the hearer when he thinks of how the **Image** and the **Topic** are similar. Often, the **Idea** of a metaphor is not explicitly stated in the Bible, but it is only implied from the context. The hearer or reader usually needs to think of the **Idea** himself.
-
+* The **Topic**, the item being immediately discussed by the writer/speaker.
+
+* The **Image**, the physical item (object, event, action, etc.) which the speaker uses to describe the topic.
+
+* The **Idea**, the abstract concept or quality that the physical **Image** brings to the mind of the hearer when he thinks of how the **Image** and the **Topic** are similar. Often, the **Idea** of a metaphor is not explicitly stated in the Bible, but it is only implied from the context. The hearer or reader usually needs to think of the **Idea** himself.
+
Using these terms, we can say that a metaphor is a figure of speech that uses a physical **Image** to apply an abstract **Idea** to the speaker’s **Topic**.
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Sometimes speakers use metaphors that are very common in their language. However
### Passive Metaphors
-A passive metaphor is a metaphor that has been used so much in the language that its speakers no longer regard it as one concept standing for another. Linguists often call these “dead metaphors.” Passive metaphors are extremely common. Examples in English include the terms “table **leg**,” “family **tree**,” “book **leaf**” (meaning a page in a book), or the word “crane” (meaning a large machine for lifting heavy loads). English speakers simply think of these words as having more than one meaning. Examples of passive metaphors in Biblical Hebrew include using the word “hand” to represent “power,” using the word “face” to represent “presence,” and speaking of emotions or moral qualities as if they were “clothing.”
+A passive metaphor is a metaphor that has been used so much in the language that its speakers no longer regard it as one concept standing for another. Linguists often call these “dead metaphors.” Passive metaphors are extremely common. Examples in English include the terms “table **leg**,” “family **tree**,” “book **leaf**” (meaning a page in a book), or the word “crane” (meaning a large machine for lifting heavy loads). English speakers simply think of these words as having more than one meaning. Examples of passive metaphors in Biblical Hebrew include using the word “hand” to represent “power,” using the word “face” to represent “presence,” and speaking of emotions or moral qualities as if they were “clothing.”
#### Patterned Pairs of Concepts acting as Metaphors
@@ -40,10 +40,10 @@ Patterned pairs of concepts are constantly used for metaphorical purposes in the
When these metaphors are used in normal ways, it is rare that the speaker and audience regard them as figurative speech. Examples of metaphors in English that go unrecognized are:
-* “Turn the heat **up**.” More is spoken of as up.
-* “Let us **go ahead** with our debate.” Doing what was planned is spoken of as walking or advancing.
-* “You **defend** your theory well.” Argument is spoken of as war.
-* “A **flow** of words” Words are spoken of as liquids.
+* “Turn the heat **up**.” More is spoken of as up.
+* “Let us **go ahead** with our debate.” Doing what was planned is spoken of as walking or advancing.
+* “You **defend** your theory well.” Argument is spoken of as war.
+* “A **flow** of words” Words are spoken of as liquids.
English speakers do not view these as metaphorical expressions or figures of speech, so it would be wrong to translate them into other languages in a way that would lead people to pay special attention to them as figurative speech. For a description of important patterns of this kind of metaphor in biblical languages, please see [Biblical Imagery - Common Patterns](../bita-part1/01.md) and the pages it will direct you to.
@@ -75,11 +75,11 @@ In this metaphor, Jesus called himself the bread of life. The **Topic** is “I
### Reasons This Is a Translation Issue
-* People may not recognize that something is a metaphor. In other words, they may mistake a metaphor for a literal statement, and thus, misunderstand it.
-* People may not be familiar with the thing that is used as an image, and so, not be able to understand the metaphor.
-* If the topic is not stated, people may not know what the topic is.
-* People may not know the points of comparison that the speaker wants them to understand. If they fail to think of these points of comparison, they will not understand the metaphor.
-* People may think that they understand the metaphor, but they do not. This can happen when they apply points of comparison from their own culture, rather than from the biblical culture.
+* People may not recognize that something is a metaphor. In other words, they may mistake a metaphor for a literal statement, and thus, misunderstand it.
+* People may not be familiar with the thing that is used as an image, and so, not be able to understand the metaphor.
+* If the topic is not stated, people may not know what the topic is.
+* People may not know the points of comparison that the speaker wants them to understand. If they fail to think of these points of comparison, they will not understand the metaphor.
+* People may think that they understand the metaphor, but they do not. This can happen when they apply points of comparison from their own culture, rather than from the biblical culture.
#### Translation Principles
@@ -108,17 +108,17 @@ If people would understand the metaphor in the same way that the original reader
If people do not or would not understand it, here are some other strategies.
-(1) If the metaphor is a common expression in the source language or expresses a patterned pair of concepts in a biblical language (that is, it is a passive metaphor), then express the **Idea** in the simplest way preferred by your language.
+(1) If the metaphor is a common expression in the source language or expresses a patterned pair of concepts in a biblical language (that is, it is a passive metaphor), then express the **Idea** in the simplest way preferred by your language.
-(2) If the metaphor seems to be an active metaphor, you can translate it literally **if you think that the target language also uses this metaphor in the same way to mean the same thing as in the Bible**. If you do this, be sure to test it to make sure that the language community understands it correctly.
+(2) If the metaphor seems to be an active metaphor, you can translate it literally **if you think that the target language also uses this metaphor in the same way to mean the same thing as in the Bible**. If you do this, be sure to test it to make sure that the language community understands it correctly.
(3) If the target audience does not realize that it is a metaphor, then change the metaphor to a simile. Some languages do this by adding words such as “like” or “as.” See [Simile](../figs-simile/01.md). (
4) If the target audience would not know the **Image**, see [Translate Unknowns](../translate-unknown/01.md) for ideas on how to translate that image.
-(5) If the target audience would not use that **Image** for that meaning, use an image from your own culture instead. Be sure that it is an image that could have been possible in Bible times.
+(5) If the target audience would not use that **Image** for that meaning, use an image from your own culture instead. Be sure that it is an image that could have been possible in Bible times.
-(6) If the target audience would not know what the **Topic** is, then state the topic clearly. (However, do not do this if the original audience did not know what the Topic was.)
+(6) If the target audience would not know what the **Topic** is, then state the topic clearly. (However, do not do this if the original audience did not know what the Topic was.)
(7) If the target audience would not know the intended similarity (the **Idea**) between the topic and the image, then state it clearly. (8) If none of these strategies is satisfactory, then simply state the **Idea** plainly without using a metaphor.
@@ -127,13 +127,13 @@ If people do not or would not understand it, here are some other strategies.
(1) If the metaphor is a common expression in the source language or expresses a patterned pair of concepts in a biblical language (that is, a passive metaphor), then express the Idea in the simplest way preferred by your language.
> Then, see, one of the leaders of the synagogue, named Jairus, came, and when he saw him, **fell at his feet**. (Mark 5:22 ULT)
->
+>
> > Then one of the leaders of the synagogue, named Jairus, came, and when he saw him, **immediately bowed down in front of him**.
(2) If the metaphor seems to be an active metaphor, you can translate it literally **if you think that the target language also uses this metaphor in the same way to mean the same thing as in the Bible**. If you do this, be sure to test it to make sure that the language community understands it correctly.
-> But Jesus said to them, “He wrote this commandment to you because of your **hardness of heart.** (Mark 10:5 ULT)
->
+> But Jesus said to them, “He wrote this commandment to you because of your **hardness of heart.** (Mark 10:5 ULT)
+>
> > It was because of your **hard hearts** that he wrote you this law,
We made no change to this one, but it must be tested to make sure that the target audience correctly understands this metaphor.
@@ -141,43 +141,43 @@ We made no change to this one, but it must be tested to make sure that the targe
(3) If the target audience does not realize that it is a metaphor, then change the metaphor to a simile. Some languages do this by adding words such as “like” or “as.”
> Yet, Yahweh, you are our father; we **are the clay.** You **are our potter**; and we all are the work of your hand. (Isaiah 64:8 ULT)
->
+>
> > And yet, Yahweh, you are our father; we are **like** clay. You are **like** a potter; and we all are the work of your hand.
(4) If the target audience would not know the **Image**, see [Translate Unknowns](../translate-unknown/01.md) for ideas on how to translate that image.
> Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me? It is hard for you **to kick against a goad**. (Acts 26:14b ULT)
->
+>
> > Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me? It is hard for you to **kick against a pointed stick**.
(5) If the target audience would not use that **Image** for that meaning, use an image from your own culture instead. Be sure that it is an image that could have been possible in Bible times.
> Yet, Yahweh, you are our father; we are the **clay**. You are our **potter**; and we all are the work of your hand. (Isaiah 64:8 ULT)
->
-> > “And yet, Yahweh, you are our father; we are the **wood**. You are our **carver**; and we all are the work of your hand.”
+>
+> > “And yet, Yahweh, you are our father; we are the **wood**. You are our **carver**; and we all are the work of your hand.”
> > “And yet, Yahweh, you are our father; we are the **string**. You are the **weaver**; and we all are the work of your hand.”
(6) If the target audience would not know what the **Topic** is, then state the topic clearly. (However, do not do this if the original audience did not know what the topic was.)
> Yahweh lives; may **my rock** be praised. May the God of my salvation be exalted. (Psalm 18:46 ULT)
->
+>
> > Yahweh lives; **He is my rock**. May he be praised. May the God of my salvation be exalted.
(7) If the target audience would not know the intended similarity between the Topic and the Image, then state it clearly.
> Yahweh lives; may **my rock** be praised. May the God of my salvation be exalted. (Psalm 18:46 ULT)
->
+>
> > Yahweh lives; may he be praised because he is the rock **under which I can hide from my enemies**. May the God of my salvation be exalted.
->
+>
> Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me? It is hard for you **to kick against a goad**. (Acts 26:14 ULT)
->
+>
> > Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me? You **fight against me and hurt yourself like an ox that kicks against its owner’s pointed stick**.
(8) If none of these strategies are satisfactory, then simply state the idea plainly without using a metaphor.
> I will make you to become **fishers of men**. (Mark 1:17b ULT)
->
-> > I will make you to become **people who gather men**.
+>
+> > I will make you to become **people who gather men**.
> > Now you gather fish. I will make you **gather people**.
To learn more about specific metaphors, see [Biblical Imagery - Common Patterns](../bita-part1/01.md).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-metonymy/01.md b/translate/figs-metonymy/01.md
index 4a3f9c1e..fa49f8fa 100644
--- a/translate/figs-metonymy/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-metonymy/01.md
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ If people would easily understand the metonym, consider using it. Otherwise, her
(1) Use the metonym along with the name of the thing it represents.
> And he took the cup in the same way after the supper, saying, “**This cup** is the new covenant in my blood, which is poured out for you. (Luke 22:20 ULT)
->
+>
> > “He took the cup in the same way after supper, saying, “**The wine in this cup** is the new covenant in my blood, which is poured out for you.”
This verse also contains a second metonym: The cup, (representing the wine it contains) also represents the new covenant made with the blood Christ shed for us.
@@ -53,13 +53,13 @@ This verse also contains a second metonym: The cup, (representing the wine it co
(2) Use the name of the thing the metonym represents.
> The Lord God will give him **the throne** of his father David. (Luke 1:32b ULT)
->
-> > “The Lord God will give him **the kingly authority** of his father, David.”
-> > or:
+>
+> > “The Lord God will give him **the kingly authority** of his father, David.”
+> > or:
> > “The Lord God will **make him king** like his ancestor, King David.”
->
+>
> Who warned you to flee from **the wrath** that is coming? (Luke 3:7b ULT)
->
+>
> > “Who warned you to flee from God’s coming **punishment**?”
To learn about some common metonymies, see [Biblical Imagery - Common Metonymies](../bita-part2/01.md).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-nominaladj/01.md b/translate/figs-nominaladj/01.md
index 487acd41..fe9fb008 100644
--- a/translate/figs-nominaladj/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-nominaladj/01.md
@@ -18,9 +18,9 @@ In Exodus 30:15, the word “rich” acts as a noun in the phrase “the rich,
### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
-* Many times in the Bible adjectives are used as nouns to describe a group of people.
-* Some languages do not use adjectives in this way.
-* Readers of these languages may think that the text is talking about one particular person when it is really talking about the group of people whom the adjective describes.
+* Many times in the Bible adjectives are used as nouns to describe a group of people.
+* Some languages do not use adjectives in this way.
+* Readers of these languages may think that the text is talking about one particular person when it is really talking about the group of people whom the adjective describes.
### Examples From the Bible
@@ -42,8 +42,8 @@ If your language uses adjectives as nouns to refer to a class of people, conside
(1) Use the adjective with a plural form of the noun that the adjective describes.
-> The scepter of wickedness must not rule in the land of **the righteous**. (Psalms 125:3a ULT)
+> The scepter of wickedness must not rule in the land of **the righteous**. (Psalms 125:3a ULT)
>> The scepter of wickedness must not rule in the land of **righteous people**.
-
-> Blessed are **the meek**. (Matthew 5:5a ULT)
+
+> Blessed are **the meek**. (Matthew 5:5a ULT)
>> Blessed are **people who are meek**.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-orderHeb/01.md b/translate/figs-orderHeb/01.md
index d14f95ad..19a90f7c 100644
--- a/translate/figs-orderHeb/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-orderHeb/01.md
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
The normal word order for Biblical Hebrew is: **Conjunction–Verb–Subject–Object**.
-However, there are many different reasons why a writer/speaker of Biblical Hebrew might choose a different word order. Some of the variations are important for understanding and translating the Hebrew text, and some are not. This module will briefly explain some of the most important variations in Hebrew word order and how those variations affect the meaning of the text.
+However, there are many different reasons why a writer/speaker of Biblical Hebrew might choose a different word order. Some of the variations are important for understanding and translating the Hebrew text, and some are not. This module will briefly explain some of the most important variations in Hebrew word order and how those variations affect the meaning of the text.
#### **Particle**–Verb–Subject–Object
-A particle is a word that has a grammatical function but does not fit into the main parts of speech (i.e. noun, verb, adverb). Particles do not change. Sometimes a particle takes the place of the conjunction. Often (but not always) in these cases, the particle is functioning as a [connecting word](../grammar-connect-words-phrases/01.md) that expresses a specific kind of logical relationship between the chunk before the particle and the chunk after the particle. NOTE: this rule does not apply to negative particles or temporal particles.
+A particle is a word that has a grammatical function but does not fit into the main parts of speech (i.e. noun, verb, adverb). Particles do not change. Sometimes a particle takes the place of the conjunction. Often (but not always) in these cases, the particle is functioning as a [connecting word](../grammar-connect-words-phrases/01.md) that expresses a specific kind of logical relationship between the chunk before the particle and the chunk after the particle. NOTE: this rule does not apply to negative particles or temporal particles.
#### Conjunction–**Subject**–Verb–Object
diff --git a/translate/figs-parables/01.md b/translate/figs-parables/01.md
index 233695ac..a250b6c7 100644
--- a/translate/figs-parables/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-parables/01.md
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-A parable is a short story that teaches something(s) that is true, and delivers the lesson in a way that is easy to understand and hard to forget.
+A parable is a short story that teaches something(s) that is true, and delivers the lesson in a way that is easy to understand and hard to forget.
### Description
@@ -10,11 +10,11 @@ This parable teaches that if a person does not have spiritual understanding, he
### Examples From the Bible
-> Neither do people light a lamp and put it under a basket but, rather, on the lampstand, and it shines for everyone in the house. Let your light shine before people in such a way that they see your good deeds and praise your Father who is in heaven. (Matthew 5:15-16 ULT)
-
+> Neither do people light a lamp and put it under a basket but, rather, on the lampstand, and it shines for everyone in the house. Let your light shine before people in such a way that they see your good deeds and praise your Father who is in heaven. (Matthew 5:15-16 ULT)
+
This parable teaches us not to hide the way we live for God from other people.
->
-> Then Jesus presented another parable to them. He said, “The kingdom of heaven is like a mustard seed which a man took and sowed in his field. This seed is indeed the smallest of all other seeds. But when it has grown, it is greater than the garden plants and becomes a tree, so that the birds of the air come and nest in its branches.” (Matthew 13:31-32 ULT)
+>
+> Then Jesus presented another parable to them. He said, “The kingdom of heaven is like a mustard seed which a man took and sowed in his field. This seed is indeed the smallest of all other seeds. But when it has grown, it is greater than the garden plants and becomes a tree, so that the birds of the air come and nest in its branches.” (Matthew 13:31-32 ULT)
This parable teaches that the kingdom of God may seem small at first, but it will grow and spread throughout the world.
@@ -30,9 +30,9 @@ This parable teaches that the kingdom of God may seem small at first, but it wil
If people do not know what a lampstand is, you could substitute something else that people put a light on so it can give light to the house.
-> > Jesus also said to them, “The lamp is not brought in order to put it under a basket, or under the bed, is it? Is it not so that it might be put on **a high shelf?**
->
-> Then Jesus presented another parable to them. He said, “The kingdom of heaven is like a mustard seed which a man took and **sowed** in his field. It is indeed the smallest of all the seeds. But when it has grown, it is greater than the garden plants. It becomes a tree, so that the birds of the air come and nest in its branches.” (Matthew 13:31-32 ULT)
+> > Jesus also said to them, “The lamp is not brought in order to put it under a basket, or under the bed, is it? Is it not so that it might be put on **a high shelf?**
+>
+> Then Jesus presented another parable to them. He said, “The kingdom of heaven is like a mustard seed which a man took and **sowed** in his field. It is indeed the smallest of all the seeds. But when it has grown, it is greater than the garden plants. It becomes a tree, so that the birds of the air come and nest in its branches.” (Matthew 13:31-32 ULT)
To sow seeds means to toss them so that they scatter on the ground. If people are not familiar with sowing, you can substitute planting.
@@ -40,10 +40,10 @@ To sow seeds means to toss them so that they scatter on the ground. If people ar
(2) If the teaching of the parable is unclear, consider telling a little about what it teaches in the introduction, such as “Jesus told this story about being generous.”
-> **Jesus also said to them**, “The lamp is not brought in order to put it under a basket, or under the bed, is it? Is it not so that it might be put on the lampstand? (Mark 4:21 ULT)
->
-> > **Jesus told them a parable about why they should witness openly.** “Jesus also said to them, “The lamp is not brought in order to put it under a basket, or under the bed, is it? Is it not so that it might be put on the lampstand? (Mark 4:21 ULT)
->
+> **Jesus also said to them**, “The lamp is not brought in order to put it under a basket, or under the bed, is it? Is it not so that it might be put on the lampstand? (Mark 4:21 ULT)
+>
+> > **Jesus told them a parable about why they should witness openly.** “Jesus also said to them, “The lamp is not brought in order to put it under a basket, or under the bed, is it? Is it not so that it might be put on the lampstand? (Mark 4:21 ULT)
+>
> **Then Jesus presented another parable to them.** He said, “The kingdom of heaven is like a mustard seed which a man took and sowed in his field. It is indeed the smallest of all the seeds. But when it has grown, it is greater than the garden plants. It becomes a tree, so that the birds of the air come and nest in its branches.” (Matthew 13:31-32 ULT)
->
+>
> > **Then Jesus presented another parable to them about how the Kingdom of God grows**. He said, “The kingdom of heaven is like a mustard seed which a man took and sowed in his field. This seed is indeed the smallest of all the seeds. But when it has grown, it is greater than the garden plants. It becomes a tree, so that the birds of the air come and nest in its branches.”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-parallelism/01.md b/translate/figs-parallelism/01.md
index 59381401..3d82d4ad 100644
--- a/translate/figs-parallelism/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-parallelism/01.md
@@ -3,18 +3,18 @@
In parallelism, two phrases or clauses that are similar in structure or idea are used together. The following are some of the different kinds of parallelism.
-* The second clause or phrase means the same as the first. This is called synonymous parallelism.
-* The second clarifies or strengthens the meaning of the first.
-* The second completes what is said in the first.
-* The second says something that contrasts with the first, but adds to the same idea.
+* The second clause or phrase means the same as the first. This is called synonymous parallelism.
+* The second clarifies or strengthens the meaning of the first.
+* The second completes what is said in the first.
+* The second says something that contrasts with the first, but adds to the same idea.
-Parallelism is most commonly found in Old Testament poetry, such as in the books of Psalms and Proverbs. It also occurs in Greek in the New Testament, both in the four gospels and in the apostles’ letters.
+Parallelism is most commonly found in Old Testament poetry, such as in the books of Psalms and Proverbs. It also occurs in Greek in the New Testament, both in the four gospels and in the apostles’ letters.
Synonymous parallelism (the kind in which the two phrases mean the same thing) in the poetry of the original languages has several effects:
-* It shows that something is very important by saying it more than once and in more than one way.
-* It helps the hearer to think more deeply about the idea by saying it in different ways.
-* It makes the language more beautiful and raises it above the ordinary way of speaking.
+* It shows that something is very important by saying it more than once and in more than one way.
+* It helps the hearer to think more deeply about the idea by saying it in different ways.
+* It makes the language more beautiful and raises it above the ordinary way of speaking.
#### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -26,38 +26,38 @@ Note: We use the term “synonymous parallelism” for long phrases or clauses t
**(1) The second clause or phrase means the same as the first.**
-> Your word is a lamp to my feet
+> Your word is a lamp to my feet
> and a light for my path. (Psalm 119:105 ULT)
Both parts of the sentence are metaphors saying that God’s word teaches people how to live.
-> You make him to rule over the works of your hands;
+> You make him to rule over the works of your hands;
> you have put all things under his feet (Psalm 8:6 ULT)
Both lines say that God made man the ruler of everything.
**(2) The second clarifies or strengthens the meaning of the first.**
-> The eyes of Yahweh are everywhere,
+> The eyes of Yahweh are everywhere,
> keeping watch over the evil and the good. (Proverbs 15:3 ULT)
The second line tells more specifically what Yahweh watches.
**(3) The second completes what is said in the first.**
-> I lift up my voice to Yahweh,
+> I lift up my voice to Yahweh,
> and he answers me from his holy hill. (Psalm 3:4 ULT)
The second line tells what Yahweh does in response to what the person does in the first clause.
**(4) The second says something that contrasts with the first, but adds to the same idea.**
-> For Yahweh approves of the way of the righteous,
+> For Yahweh approves of the way of the righteous,
> but the way of the wicked will perish. (Psalm 1:6 ULT)
This contrasts what happens to righteous people with what happens to wicked people.
-> A gentle answer turns away wrath,
+> A gentle answer turns away wrath,
> but a harsh word stirs up anger. (Proverbs 15:1 ULT)
This contrasts what happens when someone gives a gentle answer with what happens when someone says something harsh.
@@ -76,11 +76,11 @@ For most kinds of parallelism, it is good to translate both of the clauses or ph
> Until now you have dealt deceitfully with me and you have spoken lies to me. (Judges 16:13, ULT) - Delilah expressed this idea twice to emphasize that she was very upset.
> > “Until now you have deceived me with your lies.
->
-> Yahweh sees everything a person does and watches all the paths he takes. (Proverbs 5:21 ULT) - The phrase “all the paths he takes” is a metaphor for “all he does.”
->
+>
+> Yahweh sees everything a person does and watches all the paths he takes. (Proverbs 5:21 ULT) - The phrase “all the paths he takes” is a metaphor for “all he does.”
+>
> > “Yahweh pays attention to everything a person does.”
->
+>
> For Yahweh has a lawsuit with his people, and he will fight in court against Israel. (Micah 6:2 ULT) - This parallelism describes one serious disagreement that Yahweh had with one group of people. If this is unclear, the phrases can be combined:
> > “For Yahweh has a lawsuit with his people, Israel.”
@@ -91,8 +91,8 @@ For most kinds of parallelism, it is good to translate both of the clauses or ph
(3) If it appears that the clauses are used together to intensify an idea in them, you could use words like “very,” “completely” or “all.”
-> Until now you have dealt deceitfully with me and you have spoken lies to me. (Judges 16:13, ULT)
-> > “All you have done is lie to me.”
-
-> Yahweh sees everything a person does and watches all the paths he takes. (Proverbs 5:21 ULT)
+> Until now you have dealt deceitfully with me and you have spoken lies to me. (Judges 16:13, ULT)
+> > “All you have done is lie to me.”
+
+> Yahweh sees everything a person does and watches all the paths he takes. (Proverbs 5:21 ULT)
> > “Yahweh sees absolutely everything that a person does.”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-partsofspeech/01.md b/translate/figs-partsofspeech/01.md
index 075a5325..b72339c7 100644
--- a/translate/figs-partsofspeech/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-partsofspeech/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Description
-Parts of speech are categories of words. The different categories of words have different functions in a sentence. All languages have parts of speech, and all words in a language belong to a part of speech. Most languages have these basic parts of speech, with some variations, and some languages have more categories than this. This is not a completely universal list of parts of speech, but it covers the basic categories.
+Parts of speech are categories of words. The different categories of words have different functions in a sentence. All languages have parts of speech, and all words in a language belong to a part of speech. Most languages have these basic parts of speech, with some variations, and some languages have more categories than this. This is not a completely universal list of parts of speech, but it covers the basic categories.
**VERBS** are words that express either an action (such as “come,” “go,” “eat”) or a state-of-being (such as “is,” “are,” “was”). More detailed information can be found on [Verbs](../figs-verbs/01.md).
@@ -13,8 +13,8 @@ Parts of speech are categories of words. The different categories of words have
**PREPOSITIONS** are words that begin phrases which connect a noun or verb with something else in the sentence that gives more detail about that noun or verb. For example, “The girl ran **to her father**.” Here the phrase with the preposition “to” tells the direction of the girl’s running (the action) in relation to her father. Another example is, “The crowd **around Jesus** grew in numbers.” The phrase with the preposition **around** tells the location of the crowd in relation to Jesus. Some examples of prepositions are “to,” “from,” “in,” “out,” “on,” “off,” “with,” “without,” “above,” “below,” “before,” “after,” “behind,” “in front of,” “among,” “through,” “beyond,” “among.”
-**ARTICLES** are words that are used with nouns to show whether or not the speaker is referring to something that his listener should be able to identify. In English these words are: “a,” “an,” and “the.” The words **a** and **an** mean the same thing. If a speaker says “**a dog,** he does not expect his listener to know which dog he is talking about; this might be the first time he says anything about a dog. If a speaker says **the** dog, he is usually referring to a specific dog, and he expects his listener to know which dog he is talking about. English speakers also use the article **the** to show that they are talking about something in general. For example, they can say “**The** elephant is a large animal” and refer to elephants in general, not a specific elephant. *NOTE: Not all languages use articles in exactly the same way.* For example, articles can mean different things in Greek than in Hebrew. More information about this can be found on [Generic Noun Phrases](../figs-genericnoun/01.md).
+**ARTICLES** are words that are used with nouns to show whether or not the speaker is referring to something that his listener should be able to identify. In English these words are: “a,” “an,” and “the.” The words **a** and **an** mean the same thing. If a speaker says “**a dog,** he does not expect his listener to know which dog he is talking about; this might be the first time he says anything about a dog. If a speaker says **the** dog, he is usually referring to a specific dog, and he expects his listener to know which dog he is talking about. English speakers also use the article **the** to show that they are talking about something in general. For example, they can say “**The** elephant is a large animal” and refer to elephants in general, not a specific elephant. *NOTE: Not all languages use articles in exactly the same way.* For example, articles can mean different things in Greek than in Hebrew. More information about this can be found on [Generic Noun Phrases](../figs-genericnoun/01.md).
-**ADJECTIVES** are words that describe nouns and express such things as quantity, size, color, and age. Some examples are: “many,” “big,” “blue,” “old,” “smart,” “tired,” and many, many others. Sometimes people use adjectives to give some information about something, and sometimes people use them to distinguish one item from another. For example, in the phrase **my elderly father** the adjective **elderly** simply tells something about my father. But in the phrase **my eldest sister** the word **eldest** distinguishes that sister from any other older sisters I might have. More information about this can be found on [Distinguishing versus Informing or Reminding](../figs-distinguish/01.md).
+**ADJECTIVES** are words that describe nouns and express such things as quantity, size, color, and age. Some examples are: “many,” “big,” “blue,” “old,” “smart,” “tired,” and many, many others. Sometimes people use adjectives to give some information about something, and sometimes people use them to distinguish one item from another. For example, in the phrase **my elderly father** the adjective **elderly** simply tells something about my father. But in the phrase **my eldest sister** the word **eldest** distinguishes that sister from any other older sisters I might have. More information about this can be found on [Distinguishing versus Informing or Reminding](../figs-distinguish/01.md).
**ADVERBS** are words that describe verbs or adjectives and tell such things as how something happens, when it happens, where it happens, why it happens, or to what extent it happens. Many English adverbs end in **ly**. Some examples of adverbs include the words “slowly,” “later,” “far,” “intentionally,” “very,” and many others.
diff --git a/translate/figs-pastforfuture/01.md b/translate/figs-pastforfuture/01.md
index 422c73a3..e8ed2b8d 100755
--- a/translate/figs-pastforfuture/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-pastforfuture/01.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
The predictive past is a figure of speech that uses the past tense to refer to things that will happen in the future. This is sometimes done in prophecy to show that the event will certainly happen. It is also called the prophetic perfect.
-> Therefore my people have gone into captivity for lack of understanding;
+> Therefore my people have gone into captivity for lack of understanding;
> their honored leaders go hungry, and their common people have nothing to drink. (Isaiah 5:13 ULT)
In the example above, the people of Israel had not yet gone into captivity, but God spoke of their going into captivity as if it had already happened because he had decided that they certainly would go into captivity.
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Readers who are not aware of the past tense being used in prophecy to refer to f
> Now Jericho was tightly closed because of the sons of Israel. No one went out and no one came in. Yahweh said to Joshua, “See, I have delivered Jericho, and its king, and its powerful soldiers into your hand." (Joshua 6:1-2 ULT)
-> For to us a child has been born, to us a son has been given;
+> For to us a child has been born, to us a son has been given;
> and the rule will be on his shoulder. (Isaiah 9:6a ULT)
@@ -39,17 +39,17 @@ If the past tense would be natural and give the right meaning in your language,
(1) Use the future tense to refer to future events.
-> For to us a child **has been born**, to us a son **has been given**. (Isaiah 9:6a ULT)
+> For to us a child **has been born**, to us a son **has been given**. (Isaiah 9:6a ULT)
>> “For to us a child **will be born**, to us a son **will be given**.
(2) If it refers to something that would happen very soon, use a form that shows that.
> Yahweh said to Joshua, “See, I have delivered Jericho, and its king, and its powerful soldiers into your hand. (Joshua 6:2 ULT)
->
-> > Yahweh said to Joshua, “See, I **am about to deliver** over to you Jericho, its king, and its powerful soldiers.”
+>
+> > Yahweh said to Joshua, “See, I **am about to deliver** over to you Jericho, its king, and its powerful soldiers.”
(3) Some languages may use the present tense to show that something will happen very soon.
> Yahweh said to Joshua, “See, I have delivered Jericho, and its king, and its powerful soldiers into your hand.” (Joshua 6:2 ULT)
->
+>
> > Yahweh said to Joshua, “See, I **am delivering** over to you Jericho, its king, and its powerful soldiers.”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-personification/01.md b/translate/figs-personification/01.md
index c316c704..c1ff61cd 100644
--- a/translate/figs-personification/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-personification/01.md
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
### Description
-because personification makes it easier to talk about things we cannot see, such as wisdom or sin. For example:
+because personification makes it easier to talk about things we cannot see, such as wisdom or sin. For example:
-> Does not Wisdom call out? (Proverbs 8:1a ULT)
+> Does not Wisdom call out? (Proverbs 8:1a ULT)
-> Sin crouches at the door. (Genesis 4:7b ULT)
+> Sin crouches at the door. (Genesis 4:7b ULT)
People also use personification because it is sometimes easier to talk about people’s relationships with non-human things such as wealth as if they were relationships between people.
-> You cannot serve God and wealth. (Matthew 6:24b ULT)
+> You cannot serve God and wealth. (Matthew 6:24b ULT)
-In each case, the purpose of the personification is to highlight a certain characteristic of the non-human thing. As in metaphor, the reader needs to think of the way that the thing is like a certain kind of person.
+In each case, the purpose of the personification is to highlight a certain characteristic of the non-human thing. As in metaphor, the reader needs to think of the way that the thing is like a certain kind of person.
#### Reasons This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -40,18 +40,18 @@ If the personification would be understood clearly, consider using it. If it wou
(1) Add words or phrases to make the human (or animal) characteristic clear.
> **Sin crouches** at the door. (Genesis 4:7b ULT) - God speaks of sin as if it were a wild animal that is waiting for the chance to attack. This shows how dangerous sin is. An additional phrase can be added to make this danger clear.
-
->> **Sin** is at your door, **waiting to attack you.**
+
+>> **Sin** is at your door, **waiting to attack you.**
(2) In addition to Strategy (1), use words such as “like” or “as” to show that the sentence is not to be understood literally.
>Sin crouches at the door. (Genesis 4:7b ULT) - This can be translated with the word “as.”
-
+
>> Sin is crouching at the door, **just as a wild animal does as it waits to attack a person.** .
(3) Find a way to translate it without the personification.
-> Even the **winds and the sea obey him**. (Matthew 8:27b ULT) - The men speak of the “wind and the sea” as if they are able to hear and obey Jesus, just as people can. This could also be translated without the idea of obedience by speaking of Jesus controlling them.
+> Even the **winds and the sea obey him**. (Matthew 8:27b ULT) - The men speak of the “wind and the sea” as if they are able to hear and obey Jesus, just as people can. This could also be translated without the idea of obedience by speaking of Jesus controlling them.
>> He even **controls the winds and the sea**.
diff --git a/translate/figs-possession/01.md b/translate/figs-possession/01.md
index 2fe19db7..4a90ac91 100644
--- a/translate/figs-possession/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-possession/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Description
-In common English, possession refers to having something, or to something that a person has. In English, that grammatical relationship is shown by using the word **”**of**,”** by using an apostrophe and the letter "s", or by using a possessive pronoun.
+In common English, possession refers to having something, or to something that a person has. In English, that grammatical relationship is shown by using the word **”**of**,”** by using an apostrophe and the letter "s", or by using a possessive pronoun.
* the house **of** my grandfather
* my grandfather**‘s** house
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Possession is used in Hebrew, Greek, and English for a variety of situations. He
* Ownership - Someone owns something.
* My clothes - The clothes that I own
* Social relationship - Someone has some kind of social relationship with another.
- * my mother - the woman who gave birth to me, or the woman who cared for me
+ * my mother - the woman who gave birth to me, or the woman who cared for me
* my teacher - the person who teaches me
* Contents - Something has something in it.
* a bag of clothes - a bag that has clothes in it, or a bag that is full of clothes
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Possession is used in Hebrew, Greek, and English for a variety of situations. He
**Ownership** - In the example below, the son owned the money.
-> The younger son … wasted his wealth by living recklessly. (Luke 15:13b)
+> The younger son … wasted his wealth by living recklessly. (Luke 15:13b)
**Social Relationship** - In the example below, the disciples were people who learned from John.
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Possession is used in Hebrew, Greek, and English for a variety of situations. He
> But Uriah slept at **the door of the king’s palace.** (2 Samuel 11:9a ULT)
**Part of a group** - In the example below, “us” refers to the whole group and “each one” refers to the individual members.
-
+
> Now to **each one of us** grace has been given according to the measure of the gift of Christ. (Ephesians 4:7 ULT)
#### Events and Possession
@@ -61,19 +61,19 @@ Sometimes one or both of the nouns is an abstract noun that refers to an event o
In the example below, **Christ loves us**.
-> Who will separate us from the **love of Christ**? (Romans 8:35)
+> Who will separate us from the **love of Christ**? (Romans 8:35)
**Object** - Sometimes the word after “of” tells who or what something would happen to. In the example below, **people love money**.
-> For the **love of money** is a root of all kinds of evil. (1 Timothy 6:10a ULT)
+> For the **love of money** is a root of all kinds of evil. (1 Timothy 6:10a ULT)
**Instrument** - Sometimes the word after “of” tells how something would happen. In the example below, God would **punish people by sending enemies to attack them with swords**.
-> Then be afraid of the sword, because wrath brings **the punishment of the sword**. (Job 19:29a ULT)
+> Then be afraid of the sword, because wrath brings **the punishment of the sword**. (Job 19:29a ULT)
**Representation** - In the example below, John was baptizing people who were repenting of their sins. They were being baptized to show that they were repenting. Their **baptism represented their repentance**.
-> John came, baptizing in the wilderness and preaching **a baptism of repentance** for the forgiveness of sins. (Mark 1:4 ULT)
+> John came, baptizing in the wilderness and preaching **a baptism of repentance** for the forgiveness of sins. (Mark 1:4 ULT)
### Strategies for learning what the relationship is between the two nouns
@@ -95,31 +95,31 @@ If possession would be a natural way to show a particular relationship between t
(1) Use an adjective to show that one noun describes the other. The adjective below is in bold print.
> On their heads were something like **crowns of gold.** (Revelation 9:7b)
->
+>
> > “On their heads were **gold crowns**“
(2) Use a verb to show how the two are related. In the example below, the added verb is in bold.
> Whoever gives you **a cup of water** to drink … will not lose his reward. (Mark 9:41 ULT)
->
-> > Whoever gives you a **cup that has water in it** to drink … will not lose his reward.
->
+>
+> > Whoever gives you a **cup that has water in it** to drink … will not lose his reward.
+>
> Wealth is worthless on **the day of wrath** (Proverbs 11:4a ULT)
->
-> > Wealth is worthless on **the day when God shows his wrath**.
-> >
-> > Wealth is worthless on the **day when God punishes people because of his wrath**.
+>
+> > Wealth is worthless on **the day when God shows his wrath**.
+> >
+> > Wealth is worthless on the **day when God punishes people because of his wrath**.
(3) If one of the nouns refers to an event, translate it as a verb. In the example below, that verb is in bold.
-> Notice that I am not speaking to your children, who have not known or seen **the punishment of Yahweh your God.** (Deuteronomy 11:2a ULT)
->
-> > Notice that I am not speaking to your children who have not known or seen **how Yahweh your God punished the people of Egypt**.
->
+> Notice that I am not speaking to your children, who have not known or seen **the punishment of Yahweh your God.** (Deuteronomy 11:2a ULT)
+>
+> > Notice that I am not speaking to your children who have not known or seen **how Yahweh your God punished the people of Egypt**.
+>
> You will only observe and see the **punishment of the wicked**. (Psalms 91:8 ULT)
->
-> > You will only observe and see **how Yahweh punishes the wicked**.
->
+>
+> > You will only observe and see **how Yahweh punishes the wicked**.
+>
> You will receive the gift **of the Holy Spirit**. (Acts 2:38b ULT)
->
-> > You will receive the **Holy Spirit, whom God will give to you**.
\ No newline at end of file
+>
+> > You will receive the **Holy Spirit, whom God will give to you**.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-pronouns/01.md b/translate/figs-pronouns/01.md
index 51b5c04d..b04a89d4 100644
--- a/translate/figs-pronouns/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-pronouns/01.md
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
### Description
-Pronouns are words that people might use instead of using a noun when referring to someone or something. Some examples are “I,” “you,” “he,” “it,” “this,” “that,” “himself,” “someone,” and others. The personal pronouns is the most common type of pronoun.
+Pronouns are words that people might use instead of using a noun when referring to someone or something. Some examples are “I,” “you,” “he,” “it,” “this,” “that,” “himself,” “someone,” and others. The personal pronouns is the most common type of pronoun.
### Personal Pronouns
@@ -8,18 +8,18 @@ Personal pronouns refer to people or things and show whether the speaker is refe
#### Person
-* First Person - The speaker and possibly others (I, we)
+* First Person - The speaker and possibly others (I, we)
* [Exclusive and Inclusive “We”](../figs-exclusive/01.md)
-* Second Person - The person or people that the speaker is talking to and possibly others (you)
+* Second Person - The person or people that the speaker is talking to and possibly others (you)
* [Forms of You](../figs-you/01.md)
* Third Person - Someone or something other than the speaker and those he is talking to (he, she, it, they)
#### Number
-* Singular - one (I, you, he, she, it)
-* Plural - more than one (we, you, they)
- * [Singular Pronouns that Refer to Groups](../figs-youcrowd/01.md)
-* Dual - two (Some languages have pronouns specifically for two people or two things.)
+* Singular - one (I, you, he, she, it)
+* Plural - more than one (we, you, they)
+ * [Singular Pronouns that Refer to Groups](../figs-youcrowd/01.md)
+* Dual - two (Some languages have pronouns specifically for two people or two things.)
#### Gender
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ Personal pronouns refer to people or things and show whether the speaker is refe
**[Reflexive Pronouns](../figs-rpronouns/01.md)** refer to another noun or pronoun in the same sentence: myself, yourself, himself, herself, itself, ourselves, yourselves, themselves.
-* John saw **himself** in the mirror. - The word "himself" refers to John.
+* John saw **himself** in the mirror. - The word "himself" refers to John.
**Interrogative Pronouns** are used to make a question that needs more than just a yes or no for an answer: what, which, who, whom, whose.
@@ -46,18 +46,18 @@ Personal pronouns refer to people or things and show whether the speaker is refe
**Relative Pronouns** mark a relative clause. The relative pronouns, who, whom, whose, which and that give more information about a noun in the main part of the sentence. Sometimes, the relative adverbs when and where can also be used as relative pronouns.
-* I saw the house **that John built**. The clause “that John built” tells which house I saw.
-* I saw the man **who built the house**. The clause “who built the house” tells which man I saw.
+* I saw the house **that John built**. The clause “that John built” tells which house I saw.
+* I saw the man **who built the house**. The clause “who built the house” tells which man I saw.
**Demonstrative Pronouns** are used to draw attention to someone or something and to show distance from the speaker or something else. The demonstrative pronouns are: this, these, that, and those.
-* Have you seen **this** here?
-* Who is **that** over there?
+* Have you seen **this** here?
+* Who is **that** over there?
**Indefinite pronouns** are used when no particular noun is being referred to. The indefinite pronouns are: any, anyone, someone, anything, something, and some. Sometimes a personal pronoun is used in a generic way to do this: you, they, he or it.
-* He does not want to talk to **anyone**.
-* **Someone** fixed it, but I do not know who.
-* **They** say that **you** should not wake a sleeping dog.
+* He does not want to talk to **anyone**.
+* **Someone** fixed it, but I do not know who.
+* **They** say that **you** should not wake a sleeping dog.
In the last example, “they” and “you” just refer to people in general.
diff --git a/translate/figs-quotations/01.md b/translate/figs-quotations/01.md
index 24acabb6..365176a8 100644
--- a/translate/figs-quotations/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-quotations/01.md
@@ -20,16 +20,16 @@ The verses in the examples below contain both direct and indirect quotations. In
> And he commanded him to tell no one, but, “Go, show yourself to the priest and offer a sacrifice for your cleansing, according to what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.” (Luke 5:14 ULT)
-* Indirect quote: He commanded him **to tell no one**,
-* Direct quote: but told him, “**Go, show yourself to the priest …** “
+* Indirect quote: He commanded him **to tell no one**,
+* Direct quote: but told him, “**Go, show yourself to the priest …** “
> And being asked by the Pharisees when the kingdom of God was coming, he answered them and said, “The kingdom of God is not coming with careful observation. **21** Neither will they say, ‘Look, here it is!’ or ‘There it is!’ For indeed, the kingdom of God is among you.”
->
+>
> And being asked by the Pharisees when the kingdom of God was coming, he answered them and said, “The kingdom of God is not coming with careful observation. Neither will they say, ‘Look, here it is!’ or ‘There it is!’ For indeed, the kingdom of God is among you.” (Luke 17:20-21 ULT)
-* Indirect quote: Being asked by the Pharisees **when the kingdom of God was coming,**
-* Direct quote: he answered them and said, “**The kingdom of God is not coming with careful observation. Neither will they say, ‘Look. here it is!’ or ‘There it is!’ For indeed, the kingdom of God is among you.** “
-* Direct quotes: Neither will they say, ‘**Look, here it is!** ‘ or, **T****here it is!** ‘
+* Indirect quote: Being asked by the Pharisees **when the kingdom of God was coming,**
+* Direct quote: he answered them and said, “**The kingdom of God is not coming with careful observation. Neither will they say, ‘Look. here it is!’ or ‘There it is!’ For indeed, the kingdom of God is among you.** “
+* Direct quotes: Neither will they say, ‘**Look, here it is!** ‘ or, **T****here it is!** ‘
### Translation Strategies
@@ -43,13 +43,13 @@ If the kind of quote used in the source text would work well in your language, c
(1) If a direct quote would not work well in your language, change it to an indirect quote.
> And he commanded him to tell no one, but, “**Go, show yourself to the priest and offer a sacrifice for your cleansing, according to what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.**” (Luke 5:14 ULT)
->
+>
> > He commanded him to tell no one, but **to go and show himself to the priest and offer a sacrifice for his cleansing according to what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them**.”
(2) If an indirect quote would not work well in your language, change it to a direct quote.
> And he commanded him **to tell no one,** but, “Go, show yourself to the priest and offer a sacrifice for your cleansing, according to what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.” (Luke 5:14 ULT)
->
+>
> > He commanded him, “**Tell no one**. Just go and show yourself to the priest and offer a sacrifice for your cleansing according to what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.”
You may also want to watch the video at http://ufw.io/figs\_quotations.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-quotemarks/01.md b/translate/figs-quotemarks/01.md
index d5fc262a..08ae58ea 100644
--- a/translate/figs-quotemarks/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-quotemarks/01.md
@@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ Quotation marks are not used with indirect quotes.
When there are several layers of quotations inside of other quotations, it might be hard for readers to understand who is saying what. Alternating two kinds of quotation marks can help careful readers to keep track of them. In English, the outermost quotation has double quote marks, and the next quotation within it has single marks. If there is a third embedded quote, that quotation again has double quotation marks.
-* Mary said, “John said, ‘I do not know when I will arrive.’ “
-* Bob said, “Mary told me, ‘John said, “I do not know when I will arrive.” ‘ “
+* Mary said, “John said, ‘I do not know when I will arrive.’ “
+* Bob said, “Mary told me, ‘John said, “I do not know when I will arrive.” ‘ “
Some languages use other kinds of quotation marks: Here are some examples: ‚ ‘ „ “ ‹ › « » ⁊ — .
@@ -30,14 +30,14 @@ A first layer direct quote has double quotation marks around it.
A second layer direct quote has single quotation marks around it. We have printed it and the phrase in bold type for you to see them clearly.
> They asked him, “Who is the man who said to you, **‘Pick it up and walk’**?” (John 5:12 ULT)
->
-> He sent two of the disciples, saying, “Go into the village ahead of you. As you enter, you will find a colt that has never been ridden. Untie it and bring it to me. If any one asks you, **‘Why are you untying it?’** you will say thus, **‘The Lord has need of it.’**“ (Luke 19:29b-31 ULT)
+>
+> He sent two of the disciples, saying, “Go into the village ahead of you. As you enter, you will find a colt that has never been ridden. Untie it and bring it to me. If any one asks you, **‘Why are you untying it?’** you will say thus, **‘The Lord has need of it.’**“ (Luke 19:29b-31 ULT)
#### A quotation with three layers
A third layer direct quote has double quotation marks around it. We have printed it in bold type for you to see them clearly.
-> Abraham said, “Because I thought, ‘Surely there is no fear of God in this place, and they will kill me because of my wife.’ Besides, she is indeed my sister, the daughter of my father, but not the daughter of my mother; and she became my wife. When God caused me to leave my father’s house and travel from place to place, I said to her, ‘You must show me this faithfulness as my wife: At every place where we go, say about me, “**He is my brother**.”’” (Genesis 20:11-13 ULT)
+> Abraham said, “Because I thought, ‘Surely there is no fear of God in this place, and they will kill me because of my wife.’ Besides, she is indeed my sister, the daughter of my father, but not the daughter of my mother; and she became my wife. When God caused me to leave my father’s house and travel from place to place, I said to her, ‘You must show me this faithfulness as my wife: At every place where we go, say about me, “**He is my brother**.”’” (Genesis 20:11-13 ULT)
#### A quotation with four layers
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ A fourth layer direct quote has single quotation marks around it. We have printe
Here are some ways you may be able to help readers see where each quote starts and ends so they can more easily know who said what.
-(1) Alternate two kinds of quote marks to show layers of direct quotation. English alternates double quote marks and single quote marks.
+(1) Alternate two kinds of quote marks to show layers of direct quotation. English alternates double quote marks and single quote marks.
(2) Translate one or some of the quotes as indirect quotes in order to use fewer quote marks, since indirect quotes do not need them. (See [Direct and Indirect Quotations](../figs-quotations/01.md).)
(3) If a quotation is very long and has many layers of quotation in it, indent the main overall quote, and use quote marks only for the direct quotes inside of it.
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ Here are some ways you may be able to help readers see where each quote starts a
(2) Translate one or more of the quotes as indirect quotes in order to use fewer quotation marks, since indirect quotes do not need them. In English, the word “that” can introduce an indirect quote. In the example below, everything after the word “that” is an indirect quote of what the messengers said to the king. Within that indirect quote, there are some direct quotes marked with double and single quotation marks.
> They said to him, “A man came to meet us who said to us, ‘Go back to the king who sent you, and say to him, “Yahweh says this: ‘Is it because there is no God in Israel that you sent men to consult with Baal Zebub, the god of Ekron? Therefore you will not come down from the bed to which you have gone up; instead, you will certainly die.’“‘“ (2 Kings 1:6 ULT)
-
+
>> They told him **that** a man came to meet them who said to them, “Go back to the king who sent you, and say to him, ‘Yahweh says this: “Is it because there is no God in Israel that you sent men to consult with Baal Zebub, the god of Ekron? Therefore you will not come down from the bed to which you have gone up; instead, you will certainly die.”‘“
(3) If a quotation is very long and has many layers of quotation in it, indent the main overall quote, and use quote marks only for the direct quotes inside of it.
> They said to him, “A man came to meet us who said to us, ‘Go back to the king who sent you, and say to him, “Yahweh says this: ‘Is it because there is no God in Israel that you sent men to consult with Baal Zebub, the god of Ekron? Therefore you will not come down from the bed to which you have gone up; instead, you will certainly die.’“‘“ (2 Kings 1:6 ULT)
-
->> They said to him,
+
+>> They said to him,
>>> A man came to meet us who said to us, “Go back to the king who sent you, and say to him, ‘Yahweh says this: “Is it because there is no God in Israel that you sent men to consult with Baal Zebub, the god of Ekron? Therefore you will not come down from the bed to which you have gone up; instead, you will certainly die.”‘“
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-quotesinquotes/01.md b/translate/figs-quotesinquotes/01.md
index 2cb8fb0f..545b6abc 100644
--- a/translate/figs-quotesinquotes/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-quotesinquotes/01.md
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
### Description
-A quotation may have a quote within it, and quotes that are inside of other quotes can also have quotes within them. When a quote has quotes within it, we say there are “layers” of quotation, and each of the quotes is a layer. When there are many layers of quotes inside of quotes, it can be hard for listeners and readers to know who is saying what. Some languages use a combination of direct quotes and indirect quotes to make it easier.
+A quotation may have a quote within it, and quotes that are inside of other quotes can also have quotes within them. When a quote has quotes within it, we say there are “layers” of quotation, and each of the quotes is a layer. When there are many layers of quotes inside of quotes, it can be hard for listeners and readers to know who is saying what. Some languages use a combination of direct quotes and indirect quotes to make it easier.
#### Reasons this is a translation issue
-1. When there is a quote within a quote, the listener needs to know who the pronouns refer to. For example: if a quote that is inside a quote has the word “I,” the listener needs to know whether “I” refers to the speaker of the inner quote or the outer quote.
+1. When there is a quote within a quote, the listener needs to know who the pronouns refer to. For example: if a quote that is inside a quote has the word “I,” the listener needs to know whether “I” refers to the speaker of the inner quote or the outer quote.
1. Some languages make this clear by using different kinds of quotes when there are quotes within quotes. They may use direct quotes for some and indirect quotes for others.
1. Some languages do not use indirect quotes.
@@ -16,9 +16,9 @@ A quotation may have a quote within it, and quotes that are inside of other quot
#### Quotations with two layers
-> Jesus answered and said to them, “Be careful that no one leads you astray. For many will come in my name. They will say, ‘I am the Christ,’ and will lead many astray.” Matthew 24:4-5 ULT
+> Jesus answered and said to them, “Be careful that no one leads you astray. For many will come in my name. They will say, ‘I am the Christ,’ and will lead many astray.” Matthew 24:4-5 ULT
-The outermost layer is what Jesus said to his disciples. The second layer is what other people will say.
+The outermost layer is what Jesus said to his disciples. The second layer is what other people will say.
> Jesus answered, “You say that I am a king.” (John 18:37 ULT)
The outermost layer is what Jesus said to Pilate. The second layer is what Pilate said about Jesus.
@@ -46,15 +46,15 @@ Some languages use only direct quotes. Other languages use a combination of dire
(1) Translate all of the quotes as direct quotes. In the example below we have underlined the indirect quotes in the ULT and the quotes that we have changed to direct quotes below it.
-> Festus presented Paul’s case to the king; he said, “A certain man was left behind here by Felix as a prisoner.…I was puzzled about how to investigate this matter, and I asked him **if he would go to Jerusalem to be judged there about these things**. But when Paul called **to be kept under guard for the Emperor’s decision**, I ordered him **to be kept until I send him to Caesar**.” (Acts 25:14-21 ULT)
->> Festus presented Paul’s case to the king; he said, “A certain man was left behind here by Felix as a prisoner.…I was puzzled about how to investigate this matter, and I asked him, **‘Will you go to Jerusalem to be judged there about these things?’** But when Paul said, **‘I want to be kept under guard for the Emperor’s decision,’** I told the guard, **‘Keep him under guard until I send him to Caesar.’**“
+> Festus presented Paul’s case to the king; he said, “A certain man was left behind here by Felix as a prisoner.…I was puzzled about how to investigate this matter, and I asked him **if he would go to Jerusalem to be judged there about these things**. But when Paul called **to be kept under guard for the Emperor’s decision**, I ordered him **to be kept until I send him to Caesar**.” (Acts 25:14-21 ULT)
+>> Festus presented Paul’s case to the king; he said, “A certain man was left behind here by Felix as a prisoner.…I was puzzled about how to investigate this matter, and I asked him, **‘Will you go to Jerusalem to be judged there about these things?’** But when Paul said, **‘I want to be kept under guard for the Emperor’s decision,’** I told the guard, **‘Keep him under guard until I send him to Caesar.’**“
(2) Translate one or some of the quotes as indirect quotes. In English the word “that” can come before indirect quotes. It is underlined in the examples below. The pronouns that changed because of the indirect quote are also underlined.
> Then Yahweh spoke to Moses and said, “I have heard the grumbling of the Israelites. Tell them, ‘At twilight you will eat meat, and in the morning you will be filled with bread. Then you will know that I am Yahweh your God.’ “ (Exodus 16:11-12 ULT)
->
+>
> > Then Yahweh spoke to Moses and said, “I have heard the grumbling of the Israelites. Tell them **that** at twilight **they** will eat meat, and in the morning **they** will be filled with bread. Then **they** will know that I am Yahweh **their** God.”
->
+>
> They said to him, “A man came to meet us who said to us, ‘Go back to the king who sent you, and say to him, “Yahweh says this: ‘Is it because there is no God in Israel that you sent men to consult with Baal Zebub, the god of Ekron? Therefore you will not come down from the bed to which you have gone up; instead, you will certainly die.’“‘“ (2 Kings 1:6 ULT)
->
+>
> > They told him **that** a man had come to meet **them** who said to **them**, “Go back to the king who sent you, and tell him **that** Yahweh says this: ‘Is it because there is no God in Israel that you sent men to consult with Baal Zebub, the god of Ekron? Therefore you will not come down from the bed to which you have gone up; instead, you will certainly die.’“
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-rpronouns/01.md b/translate/figs-rpronouns/01.md
index 1096f6b3..818be773 100644
--- a/translate/figs-rpronouns/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-rpronouns/01.md
@@ -17,14 +17,14 @@ All languages have ways of showing that the same person fills two different role
### Examples From the Bible
Reflexive pronouns are used to show the same person or thing fills two different roles in a sentence.
-> If **I** should testify about **myself**, my testimony would not be true. (John 5:31 ULT)
-
+> If **I** should testify about **myself**, my testimony would not be true. (John 5:31 ULT)
+
> Now the Passover of the Jews was near, and **many** went up to Jerusalem from the country before the Passover in order to purify **themselves**. (John 11:55 ULT)
Reflexive pronouns are used to emphasize a person or thing in the sentence.
-> **Jesus himself** was not baptizing, but his disciples were. (John 4:2 ULT)
-
+> **Jesus himself** was not baptizing, but his disciples were. (John 4:2 ULT)
+
> So they left the crowd, taking Jesus with them, just as he was, in the boat. There also were other boats with him. Then a violent windstorm arose and the waves were breaking into the boat so that the boat was already full of water. But **Jesus himself** was in the stern, asleep on the cushion. (Mark 4:36-38a ULT)
@@ -50,18 +50,18 @@ If a reflexive pronoun would have the same function in your language, consider u
(1) In some languages people modify the verb to show that the object of the verb is the same as the subject.
-> If I should testify about **myself** alone, my testimony would not be true. (John 5:31)
+> If I should testify about **myself** alone, my testimony would not be true. (John 5:31)
>> “If I should **self-testify** alone, my testimony would not be true.”
-
-> Now the Passover of the Jews was near, and many went up to Jerusalem from the country before the Passover in order to **purify themselves**. (John 11:55)
+
+> Now the Passover of the Jews was near, and many went up to Jerusalem from the country before the Passover in order to **purify themselves**. (John 11:55)
>> “Now the Passover of the Jews was near, and many went up to Jerusalem out from country before the Passover in order to **self-purify**.”
(2) In some languages people emphasize a certain person or thing by referring to it in a special place in the sentence.
-> **He himself** took our sickness and bore our diseases. (Matthew 8:17 ULT)
+> **He himself** took our sickness and bore our diseases. (Matthew 8:17 ULT)
>> “**It was he who** took our sickness and bore our diseases.”
-
-> **Jesus himself** was not baptizing, but his disciples were. (John 4:2)
+
+> **Jesus himself** was not baptizing, but his disciples were. (John 4:2)
>> “**It was not Jesus who** was baptizing, but his disciples were.”
(3) In some languages people emphasize a certain person or thing by adding something to that word or putting another word with it. English adds the reflexive pronoun.
@@ -70,10 +70,10 @@ If a reflexive pronoun would have the same function in your language, consider u
(4) In some languages people show that someone did something alone by using a word like “alone.”
-> When Jesus realized that they were about to come and seize him by force to make him king, he withdrew again up the mountain **by himself**. (John 6:15)
+> When Jesus realized that they were about to come and seize him by force to make him king, he withdrew again up the mountain **by himself**. (John 6:15)
>> “When Jesus realized that they were about to come and seize him by force to make him king, he withdrew again **alone** up the mountain.”
(5) In some languages people show that something was alone by using a phrase that tells about where it was.
-> He saw the linen cloths lying there and the cloth that had been on his head. It was not lying with the linen cloths but was folded up in a place **by itself**. (John 20:6b-7 ULT)
+> He saw the linen cloths lying there and the cloth that had been on his head. It was not lying with the linen cloths but was folded up in a place **by itself**. (John 20:6b-7 ULT)
>> “He saw the linen cloths lying there and the cloth that had been on his head. It was not lying with the linen cloths but was folded up and lying **in it’s own place**.”
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-rquestion/01.md b/translate/figs-rquestion/01.md
index a2925c8e..5d29e5c8 100644
--- a/translate/figs-rquestion/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-rquestion/01.md
@@ -73,35 +73,35 @@ If using the rhetorical question would be natural and give the right meaning in
(1) Add the answer after the question.
-> **Will a virgin forget her jewelry, a bride her veils?** Yet my people have forgotten me for days without number! (Jeremiah 2:32 ULT)
+> **Will a virgin forget her jewelry, a bride her veils?** Yet my people have forgotten me for days without number! (Jeremiah 2:32 ULT)
>> Will a virgin forget her jewelry, a bride her veils? **Of course not!** Yet my people have forgotten me for days without number!
-
-> Or what man is there among you, of whom his son will ask for a loaf of bread, but he will give him a stone? (Matthew 7:9 ULT)
->> Or what man is there among you, of whom his son will ask for a loaf of bread, but he will give him a stone? **None of you would do that!**
+
+> Or what man is there among you, of whom his son will ask for a loaf of bread, but he will give him a stone? (Matthew 7:9 ULT)
+>> Or what man is there among you, of whom his son will ask for a loaf of bread, but he will give him a stone? **None of you would do that!**
(2) Change the rhetorical question to a statement or exclamation.
-> **What is the kingdom of God like, and what can I compare it to?** It is like a mustard seed. (Luke 13:18-19a ULT)
+> **What is the kingdom of God like, and what can I compare it to?** It is like a mustard seed. (Luke 13:18-19a ULT)
>> **This is what the kingdom of God is like.** It is like a mustard seed…”
-
-> **Are you insulting the high priest of God?** (Acts 23:4b ULT) (Acts 23:4 ULT)
->> **You should not insult God’s high priest!**
-
-> **Why did I not die when I came out from the womb?** (Job 3:11a ULT)
->> **I wish I had died when I came out from the womb!**
-
-> **And how has this happened to me that the mother of my Lord should come to me?** (Luke 1:43 ULT)
->> **How wonderful it is that the mother of my Lord has come to me!**
+
+> **Are you insulting the high priest of God?** (Acts 23:4b ULT) (Acts 23:4 ULT)
+>> **You should not insult God’s high priest!**
+
+> **Why did I not die when I came out from the womb?** (Job 3:11a ULT)
+>> **I wish I had died when I came out from the womb!**
+
+> **And how has this happened to me that the mother of my Lord should come to me?** (Luke 1:43 ULT)
+>> **How wonderful it is that the mother of my Lord has come to me!**
(3) Change the rhetorical question to a statement, and then follow it with a short question.
-> **Do you not still rule** the kingdom of Israel? (1 Kings 21:7b ULT)
->> You still rule the kingdom of Israel, **do you not?**
+> **Do you not still rule** the kingdom of Israel? (1 Kings 21:7b ULT)
+>> You still rule the kingdom of Israel, **do you not?**
(4) Change the form of the question so that it communicates in your language what the orignal speaker communicated in his.
-> Or what man is there among you, of whom his son will ask for a loaf of bread, but he will give him a stone? (Matthew 7:9 ULT)
+> Or what man is there among you, of whom his son will ask for a loaf of bread, but he will give him a stone? (Matthew 7:9 ULT)
>> If your son asks you for a loaf of bread, **would you give him a stone**?
-
-> **Will a virgin forget her jewelry, a bride her veils**? Yet my people have forgotten me for days without number! (Jeremiah 2:32 ULT)
+
+> **Will a virgin forget her jewelry, a bride her veils**? Yet my people have forgotten me for days without number! (Jeremiah 2:32 ULT)
>> **What virgin would forget her jewelry, and what bride would forget her veils**? Yet my people have forgotten me for days without number
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-sentences/01.md b/translate/figs-sentences/01.md
index 7cdfea30..9d9b1528 100644
--- a/translate/figs-sentences/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-sentences/01.md
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ When the sentence is a command, in many languages it does not have a subject pro
#### Predicate
-The predicate is the part of a sentence that tells something about the subject. It usually has a verb. (See [Verbs](../figs-verbs/01.md).) In the sentences below, the subjects are “the man” and “he.” The predicates are underlined and the verbs are in bold.
+The predicate is the part of a sentence that tells something about the subject. It usually has a verb. (See [Verbs](../figs-verbs/01.md).) In the sentences below, the subjects are “the man” and “he.” The predicates are underlined and the verbs are in bold.
* The man **is strong**.
* He **worked hard**.
@@ -44,9 +44,9 @@ The compound sentence below contains the two sentences above. In English, compou
Sentences can also have clauses and other phrases. Clauses are like sentences because they have a subject and a predicate, but they do not normally occur by themselves. Here are some examples of clauses. The subjects are in bold, and the predicates are underlined.
-* when **the maize** **was ready**
-* after **she** **picked it**
-* because **it** **tasted so good**
+* when **the maize** **was ready**
+* after **she** **picked it**
+* because **it** **tasted so good**
Sentences can have many clauses, and so they can become long and complex. But each sentence has to have at least one **independent clause**, that is, a clause that can be a sentence all by itself. The other clauses that cannot be sentences by themselves are called the **dependent clauses**. Dependent clauses depend on the independent clause to complete their meaning. The dependent clauses are underlined in the sentences below.
diff --git a/translate/figs-sentencetypes/01.md b/translate/figs-sentencetypes/01.md
index 59992353..0025724f 100644
--- a/translate/figs-sentencetypes/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-sentencetypes/01.md
@@ -2,10 +2,10 @@
A **sentence** is a group of words that expresses a complete thought. The basic types of sentences are listed below with the functions they are mainly used for.
-* **Statements** - These are mainly used to give information. ‘This is a fact.’
-* **Questions** - These are mainly used to ask for information. ‘Do you know him?’
-* **Imperative Sentences** - These are mainly used to express a desire or requirement that someone do something. ‘Pick that up.’
-* **Exclamations** - These are mainly used to express a strong feeling. ‘Ouch, that hurt!’
+* **Statements** - These are mainly used to give information. ‘This is a fact.’
+* **Questions** - These are mainly used to ask for information. ‘Do you know him?’
+* **Imperative Sentences** - These are mainly used to express a desire or requirement that someone do something. ‘Pick that up.’
+* **Exclamations** - These are mainly used to express a strong feeling. ‘Ouch, that hurt!’
#### Reasons This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Statements can also have other functions. (See [Statements - Other Uses](../figs
The speakers below used these questions to get information, and the people they were speaking to answered their questions.
> Jesus said to them, “**Do you believe that I can do this?** “ They said to him, “Yes, Lord.” (Matthew 9:28b ULT)
->
+>
> He … said, “Sirs, **what must I do to be saved?** “ They said, “Believe in the Lord Jesus, and you will be saved, you and your household.” (Acts 16:29-31 ULT)
Questions can also have other functions. (See [Rhetorical Question](../figs-rquestion/01.md).)
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ With an invitation, the speaker uses politeness or friendliness to suggest that
With a request, the speaker uses politeness to say that he wants someone to do something. This may include the word ‘please’ to make it clear that it is a request and not a command. This is usually something that would benefit the speaker.
> **Give us** today our daily bread. (Matthew 6:11 ULT)
->
+>
> **I ask you** to consider me excused. (Luke 14:18 ULT)
With a wish, a person expresses what they want to happen. In English they often start with the word “may” or “let.”
diff --git a/translate/figs-simetaphor/01.md b/translate/figs-simetaphor/01.md
index 87bc21da..e855b703 100644
--- a/translate/figs-simetaphor/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-simetaphor/01.md
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
-A **simple metaphor** is an explicit [metaphor](../figs-metaphor/01.md) that uses a single physical **Image** to refer to a single abstract **Idea**. This is in contrast to [extended metaphors](../figs-exmetaphor/01.md) and [complex metaphors](../figs-cometaphor/01.md), which can use multiple images and multiple ideas at the same time.
+A **simple metaphor** is an explicit [metaphor](../figs-metaphor/01.md) that uses a single physical **Image** to refer to a single abstract **Idea**. This is in contrast to [extended metaphors](../figs-exmetaphor/01.md) and [complex metaphors](../figs-cometaphor/01.md), which can use multiple images and multiple ideas at the same time.
### Explanation of a Simple Metaphor
-Usually, a writer/speaker uses a simple metaphor in order to express something about a **Topic**, with one main **Idea** or **Point of Comparison** between the **Topic** and the **Image**. In simple metaphors, often the **Topic** and the **Image** are explicitly stated, but the **Idea** is not; it is only implied. The writer/speaker uses a metaphor in order to invite the reader/listener to think about the similarity between the **Topic** and the **Image** and to figure out for themselves the **Idea** that is being communicated.
+Usually, a writer/speaker uses a simple metaphor in order to express something about a **Topic**, with one main **Idea** or **Point of Comparison** between the **Topic** and the **Image**. In simple metaphors, often the **Topic** and the **Image** are explicitly stated, but the **Idea** is not; it is only implied. The writer/speaker uses a metaphor in order to invite the reader/listener to think about the similarity between the **Topic** and the **Image** and to figure out for themselves the **Idea** that is being communicated.
-For example, Jesus used a simple metaphor when he said:
+For example, Jesus used a simple metaphor when he said:
> I am the light of the world. (John 9:5b ULT)
diff --git a/translate/figs-simile/01.md b/translate/figs-simile/01.md
index 1ebab9f5..cd75c277 100644
--- a/translate/figs-simile/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-simile/01.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
A simile is a comparison of two things that are not normally thought to be similar. The simile focuses on a particular trait the two items have in common, and it includes the words “like,” “as,” or “than.”
-> When he saw the crowds, he had compassion for them, because they were troubled and discouraged, **like sheep not having a shepherd**. (Matthew 9:36)
+> When he saw the crowds, he had compassion for them, because they were troubled and discouraged, **like sheep not having a shepherd**. (Matthew 9:36)
Jesus compared the crowds of people to sheep without a shepherd. Sheep grow frightened when they do not have a good shepherd to lead them in safe places. The crowds were like that because they did not have good religious leaders.
@@ -16,14 +16,14 @@ God’s word is compared to a two-edged sword. A two-edged sword is a weapon tha
#### Purposes of Simile
-* A simile can teach about something that is unknown by showing how it is similar to something that is known.
-* A simile can emphasize a particular trait, sometimes in a way that gets people’s attention.
-* Similes help form a picture in the mind or help the reader experience what he is reading about more fully.
+* A simile can teach about something that is unknown by showing how it is similar to something that is known.
+* A simile can emphasize a particular trait, sometimes in a way that gets people’s attention.
+* Similes help form a picture in the mind or help the reader experience what he is reading about more fully.
#### Reasons This Is a Translation Issue
-* People may not know how the two items are similar.
-* People may not be familiar with both of the items being compared.
+* People may not know how the two items are similar.
+* People may not be familiar with both of the items being compared.
### Examples From the Bible
@@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ This verse does not tell how the Son of Man will be like the lightning. But in c
If people would understand the correct meaning of a simile, consider using it. If they would not, here are some strategies you can use:
-(1) If people do not know how the two items are alike, tell how they are alike. However, do not do this if the meaning was not clear to the original audience.
-
+(1) If people do not know how the two items are alike, tell how they are alike. However, do not do this if the meaning was not clear to the original audience.
+
(2) If people are not familiar with the item that something is compared to, use an item from your own culture. Be sure that it is one that could have been used in the cultures of the Bible. If you use this strategy, you may want to put the original item in a footnote.
@@ -51,33 +51,33 @@ If people would understand the correct meaning of a simile, consider using it. I
(1) If people do not know how the two items are alike, tell how they are alike. However, do not do this if the meaning was not clear to the original audience.
> See, I send you out **as sheep in the midst of wolves** (Matthew 10:16a ULT) - This compares the danger that Jesus’ disciples would be in with the danger that sheep are in when they are surrounded by wolves.
->
+>
> > See, I send **you out among wicked people** and you will be in danger from them **as sheep are in danger when they are among wolves**.
->
+>
> For the word of God is living and active and sharper **than any two-edged sword**. (Hebrews 4:12a ULT)
->
+>
> > For the word of God is living and active and **more powerful than a very sharp two-edged sword**.
(2) If people are not familiar with the item that something is compared to, use an item from your own culture. Be sure that it is one that could have been used in the cultures of the Bible. If you use this strategy, you may want to put the original item in a footnote.
> See, I send you out **as sheep in the midst of wolves**, (Matthew 10:16a ULT) - If people do not know what sheep and wolves are, or that wolves kill and eat sheep, you could use some other animal that kills another.
->
+>
> > See, I send you out **as chickens in the midst of wild dogs**.
->
+>
> How often did I long to gather your children together, just **as a hen gathers her chickens under her wings**, but you were not willing! (Matthew 23:37b ULT)
->
+>
> > How often I wanted to gather your children together, **as a mother closely watches over her infants**, but you refused!
->
+>
> If you have faith **as a grain of mustard** … (Matthew 17:20)
->
+>
> > If you have faith even as small **as a tiny seed**,
(3) Simply describe the item without comparing it to another.
> See, I send you out **as sheep in the midst of wolves**. (Matthew 10:16a ULT)
->
+>
> > See, I send you out among **people who will want to harm you**.
->
+>
> How often did I long to gather your children together, just **as a hen gathers her chickens under her wings**, but you were not willing! (Matthew 23:37b ULT)
->
+>
> > How often I wanted to **protect you**, but you refused!
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-synecdoche/01.md b/translate/figs-synecdoche/01.md
index e63c7141..4a888b79 100644
--- a/translate/figs-synecdoche/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-synecdoche/01.md
@@ -12,8 +12,8 @@ The Pharisees who were standing there did not all say the same words at the same
#### Reasons This Is a Translation Issue
-* Some readers may not recognize the synecdoche and thus misunderstand the words as a literal statement.
-* Some readers may realize that they are not to understand the words literally, but they may not know what the meaning is.
+* Some readers may not recognize the synecdoche and thus misunderstand the words as a literal statement.
+* Some readers may realize that they are not to understand the words literally, but they may not know what the meaning is.
### Example From the Bible
@@ -31,14 +31,14 @@ If the synecdoche would be natural and give the right meaning in your language,
(1) State specifically what the synecdoche refers to.
-> ”**My soul** magnifies the Lord.” (Luke 1:46b ULT)
->
+> ”**My soul** magnifies the Lord.” (Luke 1:46b ULT)
+>
> > “**I** magnify the Lord."
->
-> So **the Pharisees** said to him … (Mark 2:24a ULT)
->
+>
+> So **the Pharisees** said to him … (Mark 2:24a ULT)
+>
> > **A** **representative of the Pharisees** said to him …
->
+>
> Then I looked on all the deeds that **my hands** had accomplished. (Ecclesiastes 2:11a ULT)
->
+>
> > I looked on all the deeds that **I** had accomplished
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-synonparallelism/01.md b/translate/figs-synonparallelism/01.md
index f2dbde4d..740cabc1 100644
--- a/translate/figs-synonparallelism/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-synonparallelism/01.md
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Parallelism with the same meaning is a poetic device in which one complex idea is expressed in two (or more) different ways. Speakers may do this in order to emphasize the idea that is the same in the two phrases. This is also called “synonymous parallelism.”
-NOTE: We use the term “parallelism with the same meaning” for long phrases or clauses that have the same meaning. We use the term [Doublet](../figs-doublet/01.md) for words or very short phrases that mean basically the same thing and are used together.
+NOTE: We use the term “parallelism with the same meaning” for long phrases or clauses that have the same meaning. We use the term [Doublet](../figs-doublet/01.md) for words or very short phrases that mean basically the same thing and are used together.
> Yahweh **sees everything a person does** and **watches all the paths he takes**. (Proverbs 5:21 ULT)
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Both parts of the sentence are metaphors saying that God’s word teaches people
Both parts of this verse tell people everywhere to praise Yahweh. The words ‘Praise’ and ‘exalt’ mean the same thing. The words ‘Yahweh’ and ‘him’ refer to the same person. The terms ‘all you nations’ and ‘all you peoples’ refer to the same people.
-> For Yahweh has a **lawsuit with his people**, and he will **fight in court** against Israel. (Micah 6:2b ULT)
+> For Yahweh has a **lawsuit with his people**, and he will **fight in court** against Israel. (Micah 6:2b ULT)
The two parts of this verse say that Yahweh has a serious disagreement with his people, Israel. These are not two different disagreements or two different groups of people.
@@ -46,29 +46,29 @@ If your language uses parallelism in the same way as the biblical languages (tha
(1) Combine the ideas of both clauses into one.
> Until now you have **dealt deceitfully with me** and you have **spoken lies to me**. (Judges 16:13b ULT) - Delilah expressed this idea twice to emphasize that she was very upset.
->
+>
> > Until now you have **deceived me with your lies**.
->
+>
> Yahweh **sees everything a person does** and **watches all** **the paths he takes**. (Proverbs 5:21 ULT) - The phrase “all the paths he takes” is a metaphor for “all he does.”
->
+>
> > Yahweh **pays attention to everything** a person does.
->
+>
> For Yahweh has a **lawsuit with his people**, and he will fight in court against Israel. (Micah 6:2 ULT) - This parallelism describes one serious disagreement that Yahweh had with one group of people. If this is unclear, the phrases can be combined:
->
+>
> > For Yahweh has a **lawsuit with his people**, Israel.
(2) If it appears that the clauses are used together to show that what they say is really true, you could include words that emphasize the truth such as “truly” or “certainly.”
> Yahweh **sees everything** a person does and **watches all** the paths he takes. (Proverbs 5:21 ULT)
->
+>
> > Yahweh **truly sees** everything a person does.
(3) If it appears that the clauses are used together to intensify an idea in them, you could use words like “very,” “completely” or “all.”
-> Until now you have **dealt deceitfully with me** and you have **spoken lies to me**. (Judges 16:13b ULT)
->
+> Until now you have **dealt deceitfully with me** and you have **spoken lies to me**. (Judges 16:13b ULT)
+>
> > **All** you have done is lie to me.
->
+>
> Yahweh sees **everything a person does** and **watches all the paths he takes**. (Proverbs 5:21 ULT)
->
+>
> > Yahweh sees **absolutely everything** that a person does.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-verbs/01.md b/translate/figs-verbs/01.md
index dc623447..d15f94e6 100644
--- a/translate/figs-verbs/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-verbs/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Description
-Verbs are words that refer to an action or event or that is used in describing or identifying things. An "action" is something you do. "Event" is more general than "action." "Events" are things that happen, such as death. A linking verb ("is") describes a condition of being.
+Verbs are words that refer to an action or event or that is used in describing or identifying things. An "action" is something you do. "Event" is more general than "action." "Events" are things that happen, such as death. A linking verb ("is") describes a condition of being.
**Examples** The verbs in the examples below are bolded.
@@ -19,10 +19,10 @@ A verb usually says something about someone or something. All of the example sen
Sometimes there is another person or thing associated with the verb. In the examples below, the bolded word is the verb, and the underlined phrase is the **object**. In English the object usually comes after the verb.
-* He **ate** lunch.
-* He **sang** a song.
-* He **read** a book.
-* **He saw** the book.
+* He **ate** lunch.
+* He **sang** a song.
+* He **read** a book.
+* **He saw** the book.
Some verbs never have an object.
@@ -30,17 +30,17 @@ Some verbs never have an object.
* John **slept** well.
* John **fell** yesterday.
-For many verbs in English, where the object is not important in the sentence, the object may not be stated.
+For many verbs in English, where the object is not important in the sentence, the object may not be stated.
* He never **eats** at night.
-* He **sings** all the time.
+* He **sings** all the time.
* He **reads** well.
* He cannot **see**.
In some languages, a verb that needs an object must always take one, even if the object is not very important. People who speak those languages might restate the sentences above like this.
* He never **eats** **food** at night.
-* He **sings** **songs** all the time.
+* He **sings** **songs** all the time.
* He **reads** **words** well.
* He cannot **see** **anything**.
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ When we tell about an event, we usually tell whether it is in the past, the pres
In some languages the verb may be a little bit different depending on the time associated with it. This kind of marking on a verb is called "tense." English speakers sometimes put “ed” at the end of the verb when the event happened in the past.
* Sometimes Mary **cooks** meat.
-* Yesterday Mary **cooked** meat. (She did this in the past.)
+* Yesterday Mary **cooked** meat. (She did this in the past.)
In some languages speakers might add a word to tell something about the time. English speakers use the word “will” when the verb refers to something in the future.
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ When we tell about an event, sometimes we want to show how the event progressed
* Mary **cooks** meat every day. (This tells about something Mary often does.)
* Mary **is cooking** the meat. (This tells about something Mary is in the process of doing right now.)
-* Mary **cooked** the meat, and John **came** home. (This simply tells about things that Mary and John did.)
+* Mary **cooked** the meat, and John **came** home. (This simply tells about things that Mary and John did.)
* While Mary **was cooking** the meat, John came home. (This tells about something Mary was in the process of doing when John came home)
* Mary **has cooked** the meat, and she wants us to come eat it. (This tells about something Mary did that is still relevant now.)
* Mary **had cooked** the meat by the time John came home. (This tells about something that Mary completed in the past before something else happened.)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-youcrowd/01.md b/translate/figs-youcrowd/01.md
index 906daac2..980d585b 100644
--- a/translate/figs-youcrowd/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-youcrowd/01.md
@@ -8,12 +8,12 @@ Finally, Old Testament speakers and writers also refer to actions that they perf
### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
-* For many languages, a translator who reads a Bible with a general form of “you” will need to know whether the speaker was speaking to one person or to more than one.
-* In some languages, it might be confusing if a speaker uses a singular pronoun when speaking to or about more than one person.
+* For many languages, a translator who reads a Bible with a general form of “you” will need to know whether the speaker was speaking to one person or to more than one.
+* In some languages, it might be confusing if a speaker uses a singular pronoun when speaking to or about more than one person.
### Examples From the Bible
-> 1 Now take heed that **you** do not do **your** acts of righteousness before people to be seen by them, otherwise **you** will not have a reward with **your** Father who is in heaven. 2 So when **you** give alms, do not sound a trumpet before **yourself** as the hypocrites do in the synagogues and in the streets, so that they may have the praise of people. Truly I say to **you**, they have received their reward. (Matthew 6:1-2 ULT)
+> 1 Now take heed that **you** do not do **your** acts of righteousness before people to be seen by them, otherwise **you** will not have a reward with **your** Father who is in heaven. 2 So when **you** give alms, do not sound a trumpet before **yourself** as the hypocrites do in the synagogues and in the streets, so that they may have the praise of people. Truly I say to **you**, they have received their reward. (Matthew 6:1-2 ULT)
Jesus said this to a crowd. He used “you” plural in verse 1, and “you” singular in the first sentence of verse 2. Then, in the last sentence, he used the plural again.
@@ -21,20 +21,20 @@ Jesus said this to a crowd. He used “you” plural in verse 1, and “you” s
God said this to all the people of Israel. He had taken them all out of Egypt and he wanted them all to obey him, but he used the singular form of you here when speaking to them.
-> This is what Yahweh says,
-> “For three sins of Edom,
-> even for four,
-> I will not turn away punishment,
-> because **he** pursued **his** brother with the sword
-> and cast off all pity.
-> **His** anger raged continually,
+> This is what Yahweh says,
+> “For three sins of Edom,
+> even for four,
+> I will not turn away punishment,
+> because **he** pursued **his** brother with the sword
+> and cast off all pity.
+> **His** anger raged continually,
> and **his** wrath lasted forever.” (Amos 1:11 ULT)
Yahweh said these things about the nation of Edom, not about only one person.
> And I arose in the night, myself and a few men with me. And I was going up by the wadi at night, and I was looking intently at the wall. And I turned back, and I entered by the gate of the valley, and I returned. (Nehemiah 2:12a,15 ULT)
-Nehemiah makes clear that he brought other people with him on his inspection tour of the wall of Jerusalem. But as he describes the tour, he just says “I” did this and that.
+Nehemiah makes clear that he brought other people with him on his inspection tour of the wall of Jerusalem. But as he describes the tour, he just says “I” did this and that.
### Translation Strategies
@@ -47,24 +47,24 @@ Nehemiah makes clear that he brought other people with him on his inspection tou
(1) If the singular form of the pronoun would not be natural when referring to a group of people, or if the readers would be confused by it, use the plural form of the pronoun.
-> This is what Yahweh says,
-> “For three sins of Edom,
-> even for four,
-> I will not turn away punishment,
-> because **he** pursued **his** brother with the sword
-> and cast off all pity.
-> **His** anger raged continually,
+> This is what Yahweh says,
+> “For three sins of Edom,
+> even for four,
+> I will not turn away punishment,
+> because **he** pursued **his** brother with the sword
+> and cast off all pity.
+> **His** anger raged continually,
> and **his** wrath lasted forever.” (Amos 1:11 ULT)
-
->> This is what Yahweh says,
->> “For three sins of Edom,
->> even for four,
->> I will not turn away punishment,
->> because **they** pursued **their brothers** with the sword
->> and cast off all pity.
->> **Their** anger raged continually,
+
+>> This is what Yahweh says,
+>> “For three sins of Edom,
+>> even for four,
+>> I will not turn away punishment,
+>> because **they** pursued **their brothers** with the sword
+>> and cast off all pity.
+>> **Their** anger raged continually,
>> and **their** wrath lasted forever.”
> And I arose in the night, myself and a few men with me. And **I** was going up by the wadi at night, and **I** was looking intently at the wall. And **I** turned back, and **I** entered by the gate of the valley, and **I** returned. (Nehemiah 2:12a,15 ULT)
-> > And I arose in the night, myself and a few men with me. … And **we** were going up by the wadi at night and **we** were looking intently at the wall. And **we** turned back and **we** entered by the gate of the valley, and **we** returned.
\ No newline at end of file
+> > And I arose in the night, myself and a few men with me. … And **we** were going up by the wadi at night and **we** were looking intently at the wall. And **we** turned back and **we** entered by the gate of the valley, and **we** returned.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-youdual/01.md b/translate/figs-youdual/01.md
index fa378919..f1004ad2 100755
--- a/translate/figs-youdual/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-youdual/01.md
@@ -27,9 +27,9 @@ James wrote this letter to many people, so the word “you” refers to many peo
### Strategies for finding out how many people “you” refers to
-1. Look at the translationNotes to see if they tell whether “you” refers to one person or more than one person.
-2. Look at the UST to see if it says anything that would show you whether the word “you” refers to one person or more than one person.
-3. If you have a Bible that is written in a language that distinguishes “you” singular from “you” plural, see which form of “you” that Bible has in that sentence.
-4. Look at the context to see who the speaker was talking to and who responded.
+1. Look at the translationNotes to see if they tell whether “you” refers to one person or more than one person.
+2. Look at the UST to see if it says anything that would show you whether the word “you” refers to one person or more than one person.
+3. If you have a Bible that is written in a language that distinguishes “you” singular from “you” plural, see which form of “you” that Bible has in that sentence.
+4. Look at the context to see who the speaker was talking to and who responded.
You may also want to watch the video at http://ufw.io/figs_youdual.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/figs-youformal/01.md b/translate/figs-youformal/01.md
index 8c075b84..4565ce93 100644
--- a/translate/figs-youformal/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-youformal/01.md
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ In some cultures people use the formal “you” when speaking to someone who is
* The Bible was written in Hebrew, Aramaic, and Greek. These languages do not have formal and informal forms of “you.”
* English and many other source languages do not have formal and informal forms of “you.”
-* Translators who use a source text in a language that does have formal and informal forms of “you” will need to understand how those forms are used in that language. The rules in that language may not be exactly the same as the rules in the translator’s language.
+* Translators who use a source text in a language that does have formal and informal forms of “you” will need to understand how those forms are used in that language. The rules in that language may not be exactly the same as the rules in the translator’s language.
* Translators will need to understand the relationship between two speakers in order to choose the appropriate form in their language.
#### Translation Principles
@@ -30,9 +30,9 @@ God is in authority over the man, so languages that have formal and informal for
Luke called Theophilus “most excellent.” This shows us that Theophilus was probably a high official to whom Luke was showing great respect. Speakers of languages that have a formal form of “you” would probably use that form here.
-> ‘Our Father who is in heaven, may **your** name be honored as holy. (Matthew 6:9b ULT)
+> ‘Our Father who is in heaven, may **your** name be honored as holy. (Matthew 6:9b ULT)
-This is part of a prayer that Jesus taught his disciples. Some cultures would use the formal “you” because God is in authority. Other cultures would use the informal “you” because God is our Father.
+This is part of a prayer that Jesus taught his disciples. Some cultures would use the formal “you” because God is in authority. Other cultures would use the informal “you” because God is our Father.
### Translation Strategies
diff --git a/translate/figs-yousingular/01.md b/translate/figs-yousingular/01.md
index 54fb30a5..fc6012a3 100644
--- a/translate/figs-yousingular/01.md
+++ b/translate/figs-yousingular/01.md
@@ -6,15 +6,15 @@ The Bible was first written in the Hebrew, Aramaic, and Greek languages. These l
#### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
-* Translators who speak a language that has distinct singular and plural forms of “you” will always need to know what the speaker meant so they can choose the right word for “you” in their language.
-* Many languages also have different forms of the verb depending on whether the subject is singular or plural. So even if there is no pronoun meaning “you,” translators of these languages will need to know if the speaker was referring to one person or more than one.
+* Translators who speak a language that has distinct singular and plural forms of “you” will always need to know what the speaker meant so they can choose the right word for “you” in their language.
+* Many languages also have different forms of the verb depending on whether the subject is singular or plural. So even if there is no pronoun meaning “you,” translators of these languages will need to know if the speaker was referring to one person or more than one.
Often the context will make it clear whether the word “you” refers to one person or more than one. If you look at the other pronouns in the sentence, they will help you know the number of people the speaker was speaking to.
Sometimes Greek and Hebrew speakers used the singular form of “you” even though they were speaking to a group of people. (See [Forms of ‘You’ - Singular to a Crowd](../figs-youcrowd/01.md).)
### Examples from the Bible
-> But he said, “All these things I have kept from my youth.” But when he heard this, Jesus said to him, “One thing **i**s still lacking to **you**. All things, as much as **you** have, sell all and distribute to the poor, and **you** will have treasure in heaven—and come, follow me.” (Luke 18:21-22 ULT)
+> But he said, “All these things I have kept from my youth.” But when he heard this, Jesus said to him, “One thing **i**s still lacking to **you**. All things, as much as **you** have, sell all and distribute to the poor, and **you** will have treasure in heaven—and come, follow me.” (Luke 18:21-22 ULT)
The ruler was speaking about just himself when he said “I.” This shows us that when Jesus said “you” he was referring only to the ruler. So languages that have singular and plural forms of “you” need the singular form here.
diff --git a/translate/file-formats/01.md b/translate/file-formats/01.md
index bd61d21f..99eb9ace 100644
--- a/translate/file-formats/01.md
+++ b/translate/file-formats/01.md
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Though it is strongly encouraged to only do a translation using USFM notation, s
### Markdown for Other Content
-Markdown is a very common markup language that is used in many places on the Internet. Using Markdown makes it very easy for the same text to be used in a variety of formats (such as webpage, mobile app, PDF, etc).
+Markdown is a very common markup language that is used in many places on the Internet. Using Markdown makes it very easy for the same text to be used in a variety of formats (such as webpage, mobile app, PDF, etc).
Markdown supports **bold** and *italic*, written like this:
@@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ Markdown supports **bold** and *italic*, written like this:
Markdown also supports headings like this:
# Heading 1
-
+
## Heading 2
-
+
### Heading 3
Markdown also supports links. Links display like this http://www.unfoldingword.org/ and are written like this:
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Customized wording for links are also supported, like this:
[uW Website](http://www.unfoldingword.org)
-Note that HTML is also valid Markdown. For a complete listing of Markdown syntax, please visit http://ufw.io/md.
+Note that HTML is also valid Markdown. For a complete listing of Markdown syntax, please visit http://ufw.io/md.
### Conclusion
diff --git a/translate/first-draft/01.md b/translate/first-draft/01.md
index 5a19affc..d4de7edd 100644
--- a/translate/first-draft/01.md
+++ b/translate/first-draft/01.md
@@ -3,24 +3,24 @@
Follow these steps in order to get started:
-1. **Organize.** Talk with the pastors and other believers from your language group and form a committee of people who can oversee the translation work. The Translation Committee finds and oversees the translators, to whom the rest of this list applies.
-2. **Contact.** Make contact with at least one person in the unfoldingWord network, notifying unfoldingWord that you intend to begin translation. To obtain information about how to do that, see [Finding Answers](../../intro/finding-answers/01.md)
-3. **Review.** Review the [Translation Guidelines](../../intro/translation-guidelines/01.md).
-4. **Agree.** Agree that the Statement of Faith is an accurate reflection of your own beliefs and that you intend to translate the content in harmony with it and also in accordance with the Translation Guidelines. Do this by signing the form that is provided. (see http://ufw.io/forms/)
-5. **Pray.** Pray that God would help the translators to understand the passage that you are translating and that he would help you to find the best way to communicate that passage in your language.
-6. **Read.**
- * If you are translating Open Bible Stories, read each individual story entirely before starting to translate it. If you are translating the Bible, read each entire chapter before you start to translate any part of it. That way you will understand how the part you are translating fits into the larger context, and you will translate it better.
- * Read the passage that you plan to translate in as many different translations as you have. In [translationStudio](../../process/setup-ts/01.md), the first mode is the reading mode. Access this mode by clicking on the top symbol on the left side. You can choose up to three translations to show in this mode. We recommend that two of these be the unfoldingWord® Literal Text (ULT) and the unfoldingWord® Simplified Text (UST). The ULT will help you to see the form of the original text, and the UST will help you to understand the meaning of the original text. Think about how to communicate the meaning in the form that people would use in your language.
- * Read any Bible helps or commentaries which you have that talk about that passage.
- * Read the unfoldingWord® Translation Notes for the passage that you plan to translate. To do this, click on the third icon down on the left side of translationStudio. Click on the tab that says “Notes.” Then click on each of the phrases in blue and read the explanation for each phrase.
- * Read the definitions of the unfoldingWord® Translation Words (the important words) in the passage. To do this, click on the tab that says, “Words.” Then click on each of the words in blue and read the explanation for each of these important words. Under each explanation there is also a section called “Translation Suggestions.” Here you will find ideas for how to translate these words.
-7. **Talk.** Discuss the passage, the unfoldingWord® Translation Notes, and the unfoldingWord® Translation Words with others on the translation team. Help each other to understand what they mean. If there are parts that you still do not understand, ask pastors or other church leaders for help.
-8. **Translate.** When you understand well what the passage is saying, say the first chunk (1-3 verses) out loud in your language in the way that someone from your language community would say it. If possible, say it to another member of the translation team. Let the translation team member correct it until it sounds good in your language. Use the different expressions in the ULT, UST, and Translation Notes to give you ideas for how to say the same things in different ways. Do not follow [the order of words](../translate-wforw/01.md) from either the ULT or the UST if it is more [natural](../guidelines-natural/01.md) for your language to use a different order. To help with this, say the whole chunk of text without looking at the source texts. This will help you to say these things in a way that is natural for your language, rather than in a way that was natural for the source language but might not be the best way to say it in your language. Still without looking at the source texts, type your translation of the chunk into [translationStudio](../../process/setup-ts/01.md) (or record it). To do this, click on the second icon down on the left side. The chunk that you are working on will appear in the ULT, covering the space where you will type the translation. When you are ready to type, click on the right edge of the space that is mostly covered by the ULT of that chunk. The blank space will then cover the ULT. Type your translation of the chunk here in this space from your memory. When you type (or write) from your memory without looking at the ULT, your translation will be more natural. Now repeat this step for the rest of the chunks of this passage.
-9. **Check**. Since you typed or recorded your translation of these chunks without looking at the source texts, you might have left out some things. Now is the time to add those things to your translation. Click on the third icon down on the left side of translationStudio again. In that mode:
- * Look again at the source texts, including the ULT and UST, and carefully compare them to your translation. Make sure that your translation says all of the parts of the message of the ULT and does not leave out anything. You may choose to say some parts in a way that is different than the ULT, such as more like the UST or the Translation Note or another Bible or using an expression that is natural in your language. That is fine, as long as the meaning is the same. If some part of the message is missing, put it in your translation at the point where it fits best in your language. It does not need to be in the same order as the source as long as it sounds natural and gives the same meaning. To do this in translationStudio, click on the pencil icon on the top right above your translation.
- * If you are translating the Bible, compare your translation with other translations of the same Bible passage. If one of those makes you think of a better way to say something, then revise your translation in that way. If one of those helps you to understand something better than you did before, then change your translation so that it communicates the meaning better.
- * After these steps, read your translation out loud to yourself. Fix anything that does not sound like it is the way that someone from your community would say it. Sometimes parts of sentences need to be put in a different order.
- * In translationStudio, exit editing mode by clicking the check mark icon at the top right of your translation. Now it is time to move the verse numbers where they should be in your translation. Drag each number onto the word that will begin that verse. If your translation has reordered the parts of the chunk or combined verses, you can leave some verse numbers together to indicate that what follows includes content from both of those verses.
+1. **Organize.** Talk with the pastors and other believers from your language group and form a committee of people who can oversee the translation work. The Translation Committee finds and oversees the translators, to whom the rest of this list applies.
+2. **Contact.** Make contact with at least one person in the unfoldingWord network, notifying unfoldingWord that you intend to begin translation. To obtain information about how to do that, see [Finding Answers](../../intro/finding-answers/01.md)
+3. **Review.** Review the [Translation Guidelines](../../intro/translation-guidelines/01.md).
+4. **Agree.** Agree that the Statement of Faith is an accurate reflection of your own beliefs and that you intend to translate the content in harmony with it and also in accordance with the Translation Guidelines. Do this by signing the form that is provided. (see http://ufw.io/forms/)
+5. **Pray.** Pray that God would help the translators to understand the passage that you are translating and that he would help you to find the best way to communicate that passage in your language.
+6. **Read.**
+ * If you are translating Open Bible Stories, read each individual story entirely before starting to translate it. If you are translating the Bible, read each entire chapter before you start to translate any part of it. That way you will understand how the part you are translating fits into the larger context, and you will translate it better.
+ * Read the passage that you plan to translate in as many different translations as you have. In [translationStudio](../../process/setup-ts/01.md), the first mode is the reading mode. Access this mode by clicking on the top symbol on the left side. You can choose up to three translations to show in this mode. We recommend that two of these be the unfoldingWord® Literal Text (ULT) and the unfoldingWord® Simplified Text (UST). The ULT will help you to see the form of the original text, and the UST will help you to understand the meaning of the original text. Think about how to communicate the meaning in the form that people would use in your language.
+ * Read any Bible helps or commentaries which you have that talk about that passage.
+ * Read the unfoldingWord® Translation Notes for the passage that you plan to translate. To do this, click on the third icon down on the left side of translationStudio. Click on the tab that says “Notes.” Then click on each of the phrases in blue and read the explanation for each phrase.
+ * Read the definitions of the unfoldingWord® Translation Words (the important words) in the passage. To do this, click on the tab that says, “Words.” Then click on each of the words in blue and read the explanation for each of these important words. Under each explanation there is also a section called “Translation Suggestions.” Here you will find ideas for how to translate these words.
+7. **Talk.** Discuss the passage, the unfoldingWord® Translation Notes, and the unfoldingWord® Translation Words with others on the translation team. Help each other to understand what they mean. If there are parts that you still do not understand, ask pastors or other church leaders for help.
+8. **Translate.** When you understand well what the passage is saying, say the first chunk (1-3 verses) out loud in your language in the way that someone from your language community would say it. If possible, say it to another member of the translation team. Let the translation team member correct it until it sounds good in your language. Use the different expressions in the ULT, UST, and Translation Notes to give you ideas for how to say the same things in different ways. Do not follow [the order of words](../translate-wforw/01.md) from either the ULT or the UST if it is more [natural](../guidelines-natural/01.md) for your language to use a different order. To help with this, say the whole chunk of text without looking at the source texts. This will help you to say these things in a way that is natural for your language, rather than in a way that was natural for the source language but might not be the best way to say it in your language. Still without looking at the source texts, type your translation of the chunk into [translationStudio](../../process/setup-ts/01.md) (or record it). To do this, click on the second icon down on the left side. The chunk that you are working on will appear in the ULT, covering the space where you will type the translation. When you are ready to type, click on the right edge of the space that is mostly covered by the ULT of that chunk. The blank space will then cover the ULT. Type your translation of the chunk here in this space from your memory. When you type (or write) from your memory without looking at the ULT, your translation will be more natural. Now repeat this step for the rest of the chunks of this passage.
+9. **Check**. Since you typed or recorded your translation of these chunks without looking at the source texts, you might have left out some things. Now is the time to add those things to your translation. Click on the third icon down on the left side of translationStudio again. In that mode:
+ * Look again at the source texts, including the ULT and UST, and carefully compare them to your translation. Make sure that your translation says all of the parts of the message of the ULT and does not leave out anything. You may choose to say some parts in a way that is different than the ULT, such as more like the UST or the Translation Note or another Bible or using an expression that is natural in your language. That is fine, as long as the meaning is the same. If some part of the message is missing, put it in your translation at the point where it fits best in your language. It does not need to be in the same order as the source as long as it sounds natural and gives the same meaning. To do this in translationStudio, click on the pencil icon on the top right above your translation.
+ * If you are translating the Bible, compare your translation with other translations of the same Bible passage. If one of those makes you think of a better way to say something, then revise your translation in that way. If one of those helps you to understand something better than you did before, then change your translation so that it communicates the meaning better.
+ * After these steps, read your translation out loud to yourself. Fix anything that does not sound like it is the way that someone from your community would say it. Sometimes parts of sentences need to be put in a different order.
+ * In translationStudio, exit editing mode by clicking the check mark icon at the top right of your translation. Now it is time to move the verse numbers where they should be in your translation. Drag each number onto the word that will begin that verse. If your translation has reordered the parts of the chunk or combined verses, you can leave some verse numbers together to indicate that what follows includes content from both of those verses.
When you finish the passage or chapter, it is ready for the [Oral Partner Check](../../checking/peer-check/01.md). To translate the next passage or chapter, start again at step 5.
-
+
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary/01.md
index 9d27c5ea..4ebb4544 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary/01.md
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Usually there are no special words that indicate a Contrary-to-Fact Condition. T
#### Examples from OBS and the Bible
> But **if Baal is God**, worship him! (Story 19 Frame 6 OBS)
-
+
> Elijah came near to all the people and said, “How long will you keep changing your mind? If Yahweh is God, follow him. But **if Baal is God**, then follow him.” Yet the people did not answer him a word. (1 Kings 18:21 ULT)
Baal is not God. Elijah is not suggesting that Baal might be God, and he does not want the people to follow Baal. But Elijah used a conditional statement to show them that what they were doing was wrong. In the example above, we see two conditions that have the same construction. The first one, “If Yahweh is God,” is a Factual Condition because Elijah is certain that it is true. The second one, “if Baal is God,” is a Contrary-to-Fact Condition because Elijah is certain that it is not true. You will need to consider if people would say both of these in the same way in your language or if they would say them in different ways.
@@ -23,13 +23,13 @@ Baal is not God. Elijah is not suggesting that Baal might be God, and he does no
> But his wife replied to him, “**If Yahweh had desired to kill us**, he would not have taken from our hand the whole burnt offering and the offering. He would not have shown us all these things, and at this time would he have not allowed us to hear about this.” (Judges 13:23 ULT)
Manoah’s wife thinks that the second part of her conditional statement is not true, therefore the first part is also not true. God received their burnt offering; therefore, He does not want to kill them.
->
+>
> “**If only we had died** by Yahweh’s hand in the land of Egypt, sitting by a pot of meat and eating bread to the full. (Exodus 16b:3 ULT)
Of course the people speaking here did not die in Egypt, and so this is a Contrary-to-Fact condition that is used to express a wish.
-> “Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! **If the mighty deeds had been done** in Tyre and Sidon which were done in you, **they would have repented** long ago in sackcloth and ashes. (Matthew 11:21 ULT)
+> “Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! **If the mighty deeds had been done** in Tyre and Sidon which were done in you, **they would have repented** long ago in sackcloth and ashes. (Matthew 11:21 ULT)
The English reader knows that these last two examples are Contrary-to-Fact conditions because of the past-tense verbs used in the first part (they are not things that might happen). The last example also has a second part that uses “would have.” These words also signal something that did not happen.
@@ -48,34 +48,34 @@ If Contrary-to-Fact conditions are clear in your language, then use them as they
(1) If the condition leads the reader to think that the speaker believes something that is false, then restate the condition as something that others believe.
> But **if Baal is God**, worship him! (Story 19 Frame 6 OBS)
-
+
>> If you believe that Baal is God, then worship him!
(2) If the condition leads the reader to think that the speaker is suggesting that the first part is true, then restate it as a statement that it is not true.
>> If Baal is not God, then you should not worship him!
-
+
But his wife replied to him, “**If Yahweh had desired to kill us**, he would not have taken from our hand the whole burnt offering and the offering. He would not have shown us all these things, and at this time would he have not allowed us to hear about this.” (Judges 13:23 ULT)
-
->> “**Yahweh does not want to kill us**, or he would not have received the burnt offering and the offering we gave him.
+
+>> “**Yahweh does not want to kill us**, or he would not have received the burnt offering and the offering we gave him.
(3) If the condition is expressing something that did not happen but the speaker wanted it to happen, restate it as a wish.
-> “**If only we had died** by Yahweh’s hand in the land of Egypt, sitting by a pot of meat and eating bread to the full. (Exodus 16b:3 ULT)
->> “**I wish we had died** by Yahweh’s hand in the land of Egypt…”
+> “**If only we had died** by Yahweh’s hand in the land of Egypt, sitting by a pot of meat and eating bread to the full. (Exodus 16b:3 ULT)
+>> “**I wish we had died** by Yahweh’s hand in the land of Egypt…”
(4) If the condition is expressing something that did not happen, restate it as a negative statement.
> “Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! **If the mighty deeds had been done** in Tyre and Sidon which were done in you, **they would have repented** long ago in sackcloth and ashes. (Matthew 11:21 ULT)
-
+
>> “Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! The mighty deeds which were done in you **were not done** in Tyre and Sidon. But **if they had been done there, those people would have repented** long ago in sackcloth and ashes.
(5) Often Factual and Contrary-to-Fact Conditions are used to make reasoned arguments for a change in behavior. If translators are struggling to know the best way to translate them, it could be helpful to discuss how this is done in their language community. If someone is trying to convince people to change their behavior, how do they do that? It may be possible to adapt similar strategies when translating these conditions.
> But **if Baal is God**, worship him! (Story 19 Frame 6 OBS)
-
+
>> Is Baal the one who is truly God? Should you worship him?
-
+
> “Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! **If the mighty deeds had been done** in Tyre and Sidon which were done in you, **they would have repented** long ago in sackcloth and ashes. (Matthew 11:21 ULT)
-
->> “Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! You think that you are better than Tyre and Sidon, but you are not! **They would have repented** long ago in sackcloth and ashes at seeing the mighty deeds that you have seen! **You should be like them**!
+
+>> “Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! You think that you are better than Tyre and Sidon, but you are not! **They would have repented** long ago in sackcloth and ashes at seeing the mighty deeds that you have seen! **You should be like them**!
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact/01.md
index 3400ff8e..26b015f6 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact/01.md
@@ -15,12 +15,12 @@ Some languages do not state something as a condition if it is certain or true. T
#### Examples from OBS and the Bible
> “**If** Yahweh is God, worship him!” (Story 19 Frame 6 OBS)
-
+
> Elijah came near to all the people and said, “How long will you keep changing your mind? **If Yahweh is God**, follow him. But if Baal is God, then follow him.” Yet the people did not answer him a word. (1 Kings 18:21 ULT)
This sentence has the same construction as a hypothetical condition. The condition is “if Yahweh is God.” If that is true, then the Israelites should worship Yahweh. But the prophet Elijah does not question whether or not Yahweh is God. In fact, he is so certain that Yahweh is God that later in the passage he pours water all over his sacrifice. He is confident that God is real and that he will burn even an offering that is completely wet. Over and over again, the prophets taught that Yahweh is God, so the people should worship Him. The people did not worship Yahweh, however, even though He is God. By putting the statement or instruction into the form of a Factual Condition, Elijah is trying to get the Israelites to understand more clearly what they should do.
-> “A son honors his father, and a servant honors his master. **If** I, then, am a father, where is my honor? **If** I am a master, where is the reverence for me?” says Yahweh of hosts to you priests, who despise my name. (Malachi 1:6 ULT)
+> “A son honors his father, and a servant honors his master. **If** I, then, am a father, where is my honor? **If** I am a master, where is the reverence for me?” says Yahweh of hosts to you priests, who despise my name. (Malachi 1:6 ULT)
Yahweh has said that he is a father and a master to Israel, so even though this sounds like a hypothetical condition because it begins with “if,” it is not hypothetical. This verse begins with the proverb that a son honors his father. Everyone knows that is right. But the Israelites are not honoring Yahweh. The other proverb in the verse says that a servant honors his master. Everyone knows that is right. But the Israelites are not honoring Yahweh, so it seems that he is not their master. But Yahweh is the master. Yahweh uses the form of a hypothetical condition to demonstrate that the Israelites are wrong. The second part of the condition that should occur naturally is not happening, even though the conditional statement is true.
@@ -31,9 +31,9 @@ If using the form of a hypothetical condition is confusing or would make the rea
#### Examples of Translation Strategies Applied
> “**If** Yahweh is God, worship him!” (Story 19 Frame 6 OBS)
-
+
>> “**It is true that** Yahweh is God, so worship him!”
-
-> “A son honors his father, and a servant honors his master. **If** I, then, am a father, where is my honor? **If** I am a master, where is the reverence for me?” says Yahweh of hosts to you priests, who despise my name. (Malachi 1:6 ULT)
-
->> “A son honors his father, and a servant honors his master. **Since** I, then, am a father, where is my honor? **Since** I am a master, where is the reverence for me?”
+
+> “A son honors his father, and a servant honors his master. **If** I, then, am a father, where is my honor? **If** I am a master, where is the reverence for me?” says Yahweh of hosts to you priests, who despise my name. (Malachi 1:6 ULT)
+
+>> “A son honors his father, and a servant honors his master. **Since** I, then, am a father, where is my honor? **Since** I am a master, where is the reverence for me?”
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical/01.md
index 1b1936f4..09fe0c7f 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical/01.md
@@ -22,8 +22,8 @@ There are two hypothetical conditions in this frame. In both of these conditions
If Cain does what is right, then he will be accepted. The only way for Cain to be accepted is by doing what is right.
-> … **if** this plan or this work is of men, it will be overthrown. But **if** it is of God, you will not be able to overthrow them. (Acts 5:38b-39aULT)
->
+> … **if** this plan or this work is of men, it will be overthrown. But **if** it is of God, you will not be able to overthrow them. (Acts 5:38b-39aULT)
+>
>
There are two hypothetical conditions here: (1) If it is true that this plan is of men, then it will be overthrown; (2) If it is true that this plan is of God, then it cannot be overthrown.
@@ -38,15 +38,15 @@ There are two hypothetical conditions here: (1) If it is true that this plan is
(1) If the order of clauses makes the hypothetical condition confusing, then change the order of the clauses.
> God promised to bless the people and protect them **if** they obeyed these laws. But he said he would punish them **if** they did not obey them. (Story 13 Frame 7 OBS)
-
->> If the people obeyed these laws, God promised to bless them and protect them. But **if** they did not obey these laws, God said that he would punish them.
+
+>> If the people obeyed these laws, God promised to bless them and protect them. But **if** they did not obey these laws, God said that he would punish them.
(2) If it is not clear where the second event is, mark that part with a word like “then.”
> God promised to bless the people and protect them, **if** they obeyed these laws. But he said he would punish them **if** they did not obey them. (Story 13 Frame 7 OBS)
-
+
>> If the people obeyed these laws, **then** God promised he would bless them and protect them. But **if** they did not obey these laws, **then** God said that he would punish them.
-
+
> …**if** this plan or this work is of men, it will be overthrown. But **if** it is of God, you will not be able to overthrow them; (Acts 5:38-39 ULT)
-
->> …**if** this plan or this work is of men, **then** it will be overthrown. But **if** it is of God, **then** you will not be able to overthrow them;
+
+>> …**if** this plan or this work is of men, **then** it will be overthrown. But **if** it is of God, **then** you will not be able to overthrow them;
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions/01.md
index 467cdd5c..b3635f70 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions/01.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
#### Description
-Exceptional relationship connectors exclude an item(s) or person(s) from a group.
+Exceptional relationship connectors exclude an item(s) or person(s) from a group.
#### Reason This Is a Translation Issue
@@ -11,39 +11,39 @@ English indicates exceptional relationships by first describing a group (Part 1)
#### Examples from OBS and the Bible
> God told Adam that he could eat from **any** tree in the garden **except** from the tree of the knowledge of good and evil. (OBS Story 1 Frame 11)
->
+>
> But if you will not redeem it, then tell me so that I may know, for there is **no one** to redeem it **besides** you, and I am after you.” (Ruth 4:4b ULT)
->
+>
> David attacked them from the twilight to the evening of the next day. **Not** a man escaped **except for** four hundred young men, who rode on camels and fled. (1 Samuel 30:17 ULT)
->
+>
> The man said, “Let me go, for the dawn is breaking.” Jacob said, “I will **not** let you go **unless** you bless me.” (Genesis 32:26 ULT)
#### Translation Strategies
-If the way that Exceptional Clauses are marked in the source language is also clear in your language, then translate the Exceptional Clauses in the same way.
+If the way that Exceptional Clauses are marked in the source language is also clear in your language, then translate the Exceptional Clauses in the same way.
-(1) Very often, the exception in Part 2 contradicts something that was negated in Part 1. In this case, the translator can phrase the same idea without the contradiction by deleting the negative and using a word like “**only**.”
+(1) Very often, the exception in Part 2 contradicts something that was negated in Part 1. In this case, the translator can phrase the same idea without the contradiction by deleting the negative and using a word like “**only**.”
(2) Reverse the order of the clauses, so that the exception is stated first, and then the larger group is named second.
#### Examples of Translation Strategy Applied
-(1) Very often, the exception in Part 2 contradicts something that was negated in Part 1. In this case, the translator can phrase the same idea without the contradiction by deleting the negative and using a word like “**only**.”
+(1) Very often, the exception in Part 2 contradicts something that was negated in Part 1. In this case, the translator can phrase the same idea without the contradiction by deleting the negative and using a word like “**only**.”
> David attacked them from the twilight to the evening of the next day. **Not a man escaped **except for** four hundred young men**, who rode on camels and fled. (1 Samuel 30:17 ULT)
-* Part 1: (**Not** a man escaped)
+* Part 1: (**Not** a man escaped)
* Part 2: (**except for** four hundred young men)
->> David attacked them from the twilight to the evening of the next day. **Only** four hundred young men escaped; they rode on camels and fled.
-
-> But if you will not redeem it, then tell me so that I may know, for there is **no one** to redeem it **besides** you, and I am after you.” (Ruth 4:4 ULT)
->> But if you will not redeem it, then tell me so that I may know, for **you are first in line to redeem it [only you can redeem it]**, and I am after you.”
-
-> The man said, “Let me go, for the dawn is breaking.” Jacob said, “I will **not** let you go **unless** you bless me.” (Genesis 32:26 ULT)
->> The man said, “Let me go, for the dawn is breaking.” Jacob said, “I will let you go **only if** you bless me.”
+>> David attacked them from the twilight to the evening of the next day. **Only** four hundred young men escaped; they rode on camels and fled.
+
+> But if you will not redeem it, then tell me so that I may know, for there is **no one** to redeem it **besides** you, and I am after you.” (Ruth 4:4 ULT)
+>> But if you will not redeem it, then tell me so that I may know, for **you are first in line to redeem it [only you can redeem it]**, and I am after you.”
+
+> The man said, “Let me go, for the dawn is breaking.” Jacob said, “I will **not** let you go **unless** you bless me.” (Genesis 32:26 ULT)
+>> The man said, “Let me go, for the dawn is breaking.” Jacob said, “I will let you go **only if** you bless me.”
(2) Reverse the order of the clauses, so that the exception is stated first, and then the larger group is named second.
-> God told Adam that he could eat from **any** tree in the garden **except** from the tree of the knowledge of good and evil. (OBS Story 1 Frame 11)
->> God told Adam that he could **not** eat from the tree of the knowledge of good and evil, but he could eat from **any other** tree in the garden.
+> God told Adam that he could eat from **any** tree in the garden **except** from the tree of the knowledge of good and evil. (OBS Story 1 Frame 11)
+>> God told Adam that he could **not** eat from the tree of the knowledge of good and evil, but he could eat from **any other** tree in the garden.
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast/01.md
index ed508d87..a07ab41b 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast/01.md
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ In Scripture, many events did not happen as the people involved intended or expe
#### Examples from OBS and the Bible
-> You tried to do evil when you sold me as a slave, **but** God used the evil for good! (Story 8 Frame 12 OBS)
+> You tried to do evil when you sold me as a slave, **but** God used the evil for good! (Story 8 Frame 12 OBS)
Joseph’s brothers’ evil plan to sell Joseph is contrasted with God’s good plan to save many people. The word “but” marks the contrast.
@@ -23,12 +23,12 @@ Joseph’s brothers’ evil plan to sell Joseph is contrasted with God’s good
Jesus contrasts the proud way that human leaders behave with the humble way that he behaves. The contrast is marked by the word “yet.”
> … and he was bound with chains and shackles and kept under guard, and breaking his bonds, he would be driven by the demon into the wilderness. (Luke 8:29b ULT)
->
+>
>
It is unexpected that someone who is bound with chains will be able to break them. Here, only the action verb, "breaking his bonds," marks the contrast of an unexpected event.
-> \[David\] found favor in the sight of God, and he asked if he might find a dwelling place for the house of Jacob. **However**, Solomon built the house for him. **But** the Most High does not live in houses made with hands. (Acts 7:46-48a ULT)
+> \[David\] found favor in the sight of God, and he asked if he might find a dwelling place for the house of Jacob. **However**, Solomon built the house for him. **But** the Most High does not live in houses made with hands. (Acts 7:46-48a ULT)
There are two contrasts here, marked with “however” and "but." The first contrast shows that even though David asked to find a place for God’s house, it was Solomon who built it. Then there is another contrast because, even though Solomon built a house for God, God does not live in houses that people build.
@@ -44,15 +44,15 @@ If your language uses contrast relationships in the same way as in the text, the
1.If the contrast relationship between the clauses is not clear, then use a connecting word or phrase that is more specific or more clear.
-> For who is greater, the one who reclines at table or the one who serves? Is it not the one who reclines at table? **Yet** I am among you as one who serves. (Luke 22:27 ULT)
->> For who is greater, the one who reclines at table or the one who serves? Is it not the one who reclines at table? **Unlike that person**, I am among you as one who serves.
+> For who is greater, the one who reclines at table or the one who serves? Is it not the one who reclines at table? **Yet** I am among you as one who serves. (Luke 22:27 ULT)
+>> For who is greater, the one who reclines at table or the one who serves? Is it not the one who reclines at table? **Unlike that person**, I am among you as one who serves.
2.If it is more clear in your language to mark the other clause of the contrast relationship, then use a connecting word on the other clause.
-> … and he was bound with chains and shackles and kept under guard, and breaking his bonds, he would be driven by the demon into the wilderness. (Luke 8:29b ULT) (Luke 8:29 ULT)
->> … and he was bound with chains and shackles and kept under guard, and yet, breaking his bonds, he would be driven by the demon into the wilderness.
+> … and he was bound with chains and shackles and kept under guard, and breaking his bonds, he would be driven by the demon into the wilderness. (Luke 8:29b ULT) (Luke 8:29 ULT)
+>> … and he was bound with chains and shackles and kept under guard, and yet, breaking his bonds, he would be driven by the demon into the wilderness.
3.If your language shows a contrast relationship in a different way, then use that way.
-> > \[David\] found favor in the sight of God, and he asked if he might find a dwelling place for the house of Jacob. **However**, Solomon built the house for him. **But** the Most High does not live in houses made with hands. (Acts 7:46-48a ULT)
->> [David] found favor in the sight of God, and he asked if he might find a dwelling place for the house of Jacob. **But** it was, Solomon, **not David**, who built the house for God. **Even though Solomon built him a house**, the Most High does not live in houses made with hands.
+> > \[David\] found favor in the sight of God, and he asked if he might find a dwelling place for the house of Jacob. **However**, Solomon built the house for him. **But** the Most High does not live in houses made with hands. (Acts 7:46-48a ULT)
+>> [David] found favor in the sight of God, and he asked if he might find a dwelling place for the house of Jacob. **But** it was, Solomon, **not David**, who built the house for God. **Even though Solomon built him a house**, the Most High does not live in houses made with hands.
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal/01.md
index 1499a800..8b523e5f 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal/01.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
Some connectors establish logical relationships between two phrases, clauses, sentences, of chunks of text.
-### Goal (or Purpose) Relationship
+### Goal (or Purpose) Relationship
#### Description
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ The Goal or Purpose of the woman’s false accusation was to get Joseph arrested
> Gideon, Joash’s son, was separating out the wheat by beating it on the floor, in the winepress—**to hide it from the Midianites**. (Judges 6:11b ULT)
-Here the prepositional phrase begins with only the word “to” but “in order to” is understood.
+Here the prepositional phrase begins with only the word “to” but “in order to” is understood.
> Now if I have found favor in your eyes, show me your ways **so that I may know you and continue to find favor in your eyes**. Remember that this nation is your people.”(Exodus 33:13 ULT)
@@ -36,11 +36,11 @@ The Purpose of going to Bethlehem was to see the thing that had happened. Here t
> “…if you want **to enter into life**, keep the commandments.” (Matthew 19:17 ULT)
-The Goal of keeping the commandments is to enter into life.
+The Goal of keeping the commandments is to enter into life.
> Do not turn from it to the right or to the left **so that you may be successful** wherever you go. (Joshua 1:7 ULT)
-The purpose of not turning away from the instructions that Moses gave to the Israelites was so that they would be successful.
+The purpose of not turning away from the instructions that Moses gave to the Israelites was so that they would be successful.
> But when the vine growers saw the son, they said among themselves, ‘This is the heir. Come, let us kill him **and take over his inheritance**.’ So they took him, threw him out of the vineyard and killed him. (Matt 21:38-39 ULT)
@@ -57,21 +57,21 @@ If your language uses Goal or Purpose relationships in the same way as in the te
(1) If the construction of the Goal statement is unclear, change it to one that is more clear.
-> “Also pull out for her some grain from the bundles, and leave it **for her to glean**, and do not rebuke her.” (Ruth 2:16 ULT)
+> “Also pull out for her some grain from the bundles, and leave it **for her to glean**, and do not rebuke her.” (Ruth 2:16 ULT)
>> “Also pull out for her some grain from the bundles, and leave it **so that she can glean it**, and do not rebuke her.”
-
-> …the shepherds said to each other, “Let us indeed go to Bethlehem, **and see this thing that has happened**, which the Lord has made known to us.” (Luke 2:15 ULT)
+
+> …the shepherds said to each other, “Let us indeed go to Bethlehem, **and see this thing that has happened**, which the Lord has made known to us.” (Luke 2:15 ULT)
>> …the shepherds said to each other, “Let us indeed go to Bethlehem, **so that we can see this thing that has happened**, which the Lord has made known to us.”
(2) If the order of the statements makes the Goal statement unclear or confusing for the reader, then change the order.
-> “…if you want **to enter into life**, keep the commandments.” (Matthew 19:17 ULT)
+> “…if you want **to enter into life**, keep the commandments.” (Matthew 19:17 ULT)
>> “…keep the commandments if you want **to enter into life**.” or: “…keep the commandments **so that you can enter into life**.”
-
+
> But when the vine growers saw the son, they said among themselves, ‘This is the heir. Come, let us kill him **and take over his inheritance**.’ So they took him, threw him out of the vineyard and killed him. (Matt 21:38-39 ULT)
(1) and (2)
> But when the vine growers saw the son, they said among themselves, ‘This is the heir. Come, let us kill him **and take over his inheritance**.’ So they took him, threw him out of the vineyard and killed him. (Matt 21:38-39 ULT)
-
->> But when the vine growers saw the son, they said among themselves, ‘This is the heir. Come, let us kill him **so that we can take over his inheritance**.’ So they took him, threw him out of the vineyard and killed him **so that they could take over his inheritance**.
\ No newline at end of file
+
+>> But when the vine growers saw the son, they said among themselves, ‘This is the heir. Come, let us kill him **so that we can take over his inheritance**.’ So they took him, threw him out of the vineyard and killed him **so that they could take over his inheritance**.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result/01.md
index 0c81f1dd..df6b4a8d 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result/01.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ A Reason-and-Result Relationship is a logical relationship in which one event is
#### Reason this is a translation issue
-A Reason-and-Result Relationship can look forward - “I did Y because I wanted X to happen.” But usually it is looking backward - “X happened, and so I did Y.” Also, it is possible to state the Reason either before or after the Result. Many languages have a preferred order for the Reason and the Result, and it is confusing for the reader if they are in the opposite order. Common words used to indicate a Reason-and-Result Relationship in English are “because,” “so,” “therefore,” and “for.” Some of these words can also be used to indicate a Goal relationship, so translators need to be aware of the difference between a Goal relationship and a Reason-and-Result relationship. It is necessary for translators to understand how the two events are connected and then communicate them clearly in their language.
+A Reason-and-Result Relationship can look forward - “I did Y because I wanted X to happen.” But usually it is looking backward - “X happened, and so I did Y.” Also, it is possible to state the Reason either before or after the Result. Many languages have a preferred order for the Reason and the Result, and it is confusing for the reader if they are in the opposite order. Common words used to indicate a Reason-and-Result Relationship in English are “because,” “so,” “therefore,” and “for.” Some of these words can also be used to indicate a Goal relationship, so translators need to be aware of the difference between a Goal relationship and a Reason-and-Result relationship. It is necessary for translators to understand how the two events are connected and then communicate them clearly in their language.
If the reason and result are stated in different verses, it is still possible to put them in a different order. If you change the order of the verses, then put the verse numbers together at the beginning of the group of verses that were rearranged like this: 1-2. This is called a [Verse Bridge](../translate-versebridge/01.md).
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ The **Reason** is the change in Saul - that he had tried to kill people who beli
> Behold, a great storm arose on the sea, **so that** the boat was covered with the waves. (Matthew 8:24 ULT)
-The **Reason** is the great storm, and the **Result** is that the boat was covered with the waves. The two events are connected by “so that.” Notice that the term “so that” often indicates a Goal relationship, but here the relationship is Reason-and-Result. This is because the sea cannot think and therefore does not have a Goal.
+The **Reason** is the great storm, and the **Result** is that the boat was covered with the waves. The two events are connected by “so that.” Notice that the term “so that” often indicates a Goal relationship, but here the relationship is Reason-and-Result. This is because the sea cannot think and therefore does not have a Goal.
> God blessed the seventh day and sanctified it, **because** in it he rested from all his work which he had done in his creation. (Genesis 2:3 ULT)
@@ -52,9 +52,9 @@ If your language uses Reason-and-Result relationships in the same way as in the
> Blessed are the poor, **for** yours is the kingdom of God. (Luke 6:20 ULT)
-(1) The kingdom of God belongs to you who are poor. **Therefore**, the poor are blessed.
+(1) The kingdom of God belongs to you who are poor. **Therefore**, the poor are blessed.
-(2) Blessed are the poor, **because** yours is the kingdom of God.
+(2) Blessed are the poor, **because** yours is the kingdom of God.
(3) **The reason that** the poor are blessed **is because** yours is the kingdom of God.
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ If your language uses Reason-and-Result relationships in the same way as in the
(3) Behold, **because** a great storm arose on the sea, the boat was covered with the waves.
-> **Since** the captain could not tell anything because of all the noise, he ordered that Paul be brought into the fortress. (Acts 21:34 ULT)
+> **Since** the captain could not tell anything because of all the noise, he ordered that Paul be brought into the fortress. (Acts 21:34 ULT)
(1) The captain ordered that Paul be brought into the fortress, **because** he could not tell anything because of all the noise.
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-time-background/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-time-background/01.md
index 6acdc53e..07ba7f26 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-time-background/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-time-background/01.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Some connectors establish time relationships between two phrases, clauses, sente
#### Definition
-A background clause is one that describes something that is ongoing, and then another clause indicates an event that begins to happen during that time. These events are also simultaneous events, but they have the further relationship of background event and main event, because the event that is already happening serves as the background for the other event, which is the one that is in focus. The background event simply provides the time frame or other context for the main event or events.
+A background clause is one that describes something that is ongoing, and then another clause indicates an event that begins to happen during that time. These events are also simultaneous events, but they have the further relationship of background event and main event, because the event that is already happening serves as the background for the other event, which is the one that is in focus. The background event simply provides the time frame or other context for the main event or events.
#### Reason this is a translation issue
@@ -16,9 +16,9 @@ Languages indicate a shift in time in different ways. You (the translator) need
> **When** Solomon was old, he also worshiped their gods. (OBS Story 18 Frame 3)
-Solomon began to worship foreign gods at a time when he was old. Being old is the background event. Worshipping other gods is the main event.
+Solomon began to worship foreign gods at a time when he was old. Being old is the background event. Worshipping other gods is the main event.
-> **Now** his parents went **every year** to Jerusalem for the Festival of the Passover. When he was twelve years old, they again went up at the customary time for the feast. (Luke 2:41-42 ULT)
+> **Now** his parents went **every year** to Jerusalem for the Festival of the Passover. When he was twelve years old, they again went up at the customary time for the feast. (Luke 2:41-42 ULT)
The first event––going to Jerusalem––is ongoing and started long ago. We know this because of the words “every year.” Going to Jerusalem is the background event. Then an event begins that started during the time “when he was twelve years old.” So the main event is the specific time Jesus and his family traveled to Jerualem for the Passover festival **when he was twelve years old.**
@@ -43,25 +43,25 @@ If the way that the Background Clauses are marked is also clear in your language
(1) If the connecting word does not make it clear that what follows is a Background Clause, use a connecting word that communicates this more clearly.
-> …**It happened during the time that** Pontius Pilate was governor of Judea, **and during the time that** Herod was tetrarch of Galilee, **and during the time that** his brother Philip was tetrarch of the region of Ituraea and Trachonitis, **and during the time that** Lysanias was tetrarch of Abilene, **and also during the time that** Annas and Caiaphas were high priests—**that** the word of God came to John son of Zechariah in the wilderness.
+> …**It happened during the time that** Pontius Pilate was governor of Judea, **and during the time that** Herod was tetrarch of Galilee, **and during the time that** his brother Philip was tetrarch of the region of Ituraea and Trachonitis, **and during the time that** Lysanias was tetrarch of Abilene, **and also during the time that** Annas and Caiaphas were high priests—**that** the word of God came to John son of Zechariah in the wilderness.
(2) If your language marks Background Clauses in a different way than using connecting words, such as with different verb forms, then use that way.
-> …Pontius Pilate **was governing** Judea, and Herod **was ruling over** Galilee, and his brother Philip **was ruling over** the region of Ituraea and Trachonitis, and Lysanias **was ruling over** Abilene, and Annas and Caiaphas **were being** high priests—the word of God **came** to John son of Zechariah in the wilderness.
+> …Pontius Pilate **was governing** Judea, and Herod **was ruling over** Galilee, and his brother Philip **was ruling over** the region of Ituraea and Trachonitis, and Lysanias **was ruling over** Abilene, and Annas and Caiaphas **were being** high priests—the word of God **came** to John son of Zechariah in the wilderness.
#### Example of differences in Time Relationship Connecting Words:
| | |
| ------------------------ | -------------------------------------------- |
|Background setting |The word of Yahweh was rare **in those days**;|
-|Background repeated | there was no vision breaking through. |
+|Background repeated | there was no vision breaking through. |
|Introduction of main event|**It happened at that time**, |
|Background |**when** Eli was lying down in his place |
|Simultaneous background |**and** his eyes had begun to grow dim so that he could not see well,|
|Simultaneous background |**and** the lamp of God had not yet gone out, |
|Simultaneous background |**and** Samuel was lying down to sleep in the temple of Yahweh,|
-| Simultaneous background | where the ark of God was. |
+| Simultaneous background | where the ark of God was. |
|Main event |**Yahweh called to Samuel**, |
|Sequential event |who said, “here I am.” (1 Sam 3:1-4 ULT) |
-In the above example, the first two lines talk about a condition that was going on for a long time. This is the general, long-term background. We know this from the phrase “in those days.” Then there are several lines of short-term background. The first one is introduced by “when,” and then three more are connected to the first one by “and.” The background clause introduced by “where” explains a little more about the background clause before it. Then the main event happens, followed by more events. Translators will need to think about the best way to show these relationships in their language.
+In the above example, the first two lines talk about a condition that was going on for a long time. This is the general, long-term background. We know this from the phrase “in those days.” Then there are several lines of short-term background. The first one is introduced by “when,” and then three more are connected to the first one by “and.” The background clause introduced by “where” explains a little more about the background clause before it. Then the main event happens, followed by more events. Translators will need to think about the best way to show these relationships in their language.
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential/01.md
index 0b1dfc8a..6a5d9015 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential/01.md
@@ -15,14 +15,14 @@ Languages indicate sequences of events in different ways; some use ordering, som
#### Examples from OBS and the Bible
> **When** Joseph came to his brothers, they kidnapped him and sold him to some slave traders. (OBS Story 8 Frame 2)
-
+
First Joseph came to his brothers and then they kidnapped and sold him. We know this because of the connecting word, **when**. The translator needs to decide the best way to communicate this sequence clearly and correctly.
> It was as sweet as honey in my mouth, but **after** I ate it, my stomach became bitter. (Revelation 10:10 ULT)
The event of the first clause occurs first, and the event of the last clause occurs later. We know this because of the connecting word, **after**. The translator needs to decide the best way to communicate this sequence clearly and correctly.
-> For **before** the child knows to refuse the evil and choose the good, the land whose two kings you dread will be desolate (Isaiah 7:16 ULT)
+> For **before** the child knows to refuse the evil and choose the good, the land whose two kings you dread will be desolate (Isaiah 7:16 ULT)
The event of the first clause occurs after the event of the second clause. First the land they dread will be desolate and then the child will know to refuse evil and choose good. We know this because of the connecting word, **before**. However, stating the clauses in this order may communicate the wrong order of events in your language. The translator may have to change the order so the clauses come in the order that they will happen. Or it may be possible to keep the order of the original language text and mark the ordering of sequence so that it is clear to the readers. You (the translator) need to decide the best way to communicate this sequence clearly and correctly.
@@ -35,16 +35,16 @@ Here the general connector “**and** ” connects four events. These are sequen
If the sequence of events is clear in your language, then translate the sequence as it is.
1. If the connecting word is not clear, use a connecting word that communicates the sequence more clearly.
-1. If the clauses are in an order that makes the sequence unclear, put the clauses in an order that is more clear.
+1. If the clauses are in an order that makes the sequence unclear, put the clauses in an order that is more clear.
#### Examples of Translation Strategies Applied
(1) If the connecting word is not clear, use a connecting word that communicates the sequence more clearly.
-> Then Mary arose in those days **and** quickly went into the hill country, to a city of Judah, **and** she entered into the house of Zechariah **and** greeted Elizabeth. (Luke 1:39-40 ULT)
->> Then Mary arose in those days. **Then** she quickly went into the hill country, to a city of Judah. **Then** she entered into the house of Zechariah **and then** she greeted Elizabeth.
-
-> For **before** the child knows to refuse the evil and choose the good, the land whose two kings you dread will be desolate (Isaiah 7:16 ULT)
+> Then Mary arose in those days **and** quickly went into the hill country, to a city of Judah, **and** she entered into the house of Zechariah **and** greeted Elizabeth. (Luke 1:39-40 ULT)
+>> Then Mary arose in those days. **Then** she quickly went into the hill country, to a city of Judah. **Then** she entered into the house of Zechariah **and then** she greeted Elizabeth.
+
+> For **before** the child knows to refuse the evil and choose the good, the land whose two kings you dread will be desolate (Isaiah 7:16 ULT)
>> For the time will come when the child knows to refuse the evil and choose the good, **but even before that time**, the land whose two kings you dread will be desolate.
(2) If the clauses are in an order that makes the sequence unclear, put the clauses in an order that is more clear.
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous/01.md
index 51098229..e8719645 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous/01.md
@@ -20,9 +20,9 @@ Two events happened while Joseph was a slave to a wealthy government official: J
> But in truth I tell you that there were many widows in Israel **during** the time of Elijah… (Luke 4:25 ULT)
-This tells us clearly that two things happened at the same time, because of the connecting word, **during**. But one event did not cause the other.
+This tells us clearly that two things happened at the same time, because of the connecting word, **during**. But one event did not cause the other.
-> Now the people were waiting for Zechariah, **and** they were wondering at his delay in the temple. (Luke 1:21 ULT)
+> Now the people were waiting for Zechariah, **and** they were wondering at his delay in the temple. (Luke 1:21 ULT)
The people were both waiting and wondering at the same time. The general connector, **and**, indicates this.
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ If the way that the Simultaneous Clauses are marked also is clear in your langua
Below, each Bible verse will be restated in three different ways, according to the Translation Strategies in the list above. Each restatement will have the same number as the Translation Strategy that it is using.
-> Now the people were waiting for Zechariah, **and** they were wondering at his delay in the temple. (Luke 1:21 ULT)
+> Now the people were waiting for Zechariah, **and** they were wondering at his delay in the temple. (Luke 1:21 ULT)
(1) Now **while** the people were waiting for Zechariah, they were wondering at his delay in the temple.
@@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ Below, each Bible verse will be restated in three different ways, according to t
> And **while** they were looking intently into heaven **as** he was going up, behold, two men stood by them in white clothing. (Acts 1:10 ULT)
-(1) And **during the time** they were looking intently into heaven **while** he was going up, behold, two men stood by them in white clothing.
+(1) And **during the time** they were looking intently into heaven **while** he was going up, behold, two men stood by them in white clothing.
-(2) And **while** they were looking intently into heaven **as** he was going up, behold, **at that same time** two men stood by them in white clothing.
+(2) And **while** they were looking intently into heaven **as** he was going up, behold, **at that same time** two men stood by them in white clothing.
(3) They were looking intently into heaven, he was going up, **when** they saw two men standing by them in white clothing.
diff --git a/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases/01.md b/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases/01.md
index 63e43aea..7e568645 100644
--- a/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases/01.md
+++ b/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases/01.md
@@ -5,19 +5,19 @@ As humans, we write our thoughts in phrases and sentences. Usually, we want to c
* It was raining, **so** I opened my umbrella.
* It was raining, **but** I did not have an umbrella. **So** I got very wet.
-Connecting Words or Phrases can connect phrases or clauses within a sentence. They can connect sentences to each other. They can also connect entire chunks to one another in order to show how the chunk before relates to the chunk after. Very often, the Connecting Words that connect entire chunks to one another are either conjunctions or adverbs.
+Connecting Words or Phrases can connect phrases or clauses within a sentence. They can connect sentences to each other. They can also connect entire chunks to one another in order to show how the chunk before relates to the chunk after. Very often, the Connecting Words that connect entire chunks to one another are either conjunctions or adverbs.
> It was raining, but I did not have an umbrella. So I got very wet.
-
-> **Now** I must change my clothes. Then I will drink a cup of hot tea and warm myself by the fire.
-In the above example, the word “now” connects the two short chunks of text, showing the relationship between them. The speaker must change his clothes, drink hot tea, and warm himself because of something that happened earlier (that is, he got wet in the rain).
+> **Now** I must change my clothes. Then I will drink a cup of hot tea and warm myself by the fire.
-Sometimes people might not use a Connecting Word because they expect the readers to understand the relationship between the thoughts because of the context. Some languages do not use Connecting Words as much as other languages do. They might say:
+In the above example, the word “now” connects the two short chunks of text, showing the relationship between them. The speaker must change his clothes, drink hot tea, and warm himself because of something that happened earlier (that is, he got wet in the rain).
+
+Sometimes people might not use a Connecting Word because they expect the readers to understand the relationship between the thoughts because of the context. Some languages do not use Connecting Words as much as other languages do. They might say:
* It was raining. I did not have an umbrella. I got very wet.
-You (the translator) will need to use the method that is most natural and clear in the target language. But in general, using Connecting Words whenever possible helps the reader to understand the ideas in the Bible most clearly.
+You (the translator) will need to use the method that is most natural and clear in the target language. But in general, using Connecting Words whenever possible helps the reader to understand the ideas in the Bible most clearly.
#### Reasons this is a translation issue
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Listed below are different types of connections between ideas or events. These d
* [Factual Condition](../grammar-connect-condition-fact/01.md) – a connection that sounds hypothetical but is already certain or true so that the condition is guaranteed to happen.
* [Contrary to Fact Condition](../grammar-connect-condition-contrary/01.md) – a connection that sounds hypothetical but is already certain that it is not true. See also: [Hypothetical Statements](../figs-hypo/01.md).
* [Goal Relationship](../grammar-connect-logic-goal/01.md) – a logical relationship in which the second event is the purpose or goal of the first.
-* [Reason and Result Relationship](../grammar-connect-logic-result/01.md) - a logical relationship in which one event is the reason for the other event, which is the result.
+* [Reason and Result Relationship](../grammar-connect-logic-result/01.md) - a logical relationship in which one event is the reason for the other event, which is the result.
* [Contrast Relationship](../grammar-connect-logic-contrast/01.md) – one item is being described as different or in opposition to another.
@@ -74,30 +74,30 @@ If the way the relationship between thoughts is shown in the ULT would be natura
(1) Use a connecting word (even if the ULT does not use one).
-> Jesus said to them, “Come after me, and I will make you become fishers of men.” Immediately they left the nets and went after him. (Mark 1:17-18 ULT)
-
-They followed Jesus **because** he told them to. Some translators may want to mark this clause with the connecting word “so.”
+> Jesus said to them, “Come after me, and I will make you become fishers of men.” Immediately they left the nets and went after him. (Mark 1:17-18 ULT)
+
+They followed Jesus **because** he told them to. Some translators may want to mark this clause with the connecting word “so.”
>> Jesus said to them, “Come after me, and I will make you become fishers of men.” **So** immediately they left the nets and went after him.
(2) Do not use a connecting word if it would be odd to use one and people would understand the right relationship between the thoughts without it.
-> Therefore whoever breaks the least one of these commandments **and** teaches others to do so, will be called least in the kingdom of heaven. **But** whoever keeps them and teaches them will be called great in the kingdom of heaven. (Matthew 5:19 ULT)
+> Therefore whoever breaks the least one of these commandments **and** teaches others to do so, will be called least in the kingdom of heaven. **But** whoever keeps them and teaches them will be called great in the kingdom of heaven. (Matthew 5:19 ULT)
-Some languages would prefer not to use connecting words here, because the meaning is clear without them and using them would be unnatural. They might translate like this:
+Some languages would prefer not to use connecting words here, because the meaning is clear without them and using them would be unnatural. They might translate like this:
>> Therefore whoever breaks the least one of these commandments, teaching others to do so as well, will be called least in the kingdom of heaven. Whoever keeps them and teaches them will be called great in the kingdom of heaven.
-
+
> I did not immediately consult with flesh and blood, nor did I go up to Jerusalem to those who had become apostles before me, **but** instead I went to Arabia and then returned to Damascus. **Then** after three years I went up to Jerusalem to visit Cephas, and I stayed with him fifteen days. (Galatians 1:16-18 ULT)
-Some languages might not need the words “but” or “then” here. They might translate like this:
+Some languages might not need the words “but” or “then” here. They might translate like this:
>> I did not immediately consult with flesh and blood, nor did I go up to Jerusalem to those who had become apostles before me. Instead I went to Arabia and then returned to Damascus. After three years I went up to Jerusalem to visit Cephas, and I stayed with him fifteen days.
(3) Use a different connecting word.
-> **Therefore** whoever breaks the least one of these commandments and teaches others to do so, will be called least in the kingdom of heaven. **But** whoever keeps them and teaches them will be called great in the kingdom of heaven. (Matthew 5:19 ULT)
-
-Instead of a word like “therefore,” a language might need a phrase to indicate that there was a section before it that gave the reason for the section that follows. Also, the word “but” is used here because of the contrast between the two groups of people. But in some languages, the word “but” would show that what comes after it is surprising because of what came before it. So “and” might be clearer for those languages. They might translate like this:
+> **Therefore** whoever breaks the least one of these commandments and teaches others to do so, will be called least in the kingdom of heaven. **But** whoever keeps them and teaches them will be called great in the kingdom of heaven. (Matthew 5:19 ULT)
+
+Instead of a word like “therefore,” a language might need a phrase to indicate that there was a section before it that gave the reason for the section that follows. Also, the word “but” is used here because of the contrast between the two groups of people. But in some languages, the word “but” would show that what comes after it is surprising because of what came before it. So “and” might be clearer for those languages. They might translate like this:
>> **Because of that**, whoever breaks the least one of these commandments and teaches others to do so, will be called least in the kingdom of heaven. **And** whoever keeps them and teaches them will be called great in the kingdom of heaven.
diff --git a/translate/guidelines-equal/01.md b/translate/guidelines-equal/01.md
index a436c340..f7e2348b 100644
--- a/translate/guidelines-equal/01.md
+++ b/translate/guidelines-equal/01.md
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-An **equal** translation communicates any expressive meaning from the source language in an equal way in the target language. Especially notice the forms in the source text that communicate certain kinds of emotions and choose forms in the target language that communicate the same emotions. Examples of some of these forms follow.
+An **equal** translation communicates any expressive meaning from the source language in an equal way in the target language. Especially notice the forms in the source text that communicate certain kinds of emotions and choose forms in the target language that communicate the same emotions. Examples of some of these forms follow.
#### Idioms
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ An **equal** translation communicates any expressive meaning from the source lan
For example, these three translations all have the same meaning. See Acts 18:6:
-* “Your blood be upon your heads! I am innocent.” (RSV)
+* “Your blood be upon your heads! I am innocent.” (RSV)
* “If you are lost, you yourselves must take the blame for it! I am not responsible.” (GNB)
* “If God punishes you, it is because of you, not me!” (TFT)
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Here are some examples:
* **I was shattered**! The speaker was not literally broken, but he felt very bad.
* **He closed his ears to what I was saying.** Meaning, “he chose to not listen to what I was saying.”
* **The wind moaned in the trees**. This means that the wind blowing through the trees sounded like a person moaning.
-* **The whole world came to the meeting**. Everyone in the world did not attend the meeting. Most likely there were many people at the meeting.
+* **The whole world came to the meeting**. Everyone in the world did not attend the meeting. Most likely there were many people at the meeting.
Each language uses different figures of speech. Make sure you can:
@@ -47,9 +47,9 @@ It is the **real meaning** of the whole figure of speech that should be translat
For example, see Matthew 3:7: “You offspring of poisonous snakes, who warned you to flee from the wrath that is coming?”
-Here no answer is expected. The speaker is not asking for information; he is rebuking his hearers. It does no good to warn these people of God’s wrath, because they refuse the only way to escape it: to repent of their sins.
+Here no answer is expected. The speaker is not asking for information; he is rebuking his hearers. It does no good to warn these people of God’s wrath, because they refuse the only way to escape it: to repent of their sins.
-You may need to restate this rhetorical question as a statement when you translate, if your language does not use rhetorical questions in this way. But remember, be sure to keep the same purpose and meaning, and communicate the same emotion as the original rhetorical question had. If your language communicates the purpose, meaning, and emotion of a rhetorical question with a different kind of figure of speech, then use that figure of speech.
+You may need to restate this rhetorical question as a statement when you translate, if your language does not use rhetorical questions in this way. But remember, be sure to keep the same purpose and meaning, and communicate the same emotion as the original rhetorical question had. If your language communicates the purpose, meaning, and emotion of a rhetorical question with a different kind of figure of speech, then use that figure of speech.
(see [Rhetorical Questions](../figs-rquestion/01.md))
@@ -73,4 +73,4 @@ your loyalty [reaches] to the clouds. (ULT)
This verse of poetry repeats a similar idea in two lines, which is good Hebrew poetic style. Also, there are no verbs in the Hebrew original, which is a different use of grammar than ordinary speech would use. Poetry in your language may have different things that mark it as poetry. When you are translating poetry, try to use the forms of your language that communicate to the reader that this is poetry, and that communicate the same emotions that the source poem is trying to communicate.
-**Remember:** Communicate the feelings and attitudes of the original text. Translate them into forms that communicate in a similar way in your language. Consider how that meaning can best be **Accurately**, **Clearly**, **Equally**, and **Naturally Expressed** in the Target Language.
\ No newline at end of file
+**Remember:** Communicate the feelings and attitudes of the original text. Translate them into forms that communicate in a similar way in your language. Consider how that meaning can best be **Accurately**, **Clearly**, **Equally**, and **Naturally Expressed** in the Target Language.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/guidelines-historical/01.md b/translate/guidelines-historical/01.md
index deb789a7..4316eeff 100644
--- a/translate/guidelines-historical/01.md
+++ b/translate/guidelines-historical/01.md
@@ -18,15 +18,15 @@ Some explanation can be included in the text, as long as it is brief and does no
Let us compare 1 Corinthians 10:1 from the ULT and UST.
-> “I want you to know, brothers and sisters that our fathers were all under the cloud and all passed through the sea. “ (ULT)
-
-> “I want you to remember, brothers and sisters, that our Jewish ancestors were following God, who led them as a cloud during the day, as they passed through the Red Sea on dry land, long ago in the time of the Exodus.” (UST)
+> “I want you to know, brothers and sisters that our fathers were all under the cloud and all passed through the sea. “ (ULT)
+
+> “I want you to remember, brothers and sisters, that our Jewish ancestors were following God, who led them as a cloud during the day, as they passed through the Red Sea on dry land, long ago in the time of the Exodus.” (UST)
Notice that the UST makes several points explicit: the ‘fathers were all under the cloud’ tells of the time that God led the Jewish ancestors as a cloud. The statement that ‘our fathers passed through the sea’ is also about the ‘passing through the Red Sea in the time of the exodus.’ The UST translator decided to explicitly describe the historical events. This is a way to translate historical events that is more meaningful for those who have little knowledge of Old Testament history.
Include or refer to the needed implicit information intended by the original writer that will be necessary for your community to understand what is written.
-Maintain the historical accuracy of the message. Avoid referring to items and events that were not present in the Bible times. Do not make your translation sound like it is a modern-day event.
+Maintain the historical accuracy of the message. Avoid referring to items and events that were not present in the Bible times. Do not make your translation sound like it is a modern-day event.
Remember:
diff --git a/translate/guidelines-sonofgod/01.md b/translate/guidelines-sonofgod/01.md
index 78f61f89..4fad26fb 100644
--- a/translate/guidelines-sonofgod/01.md
+++ b/translate/guidelines-sonofgod/01.md
@@ -15,28 +15,28 @@ In the New Testament:
#### The Old Testament begins to reveal God’s three persons.
-> **God** created the heavens…**The Spirit of God** was moving…“Let **us** make man in **our** image.” (Genesis 1:1-2 ULT)
-
-> God has spoken to us by a **Son**…through whom he also made the universe. His **Son** is the radiance of his glory, the very character of his essence…about the **Son** he says,…“In the beginning, Lord, you laid earth’s foundation; the heavens are the work of your hands.” (Hebrews 1:2-3, and 8-10 ULT quoting Psalm 102:25)
+> **God** created the heavens…**The Spirit of God** was moving…“Let **us** make man in **our** image.”(Genesis 1:1-2 ULT)
+
+> God has spoken to us by a **Son**…through whom he also made the universe. His **Son** is the radiance of his glory, the very character of his essence…about the **Son** he says,…“In the beginning, Lord, you laid earth’s foundation; the heavens are the work of your hands.” (Hebrews 1:2-3, and 8-10 ULT quoting Psalm 102:25)
#### The Church has always found it necessary to state what the New Testament says about God by affirming that he exists in three distinct persons: The Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit.
> Jesus said, “…Baptize them into the name of **the Father**, of **the Son**, and of **the Holy Spirit**.” (Matthew 28:19 ULT)
-
-> God sent his **Son**, born of a woman,…God sent the **Spirit** of his **Son** into our hearts, who calls, “Abba, **Father**.” (Galatians 4:4-6 ULT)
+
+> God sent his **Son**, born of a woman,…God sent the **Spirit** of his **Son** into our hearts, who calls, “Abba, **Father**.” (Galatians 4:4-6 ULT)
See also: John 14:16-17, 1 Peter 1:2
Each person of God is fully God and is called “God” in the Bible.
> Yet for us there is only one **God the Father…** (1 Corinthians 8:6 ULT)
-
-> Thomas answered and said to him, “My Lord and **my God**.” **Jesus** said to him, “Because you have seen me, you have believed. Blessed are those who have not seen, and yet have believed.” (John 20:28-29 ULT)
-
-> But Peter said, “Ananias, why has Satan filled your heart to lie to **the Holy Spirit** and to keep back part of the price of the land?…You have not lied to men, but to **God**.” (Acts 5:3-4 ULT)
+
+> Thomas answered and said to him, “My Lord and **my God**.” **Jesus** said to him, “Because you have seen me, you have believed. Blessed are those who have not seen, and yet have believed.” (John 20:28-29 ULT)
+
+> But Peter said, “Ananias, why has Satan filled your heart to lie to **the Holy Spirit** and to keep back part of the price of the land?…You have not lied to men, but to **God**.” (Acts 5:3-4 ULT)
Each person is also distinct from the other two persons. All three persons can appear separately at the same time. In the verses below, God the Son is baptized while God the Spirit comes down and God the Father speaks from heaven.
> After he was baptized, **Jesus** came up…from the water…He saw the **Spirit** of God coming down…, and a **voice** [the Father’s] came out of the heavens saying, “This is my Beloved **Son**…” (Matthew 3:16-17 ULT)
-As Christians, we must always remember that, since we are humans and do not have the mind of God, we cannot fully understand how all three persons of the Holy Trinity are fully God, and yet God is only one being. The Holy Trinity is a divine mystery that we confess by faith, based on the witness of God’s inspired Word.
+As Christians, we must always remember that, since we are humans and do not have the mind of God, we cannot fully understand how all three persons of the Holy Trinity are fully God, and yet God is only one being. The Holy Trinity is a divine mystery that we confess by faith, based on the witness of God’s inspired Word.
diff --git a/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples/01.md b/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples/01.md
index dff9a5b0..b0588e02 100644
--- a/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples/01.md
+++ b/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples/01.md
@@ -22,17 +22,17 @@ Jesus referred to God in the following terms:
The intimate, loving relationship between the Father and the Son is eternal, just as they are eternal.
> The Father **loves** the Son. (John 3:35-36; 5:19-20 ULT)
-
-> I **love** the Father, I do what the Father commands me, just as he gave me the commandment. (John 14:31 ULT)
-
-> **…no one knows who the Son is except the Father, and no one knows who the Father is except the Son**. (Luke 10:22 ULT)
+
+> I **love** the Father, I do what the Father commands me, just as he gave me the commandment. (John 14:31 ULT)
+
+> **…no one knows who the Son is except the Father, and no one knows who the Father is except the Son**. (Luke 10:22 ULT)
The terms “Father” and “Son” also communicate that the Father and the Son are of the same essence; they are both eternal God.
> Jesus said, “Father, glorify your Son so that the Son may glorify you…I glorified you on the earth,…Now Father, glorify me…with the glory that **I had with you before the world was created**.” (John 17:1-5 ULT)
-
-> But in these last days, he [God the Father] has spoken to us through a Son, whom he appointed to be the heir of all things. It is through him that God also made the universe. He is the brightness of God’s glory, **the very character of his essence**. He even holds everything together by the word of his power. (Hebrews 1:2-3 ULT)
-
+
+> But in these last days, he [God the Father] has spoken to us through a Son, whom he appointed to be the heir of all things. It is through him that God also made the universe. He is the brightness of God’s glory, **the very character of his essence**. He even holds everything together by the word of his power. (Hebrews 1:2-3 ULT)
+
> Jesus said to him, “I have been with you for so long and you still do not know me, Philip? **Whoever has seen me has seen the Father**. How can you say, ‘Show us the Father’? (John 14:9 ULT)
### Human Relationships
diff --git a/translate/resources-alter/title.md b/translate/resources-alter/title.md
index 4fad4b53..d81fa6e2 100644
--- a/translate/resources-alter/title.md
+++ b/translate/resources-alter/title.md
@@ -1 +1 @@
-Notes with Alternate Translations
\ No newline at end of file
+Notes with Alternate Translations
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/resources-alterm/01.md b/translate/resources-alterm/01.md
index 5b476bb5..62124629 100644
--- a/translate/resources-alterm/01.md
+++ b/translate/resources-alterm/01.md
@@ -17,6 +17,6 @@ This note has the ULT text followed by three possible meanings. The word transla
> But Simon Peter, when he saw it, **fell down at Jesus’ knees** (Luke 5:8 ULT)
-* **fell down at Jesus’ knees** - Possible meanings are (1) “knelt down before Jesus” or (2) “bowed down at Jesus’ feet” or (3) “lay down on the ground at Jesus’ feet.” Peter did not fall accidentally. He did this as a sign of humility and respect for Jesus.
+* **fell down at Jesus’ knees** - Possible meanings are (1) “knelt down before Jesus” or (2) “bowed down at Jesus’ feet” or (3) “lay down on the ground at Jesus’ feet.” Peter did not fall accidentally. He did this as a sign of humility and respect for Jesus.
This note explains what “fell down at Jesus’ knees” might mean. The first meaning is most likely correct, but the other meanings are also possible. If your language does not have a general expression that could include various actions like these, you may need to choose one of these possibilities that describe more specifically what Simon Peter did. It is also helpful to think about why Simon Peter did this, and what kind of action would communicate the same attitude of humility and respect in your culture.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/resources-clarify/01.md b/translate/resources-clarify/01.md
index a92931db..d0c4e921 100644
--- a/translate/resources-clarify/01.md
+++ b/translate/resources-clarify/01.md
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Sometimes a Note suggests a translation from the UST. In that case the text from
### Translation Notes Examples
> He who **sits in the heavens** will sneer at them (Psalms 2:4 **ULT**)
-
+
> But the one who **sits on his throne in heaven** laughs at them (Psalms 2:4 **UST**)
The Note for this verse says:
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ The Note for this verse says:
Here there are two suggested translations for the phrase ‘sits in the heavens.’ The first expresses clearly what “sits in the heavens” represents. The second gives a hint about the idea of ruling by stated clearly that he sits on his “throne.” This suggestion is from the UST.
> When he saw Jesus, **he fell on his face**. (Luke 5:12 **ULT**)
-
+
> When he saw Jesus, **he bowed down to the ground**. (Luke 5:12 **UST**)
The Note for this verse says:
diff --git a/translate/resources-connect/01.md b/translate/resources-connect/01.md
index a8a25e69..fba043ad 100644
--- a/translate/resources-connect/01.md
+++ b/translate/resources-connect/01.md
@@ -3,13 +3,13 @@
Sometimes, at the top of the list of notes, there are notes that start with **Connecting Statement** or **General Information**.
-A **connecting statement** tells how a chunk of text is related to the chunk(s) that came before it. The following are some of the kinds of information in the connecting statements.
+A **connecting statement** tells how a chunk of text is related to the chunk(s) that came before it. The following are some of the kinds of information in the connecting statements.
* whether this chunk is at the beginning, middle, or end of a passage
* who is speaking
* whom the speaker is speaking to
-A **general information** note tells about issues in the chunk that cover more than one phrase. The following are some of the kinds of information that appear in a general information statement.
+A **general information** note tells about issues in the chunk that cover more than one phrase. The following are some of the kinds of information that appear in a general information statement.
* the person or thing that pronouns refer to
* important background or implied information that is needed to understand the text in the chunk
@@ -37,10 +37,10 @@ This note tells you that it is still Peter speaking in verse 17 so you can mark
#### The person or thing that pronouns refer to
-> 20 And Isaiah is very bold and says,
-> “I was found by those who did not seek me.
-> I appeared to those who did not ask for me.”
-> 21 But to Israel he says, “All the day long I reached out my hands
+> 20 And Isaiah is very bold and says,
+> “I was found by those who did not seek me.
+> I appeared to those who did not ask for me.”
+> 21 But to Israel he says, “All the day long I reached out my hands
> to a disobedient and resistant people.” (Romans 10:20-21 ULT)
* **General Information:** - Here the words “I,” “me,” and “my” refer to God.
diff --git a/translate/resources-eplain/01.md b/translate/resources-eplain/01.md
index 2818e7c8..604584bf 100644
--- a/translate/resources-eplain/01.md
+++ b/translate/resources-eplain/01.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Simple explanations about words or phrases are written as full sentences. They b
If you did not know that fishermen used nets to catch fish, you might wonder why the fishermen were cleaning their nets. This explanation can help you choose good words for “were washing” and “nets.”
-> they **motioned** to their partners in the other boat (Luke 5:7 ULT)
+> they **motioned** to their partners in the other boat (Luke 5:7 ULT)
* **motioned** - They were too far from shore to call so they made gestures, probably waving their arms.
diff --git a/translate/resources-fofs/01.md b/translate/resources-fofs/01.md
index fbea8954..14887fd9 100644
--- a/translate/resources-fofs/01.md
+++ b/translate/resources-fofs/01.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Figures of speech are ways of saying things that use words in non-literal ways.
In the translationNotes there will be an explanation about the meaning of a figure of speech that is in the passage. Sometimes an alternate translation is provided. This is marked as “Alternate Translation:.” There will also be a link to an unfoldingWord® Translation Academy (UTA) page that gives additional information and translation strategies for that kind of figure of speech.
-In order to translate the meaning, you need to be able to recognize the figure of speech and know what it means in the source language. Then you can choose either a figure of speech or a direct way to communicate that same meaning in the target language.
+In order to translate the meaning, you need to be able to recognize the figure of speech and know what it means in the source language. Then you can choose either a figure of speech or a direct way to communicate that same meaning in the target language.
### Translation Notes Examples
@@ -21,4 +21,4 @@ The figure of speech in this Note is called a metonymy. The phrase “in my name
* **You offspring of vipers** - In this metaphor, John compares the crowd to vipers, which were deadly or dangerous snakes and represent evil. Alternate Translation: “You evil poisonous snakes” or “People should stay away from you just like they avoid poisonous snakes” (See: *Metaphor*)
-The figure of speech in this Note is called a metaphor. The Note explains the metaphor and gives two alternate translations. After that, there is a link to the UTA page about metaphors.
+The figure of speech in this Note is called a metaphor. The Note explains the metaphor and gives two alternate translations. After that, there is a link to the UTA page about metaphors.
diff --git a/translate/resources-iordquote/01.md b/translate/resources-iordquote/01.md
index 1ae67bc9..237fb1b5 100644
--- a/translate/resources-iordquote/01.md
+++ b/translate/resources-iordquote/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Description
-There are two kinds of quotations: direct quotation and indirect quotation. When translating a quotation, translators need to decide whether to translate it as a direct quotation or an indirect quotation. (See [Direct and Indirect Quotations](../figs-quotations/01.md).)
+There are two kinds of quotations: direct quotation and indirect quotation. When translating a quotation, translators need to decide whether to translate it as a direct quotation or an indirect quotation. (See [Direct and Indirect Quotations](../figs-quotations/01.md).)
When there is a direct or indirect quote in the ULT, the Notes may have an option for translating it as the other kind of quote. The translation suggestion may start with “It can be translated as a direct quote:” or “It can be translated as an indirect quote:” and it will be followed by that kind of quote. This will be followed by a link to the information page called “Direct and Indirect Quotations” that explains both kinds of quotations.
diff --git a/translate/resources-links/01.md b/translate/resources-links/01.md
index eed959ca..ee02c40d 100644
--- a/translate/resources-links/01.md
+++ b/translate/resources-links/01.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ There are two types of links in the translationNotes: links to an unfoldingWord
The unfoldingWord® Translation Academy topics are intended to enable anyone, anywhere to learn the basics of how to translate the Bible into their own language. They are intended to be highly flexible for just-in-time learning in either online or offline mobile video formats.
-Each translationNote follows a phrase from the ULT and will provide immediate help on how to translate that phrase. Sometimes there will be a statement in parentheses at the end of the suggested translation that may look like this: (See: [*Metaphor*](../figs-metaphor/01.md)). The word or words in blue or green are a link to an unfoldingWord® Translation Academy topic. In the translationNote, you can click on the link to learn more about the topic.
+Each translationNote follows a phrase from the ULT and will provide immediate help on how to translate that phrase. Sometimes there will be a statement in parentheses at the end of the suggested translation that may look like this: (See: [*Metaphor*](../figs-metaphor/01.md)). The word or words in blue or green are a link to an unfoldingWord® Translation Academy topic. In the translationNote, you can click on the link to learn more about the topic.
There are several reasons to read the unfoldingWord® Translation Academy topic information:
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ There are several reasons to read the unfoldingWord® Translation Academy topic
### Repeated Phrases in a Book
-Sometimes a phrase is used multiple times in one book. When this happens, there will be a link in the translationNotes (the blue or green chapter and verse numbers that you can click on) that will take you back to where you have translated that phrase before. There are several reasons why you will want to go to the place where the word or phrase was translated before:
+Sometimes a phrase is used multiple times in one book. When this happens, there will be a link in the translationNotes (the blue or green chapter and verse numbers that you can click on) that will take you back to where you have translated that phrase before. There are several reasons why you will want to go to the place where the word or phrase was translated before:
* This will make it easier for you to translate this phrase by reminding you of how you have already translated it.
* This will make your translation faster and more consistent because you will be reminded to translate that phrase in the same way each time.
diff --git a/translate/resources-porp/01.md b/translate/resources-porp/01.md
index a859c609..fc9c3d94 100755
--- a/translate/resources-porp/01.md
+++ b/translate/resources-porp/01.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ When many scholars say that a word or phrase means one thing, and many others sa
> But Simon Peter, when he saw it, **fell down at Jesus’ knees**, saying, “Depart from me, for I am a sinful man, Lord.” (Luke 5:8 ULT)
-* **fell down at Jesus’ knees** - Possible meanings are (1) “knelt down before Jesus” or (2) “bowed down at Jesus feet” or (3) “lay down on the ground at Jesus feet.” Peter did not fall accidentally. He did this as a sign of humility and respect for Jesus.
+* **fell down at Jesus’ knees** - Possible meanings are (1) “knelt down before Jesus” or (2) “bowed down at Jesus feet” or (3) “lay down on the ground at Jesus feet.” Peter did not fall accidentally. He did this as a sign of humility and respect for Jesus.
### Translation Strategies
diff --git a/translate/resources-synequi/01.md b/translate/resources-synequi/01.md
index 99765f3a..882cd6db 100755
--- a/translate/resources-synequi/01.md
+++ b/translate/resources-synequi/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Description
-Some Notes provide a translation suggestion that can replace the word or phrase that they quote from the ULT. These replacements can fit into the sentence without changing the meaning of the sentence. These are synonyms and equivalent phrases and are written in double-quotes. These mean the same as the text in the ULT. This kind of Note can help you to think of other ways to say the same thing, in case the word or phrase in the ULT does not seem to have a natural equivalent in your language.
+Some Notes provide a translation suggestion that can replace the word or phrase that they quote from the ULT. These replacements can fit into the sentence without changing the meaning of the sentence. These are synonyms and equivalent phrases and are written in double-quotes. These mean the same as the text in the ULT. This kind of Note can help you to think of other ways to say the same thing, in case the word or phrase in the ULT does not seem to have a natural equivalent in your language.
### Translation Notes Examples
diff --git a/translate/toc.yaml b/translate/toc.yaml
index ecadabf0..f0644330 100644
--- a/translate/toc.yaml
+++ b/translate/toc.yaml
@@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ sections:
- title: "Apostrophe"
link: figs-apostrophe
- title: "Aside"
- link: figs-aside
+ link: figs-aside
- title: "Doublet"
link: figs-doublet
- title: "Euphemism"
@@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ sections:
link: figs-metonymy
- title: "Parallelism"
link: figs-parallelism
- - title: "Parallelism with the Same Meaning"
+ - title: "Parallelism with the Same Meaning"
link: figs-synonparallelism
- title: "Personification"
link: figs-personification
diff --git a/translate/translate-aim/01.md b/translate/translate-aim/01.md
index 73858f52..a186b39e 100644
--- a/translate/translate-aim/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-aim/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### A translator is like a hunter
-A translator is like a hunter, who must aim his weapon at an animal if he wants to hit it. He must know the kind of animal he is hunting, because a hunter does not always use the same kind of weapon for every animal. For example, a hunter will use a very different kind of spear when hunting fish than when hunting a very large animal such as a tiger or an elephant.
+A translator is like a hunter, who must aim his weapon at an animal if he wants to hit it. He must know the kind of animal he is hunting, because a hunter does not always use the same kind of weapon for every animal. For example, a hunter will use a very different kind of spear when hunting fish than when hunting a very large animal such as a tiger or an elephant.
It is the same when we speak to other people. We do not speak to young children with exactly the same words that we would say to an adult. Neither do we speak to our friends in exactly the same way we would speak to the president or ruler of our country.
diff --git a/translate/translate-alphabet2/01.md b/translate/translate-alphabet2/01.md
index c77f141b..a7f3979e 100644
--- a/translate/translate-alphabet2/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-alphabet2/01.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ These are definitions of words that we use to talk about how people make the sou
#### Consonant
-These are the sounds that people make when the air flow from their lungs is interrupted or limited by the position of the tongue, teeth or lips. The majority of letters in the alphabet are consonant letters. Most consonant letters have only one sound.
+These are the sounds that people make when the air flow from their lungs is interrupted or limited by the position of the tongue, teeth or lips. The majority of letters in the alphabet are consonant letters. Most consonant letters have only one sound.
#### Vowel
diff --git a/translate/translate-bdistance/01.md b/translate/translate-bdistance/01.md
index 05ea8c38..f8e5e915 100644
--- a/translate/translate-bdistance/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-bdistance/01.md
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ The metric values in the table below are close but not exactly equal to the bibl
1. The people in the Bible did not use modern measures such as meters, liters, and kilograms. Using the original measures can help readers know that the Bible really was written long ago in a time when people used those measures.
1. Using modern measures can help readers understand the text more easily.
1. Whatever measure you use, it would be good, if possible, to tell about the other kind of measure in the text or a footnote.
-1. If you do not use the Biblical measures, try not to give the readers the idea that the measurements are exact. For example, if you translate one cubit as “.46 meters” or even as “46 centimeters,” readers might think that the measurement is exact. It would be better to say “half a meter,” “45 centimeters,” or “50 centimeters.”
+1. If you do not use the Biblical measures, try not to give the readers the idea that the measurements are exact. For example, if you translate one cubit as “.46 meters” or even as “46 centimeters,” readers might think that the measurement is exact. It would be better to say “half a meter,” “45 centimeters,” or “50 centimeters.”
1. Sometimes it can be helpful to use the word “about” to show that a measurement is not exact. For example, Luke 24:13 says that Emmaus was sixty stadia from Jerusalem. This can be translated as “about ten kilometers” from Jerusalem.
1. When God tells people how long something should be, and when people make things according to those lengths, do not use “about” in the translation. Otherwise it will give the impression that God did not care exactly how long something should be.
@@ -61,14 +61,14 @@ The strategies are all applied to Exodus 25:10 below.
(5) Use measurements that your people know, and include the measurements from the ULT in the text or in a note. The following shows the ULT measurements in notes.
->> “They are to make an ark of acacia wood. Its length must be **one meter** 1; its width will be **two thirds of a meter** 2; and its height will be **two thirds of a meter**.”
+>> “They are to make an ark of acacia wood. Its length must be **one meter** 1; its width will be **two thirds of a meter** 2; and its height will be **two thirds of a meter**.”
The footnotes would look like:
->> “They are to make an ark of acacia wood. Its length must be **one meter** 1; its width will be **two thirds of a meter** 2; and its height will be **two thirds of a meter**.”
+>> “They are to make an ark of acacia wood. Its length must be **one meter** 1; its width will be **two thirds of a meter** 2; and its height will be **two thirds of a meter**.”
The footnotes would look like:
->> [1] two and a half cubits
+>> [1] two and a half cubits
>> [2] one cubit and a half
diff --git a/translate/translate-bmoney/01.md b/translate/translate-bmoney/01.md
index 31396de6..e2477df2 100644
--- a/translate/translate-bmoney/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-bmoney/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Description:
-In early Old Testament times, people weighed their metals such as silver and gold and would give a certain weight of that metal in order to buy things. Later people started to make coins that each contained a standard amount of a certain metal. The daric is one such coin. In New Testament times, people used silver and copper coins.
+In early Old Testament times, people weighed their metals such as silver and gold and would give a certain weight of that metal in order to buy things. Later people started to make coins that each contained a standard amount of a certain metal. The daric is one such coin. In New Testament times, people used silver and copper coins.
The two tables below show some of the most well-known units of money found in the Old Testament (OT) and New Testament (NT). The table for Old Testament units shows what kind of metal was used and how much it weighed. The table for New Testament units shows what kind of metal was used and how much it was worth in terms of a day’s wage.
@@ -56,15 +56,15 @@ The translations strategies are all applied to Luke 7:41 below.
(4) Use the Bible term and give the equivalent amount in the text or a footnote.
>> “The one owed **five hundred denarii** 1, and the other owed **fifty denarii**. 2“
-
+
The footnotes would look like:
->> [1] five hundred days’s wages
+>> [1] five hundred days’s wages
>> [2] fifty day’s wages
(5) Use the Bible term and explain it in a footnote.
>> “The one owed **five hundred denarii** 1, and the other owed **fifty denarii**.” (Luke 7:41 ULT)
-
+
>> [1] A denarius was the amount of silver that people could earn in one day of work.
diff --git a/translate/translate-bvolume/01.md b/translate/translate-bvolume/01.md
index 9adb656d..783d4b66 100644
--- a/translate/translate-bvolume/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-bvolume/01.md
@@ -48,25 +48,25 @@ The strategies are all applied to Isaiah 5:10 below.
(2) Use the measurements given in the UST. Usually they are metric measurements. The translators of the UST have already figured how to represent the amounts in the metric system.
>> “For four hectares of vineyard will yield only **twenty-two liters** and **220 liters** of seed will yield only **twenty-two liters**.”
-
+
>> “For four hectares of vineyard will yield only **twenty-two liters**, and **ten baskets** of seed will yield only **one basket**.”
(3) Use measurements that are already used in your language. In order to do this you would need to know how your measurements relate to the metric system and figure out each measurement.
>> “For four hectares of vineyard will yield only six gallons, and **six and a half bushels** of seed will yield only twenty quarts.”
-(4) Use the measurements from the ULT and include measurements that your people know in the text or a note. The following shows both measurements in the text.
+(4) Use the measurements from the ULT and include measurements that your people know in the text or a note. The following shows both measurements in the text.
>> “For four hectares of vineyard will yield only **one bath (six gallons)**, and **one homer (six and a half bushels)** of seed will yield only **an ephah (twenty quarts)**.”
(5) Use measurements that your people know, and include the measurements from the ULT in the text or in a note. The following shows the ULT measurements in footnotes.
->> “For four hectares of vineyard will yield only twenty-two liters 1, and 220 liters 2 of seed will yield only twenty-two liters 3.”
+>> “For four hectares of vineyard will yield only twenty-two liters 1, and 220 liters 2 of seed will yield only twenty-two liters 3.”
The footnotes would look like:
->> [1] one bath
->> [2] one homer
+>> [1] one bath
+>> [2] one homer
>> [3] one ephah
### When the unit of measure is implied
diff --git a/translate/translate-chapverse/01.md b/translate/translate-chapverse/01.md
index 23303834..b1c4fb34 100644
--- a/translate/translate-chapverse/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-chapverse/01.md
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ People who speak your language may also use a Bible written in another language.
Since 3 John has only one chapter, some versions do not mark the chapter number. In the ULT and UST it is marked as chapter 1. Also, some versions do not divide verses 14 and 15 into two verses. Instead they mark it all as verse 14.
> A psalm of David, when he fled from Absalom his son.
-
+
> 1 Yahweh, how many are my enemies! (Psalm 3:1 ULT)
Some of the psalms have an explanation at the beginning. In some versions the explanation is not given a verse number, as in the ULT and UST. In other versions the explanation is verse 1, and the actual psalm starts with verse 2.
@@ -32,22 +32,22 @@ If the people who speak your language have another Bible that they use, number t
If the people who speak your language have another Bible that they use, number the chapters and verses the way it does.
-The example below is from 3 John 1. Some Bibles mark this text as verses 14 and 15, and some mark it all as verse 14. You may mark the verse numbers as your other Bible does.
+The example below is from 3 John 1. Some Bibles mark this text as verses 14 and 15, and some mark it all as verse 14. You may mark the verse numbers as your other Bible does.
> 14 But I expect to see you soon, and we will speak face to face. 15** Peace be to you. The friends greet you. Greet the friends by name.** (3 John 1:14-15 ULT)
-
+
> 14 But I expect to see you soon, and we will speak face to face. Peace be to you. The friends greet you. Greet the friends by name. (3 John 14)
Next is an example from Psalm 3. Some Bibles do not mark the explanation at the beginning of the psalm as a verse, and others mark it as verse 1. You may mark the verse numbers as your other Bible does.
-> **A psalm of David, when he fled from Absalom his son.**
-> 1 Yahweh, how many are my enemies!
-> Many have turned away and attacked me.
-> 2 Many say about me,
+> **A psalm of David, when he fled from Absalom his son.**
+> 1 Yahweh, how many are my enemies!
+> Many have turned away and attacked me.
+> 2 Many say about me,
> ”There is no help for him from God.” Selah
-
-> 1 *A psalm of David, when he fled from Absalom his son.*
-> 2 Yahweh, how many are my enemies!
-> Many have turned away and attacked me.
-> 3 Many say about me,
+
+> 1 *A psalm of David, when he fled from Absalom his son.*
+> 2 Yahweh, how many are my enemies!
+> Many have turned away and attacked me.
+> 3 Many say about me,
> “There is no help for him from God.” Selah
diff --git a/translate/translate-dynamic/01.md b/translate/translate-dynamic/01.md
index 1e31003a..bf7112d9 100644
--- a/translate/translate-dynamic/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-dynamic/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Introduction
-We have looked closely at literal translations. Now, we will look at meaning-based translations. These translations are also called:
+We have looked closely at literal translations. Now, we will look at meaning-based translations. These translations are also called:
* meaning-equivalent
* idiomatic
@@ -60,4 +60,4 @@ From the unfoldingWord® Simplified Text:
Notice that these translations have changed the word order to be more natural in English. Also, the word “fruits” no longer appears. In fact, the Living Bible translation uses almost none of the words in the ULT translation. Instead, rather than “fruits,” the meaning-based translations refer to “deeds” or to “the way you live.” “Fruits” in this verse is used as part of a metaphor. The meaning of “fruits” in this metaphor is “the things that a person does.” (See [Metaphor](../figs-metaphor/01.md).)
-So in these versions, the translators translated the meaning in context, rather than just the words. They also used more understandable phrases such as “turned from sin” or “turned away from your sinful behavior” rather than the single difficult word “repentance,” or they explained the word by saying, “repented of your sins and turned to God.” The meaning in all of them is the same, but the form is very different. In the meaning-based translations, the meaning is much clearer.
+So in these versions, the translators translated the meaning in context, rather than just the words. They also used more understandable phrases such as “turned from sin” or “turned away from your sinful behavior” rather than the single difficult word “repentance,” or they explained the word by saying, “repented of your sins and turned to God.” The meaning in all of them is the same, but the form is very different. In the meaning-based translations, the meaning is much clearer.
diff --git a/translate/translate-form/01.md b/translate/translate-form/01.md
index 26256ac2..5ba59893 100644
--- a/translate/translate-form/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-form/01.md
@@ -9,10 +9,10 @@ From the New Life Version:
> I will give thanks to the Lord with all my heart. I will tell of all the great things You have done. I will be glad and full of joy because of You. I will sing praise to Your name, O Most High.
From the New Revised Standard Version
-> I will give thanks to the LORD with my whole heart;
->> I will tell of all your wonderful deeds.
->
-> I will be glad and exult in you;
+> I will give thanks to the LORD with my whole heart;
+>> I will tell of all your wonderful deeds.
+>
+> I will be glad and exult in you;
>> I will sing praise to your name, O Most High.
The first version puts the text into a form that is no different than the form it uses for telling stories. Each line of the Psalm is stated as a separate sentence.
diff --git a/translate/translate-formatsignals/01.md b/translate/translate-formatsignals/01.md
index 5a44374f..2d4ddf2b 100644
--- a/translate/translate-formatsignals/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-formatsignals/01.md
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ In Mark 11:31-33, the ellipsis mark shows that either the religious leaders did
#### Parentheses
-**Definition** - Parentheses “( )” show that some information either is an explanation or is background information that the writer put in that place to help the reader understand the material around it.
+**Definition** - Parentheses “( )” show that some information either is an explanation or is background information that the writer put in that place to help the reader understand the material around it.
In John 6:6, John interrupted the story he was writing to explain that Jesus already knew what he was going to do. This is put in parentheses.
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ The words in the parentheses below are not what Jesus was saying, but what Matth
This is done for poetry and some lists, to show that the indented lines form a part of the non-indented line above them. For example:
-> 5 These are the names of the leaders who must fight with you:
->> From the tribe of Reuben, Elizur son of Shedeur;
->> 6 from the tribe of Simeon, Shelumiel son of Zurishaddai;
+> 5 These are the names of the leaders who must fight with you:
+>> From the tribe of Reuben, Elizur son of Shedeur;
+>> 6 from the tribe of Simeon, Shelumiel son of Zurishaddai;
>> 7 from the tribe of Judah, Nahshon son of Amminadab; (Numbers 1:5-7 ULT)
diff --git a/translate/translate-fraction/01.md b/translate/translate-fraction/01.md
index 9755591d..3ef2b42b 100644
--- a/translate/translate-fraction/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-fraction/01.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
### Description
-Fractions are a kind of number that refer to equal parts of a thing or to equal groups within a larger group of people or things. An item or a group of items is divided into two or more parts or groups, and a fraction refers to one or more of those parts or groups.
+Fractions are a kind of number that refer to equal parts of a thing or to equal groups within a larger group of people or things. An item or a group of items is divided into two or more parts or groups, and a fraction refers to one or more of those parts or groups.
> For the drink offering, you must offer **a third** of a hin of wine. (Numbers 15:7 ULT)
A hin is a container used for measuring wine and other liquids. They were to think about dividing a hin container into three equal parts and fill up only one of those parts, and offer that amount.
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ Some languages do not use fractions. They may simply talk about parts or groups,
> Now to **one half** of the tribe of Manasseh, Moses had given an inheritance in Bashan, but to the other **half**, Joshua gave an inheritance beside their brothers in the land west of the Jordan. (Joshua 22:7 ULT)
-The tribe of Manasseh divided into two groups. The phrase “one half of the tribe of Manasseh” refers one of those groups. The phrase “the other half” refers to the other group.
+The tribe of Manasseh divided into two groups. The phrase “one half of the tribe of Manasseh” refers one of those groups. The phrase “the other half” refers to the other group.
> The four angels who had been prepared for that very hour, that day, that month, and that year, were released to kill **a third** of humanity. (Revelation 9:15 ULT)
@@ -60,22 +60,22 @@ If a fraction in your language would give the right meaning, consider using it.
(1) Tell the number of parts or groups that the item would be divided into, and then tell the number of parts or groups that is being referred to.
-> **A third** of the ocean became red like blood (Revelation 8:8 ULT)
+> **A third** of the ocean became red like blood (Revelation 8:8 ULT)
>> It was like they **divided** the ocean **into three parts**, and **one part** of the ocean became blood.
-
-> then you must offer with the bull a grain offering of **three tenths** of an ephah of fine flour mixed with **half a hin** of oil. (Numbers 15:9 ULT)
+
+> then you must offer with the bull a grain offering of **three tenths** of an ephah of fine flour mixed with **half a hin** of oil. (Numbers 15:9 ULT)
>> …then you must **divide** an ephah of fine flour **into ten parts** and **divide** a hin of oil **into two parts**. Then mix **three of those parts** of the flour with **one of the parts** of oil. Then you must offer that grain offering along with the bull.
(2) For measurements, use the measurements that are given in the UST. The translators of the UST have already figured how to represent the amounts in the metric system.
-> **two thirds of a shekel** (1 Samuel 13:21 ULT)
+> **two thirds of a shekel** (1 Samuel 13:21 ULT)
>> **eight grams** of silver (1 Samuel 13:21 UST)
-
-> **three tenths of an ephah** of fine flour mixed with **half a hin** of oil. (Numbers 15:9 ULT)
+
+> **three tenths of an ephah** of fine flour mixed with **half a hin** of oil. (Numbers 15:9 ULT)
>> **six and one-half liters** of finely ground flour mixed with **two liters** of olive oil. (Numbers 15:9 UST)
(3) For measurements, use ones that are used in your language. In order to do that you would need to know how your measurements relates to the metric system and figure out each measurement.
-> **three tenths of an ephah** of fine flour mixed with **half a hin** of oil. (Numbers 15:9, ULT)
+> **three tenths of an ephah** of fine flour mixed with **half a hin** of oil. (Numbers 15:9, ULT)
>> **six quarts** of fine flour mixed with **two quarts** of oil.
diff --git a/translate/translate-hebrewmonths/01.md b/translate/translate-hebrewmonths/01.md
index 3833c985..1fde636b 100644
--- a/translate/translate-hebrewmonths/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-hebrewmonths/01.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
### Description
-The Hebrew calendar used in the Bible has twelve months. Unlike the western calendar, its first month begins in the spring of the northern hemisphere. Sometimes a month is called by its name (Abib, Ziv, Sivan), and sometimes it is called by its order in the Hebrew calendar year (first month, second month, third month).
+The Hebrew calendar used in the Bible has twelve months. Unlike the western calendar, its first month begins in the spring of the northern hemisphere. Sometimes a month is called by its name (Abib, Ziv, Sivan), and sometimes it is called by its order in the Hebrew calendar year (first month, second month, third month).
#### Reasons this is a translation issue
@@ -41,8 +41,8 @@ This is a list of the Hebrew months with information about them that may be help
#### Examples from the Bible
-> You are going out of Egypt on this day, in **the month of Abib**. (Exodus 13:4 ULT)
-
+> You are going out of Egypt on this day, in **the month of Abib**. (Exodus 13:4 ULT)
+
> You must eat unleavened bread from twilight of the fourteenth day **in the first month of the year**, until twilight of the twenty-first day of the month. (Exodus 12:18 ULT)
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ You may need to make some information about the months explicit. (See [Assumed K
The examples below use these two verses.
> At that time, you will appear before me in **the month of Abib**, which is fixed for this purpose. It was in this month that you came out from Egypt. (Exodus 23:15 ULT)
-
+
> It will always be a statute for you that in **the seventh month, on the tenth day of the month,** you must humble yourselves and do no work. (Leviticus 16:29 ULT)
(1) Tell the number of the Hebrew month.
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ The examples below use these two verses.
(2) Use the months that people know.
>> At that time, you will appear before me in **the month of March**, which is fixed for this purpose. It was in this month that you came out from Egypt.
-
+
>> It will always be a statute for you that **on the day I choose in late September** you must humble yourselves and do no work.”
(3) State clearly what season the month occurred in.
diff --git a/translate/translate-help/01.md b/translate/translate-help/01.md
index 17752225..af7ea598 100644
--- a/translate/translate-help/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-help/01.md
@@ -3,11 +3,11 @@
To help translators make the best translation possible, **unfoldingWord® Translation Notes**, **unfoldingWord® Translation Words**, and **unfoldingWord® Translation Questions** have been created.
-**unfoldingWord® Translation Notes** are cultural, linguistic, and exegetical notes that help to describe and explain some of the Bible background that the translator needs to know to translate accurately. The unfoldingWord® Translation Notes also inform translators about different ways that they might express the same meaning. See http://ufw.io/tn/.
+**unfoldingWord® Translation Notes** are cultural, linguistic, and exegetical notes that help to describe and explain some of the Bible background that the translator needs to know to translate accurately. The unfoldingWord® Translation Notes also inform translators about different ways that they might express the same meaning. See http://ufw.io/tn/.
-The **unfoldingWord® Translation Words** are key terms found in Open Bible Stories and the Bible that are important to translate correctly. Each of these words or phrases has a small article written about it as well as cross-references to other places where that term is used in either Open Bible Stories or the Bible. This is to show the translator other ways that the unfoldingWord® Translation Words is used and to ensure that it has been translated correctly in those places, too. See http://ufw.io/tw/.
+The **unfoldingWord® Translation Words** are key terms found in Open Bible Stories and the Bible that are important to translate correctly. Each of these words or phrases has a small article written about it as well as cross-references to other places where that term is used in either Open Bible Stories or the Bible. This is to show the translator other ways that the unfoldingWord® Translation Words is used and to ensure that it has been translated correctly in those places, too. See http://ufw.io/tw/.
-The **unfoldingWord® Translation Questions** are comprehension questions that can be used to self-check your translation. If you can correctly answer the unfoldingWord® Translation Questions using only the Target Language translation, then it is an accurate translation. The unfoldingWord® Translation Questions are also a good tool to use for checking with the target language community. See http://ufw.io/tq/.
+The **unfoldingWord® Translation Questions** are comprehension questions that can be used to self-check your translation. If you can correctly answer the unfoldingWord® Translation Questions using only the Target Language translation, then it is an accurate translation. The unfoldingWord® Translation Questions are also a good tool to use for checking with the target language community. See http://ufw.io/tq/.
Once you have consulted the unfoldingWord® Translation Notes, unfoldingWord® Translation Words and unfoldingWord® Translation Questions, then you are ready to make the best translation.
diff --git a/translate/translate-levels/01.md b/translate/translate-levels/01.md
index a0b32969..3100715a 100644
--- a/translate/translate-levels/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-levels/01.md
@@ -5,12 +5,12 @@ A good translation requires that the meaning be the same in the target language
There are many different levels of meaning in any text, including the Bible. These levels include:
-* meaning of words
-* meaning of phrases
-* meaning of sentences
-* meaning of paragraphs
-* meaning of chapters
-* meaning of books
+* meaning of words
+* meaning of phrases
+* meaning of sentences
+* meaning of paragraphs
+* meaning of chapters
+* meaning of books
### Words Have Meaning
diff --git a/translate/translate-literal/01.md b/translate/translate-literal/01.md
index a5c675d1..32e99bba 100644
--- a/translate/translate-literal/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-literal/01.md
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Literal translations are also called:
#### Form Over Meaning
-A literal translation is one that focuses on reproducing the form of the source text in the target text, even if the meaning changes or is hard to understand as a result. An extreme version of a literal translation would not be a translation at all. Rather, it would be a copy. It would have the same characters and words as the source language. The next closest step would be to replace each word in the source language with an equivalent word from the target language. Because of differences in grammar between languages, the target language audience would probably not understand this kind of translation. Some translators of the Bible wrongly believe that they should keep the word order of the source text in the target text and only substitute target language words for source language words. They wrongly believe that this shows respect for the source text as God’s Word. But in fact this kind of translation keeps people from understanding God’s Word. God wants people to understand his Word, so it shows the greatest respect for the Bible and for God to translate the Bible so that people can understand it.
+A literal translation is one that focuses on reproducing the form of the source text in the target text, even if the meaning changes or is hard to understand as a result. An extreme version of a literal translation would not be a translation at all. Rather, it would be a copy. It would have the same characters and words as the source language. The next closest step would be to replace each word in the source language with an equivalent word from the target language. Because of differences in grammar between languages, the target language audience would probably not understand this kind of translation. Some translators of the Bible wrongly believe that they should keep the word order of the source text in the target text and only substitute target language words for source language words. They wrongly believe that this shows respect for the source text as God’s Word. But in fact this kind of translation keeps people from understanding God’s Word. God wants people to understand his Word, so it shows the greatest respect for the Bible and for God to translate the Bible so that people can understand it.
#### Weaknesses of Literal Translation
diff --git a/translate/translate-names/01.md b/translate/translate-names/01.md
index 7af8ea87..5b3de375 100644
--- a/translate/translate-names/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-names/01.md
@@ -36,9 +36,9 @@ Readers may not understand the second sentence if they do not know that “Beerl
Readers may not understand why she said this if they do not know that the name Moses sounds like the Hebrew words “pull out.”
-> **Saul** was in agreement with his death (Acts 8:1 ULT)
-
-> It came about in Iconium that **Paul** and Barnabas entered together into the synagogue (Acts 14:1 ULT)
+> **Saul** was in agreement with his death (Acts 8:1 ULT)
+
+> It came about in Iconium that **Paul** and Barnabas entered together into the synagogue (Acts 14:1 ULT)
Readers may not know that the names Saul and Paul refer to the same person.
@@ -54,26 +54,26 @@ Readers may not know that the names Saul and Paul refer to the same person.
(1) If readers cannot easily understand from the context what kind of a thing a name refers to, you can add a word to clarify it.
-> You went over the **Jordan** and came to **Jericho**. The leaders of Jericho fought against you, along with the **Amorites** (Joshua 24:11 ULT)
->> You went over the **Jordan River** and came to the **city of Jericho**. The leaders of Jericho fought against you, along with **the tribe of the Amorites**
-
-> Shortly after, some Pharisees came and said to him, “Go and leave here because **Herod** wants to kill you.” (Luke 13:31 ULT)
+> You went over the **Jordan** and came to **Jericho**. The leaders of Jericho fought against you, along with the **Amorites** (Joshua 24:11 ULT)
+>> You went over the **Jordan River** and came to the **city of Jericho**. The leaders of Jericho fought against you, along with **the tribe of the Amorites**
+
+> Shortly after, some Pharisees came and said to him, “Go and leave here because **Herod** wants to kill you.” (Luke 13:31 ULT)
>> Shortly after, some Pharisees came and said to him, “Go and leave here because **King Herod** wants to kill you.
(2) If readers need to understand the meaning of a name in order to understand what is said about it, copy the name and tell about its meaning either in the text or in a footnote.
-> She named him **Moses** and said, “Because I drew him from the water.” (Exodus 2:11 ULT)
+> She named him **Moses** and said, “Because I drew him from the water.” (Exodus 2:11 ULT)
>> She named him **Moses (which sounds like ‘drawn out’),** and said, “Because I drew him from the water.”
(3) Or if readers need to understand the meaning of a name in order to understand what is said about it, and that name is used only once, translate the meaning of the name instead of copying the name.
-> …she said, “Do I really continue to see, even after he has seen me?” Therefore the well was called **Beerlahairoi**; (Genesis 16:13-14 ULT)
+> …she said, “Do I really continue to see, even after he has seen me?” Therefore the well was called **Beerlahairoi**; (Genesis 16:13-14 ULT)
>> …she said, “Do I really continue to see, even after he has seen me?” Therefore the well was called **Well of the Living One who sees me**;
(4) If a person or place has two different names, use one name most of the time and the other name only when the text tells about the person or place having more than one name or when it says something about why the person or place was given that name. Write a footnote when the source text uses the name that is used less frequently. For example, Paul is called “Saul” before Acts 13 and “Paul” after Acts 13. You could translate his name as “Paul” all of the time, except in Acts 13:9 where it talks about him having both names.
-> …a young man named **Saul** (Acts 7:58 ULT)
->> …a young man named **Paul** 1
+> …a young man named **Saul** (Acts 7:58 ULT)
+>> …a young man named **Paul** 1
The footnote would look like:
@@ -81,13 +81,13 @@ The footnote would look like:
Then later in the story, you could translate this way:
-> But **Saul**, who is also called **Paul**, was filled with the Holy Spirit; (Acts 13:9)
+> But **Saul**, who is also called **Paul**, was filled with the Holy Spirit; (Acts 13:9)
>> But **Saul**, who is also called **Paul**, was filled with the Holy Spirit;
(5) Or if a person or place has two names, use whatever name is given in the source text, and add a footnote that gives the other name. For example, you could write “Saul” where the source text has “Saul” and “Paul” where the source text has “Paul.”
-> a young man named **Saul** (Acts 7:58 ULT)
->> a young man named **Saul**
+> a young man named **Saul** (Acts 7:58 ULT)
+>> a young man named **Saul**
The footnote would look like:
@@ -95,12 +95,12 @@ The footnote would look like:
Then later in the story, you could translate this way:
-> But **Saul**, who is also called **Paul**, was filled with the Holy Spirit; (Acts 13:9)
+> But **Saul**, who is also called **Paul**, was filled with the Holy Spirit; (Acts 13:9)
>> But **Saul**, who is also called **Paul**, was filled with the Holy Spirit;
Then after the story has explained the name change, you could translate this way.
-> It came about in Iconium that **Paul** and Barnabas entered together into the synagogue (Acts 14:1 ULT)
+> It came about in Iconium that **Paul** and Barnabas entered together into the synagogue (Acts 14:1 ULT)
>> It came about in Iconium that **Paul** 1 and Barnabas entered together into the synagogue
The footnote would look like:
diff --git a/translate/translate-numbers/01.md b/translate/translate-numbers/01.md
index de40558c..dbdcc1c8 100644
--- a/translate/translate-numbers/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-numbers/01.md
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Eighty-six (86) is an exact number.
Here the number three thousand is a round number. It may have been a little more than that or a little less than that. The word “about” shows that it is not an exact number.
-#### Reason this is a translation issue
+#### Reason this is a translation issue
Some languages do not have words for some of these numbers.
@@ -80,4 +80,4 @@ Be consistent in your translations. Decide how the numbers will be translated, u
The *unfoldingWord® Literal Text* (ULT) and the *unfoldingWord® Simplified Text* (UST) use words for numbers that have only one or two words (nine, sixteen, three hundred). They use numerals for numbers that have more than two words (the numerals “130” instead of “one hundred thirty”).
-> When Adam had lived **130** years, he became the father of a son in his own likeness, after his image, and he called his name Seth. After Adam became the father of Seth, he lived **eight hundred** years. He became the father of more sons and daughters. Adam lived **930** years, and then he died. (Genesis 5:3-5 ULT)
+> When Adam had lived **130** years, he became the father of a son in his own likeness, after his image, and he called his name Seth. After Adam became the father of Seth, he lived **eight hundred** years. He became the father of more sons and daughters. Adam lived **930** years, and then he died. (Genesis 5:3-5 ULT)
diff --git a/translate/translate-ordinal/01.md b/translate/translate-ordinal/01.md
index 27000065..d0a2abb7 100644
--- a/translate/translate-ordinal/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-ordinal/01.md
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ This is a list of workers that God gave to the church in their order.
#### Ordinal Numbers in English
-Most ordinal numbers in English simply have “-th” added to the end.
+Most ordinal numbers in English simply have “-th” added to the end.
| Numeral | Number | Ordinal Number |
| -------- | -------- | -------- |
@@ -36,11 +36,11 @@ Some languages do not have special numbers for showing the order of items in a l
### Examples from the Bible
-> The **first** lot went to Jehoiarib, the **second** to Jedaiah, the **third** to Harim, the **fourth** to Seorim, … the **twenty-third** to Delaiah, and the **twenty-fourth** to Maaziah. (1 Chronicles 24:7-18 ULT)
+> The **first** lot went to Jehoiarib, the **second** to Jedaiah, the **third** to Harim, the **fourth** to Seorim, … the **twenty-third** to Delaiah, and the **twenty-fourth** to Maaziah. (1 Chronicles 24:7-18 ULT)
The people cast lots and one went to each of these people in the order given.
-> You must place in it four rows of precious stones. The **first** row must have a ruby, a topaz, and a garnet. The **second** row must have an emerald, a sapphire, and a diamond. The **third** row must have a jacinth, an agate, and an amethyst. The **fourth** row must have a beryl, and an onyx, and a jasper. They must be mounted in gold settings. (Exodus 28:17-20 ULT)
+> You must place in it four rows of precious stones. The **first** row must have a ruby, a topaz, and a garnet. The **second** row must have an emerald, a sapphire, and a diamond. The **third** row must have a jacinth, an agate, and an amethyst. The **fourth** row must have a beryl, and an onyx, and a jasper. They must be mounted in gold settings. (Exodus 28:17-20 ULT)
This describes four rows of stones. The first row is probably the top row, and the fourth row is probably the bottom row.
@@ -55,16 +55,16 @@ If your language has ordinal numbers and using them would give the right meaning
(1) Tell the total number of items, and use “one” with the first item and “another” or “the next” with the rest.
-> The first lot went to Jehoiarib, the second to Jedaiah, the third to Harim, the fourth to Seorim,…the twenty-third to Delaiah, and the twenty-fourth to Maaziah. (1 Chronicles 24:7-18 ULT)
->> There were **twenty-four** lots. **One lot** went to Jehoiarib, **another** to Jedaiah, **another** to Harim,…**another** to Delaiah, **and the last** went to Maaziah.
+> The first lot went to Jehoiarib, the second to Jedaiah, the third to Harim, the fourth to Seorim,…the twenty-third to Delaiah, and the twenty-fourth to Maaziah. (1 Chronicles 24:7-18 ULT)
+>> There were **twenty-four** lots. **One lot** went to Jehoiarib, **another** to Jedaiah, **another** to Harim,…**another** to Delaiah, **and the last** went to Maaziah.
>> There were **twenty-four** lots. **One lot** went to Jehoiarib, **the next** to Jedaiah, **the next** to Harim,…**the next** to Delaiah, **and the last** went to Maaziah.
-
-> A river went out of Eden to water the garden. From there it divided and became **four** rivers. The name of **the first** is Pishon. It is the one which flows throughout the whole land of Havilah, where there is gold. The gold of that land is good. There is also bdellium and the onyx stone there. The name of **the second** river is Gihon. This one flows throughout the whole land of Cush. The name of **the third** river is Tigris, which flows east of Asshur. **The fourth** river is the Euphrates. (Genesis 2:10-14 ULT)
+
+> A river went out of Eden to water the garden. From there it divided and became **four** rivers. The name of **the first** is Pishon. It is the one which flows throughout the whole land of Havilah, where there is gold. The gold of that land is good. There is also bdellium and the onyx stone there. The name of **the second** river is Gihon. This one flows throughout the whole land of Cush. The name of **the third** river is Tigris, which flows east of Asshur. **The fourth** river is the Euphrates. (Genesis 2:10-14 ULT)
>> A river went out of Eden to water the garden. From there it divided and became **four** rivers. The name of **one** is Pishon. It is the one which flows throughout the whole land of Havilah, where there is gold. The gold of that land is good. There is also bdellium and the onyx stone there. The name of **the next** river is Gihon. This one flows throughout the whole land of Cush. The name of **the next** river is Tigris, which flows east of Asshur. The **last** river is the Euphrates.
(2) Tell the total number of items and then list them or the things associated with them.
-> The first lot went to Jehoiarib, the second to Jedaiah, the third to Harim, the fourth to Seorim,…the twenty-third to Delaiah, and the twenty-fourth to Maaziah. (1 Chronicles 24:7-18 ULT)
+> The first lot went to Jehoiarib, the second to Jedaiah, the third to Harim, the fourth to Seorim,…the twenty-third to Delaiah, and the twenty-fourth to Maaziah. (1 Chronicles 24:7-18 ULT)
>> They cast **twenty-four** lots. The lots went to Jerhoiarib, Jedaiah, Harim, Seorim,…Delaiah, and Maaziah.
diff --git a/translate/translate-problem/01.md b/translate/translate-problem/01.md
index 0c8d5361..8873fabd 100644
--- a/translate/translate-problem/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-problem/01.md
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Literal translations keep the form of the source text in the target text. As you
### Different languages use different orders of words and phrases
-If you keep the word order of the source text in your translation, it will be very difficult for the people who speak your language to understand it. Sometimes it will be impossible to understand. You must use the natural word order of the target language so that people can understand the meaning of the text.
+If you keep the word order of the source text in your translation, it will be very difficult for the people who speak your language to understand it. Sometimes it will be impossible to understand. You must use the natural word order of the target language so that people can understand the meaning of the text.
### Different languages use different idioms and expressions
@@ -17,6 +17,6 @@ The Bible contains many terms for things that no longer exist, such as ancient w
### The Bible was intended to be understood
-The Scriptures themselves show that they were meant to be understood. The Bible is written in three languages because the language that God’s people used was different in different times. When the Jews returned from exile and no longer remembered Hebrew, the priests translated the Old Testament readings into Aramaic so they could understand (Neh 8:8). Later, when the New Testament was written, it was written in the common Koiné Greek, which was the language that most people spoke at that time. The New Testament was not written in Hebrew, Aramaic or even classical Greek, which would have been harder for common people to understand.
+The Scriptures themselves show that they were meant to be understood. The Bible is written in three languages because the language that God’s people used was different in different times. When the Jews returned from exile and no longer remembered Hebrew, the priests translated the Old Testament readings into Aramaic so they could understand (Neh 8:8). Later, when the New Testament was written, it was written in the common Koiné Greek, which was the language that most people spoke at that time. The New Testament was not written in Hebrew, Aramaic or even classical Greek, which would have been harder for common people to understand.
These and other reasons demonstrate that God wants people to understand his word. So we know that he wants us to translate the meaning of the Bible, not reproduce the form. The meaning of the Scriptures is more important than the form.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/translate-process/01.md b/translate/translate-process/01.md
index 8c70dfe6..f0ed7394 100644
--- a/translate/translate-process/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-process/01.md
@@ -6,6 +6,6 @@ There are two things to do in translation:
1. Discover the meaning in the source language text (See [Discover the Meaning of the Text](../translate-discover/01.md).)
1. Re-tell the meaning in the target language translation (See [Re-telling the Meaning](../translate-retell/01.md).)
-Instructions for translation sometimes divide these two things into smaller steps. The graphic below shows how these two fit into the translation process.
+Instructions for translation sometimes divide these two things into smaller steps. The graphic below shows how these two fit into the translation process.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/translate-source-version/01.md b/translate/translate-source-version/01.md
index 304a11fa..36f50a67 100644
--- a/translate/translate-source-version/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-source-version/01.md
@@ -11,12 +11,12 @@ Version numbers are only given when a work is released, not when they are edited
-Each source text is given a whole number for each release (version 1, 2, 3, etc). Any translations based on that source text will take the version number of the source text and add .1 (thus, a translation from English OBS version 4 would become version 4.1). Any further translation based on the intermediate translation would add another .1 to the version number it was created from (for example 4.1.1). New releases of any of these texts increment their “decimal place” by 1.
+Each source text is given a whole number for each release (version 1, 2, 3, etc). Any translations based on that source text will take the version number of the source text and add .1 (thus, a translation from English OBS version 4 would become version 4.1). Any further translation based on the intermediate translation would add another .1 to the version number it was created from (for example 4.1.1). New releases of any of these texts increment their “decimal place” by 1.
Please see http://ufw.io/versioning for more details.
### Where to Find the Latest Version
-The latest published versions of resources in the Door43 Catalog may be seen online at https://door43.org/en/?user=Door43-Catalog. The unfoldingWord® English source content is also available in various formats from http://www.unfoldingword.org/content/.
+The latest published versions of resources in the Door43 Catalog may be seen online at https://door43.org/en/?user=Door43-Catalog. The unfoldingWord® English source content is also available in various formats from http://www.unfoldingword.org/content/.
**Note:** translationCore, translationStudio and the unfoldingWord® app do not always have the latest versions since updating content does not happen automatically (you may use the source content update feature in each of these apps to get the latest versions).
diff --git a/translate/translate-symaction/01.md b/translate/translate-symaction/01.md
index 13c02288..daac655b 100644
--- a/translate/translate-symaction/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-symaction/01.md
@@ -7,11 +7,11 @@ A symbolic action is something that someone does in order to express a certain i
#### Examples of symbolic actions
* In some cultures people shake hands when they meet to show that they are willing to be friendly.
-* In some cultures people bow when they meet to show respect to each other.
+* In some cultures people bow when they meet to show respect to each other.
#### Reason this is a translation issue
-An action may have a meaning in one culture, and a different meaning or no meaning at all in another culture. For example, in some cultures raising the eyebrows means “I am surprised” or “What did you say?” In others cultures it means “Yes.”
+An action may have a meaning in one culture, and a different meaning or no meaning at all in another culture. For example, in some cultures raising the eyebrows means “I am surprised” or “What did you say?” In others cultures it means “Yes.”
In the Bible people did things that had certain meanings in their culture. When we read the Bible we might not understand what someone meant if we interpret the action based on what it means in our own culture.
@@ -39,24 +39,24 @@ If people would correctly understand what a symbolic action meant to the people
(1) Tell what the person did and why he did it.
-> Jairus fell down at Jesus’ feet. (Luke 8:41 ULT)
+> Jairus fell down at Jesus’ feet. (Luke 8:41 ULT)
>> Jairus fell down at Jesus’ feet in order to show that he greatly respected him.
-
-> Look, I stand at the door and knock. (Revelation 3:20 ULT)
+
+> Look, I stand at the door and knock. (Revelation 3:20 ULT)
>> Look, I stand at the door and knock on it, asking you to let me in.
(2) Do not tell what the person did, but tell what he meant.
-> Jairus fell down at Jesus’ feet. (Luke 8:41)
+> Jairus fell down at Jesus’ feet. (Luke 8:41)
>> Jairus showed Jesus great respect.
-
-> Look, I stand at the door and knock. (Revelation 3:20)
+
+> Look, I stand at the door and knock. (Revelation 3:20)
>> Look, I stand at the door and ask you to let me in.
(3) Use an action from your own culture that has the same meaning.
> Jairus fell down at Jesus’ feet. (Luke 8:41 ULT) - Since Jairus actually did this, you should not substitute an action from your own culture.
-
-> Look, I stand at the door and knock. (Revelation 3:20 ULT) - Jesus was not standing at a real door. Rather he was speaking about wanting to have a relationship with people. So in cultures where it is polite to clear one’s throat when wanting to be let into a house, you could use that.
+
+> Look, I stand at the door and knock. (Revelation 3:20 ULT) - Jesus was not standing at a real door. Rather he was speaking about wanting to have a relationship with people. So in cultures where it is polite to clear one’s throat when wanting to be let into a house, you could use that.
>> Look, I stand at the door and clear my throat.
diff --git a/translate/translate-textvariants/01.md b/translate/translate-textvariants/01.md
index d4a28284..b4e3f4fe 100644
--- a/translate/translate-textvariants/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-textvariants/01.md
@@ -11,13 +11,13 @@ Translators are encouraged to translate the text in the ULT and to write about a
### Examples from the Bible
Matthew 18:10-11 ULT has a footnote about verse 11.
-> 10 See that you do not despise any of these little ones. For I say to you that in heaven their angels always look on the face of my Father who is in heaven. 11 [1]
-
+> 10 See that you do not despise any of these little ones. For I say to you that in heaven their angels always look on the face of my Father who is in heaven. 11 [1]
+
> [1] Many authorities, some ancient, insert v. 11. **For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost.**
John 7:53-8:11 is not in the best earliest manuscripts. It has been included in the ULT, but it is marked off with square brackets ([ ]) at the beginning and end, and there is a footnote after verse 11.
-> 53 [Then every man went to his own house.… 11 She said, “No one, Lord.” Jesus said, “Neither do I condemn you. Go your way; from now on sin no more.”] [2]
-
+> 53 [Then every man went to his own house.… 11 She said, “No one, Lord.” Jesus said, “Neither do I condemn you. Go your way; from now on sin no more.”] [2]
+
> [2] The best earliest manuscripts do not have John 7:53-8:11
### Translation Strategies
@@ -32,17 +32,17 @@ When there is a textual variant, you may choose to follow the ULT or another ver
The translation strategies are applied to Mark 7:14-16 ULT, which has a footnote about verse 16.
> 14 He called the crowd again and said to them, “Listen to me, all of you, and understand. 15 There is nothing from outside of a person that can defile him when it enters into him. It is what comes out of the person that defiles him.” 16[1]
-
+
> [1] The best ancient copies omit v. 16. *If any man has ears to hear, let him hear*.
(1) Translate the verses that the ULT does and include the footnote that the ULT provides.
-> 14 He called the crowd again and said to them, “Listen to me, all of you, and understand. 15 There is nothing from outside of a person that can defile him when it enters into him. It is what comes out of the person that defiles him.” 16[1]
+> 14 He called the crowd again and said to them, “Listen to me, all of you, and understand. 15 There is nothing from outside of a person that can defile him when it enters into him. It is what comes out of the person that defiles him.” 16[1]
>> [1] The best ancient copies omit verse 16. *If any man has ears to hear, let him hear*.
(2) Translate the verses as another version does, and change the footnote so that it fits this situation.
-> 14 He called the crowd again and said to them, “Listen to me, all of you, and understand. 15 There is nothing from outside of a person that can defile him when it enters into him. It is what comes out of the person that defiles him. 16 If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” [1]
-
+> 14 He called the crowd again and said to them, “Listen to me, all of you, and understand. 15 There is nothing from outside of a person that can defile him when it enters into him. It is what comes out of the person that defiles him. 16 If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” [1]
+
>> [1] Some ancient copies do not have verse 16.
diff --git a/translate/translate-transliterate/01.md b/translate/translate-transliterate/01.md
index 066f6c62..ac04bc41 100755
--- a/translate/translate-transliterate/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-transliterate/01.md
@@ -2,13 +2,13 @@
### Description
-Sometimes the Bible includes things that are not part of your culture and that your language may not have a word for. It also includes people and places that you may not have names for.
+Sometimes the Bible includes things that are not part of your culture and that your language may not have a word for. It also includes people and places that you may not have names for.
-When that happens you can “borrow” the word from the Bible into your own language. This means that you basically copy it from the other language. This page tells how to “borrow” words. (There are also other ways to translate words for things that are not in your language. See [Translate Unknowns](../translate-unknown/01.md).)
+When that happens you can “borrow” the word from the Bible into your own language. This means that you basically copy it from the other language. This page tells how to “borrow” words. (There are also other ways to translate words for things that are not in your language. See [Translate Unknowns](../translate-unknown/01.md).)
### Examples from the Bible
-> He saw a **fig** tree on the roadside (Matthew 21:19 ULT)
+> He saw a **fig** tree on the roadside (Matthew 21:19 ULT)
If there are no fig trees where your language is spoken, there might not be a name for this kind of tree in your language.
@@ -39,20 +39,20 @@ There are several ways to borrow a word.
(1) If your language uses a different script from the language you are translating from, you can simply substitute each letter shape with the corresponding letter shape of the script of your language.
-> צְפַנְיָ֤ה - A man’s name in Hebrew letters.
+> צְפַנְיָ֤ה - A man’s name in Hebrew letters.
>> “Zephaniah” - The same name in Roman letters
(2) You can spell the word as the other language spells it, and pronounce it the way your language normally pronounces those letters.
-> Zephaniah - This is a man’s name.
+> Zephaniah - This is a man’s name.
>> “Zephaniah” - The name as it is spelled in English, but you can pronounce it according to the rules of your language.
(3) You can pronounce the word similarly to the way the other language does, and adjust the spelling to fit the rules of your language.
-> Zephaniah - If your language does not have the “z,” you could use “s.” If your writing system does not use “ph” you could use “f.” Depending on how you pronounce the “i” you could spell it with “i” or “ai” or “ay.”
+> Zephaniah - If your language does not have the “z,” you could use “s.” If your writing system does not use “ph” you could use “f.” Depending on how you pronounce the “i” you could spell it with “i” or “ai” or “ay.”
>> “Sefania”
-
+
>> “Sefanaia”
-
+
>> “Sefanaya”
diff --git a/translate/translate-unknown/01.md b/translate/translate-unknown/01.md
index 80c5f100..0b9af38e 100644
--- a/translate/translate-unknown/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-unknown/01.md
@@ -55,38 +55,38 @@ Here are ways you might translate a term that is not known in your language:
(1) Use a phrase that describes what the unknown item is, or what is important about the unknown item for the verse being translated.
-> Beware of false prophets, those who come to you in sheep’s clothing, but are truly **ravenous wolves**. (Matthew 7:15 ULT)
+> Beware of false prophets, those who come to you in sheep’s clothing, but are truly **ravenous wolves**. (Matthew 7:15 ULT)
>> Beware of false prophets, those who come to you in sheep’s clothing, but **are truly hungry and dangerous animals**.
“Ravenous wolves” is part of a metaphor here, so the reader needs to know that they are very dangerous to sheep in order to understand this metaphor. (If sheep are also unknown, then you will need to also use one of the translation strategies to translate sheep, or change the metaphor to something else, using a translation strategy for metaphors. See [Translating Metaphors](../figs-metaphor/01.md).)
-> We have here only five **loaves of bread** and two fish (Matthew 14:17 ULT)
+> We have here only five **loaves of bread** and two fish (Matthew 14:17 ULT)
>> We have here only five **loaves of baked grain seeds** and two fish
(2) Substitute something similar from your language if doing so does not falsely represent a historical fact.
-> your sins…will be white like **snow** (Isaiah 1:18 ULT) This verse is not about snow. It uses snow in a figure of speech to help people understand how white something will be.
->> your sins…will be white like **milk**
->> your sins…will be white like **the moon**
+> your sins…will be white like **snow** (Isaiah 1:18 ULT) This verse is not about snow. It uses snow in a figure of speech to help people understand how white something will be.
+>> your sins…will be white like **milk**
+>> your sins…will be white like **the moon**
(3) Copy the word from another language, and add a general word or descriptive phrase to help people understand it.
-> Then they tried to give Jesus wine that was mixed with **myrrh**. But he refused to drink it. (Mark 15:23 ULT) - People may understand better what myrrh is if it is used with the general word “medicine.”
+> Then they tried to give Jesus wine that was mixed with **myrrh**. But he refused to drink it. (Mark 15:23 ULT) - People may understand better what myrrh is if it is used with the general word “medicine.”
>> Then they tried to give Jesus wine that was mixed with **a medicine called myrrh**. But he refused to drink it.
-
-> We have here only five loaves of **bread** and two fish (Matthew 14:17 ULT) - People may understand better what bread is if it is used with a phrase that tells what it is made of (seeds) and how it is prepared (crushed and baked).
+
+> We have here only five loaves of **bread** and two fish (Matthew 14:17 ULT) - People may understand better what bread is if it is used with a phrase that tells what it is made of (seeds) and how it is prepared (crushed and baked).
>> We have here only five loaves of **baked crushed seed bread** and two fish
(4) Use a word that is more general in meaning.
-> I will turn Jerusalem into piles of ruins, a hideout for **jackals** (Jeremiah 9:11 ULT)
->> I will turn Jerusalem into piles of ruins, a hideout for **wild dogs**
-
-> We have here only five **loaves of bread** and two fish (Matthew 14:17 ULT)
+> I will turn Jerusalem into piles of ruins, a hideout for **jackals** (Jeremiah 9:11 ULT)
+>> I will turn Jerusalem into piles of ruins, a hideout for **wild dogs**
+
+> We have here only five **loaves of bread** and two fish (Matthew 14:17 ULT)
>> We have here only five **loaves of baked food** and two fish
(5) Use a word or phrase that is more specific in meaning.
-> to him who made **great lights** (Psalm 136:7 ULT)
->> to him who made **the sun and the moon**
+> to him who made **great lights** (Psalm 136:7 ULT)
+>> to him who made **the sun and the moon**
diff --git a/translate/translate-useultust/01.md b/translate/translate-useultust/01.md
index 0825e00a..fef166c4 100644
--- a/translate/translate-useultust/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-useultust/01.md
@@ -9,9 +9,9 @@ The UST tries to present ideas in an order that is more natural in English, or t
When you translate, you should put ideas into an order that is natural in the target language. (See [Order of Events](../figs-events/01.md).)
-> 1 Paul, a servant of Jesus Christ, called to be an apostle, and set apart for the gospel of God… 7 This letter is to all who are in Rome, the beloved of God. (Romans 1:1,7 ULT)
-
-> 1 I, Paul, who serve Christ Jesus, am writing this letter to all of you believers in the city of Rome. (Romans 1:1 UST)
+> 1 Paul, a servant of Jesus Christ, called to be an apostle, and set apart for the gospel of God… 7 This letter is to all who are in Rome, the beloved of God. (Romans 1:1,7 ULT)
+
+> 1 I, Paul, who serve Christ Jesus, am writing this letter to all of you believers in the city of Rome. (Romans 1:1 UST)
The ULT shows Paul’s style of beginning his letters. He does not say who his audience is until verse 7. However, the UST follows a style that is much more natural in English and many other languages today.
@@ -24,14 +24,14 @@ The UST often makes those other ideas explicit. The UST does this in order to re
When you translate, you should decide which of these implied ideas would be understood by your audience without being included. If your audience understands these ideas without including them in the text, then you do not need to make those ideas explicit. Remember also that you might even offend your audience if you needlessly present implied ideas that they would understand anyway. (See [Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information](../figs-explicit/01.md).)
> And Jesus said to Simon, “Do not be afraid, because **from now on you will catch men**.” (Luke 5:10 ULT)
-
-> But Jesus said to Simon, “Do not be afraid! Until now you gathered in fish, but from now on you will gather in people to become my disciples.” (Luke 5:10 UST)
+
+> But Jesus said to Simon, “Do not be afraid! Until now you gathered in fish, but from now on you will gather in people to become my disciples.” (Luke 5:10 UST)
Here the UST reminds the reader that Simon was a fisherman by trade. It also makes clear the similarity that Jesus was drawing between Simon’s previous work and his future work. In addition, the UST makes it clear why Jesus wanted Simon to “catch men” (ULT), that is, to lead them “to become my disciples” (UST).
> When he saw Jesus, he **fell on his face** and begged him, saying, “Lord, if you are willing, you can **make me clean**.” (Luke 5:12 ULT)
-
-> When he saw Jesus, he **bowed down to the ground** in front of him and pleaded with him, “Lord, **please heal me**, because you are able to heal me if you are willing!” (Luke 5:12 UST)
+
+> When he saw Jesus, he **bowed down to the ground** in front of him and pleaded with him, “Lord, **please heal me**, because you are able to heal me if you are willing!” (Luke 5:12 UST)
Here the UST makes it clear that the man who had leprosy did not fall to the ground by accident. Instead, he deliberately bowed down to the ground. Also, the UST makes it clear that he is asking Jesus to heal him. In the ULT, he only implies this request.
@@ -44,16 +44,16 @@ The ULT often simply presents the symbolic action with no explanation of what it
When you translate, you should decide whether your audience will correctly understand a symbolic action. If your audience will not understand, then you should do as the UST does. (See [Symbolic Action](../translate-symaction/01.md).)
> The high priest **tore his** garments (Mark 14:63 ULT)
-
-> In response to Jesus’ words, the high priest **was so shocked** that he tore his outer garment. (Mark 14:63 UST)
+
+> In response to Jesus’ words, the high priest **was so shocked** that he tore his outer garment. (Mark 14:63 UST)
Here the UST makes it clear that it was not by accident that the high priest tore his garment. It also makes clear that it was probably only his outer garment that he tore, and that he did so because he wanted to show that he was sad or angry or both.
Because the high priest actually tore his garment, the UST must, of course, say that he did. However, if a symbolic action never actually took place, you do not have to state that action. Here is such an example:
> Present that to your governor; will he accept you or will he **lift up your face**?” (Malachi 1:8 ULT)
-
-> You would not dare to offer such gifts to your own governor! You know that he would not take them. You know that he would be **displeased with you and would not welcome you**! (Malachi 1:8 UST)
+
+> You would not dare to offer such gifts to your own governor! You know that he would not take them. You know that he would be **displeased with you and would not welcome you**! (Malachi 1:8 UST)
Here the symbolic action “lift up someone’s face,” represented in this way in the ULT, is presented only as its meaning in the UST: “he would be displeased with you and would not welcome you.” It can be presented in this way because Malachi is not referring to an actual event that took place. He is only referring to the idea represented by that event.
@@ -66,14 +66,14 @@ When you translate, you must decide whether the target language can present even
### Examples from the Bible
> For **he was amazed**, and all who were with him, at the catch of fish which they had taken. (Luke 5:9 ULT)
-
-> He said this because **he marveled** at the huge number of fish that they had caught. All the men who were with him also marveled. (Luke 5:9 UST)
+
+> He said this because **he marveled** at the huge number of fish that they had caught. All the men who were with him also marveled. (Luke 5:9 UST)
Here the UST uses a verb in the active voice “he marveled” instead of the ULT’s verb in the passive voice “was amazed.”
> Large crowds of people came together to hear him teach and to be healed of their sicknesses. (Luke 5:15 ULT)
-
-> The result was that large crowds came to Jesus to hear him teach and **to have him heal them from their sicknesses**. (Luke 5:15 UST)
+
+> The result was that large crowds came to Jesus to hear him teach and **to have him heal them from their sicknesses**. (Luke 5:15 UST)
Here the UST avoids the ULT’s passive verb form “to be healed.” It does this by restructuring the phrase. It says who the healer is: “to have him [Jesus] heal them.”
@@ -86,20 +86,20 @@ The UST often presents the meaning of these ideas in other ways.
When you translate, you will need to decide whether the target language readers will understand a figure of speech with little effort, with some effort, or not at all. If they must make a great effort to understand, or if they do not understand at all, you will need to present the essential meaning of the figure of speech using other words.
> He has **made you rich in every way**, in all speech and with all knowledge. (1 Corinthians 1:5 ULT)
-
-> Christ has **given you so many things**. He helped you to speak his truth and to know God. (1 Corinthians 1:5 UST)
+
+> Christ has **given you so many things**. He helped you to speak his truth and to know God. (1 Corinthians 1:5 UST)
Paul uses a metaphor of material wealth, expressed in the word “rich.” Even though he immediately explains what he means––“in all speech and with all knowledge”––some readers might not understand. The UST presents the idea in a different way, without using the metaphor of material wealth. (See [Metaphor](../figs-metaphor/01.md).)
> I send you out **as sheep in the midst of wolves**, (Matthew 10:16 ULT)
-
-> When I send you out, you will be **as defenseless as sheep, among people who are as dangerous as wolves**. (Matthew 10:16 UST)
+
+> When I send you out, you will be **as defenseless as sheep, among people who are as dangerous as wolves**. (Matthew 10:16 UST)
Jesus uses a simile that compares his apostles going to others as sheep going out among wolves. Some readers might not understand how the apostles would be like sheep while the other people would be like wolves. The UST clarifies that the apostles would be defenseless, and that their enemies would be dangerous. (See [Simile](../figs-simile/01.md).)
> You are separated from Christ, all **you who are “justified” by the law**. You have fallen away from grace. (Galatians 5:4 ULT)
-
-> **If you expect God to declare you good in his sight because you try to keep the law**, you have separated yourself from Christ; God will no longer act kindly toward you. (Galatians 5:4 UST)
+
+> **If you expect God to declare you good in his sight because you try to keep the law**, you have separated yourself from Christ; God will no longer act kindly toward you. (Galatians 5:4 UST)
Paul uses irony when he refers to them as being justified by the law. He had already taught them that no one can be justified by the law. The ULT uses quote marks around “justified” to show that Paul did not really believe that they were justified by the law. The UST translates the same idea by making it clear that it was what the other people believed. (See [Irony](../figs-irony/01.md).)
@@ -111,8 +111,8 @@ The UST tries not to use such abstract expressions, because many languages do no
When you translate, you will have to decide how the target language prefers to present these ideas. (See [Abstract Nouns](../figs-abstractnouns/01.md).)
> He has made you rich in every way, in **all speech** and with **all knowledge**. (1 Corinthians 1:5 ULT)
-
-> Christ has given you so many things. He **helped you to speak his truth** and **to know God**. (1 Corinthians 1:5 UST)
+
+> Christ has given you so many things. He **helped you to speak his truth** and **to know God**. (1 Corinthians 1:5 UST)
Here the ULT expressions “all speech” and “all knowledge” are abstract noun expressions. One problem with them is that readers might not know who is supposed to do the speaking and what they are to speak, or who is doing the knowing and what it is that they know. The UST answers these questions.
diff --git a/translate/translate-versebridge/01.md b/translate/translate-versebridge/01.md
index b65f5841..b85ed663 100644
--- a/translate/translate-versebridge/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-versebridge/01.md
@@ -4,9 +4,9 @@
In some cases, you will see in the unfoldingWord® Simplified Text (UST) that two or more verse numbers are combined, such as 17-18. This is called a verse bridge. This means that the information in the verses was rearranged so that the story or message could be more easily understood.
-> 29 These were the clans of the Horites: Lotan, Shobal, Zibeon, and Anah, 30 Dishon, Ezer, Dishan: these are clans of the Horites, according to their clan lists in the land of Seir. (Genesis 36:29-30 ULT)
-
-> 29-30 The people groups who were descendants of Hor lived in Seir land. The names of the people groups are Lotan, Shobal, Zibeon, Anah, Dishon, Ezer, and Dishan. (Genesis 36:29-30 UST)
+> 29 These were the clans of the Horites: Lotan, Shobal, Zibeon, and Anah, 30 Dishon, Ezer, Dishan: these are clans of the Horites, according to their clan lists in the land of Seir. (Genesis 36:29-30 ULT)
+
+> 29-30 The people groups who were descendants of Hor lived in Seir land. The names of the people groups are Lotan, Shobal, Zibeon, Anah, Dishon, Ezer, and Dishan. (Genesis 36:29-30 UST)
In the ULT text, verses 29 and 30 are separate, and the information about the people living in Seir is at the end of verse 30. In the UST text, the verses are joined, and the information about them living in Seir is at the beginning. For many languages, this is a more logical order of information.
@@ -16,12 +16,12 @@ Where the UST has a verse bridge, the ULT will have separate verses.
> 4-5 Yahweh our God will bless you in the land that he is giving to you. If you obey Yahweh our God and obey all the commandments that I am giving to you today, there will not be any poor people among you. (Deuteronomy 15:4-5 UST)
-
-> 4 However, there should be no poor among you (for Yahweh will surely bless you in the land that he gives you as an inheritance to possess), 5 if only you diligently listen to the voice of Yahweh your God, to keep all these commandments that I am commanding you today. (Deuteronomy 15:4-5 ULT)
-
+
+> 4 However, there should be no poor among you (for Yahweh will surely bless you in the land that he gives you as an inheritance to possess), 5 if only you diligently listen to the voice of Yahweh your God, to keep all these commandments that I am commanding you today. (Deuteronomy 15:4-5 ULT)
+
> 16-17 But Yahweh said to him, “You must not eat the fruit of the tree that will enable you to know what actions are evil to do as well as what actions are good to do. If you eat any fruit from that tree, on that day your relationship with me will end. But I will permit you to eat the fruit of any of the other trees in the garden.” (Genesis 2:16-17 UST)
-
+
> 16 Yahweh God commanded the man, saying, “From every tree in the garden you may freely eat. 17 But from the tree of the knowledge of good and evil you may not eat, for on the day that you eat from it, you will surely die.” (Genesis 2:16-17 ULT)
### Translation Strategies
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ See how to mark verses in [translationStudio](http://help.door43.org/en/knowledg
(1) If information from one verse is put before information from an earlier verse, then combine the verses and put the verse numbers before the first verse with a hyphen between them.
-> 2 you must select three cities for yourself in the middle of your land that Yahweh your God is giving you to possess. 3 You must build a road and divide the borders of your land into three parts, the land that Yahweh your God is causing you to inherit, so that everyone who kills another person may flee there. (Deuteronomy 19:2-3)
+> 2 you must select three cities for yourself in the middle of your land that Yahweh your God is giving you to possess. 3 You must build a road and divide the borders of your land into three parts, the land that Yahweh your God is causing you to inherit, so that everyone who kills another person may flee there. (Deuteronomy 19:2-3)
>> 2-3 you must divide into three parts the land that he is giving to you. Then select a city in each part. You must make good roads in order that people can get to those cities easily. Someone who kills another person can escape to one of those cities to be safe. (Deuteronomy 19:2-3 UST)
diff --git a/translate/translate-wforw/01.md b/translate/translate-wforw/01.md
index 9c6f6a52..42b78b5a 100644
--- a/translate/translate-wforw/01.md
+++ b/translate/translate-wforw/01.md
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Here the word “aggelos” refers to a human messenger. Jesus was talking about
Here the word “aggelos” refers to angels from heaven.
-A word-for-word translation process might use the same word in both verses, even though it is used to refer to two different kinds of beings. This would be confusing to the reader.
+A word-for-word translation process might use the same word in both verses, even though it is used to refer to two different kinds of beings. This would be confusing to the reader.
#### Figures of Speech
diff --git a/translate/translation-difficulty/01.md b/translate/translation-difficulty/01.md
index c14aad98..ad7cee51 100644
--- a/translate/translation-difficulty/01.md
+++ b/translate/translation-difficulty/01.md
@@ -76,6 +76,6 @@ You can work your way through the Stories in whatever order that you want, but w
### Conclusion
-Ultimately, the church needs to decide what they want to translate, and in what order. But we highly recommend starting your translation project with Open Bible Stories, for three reasons. First, because translation is a skill that improves with use. Secondly, because the translation and checking teams can learn so much about translating the Bible by translating Open Bible Stories. Thirdly, because of the immense value that the translated Open Bible Stories gives to the local church.
+Ultimately, the church needs to decide what they want to translate, and in what order. But we highly recommend starting your translation project with Open Bible Stories, for three reasons. First, because translation is a skill that improves with use. Secondly, because the translation and checking teams can learn so much about translating the Bible by translating Open Bible Stories. Thirdly, because of the immense value that the translated Open Bible Stories gives to the local church.
After translating Open Bible Stories, the church will need to decide if it would be more beneficial to start with how everything began (Genesis, Exodus) or with Jesus (New Testament gospels). In either case, we recommend starting Bible translation with some of the Difficulty Level 2 and 3 books (like Genesis, Ruth, and Mark). Finally, after the translation team has a lot of experience, then they can start translating Difficulty Level 4 and 5 books (like John, Hebrews, and Psalms). If the translation team follows this schedule, they will make better translations with far fewer mistakes.
diff --git a/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting/01.md b/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting/01.md
index 59190734..75587ec4 100644
--- a/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting/01.md
+++ b/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting/01.md
@@ -37,31 +37,31 @@ Some of these things happened after the prophets told about them, and some of th
The following passages describe powerful beings that Ezekiel, Daniel, and John saw. Images that come up in these visions include hair that is white as wool, a voice like many waters, a golden belt, and legs or feet like polished bronze. Though the prophets saw various details, it would be good to translate the details that are the same in the same way. The underlined phrases in the passage from Revelation also occur in the passages from Daniel and Ezekiel.
-> In the middle of the lampstands there was one like a Son of Man, wearing a long robe that reached down to his feet, and a golden belt around his chest. **His head and hair were as white as wool**— as white as snow, and his eyes were like a flame of fire. **His feet were like burnished bronze**, like bronze that had been refined in a furnace, and **his voice was like the sound of many rushing waters**. He had in his right hand seven stars, and coming out of his mouth was a sharp two-edged sword. His face was shining like the sun at its strongest shining. (Revelation 1:13-16 ULT)
-
-> As I looked,
-> thrones were set in place,
-> and the Ancient of Days took his seat.
-> His clothing was as white as snow,
+> In the middle of the lampstands there was one like a Son of Man, wearing a long robe that reached down to his feet, and a golden belt around his chest. **His head and hair were as white as wool**— as white as snow, and his eyes were like a flame of fire. **His feet were like burnished bronze**, like bronze that had been refined in a furnace, and **his voice was like the sound of many rushing waters**. He had in his right hand seven stars, and coming out of his mouth was a sharp two-edged sword. His face was shining like the sun at its strongest shining. (Revelation 1:13-16 ULT)
+
+> As I looked,
+> thrones were set in place,
+> and the Ancient of Days took his seat.
+> His clothing was as white as snow,
> and **the hair of his head was like pure wool**. (Daniel 7:9 ULT)
-
-> I looked up and saw a man dressed in linen, with a belt around his waist made of pure gold from Uphaz. His body was like topaz, his face was like lightning, his eyes were like flaming torches, his arms and **his feet were like polished bronze**, and the sound of his words was like the sound of a great crowd. (Daniel 10:5-6 ULT)
-
+
+> I looked up and saw a man dressed in linen, with a belt around his waist made of pure gold from Uphaz. His body was like topaz, his face was like lightning, his eyes were like flaming torches, his arms and **his feet were like polished bronze**, and the sound of his words was like the sound of a great crowd. (Daniel 10:5-6 ULT)
+
> Behold! The glory of the God of Israel came from the east; **his voice was like the sound of many waters**, and the earth shone with his glory! (Ezekiel 43:2 ULT)
The following passage shows the use of the past tense to refer to past events. The underlined verbs refer to past events.
> The vision of Isaiah son of Amoz, that he **saw** concerning Judah and Jerusalem, in the days of Uzziah, Jotham, Ahaz, and Hezekiah, kings of Judah.
-
+
> Hear, heavens, and give ear, earth; for Yahweh **has spoken**:
-
+
> “I **have nourished** and **brought up** children, but they **have rebelled** against me. (Isaiah 1:1-2 ULT)
The following passage shows the future tense and different uses of the past tense. The underlined verbs are examples of the predictive past, where the past tense is used to show that the events certainly will happen.
-> The gloom will be dispelled from her who was in anguish.
-> In an earlier time he humiliated
-> the land of Zebulun and the land of Naphtali,
-> but in the later time he will make it glorious, the way to the sea, beyond the Jordan, Galilee of the nations.
-> The people who walked in darkness **have seen** a great light;
+> The gloom will be dispelled from her who was in anguish.
+> In an earlier time he humiliated
+> the land of Zebulun and the land of Naphtali,
+> but in the later time he will make it glorious, the way to the sea, beyond the Jordan, Galilee of the nations.
+> The people who walked in darkness **have seen** a great light;
> those who have lived in the land of the shadow of death, the light **has shone** on them. (Isaiah 9:1-2 ULT)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/translate/writing-background/01.md b/translate/writing-background/01.md
index c078aa37..096d75d4 100644
--- a/translate/writing-background/01.md
+++ b/translate/writing-background/01.md
@@ -51,26 +51,26 @@ These verses give the setting of the story. The events took place in a grain fie
To keep translations clear and natural you will need to study how people tell stories in your language. Observe how your language marks background information. You may need to write down some stories in order to study this. Observe what kind of verbs your language uses for background information and what kinds of words or other markers signal that something is background information. Do these same things when you translate, so that your translation is clear and natural and people can understand it easily.
1. Use your language’s way of showing that certain information is background information.
-1. Reorder the information so that earlier events are mentioned first. (This is not always possible when the background information is very long.)
+1. Reorder the information so that earlier events are mentioned first. (This is not always possible when the background information is very long.)
### Examples of Translation Strategies Applied
(1) Use your language’s way of showing that certain information is background information. The examples below explain how this was done in the ULT English translations.
-> **Now** Jesus himself, when he began to teach, **was** about thirty years of age. He **was** the son (as was supposed) of Joseph, the son of Heli. (Luke 3:23 ULT)
+> **Now** Jesus himself, when he began to teach, **was** about thirty years of age. He **was** the son (as was supposed) of Joseph, the son of Heli. (Luke 3:23 ULT)
English uses the word “now” to show that there is some kind of change in the story. The verb “was” shows that it is background information.
-> With many other exhortations also, he preached good news to the people. John also rebuked Herod the tetrarch **for marrying his brother’s wife, Herodias**, and **for all the other evil things that Herod had done**. But then Herod did another very evil thing. He had John locked up in prison. (Luke 3:18-20 ULT)
+> With many other exhortations also, he preached good news to the people. John also rebuked Herod the tetrarch **for marrying his brother’s wife, Herodias**, and **for all the other evil things that Herod had done**. But then Herod did another very evil thing. He had John locked up in prison. (Luke 3:18-20 ULT)
The underlined phrases happened before John rebuked Herod. In English, the helping verb “had” in “had done” shows that Herod did those things before John rebuked him.
(2) Reorder the information so that earlier events are mentioned first.
-> Hagar gave birth to Abram’s son, and Abram named his son, whom Hagar bore, Ishmael. **Abram was eighty-six years old when Hagar bore Ishmael to Abram**. (Genesis 16:16 ULT)
+> Hagar gave birth to Abram’s son, and Abram named his son, whom Hagar bore, Ishmael. **Abram was eighty-six years old when Hagar bore Ishmael to Abram**. (Genesis 16:16 ULT)
>> “**When Abram was eighty-six years old**, Hagar gave birth to his son, and Abram named his son Ishmael.”
-
-> John also rebuked Herod the tetrarch **for marrying his brother’s wife, Herodias**, and **for all the other evil things that Herod had done**. But then Herod did another very evil thing. He had John locked up in prison. (Luke 3:18-20)
+
+> John also rebuked Herod the tetrarch **for marrying his brother’s wife, Herodias**, and **for all the other evil things that Herod had done**. But then Herod did another very evil thing. He had John locked up in prison. (Luke 3:18-20)
The translation below reorders John’s rebuke and Herod’s actions.
diff --git a/translate/writing-intro/01.md b/translate/writing-intro/01.md
index 0329618d..c3a0d835 100644
--- a/translate/writing-intro/01.md
+++ b/translate/writing-intro/01.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
### Description
-There are different kinds or types of writing, and each type of writing has its own purpose. Because these purposes are different, the different kinds of writing are organized in different ways. They use different verbs, different kinds of sentences, and refer to the people and things that they write about in different ways. These differences help the reader to quickly know the purpose of the writing, and they work to communicate the author’s meaning in the best way.
+There are different kinds or types of writing, and each type of writing has its own purpose. Because these purposes are different, the different kinds of writing are organized in different ways. They use different verbs, different kinds of sentences, and refer to the people and things that they write about in different ways. These differences help the reader to quickly know the purpose of the writing, and they work to communicate the author’s meaning in the best way.
### Types of Writing
diff --git a/translate/writing-newevent/01.md b/translate/writing-newevent/01.md
index 3fe0c33c..65a9ceb3 100644
--- a/translate/writing-newevent/01.md
+++ b/translate/writing-newevent/01.md
@@ -12,9 +12,9 @@ When your people tell about events, what information do they give at the beginni
The verses above introduce a story about Zechariah. The first underlined phrase tells when it happened, and the next two underlined phrases introduce the main people. The next two verses go on to explain that Zechariah and Elizabeth were old and did not have any children. All of this is the setting. Then the phrase “One day” in Luke 1:8 helps to introduce the first event in this story:
-> **One day** while Zechariah was performing his duties as a priest before God in the order of his division, the priests followed their custom and chose him by lot to enter the temple of the Lord and burn incense. (Luke 1:8-9 ULT)
-
-> **The birth of Jesus Christ happened in the following way.** His mother Mary was engaged to marry Joseph, but before they came together, she was found to be pregnant by the Holy Spirit. (Matthew 1:18 ULT)
+> **One day** while Zechariah was performing his duties as a priest before God in the order of his division, the priests followed their custom and chose him by lot to enter the temple of the Lord and burn incense. (Luke 1:8-9 ULT)
+
+> **The birth of Jesus Christ happened in the following way.** His mother Mary was engaged to marry Joseph, but before they came together, she was found to be pregnant by the Holy Spirit. (Matthew 1:18 ULT)
The underlined sentence above makes it explicit that a story about Jesus is being introduced. The story will tell about how the birth of Jesus happened.
@@ -51,37 +51,37 @@ If the information given at the beginning of a new event is clear and natural to
(1) Put the information that introduces the event in the order that your people put it.
-> Now there was a **Pharisee whose name was Nicodemus, a member of the Jewish Council**. This man came to Jesus at night time and said to him… (John 3:1,2)
+> Now there was a **Pharisee whose name was Nicodemus, a member of the Jewish Council**. This man came to Jesus at night time and said to him… (John 3:1,2)
>> There was a **man whose name was Nicodemus. He was a Pharisee and a member of the Jewish Council**. One night he came to Jesus and said…
-
+
>> One night **a man named Nicodemus, who was a Pharisee and a member of the Jewish Council**, came to Jesus and said…
-
-> As he passed by, **he saw Levi the son of Alpheus, who was sitting** at the tax collecting place, and he said to him… (Mark 2:14 ULT)
+
+> As he passed by, **he saw Levi the son of Alpheus, who was sitting** at the tax collecting place, and he said to him… (Mark 2:14 ULT)
>> As he passed by, **Levi the son of Alpheus was sitting** at the tax collecting place. Jesus saw him and and said to him…
-
+
>> As he passed by, **there was a man sitting** at the tax collecting place. His name was Levi, and he was the son of Alpheus. Jesus saw him and said to him…
-
+
>> As he passed by, **there was a tax collector** sitting at the tax collecting place. His name was Levi, and he was the son of Alpheus. Jesus saw him and said to him…
(2) If readers would expect certain information but it is not in the Bible, consider using an indefinite word or phrase such as: another time, someone.
-> Noah was six hundred years old when the flood came upon the earth. (Genesis 7:6 ULT) - If people expect to be told something about when the new event happened, the phrase “after that” can help them see that it happened after the events already mentioned.
+> Noah was six hundred years old when the flood came upon the earth. (Genesis 7:6 ULT) - If people expect to be told something about when the new event happened, the phrase “after that” can help them see that it happened after the events already mentioned.
>> **After that**, when Noah was six hundred years old, the flood came upon the earth.
-
-> **Again he began** to teach beside the lake. (Mark 4:1 ULT) - In chapter 3 Jesus was teaching at someone’s house. Readers may need to be told that this new event happened at another time, or that Jesus actually went to the lake.
+
+> **Again he began** to teach beside the lake. (Mark 4:1 ULT) - In chapter 3 Jesus was teaching at someone’s house. Readers may need to be told that this new event happened at another time, or that Jesus actually went to the lake.
>> **Another time** Jesus began to teach people again beside the lake.
-
+
>> Jesus went to the lake and **began to teach people again** there.
(3) If the introduction is a summary of the whole event, use your language’s way of showing that it is a summary.
-> Noah was six hundred years old when the flood came upon the earth. (Genesis 7:6 ULT)
+> Noah was six hundred years old when the flood came upon the earth. (Genesis 7:6 ULT)
>> **Now this is what happened when** Noah was six hundred years old and the flood came upon the earth.
-
+
>> **This part tells about what happened when** the flood came upon the earth. It happened when Noah was six hundred years old.
(4) If it would be strange in the target language to give a summary of the event at the beginning, show that the event will actually happen later in the story.
-> Noah was six hundred years old when the flood came upon the earth. Noah, his sons, his wife, and his sons’ wives went into the ark together because of the waters of the flood. (Genesis 7:6-7 ULT)
+> Noah was six hundred years old when the flood came upon the earth. Noah, his sons, his wife, and his sons’ wives went into the ark together because of the waters of the flood. (Genesis 7:6-7 ULT)
>> **Now this is what happened when** Noah was six hundred years old. Noah, his sons, his wife, and his sons’ wives went into the ark together because **God had said that the waters of the flood would come**.
diff --git a/translate/writing-participants/01.md b/translate/writing-participants/01.md
index b2e61091..cc456f06 100644
--- a/translate/writing-participants/01.md
+++ b/translate/writing-participants/01.md
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ In order to make your translation clear and natural, it is necessary to refer to
Often the most important new participant is introduced with a phrase that says that he existed, such as “There was a man” in the example below. The phrase “There was” tells us that this man existed. The word “a” in “a man” tells us that the author is speaking about him for the first time. The rest of the sentence tells where this man was from, who is family was, and what his name was.
> **There was a man** from Zorah, of the family of the Danites, whose name was Manoah. (Judges 13:2 ULT)
-A new participant who is not the most important one is often introduced in relation to the more important person who was already introduced. In the example below, Manoah’s wife is simply referred to as “his wife.” This phrase shows her relationship to him.
+A new participant who is not the most important one is often introduced in relation to the more important person who was already introduced. In the example below, Manoah’s wife is simply referred to as “his wife.” This phrase shows her relationship to him.
> There was a man from Zorah, of the family of the Danites, whose name was Manoah. **His wife** was not able to become pregnant and so she had not given birth. (Judges 13:2 ULT)
Sometimes a new participant is introduced simply by name because the author assumes that the readers know who the person is. In the first verse of 1 Kings, the author assumes that his readers know who King David is, so there is no need to explain who he is.
@@ -48,17 +48,17 @@ Some languages place an affix on the verb that tells something about the subject
(1) If the participant is new, use one of your language’s ways of introducing new participants.
-> Joseph, a Levite, a man from Cyprus, was given the name Barnabas by the apostles (that is, being interpreted, Son of encouragement). (Acts 4:36-37 ULT) - Starting the sentence with Joseph’s name when he has not been introduced yet might be confusing in some languages.
->> There was a man from Cyprus who was a Levite. His name was Joseph, and he was given the name Barnabas by the apostles (that is, being interpreted, Son of encouragement).
+> Joseph, a Levite, a man from Cyprus, was given the name Barnabas by the apostles (that is, being interpreted, Son of encouragement). (Acts 4:36-37 ULT) - Starting the sentence with Joseph’s name when he has not been introduced yet might be confusing in some languages.
+>> There was a man from Cyprus who was a Levite. His name was Joseph, and he was given the name Barnabas by the apostles (that is, being interpreted, Son of encouragement).
>> There was a Levite from Cyprus whose name was Joseph. The apostles gave him the name Barnabas, which means Son of encouragement.
(2) If it is not clear who a pronoun refers to, use a noun phrase or name.
-> It happened when **he** finished praying in a certain place, that one of his disciples said, “Lord, teach us to pray just as John taught his disciples.” (Luke 11:1 ULT) - Since this is the first verse in a chapter, readers might wonder who “he” refers to.
+> It happened when **he** finished praying in a certain place, that one of his disciples said, “Lord, teach us to pray just as John taught his disciples.” (Luke 11:1 ULT) - Since this is the first verse in a chapter, readers might wonder who “he” refers to.
>> It happened when **Jesus** finished praying in a certain place, that one of his disciples said, “Lord, teach us to pray just as John taught his disciples.
(3) If an old participant is referred to by name or a noun phrase, and people wonder if this is another new participant, try using a pronoun instead. If a pronoun is not needed because people would understand it clearly from the context, then leave out the pronoun.
-> **Joseph’s** master took **Joseph** and put **him** in prison, in the place where all the king’s prisoners were put, and **Joseph** stayed there. (Genesis 39:20 ULT) - Since Joseph is the main person in the story, some languages might find it unnatural or confusing to use his name so much. They might prefer a pronoun.
+> **Joseph’s** master took **Joseph** and put **him** in prison, in the place where all the king’s prisoners were put, and **Joseph** stayed there. (Genesis 39:20 ULT) - Since Joseph is the main person in the story, some languages might find it unnatural or confusing to use his name so much. They might prefer a pronoun.
>> Joseph’s master took **him** and put **him** in prison, in the place where all the king’s prisoners were put, and **he** stayed there in the prison.
diff --git a/translate/writing-poetry/01.md b/translate/writing-poetry/01.md
index 78c39349..77e5c730 100644
--- a/translate/writing-poetry/01.md
+++ b/translate/writing-poetry/01.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
### Description
-Poetry is one of the ways that people use the words and sounds of their language to make their speech and writing more beautiful and to express strong emotion. Through poetry, people can communicate deeper emotion than they can through simple non-poetic forms. Poetry gives more weight and elegance to statements of truth, such as proverbs, and is also easier to remember than ordinary speech.
+Poetry is one of the ways that people use the words and sounds of their language to make their speech and writing more beautiful and to express strong emotion. Through poetry, people can communicate deeper emotion than they can through simple non-poetic forms. Poetry gives more weight and elegance to statements of truth, such as proverbs, and is also easier to remember than ordinary speech.
#### Some things commonly found in poetry
@@ -48,23 +48,23 @@ Elegant or fancy speech is similar to poetry in that it uses beautiful language,
The Bible uses poetry for songs, teaching, and prophecy. Almost all of the books of the Old Testament have poetry in them and many of the books are completely poetry.
-> for you saw my affliction;
+> for you saw my affliction;
> you knew the distress of my soul. (Psalm 31:7 ULT)
This example of [Parallelism with the Same Meaning](../figs-synonparallelism/01.md) has two lines that mean the same thing.
-> Yahweh, judge the nations;
+> Yahweh, judge the nations;
> vindicate me, Yahweh, because I am righteous and innocent, Most High.
This example of parallelism shows the contrast between what David wants God to do to him and what he wants God to do to the unrighteous nations. (See [Parallelism](../figs-parallelism/01.md).)
-> Keep your servant also from arrogant sins;
+> Keep your servant also from arrogant sins;
> let them not rule over me. (Psalm 19:13 ULT)
This example of personification speaks of sins as if they could rule over a person. (See [Personification](../figs-personification/01.md).)
-> Oh, give thanks to Yahweh; for he is good, for his covenant faithfulness endures forever.
-> Oh, give thanks to the God of gods, for his covenant faithfulness endures forever.
+> Oh, give thanks to Yahweh; for he is good, for his covenant faithfulness endures forever.
+> Oh, give thanks to the God of gods, for his covenant faithfulness endures forever.
> Oh, give thanks to the Lord of lords, for his covenant faithfulness endures forever. (Psalm 136:1-3 ULT)
This example repeats the phrases “give thanks” and “his covenant faithfulness endures forever.”
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ If the style of poetry that is used in the source text would be natural and give
1. Translate the poetry using one of your styles of poetry.
1. Translate the poetry using your style of elegant speech.
-1. Translate the poetry using your style of ordinary speech.
+1. Translate the poetry using your style of ordinary speech.
If you use poetry it may be more beautiful.
@@ -83,21 +83,21 @@ If you use ordinary speech it may be more clear.
### Examples of Translation Strategies Applied
-> **Blessed is the man who does not walk in the advice of the wicked,
-> or stand in the pathway with sinners,
-> or sit in the assembly of mockers.
-> But his delight is in the law of Yahweh,
+> **Blessed is the man who does not walk in the advice of the wicked,
+> or stand in the pathway with sinners,
+> or sit in the assembly of mockers.
+> But his delight is in the law of Yahweh,
> and on his law he meditates day and night.** (Psalm 1:1,2 ULT)
The following are examples of how people might translate Psalm 1:1,2.
(1) Translate the poetry using one of your styles of poetry. (The style in this example has words that sound similar at the end of each line.)
->> “Happy is the person not encouraged **to sin**
->> Disrespect for God he will not **begin**
->> To those who laugh at God, he is **no kin.**
->> God is his constant **delight**
->> He does what God says **is right**
+>> “Happy is the person not encouraged **to sin**
+>> Disrespect for God he will not **begin**
+>> To those who laugh at God, he is **no kin.**
+>> God is his constant **delight**
+>> He does what God says **is right**
>> He thinks of it all day **and night**
(2) Translate the poetry using your style of elegant speech.
diff --git a/translate/writing-pronouns/01.md b/translate/writing-pronouns/01.md
index 7393cfd5..ff9470e3 100644
--- a/translate/writing-pronouns/01.md
+++ b/translate/writing-pronouns/01.md
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ In the example below, two men are named in the first sentence. It might not be c
Jesus is the main character of the book of Matthew, but in the verses below he is referred to four times by name. This may lead speakers of some languages to think that Jesus is not the main character. Or it might lead them to think that there is more than one person named Jesus in this story. Or it might lead them to think that there is some kind of emphasis on him, even though there is no emphasis.
-> At that time **Jesus** went on the Sabbath day through the grainfields. **His** disciples were hungry and began to pluck heads of grain and eat them. But when the Pharisees saw that, they said to **Jesus**, “See, your disciples do what is unlawful to do on the Sabbath.”
-> But **Jesus** said to them, “Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and the men who were with him?…”
+> At that time **Jesus** went on the Sabbath day through the grainfields. **His** disciples were hungry and began to pluck heads of grain and eat them. But when the Pharisees saw that, they said to **Jesus**, “See, your disciples do what is unlawful to do on the Sabbath.”
+> But **Jesus** said to them, “Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and the men who were with him?…”
> Then **Jesus** left from there and went into their synagogue. (Matthew 12:1-9 ULT)
@@ -47,17 +47,17 @@ Jesus is the main character of the book of Matthew, but in the verses below he i
(1) If it would not be clear to your readers to whom or to what a pronoun refers, use a name or a noun.
-> Again Jesus walked into the synagogue, and a man with a withered hand was there. **They** watched **him** to see if **he** would heal **him** on the Sabbath. (Mark 3:1-2 ULT)
+> Again Jesus walked into the synagogue, and a man with a withered hand was there. **They** watched **him** to see if **he** would heal **him** on the Sabbath. (Mark 3:1-2 ULT)
>> Again Jesus walked into the synagogue, and a man with a withered hand was there. **Some Pharisees** watched **Jesus** to see if **he** would heal **the man** on the Sabbath. (Mark 3:1-2 UST)
(2) If repeating a noun or name would lead people to think that a main character is not a main character, or that the writer is talking about more than one person with that name, or that there is some kind of emphasis on someone when there is no emphasis, use a pronoun instead.
-> At that time **Jesus** went on the Sabbath day through the grain fields. **His** disciples were hungry and began to pluck heads of grain and eat them. But when the Pharisees saw that, they said to **Jesus**, “See, your disciples do what is unlawful to do on the Sabbath.”
-> But **Jesus** said to them, “Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and the men who were with him?…
+> At that time **Jesus** went on the Sabbath day through the grain fields. **His** disciples were hungry and began to pluck heads of grain and eat them. But when the Pharisees saw that, they said to **Jesus**, “See, your disciples do what is unlawful to do on the Sabbath.”
+> But **Jesus** said to them, “Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and the men who were with him?…
> Then **Jesus** left from there and went into their synagogue. (Matthew 12:1-9 ULT)
May be translated as:
->> At that time **Jesus** went on the Sabbath day through the grain fields. **His** disciples were hungry and began to pluck heads of grain and eat them. But when the Pharisees saw that, they said to **him**, “See, your disciples do what is unlawful to do on the Sabbath.
->> But **he** said to them, “Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and the men who were with him?…
+>> At that time **Jesus** went on the Sabbath day through the grain fields. **His** disciples were hungry and began to pluck heads of grain and eat them. But when the Pharisees saw that, they said to **him**, “See, your disciples do what is unlawful to do on the Sabbath.
+>> But **he** said to them, “Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and the men who were with him?…
>> Then **he** left from there and went into their synagogue.
diff --git a/translate/writing-proverbs/01.md b/translate/writing-proverbs/01.md
index 881e2044..764f2c1c 100644
--- a/translate/writing-proverbs/01.md
+++ b/translate/writing-proverbs/01.md
@@ -4,13 +4,13 @@
Proverbs are short sayings that give wise advice or teach something that is generally true about life. People enjoy proverbs because they give a lot of wisdom in few words. Proverbs in the Bible often use metaphor and parallelism. Proverbs should not be understood as absolute and unchangeable laws. Rather, proverbs offer *general advice* to a person about how to live his life.
-> Hatred stirs up conflicts,
+> Hatred stirs up conflicts,
> but love covers over all offenses. (Proverbs 10:12 ULT)
Here is another example from the book of Proverbs.
-> Look at the ant, you lazy person, consider her ways, and be wise.
-> It has no commander, officer, or ruler,
-> yet it prepares its food in the summer,
+> Look at the ant, you lazy person, consider her ways, and be wise.
+> It has no commander, officer, or ruler,
+> yet it prepares its food in the summer,
> and during the harvest it stores up what it will eat. (Proverbs 6:6-8 ULT)
#### Reason this is a translation issue
@@ -19,17 +19,17 @@ Each language has its own ways of saying proverbs. There are many proverbs in th
### Examples from the Bible
-> A good name is to be chosen over great riches,
+> A good name is to be chosen over great riches,
> and favor is better than silver and gold. (Proverbs 22:1 ULT)
This means that it is better to be a good person and to have a good reputation than it is to have a lot of money.
-> Like vinegar on the teeth and smoke in the eyes,
+> Like vinegar on the teeth and smoke in the eyes,
> so is the sluggard to those who send him. (Proverbs 10:26 ULT)
This means that a lazy person is very annoying to those who send him to do something.
-> The way of Yahweh protects those who have integrity,
+> The way of Yahweh protects those who have integrity,
> but it is destruction for the wicked. (Proverbs 10:29 ULT)
This means that Yahweh protects people who do what is right, but he destroys those who are wicked.
@@ -47,40 +47,40 @@ If translating a proverb literally would be natural and give the right meaning i
(1) Find out how people say proverbs in your language, and use one of those ways.
-> A good name is to be chosen over great riches,
+> A good name is to be chosen over great riches,
>
> and favor is better than silver and gold. (Proverbs 22:1 ULT)
Here are some ideas for ways that people might say a proverb in their language.
->> It is better to have a good name than to have great riches, and to be favored by people than to have silver and gold.
+>> It is better to have a good name than to have great riches, and to be favored by people than to have silver and gold.
>
->> Wise people choose a good name over great riches, and favor over silver and gold.
+>> Wise people choose a good name over great riches, and favor over silver and gold.
>
->> Try to have a good reputation rather than great riches.
+>> Try to have a good reputation rather than great riches.
>
>> Will riches really help you? I would rather have a good reputation.
(2) If certain objects in the proverb are not known to many people in your language group, consider replacing them with objects that people know and that function in the same way in your language.
-> Like **snow in summer** or rain in harvest,
+> Like **snow in summer** or rain in harvest,
>
> so a fool does not deserve honor. (Proverbs 26:1 ULT)
-
+
>> It is not natural for **a cold wind to blow in the hot season** or for it to rain in the harvest season; And it is not natural to honor a foolish person.
(3) Substitute a proverb in your language that has the same teaching as the proverb in the Bible.
-> Do not boast about tomorrow (Proverbs 27:1 ULT)
+> Do not boast about tomorrow (Proverbs 27:1 ULT)
>> Do not count your chickens before they hatch.
(4) Give the same teaching but not in a form of a proverb.
-> A generation that curses their father and does not bless their mother,
+> A generation that curses their father and does not bless their mother,
>
-> that is a generation that is pure in their own eyes,
+> that is a generation that is pure in their own eyes,
>
> but they are not washed of their filth. (Proverbs 30:11-12 ULT)
-
+
>> People who do not respect their parents think that they are righteous, and they do not turn away from their sin.
diff --git a/translate/writing-quotations/01.md b/translate/writing-quotations/01.md
index 85a1ef2e..db20d8b2 100644
--- a/translate/writing-quotations/01.md
+++ b/translate/writing-quotations/01.md
@@ -28,9 +28,9 @@ When writing that someone said something, some languages put the quote (what was
#### Quote margin before the quote
> **Zechariah said to the angel**, “How will I know this will happen? For I am an old man, and my wife also is very old.” (Luke 1:18 ULT)
-
-> Then some tax collectors also came to be baptized, and **they said to him**, “Teacher, what must we do?” (Luke 3:12 ULT)
-
+
+> Then some tax collectors also came to be baptized, and **they said to him**, “Teacher, what must we do?” (Luke 3:12 ULT)
+
> **He said to them,** “Do not collect more money than you are supposed to.” (Luke 3:13 ULT)
#### Quote margin after the quote
@@ -40,9 +40,9 @@ When writing that someone said something, some languages put the quote (what was
#### Quote margin between two parts of the quote
> “I will hide my face from them,” **he said,** “and I will see what their end will be; for they are a perverse generation, children who are unfaithful.” (Deuteronomy 32:20 ULT)
-
-> “Therefore, those who can,” **he said,** “should go there with us. If there is something wrong with the man, you should accuse him.” (Acts 25:5 ULT)
-
+
+> “Therefore, those who can,” **he said,** “should go there with us. If there is something wrong with the man, you should accuse him.” (Acts 25:5 ULT)
+
> “For look, days are coming”—**this is Yahweh’s declaration**—”when I will restore the fortunes of my people, Israel” (Jeremiah 30:3 ULT)
@@ -55,19 +55,19 @@ When writing that someone said something, some languages put the quote (what was
(1) Decide where to put the quote margin.
-> ”Therefore, those who can,” **he said,** “should go there with us. If there is something wrong with the man, you should accuse him.” (Acts 25:5 ULT)
+> ”Therefore, those who can,” **he said,** “should go there with us. If there is something wrong with the man, you should accuse him.” (Acts 25:5 ULT)
>> **He said,** “Therefore, those who can should go there with us. If there is something wrong with the man, you should accuse him.”
-
+
>> “Therefore, those who can should go there with us. If there is something wrong with the man, you should accuse him,” **he said**.
-
+
>> “Therefore, those who can should go there with us,” **he said.** “If there is something wrong with the man, you should accuse him.”
(2) Decide whether to use one or two words meaning “said.”
-> But his mother **answered and said**, “No, instead he will be called John.” (Luke 1:60 ULT)
+> But his mother **answered and said**, “No, instead he will be called John.” (Luke 1:60 ULT)
>> But his mother **replied**, “No, instead he will be called John.”
-
+
>> But his mother **said**, “No, instead he will be called John.”
-
+
>> But his mother **answered** like this, “No, instead he will be called John,” she **said**.
diff --git a/translate/writing-symlanguage/01.md b/translate/writing-symlanguage/01.md
index db19a7dc..3160feac 100644
--- a/translate/writing-symlanguage/01.md
+++ b/translate/writing-symlanguage/01.md
@@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ People who read the Bible today may find it hard to recognize that the language
The meaning of the underlined symbols is explained in Daniel 7:23-24 as shown below. The animals represent kingdoms, iron teeth represent a powerful army, and the horns represent powerful leaders.
> This is what that person said, ‘As for the fourth animal, it will be **a fourth kingdom** on earth that will be different from all the other kingdoms. It will devour the whole earth, and it will trample it down and break it into pieces. As for the ten horns, out of this kingdom **ten kings** will arise, and another will arise after them. He will be different from the previous ones, and he will conquer the three kings. (Daniel 7:23-24 ULT)
-
-> I turned around to see whose voice was speaking to me, and as I turned I saw **seven golden lampstands**. In the middle of the lampstands there was one like a Son of Man,…He had in his right hand **seven stars**, and coming out of his mouth was **a sharp two-edged sword**…As for the hidden meaning about the seven stars you saw in my right hand, and the seven golden lampstands: **the seven stars are the angels of the seven churches**, and **the seven lampstands are the seven churches**. (Revelation 1:12, 16, 20 ULT)
+
+> I turned around to see whose voice was speaking to me, and as I turned I saw **seven golden lampstands**. In the middle of the lampstands there was one like a Son of Man,…He had in his right hand **seven stars**, and coming out of his mouth was **a sharp two-edged sword**…As for the hidden meaning about the seven stars you saw in my right hand, and the seven golden lampstands: **the seven stars are the angels of the seven churches**, and **the seven lampstands are the seven churches**. (Revelation 1:12, 16, 20 ULT)
This passage explains the meaning of the seven lampstands and the seven stars. The two-edged sword represents God’s word and judgment.
@@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ This passage explains the meaning of the seven lampstands and the seven stars. T
(2) Translate the text with the symbols. Then explain the symbols in footnotes.
> After this I saw in my dream at night **a fourth animal**, terrifying, frightening, and very strong. It had **large iron teeth**; it devoured, broke in pieces, and trampled underfoot what was left. It was different from the other animals, and it had **ten horns**. (Daniel 7:7 ULT)
-
->> After this I saw in my dream at night a fourth animal, 1 terrifying, frightening, and very strong. It had large iron teeth; 2 it devoured, broke in pieces, and trampled underfoot what was left. It was different from the other animals, and it had ten horns. 3
-
-> The footnotes would look like:
-
->> [1] The animal is a symbol for a kingdom.
->> [2] The iron teeth is a symbol for the kingdom’s powerful army.
->> [3] The horns are a symbol of powerful kings.
+
+>> After this I saw in my dream at night a fourth animal, 1 terrifying, frightening, and very strong. It had large iron teeth; 2 it devoured, broke in pieces, and trampled underfoot what was left. It was different from the other animals, and it had ten horns. 3
+
+> The footnotes would look like:
+
+>> [1] The animal is a symbol for a kingdom.
+>> [2] The iron teeth is a symbol for the kingdom’s powerful army.
+>> [3] The horns are a symbol of powerful kings.